C-Class Saloon

Owner's Manual +

F206 0151 02
Did you know?
In order to meet all needs, your operator's manual is available to you in various formats.
In addition to this PDF, the following options are open to you:

Digital – in the vehicle Digital – on the Internet

Discover the Owner's Manual in the multimedia system You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz
under Preferences. Begin with Quick Start and discover homepage.
useful tips.

Digital – as an App
Vehicle document wallet The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge
Here you can find comprehensive information about oper‐ in familiar App stores.
ating your vehicle and about services and warranties in
printed form.

Apple® iOS AndroidTM

F206 0151 02
Front passenger airbag warning
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

& WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be
struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with

an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.

F206 0151 02
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise R Technical features
yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life for the
vehicle, follow the instructions and warnings in this Owner's Manual. Failure to do
The latest and complete information about your vehicle and the description of
so may lead to personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
any subsequently uploaded functions are contained in the Digital Owner's Manual
THE EQUIPMENT FEATURES OR PRODUCT DESIGNATIONS OF YOUR VEHICLE in the multimedia system.
MAY DIFFER FROM THE CONTENT DESCRIBED IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL.
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. For right-
THE OWNER'S MANUAL DESCRIBES THE FOLLOWING CONTENT:
hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.
R The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle includes a list of the equipment
this Owner's Manual going to press.
features in your vehicle at the time of delivery.
R The models and the standard and special equipment only available in cer‐
tain countries. THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE COMPONENTS OF THE VEHICLE:
R The models and the standard and special equipment which will only
R Digital Owner's Manual in the multimedia system
become available at a later date.
R Printed Owner's Manual
R Service booklet
Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described.
This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions. In individual R Supplements relating to specific equipment
cases, your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and R Supplementary documents
illustrations.

MERCEDES-BENZ KEEPS ADVANCING ITS VEHICLES CONSTANTLY AND Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in
THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INTRODUCE CHANGES IN THE FOL‐ the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.
LOWING AREAS:
For questions concerning equipment and operation, please contact a Mercedes-
R Design Benz service centre.
R Equipment

F206 0151 02
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that
your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions.

Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version.
Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

COPYRIGHT
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and
used on other websites.

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual

Contents
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Symbols 7 Opening and closing 183 MBUX multimedia system 557

Quick start and Tips 9 Seats and stowing 222 Maintenance and care 708

At a glance 82 Light and sight 280 Breakdown assistance 732

Digital Owner's Manual 99 Climate control 303 Wheels and tyres 763

General notes 102 Driving and parking 323 Technical data 787

Display messages and warning/indicator

Occupant safety 132 Driver display 519 882
lamps

Children in the vehicle 154 MBUX Voice Assistant 546 Index 980

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Symbols

Symbols
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual

Symbols

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols: # Instruction

(/ page) Further information on a topic

& WARNING
Danger due to not observing the warning notices Display Display in the central display
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia
health or life, or the health or life of others. system
# Observe the warning notices. 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia
system

* Indicates a cause
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental
notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsi‐
ble behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE
Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material
damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your
vehicle being damaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information

that could be helpful to you.

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips

Quick start and Tips

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Seats 10 ENERGIZING Packages 18 At the filling station 29

Children in the vehicle 12 Driving Assistance package 19 Preparing for a holiday 42

DIGITAL LIGHT 13 Parking Package 20 Luggage and loading 48

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2

Radio 14 21 Ice and snow 59
or 3)

High-voltage battery direct current charg‐

Wi-Fi hotspot 15 22 Help in the event of a breakdown 68
ing (mode 4)

Connecting a mobile phone 16 Destination entry navigation 23 Expert knowledge 77

MBUX Voice Assistant 17 New multimedia system features 24

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Seats

Seats

Adjusting the seats # To set the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 3 forwards or
backwards until the required position has been reached.

Vehicles without the Seat Comfort Package

1 Seat fore-and-aft position Vehicles with the Seat Comfort Package
2 Seat height 1 Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 1 and slide the 3 Seat cushion inclination
seat into the desired position. 4 Seat cushion length
5 Seat fore-and-aft position
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 5 and slide the
# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2 until the desired posi‐ seat into the desired position.
tion has been reached.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

10

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Seats

Vehicles with electric seats

1 Head restraint height
2 Seat cushion inclination
3 Seat cushion length
4 Seat fore-and-aft position
5 Seat height
6 Seat backrest inclination
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 249).

11

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Children in the vehicle

Children in the vehicle

Safely transporting children in the vehicle R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys‐
tems on the front passenger seat (/ page 161)
# Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle (/ page 157) R Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
(/ page 177)
# Important warning stickers (/ page 158)
# Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 161)
# Recommended child restraint systems (/ page 165)
# Child safety locks for the rear side windows (/ page 180)
# Suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system
(/ page 155) # Child safety locks for the rear doors (/ page 178)

# Approval categories for child restraint systems (/ page 164)

# Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

(/ page 169)
R Fitting the ISOFIX child restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 174)

# Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems

(/ page 170).
R Fitting the i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat
(/ page 174)

# Fastening a Top Tether belt (/ page 176)

# Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

(/ page 170)
R Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff
(/ page 163)

12

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips DIGITAL LIGHT

DIGITAL LIGHT

Adaptive functions of DIGITAL LIGHT The availability of the assistance functions is country-dependent.

With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It
also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING ADAPTIVE FUNCTIONS:

R Active headlamps (/ page 285)

R Cornering light (/ page 285)
R Motorway mode (/ page 285)
R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 286)
R Bad weather light (/ page 286)
R City lighting (/ page 286)
R Topographical compensation (/ page 286)

# To activate or deactivate Digital Light:

R Briefly press © on the multimedia system display.
R Select Settings.
R Select Lights.
R Select DIGITAL LIGHT.
R Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.

# To activate or deactivate enhanced assistance functions:

R Select Supporting projections.
R Activate or deactivate the desired projection.

13

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Radio

Radio

Operating radio R Select è.

R Enter a station name or frequency.
# To switch to radio: R Select a station.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
# To store radio stations:
R Tap on Þ.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
# To set the frequency band: R Tap on Þ.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. R Select f.
R Tap on Þ.
# To set the traffic information service volume increase:
R Select a frequency band or a favourite.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
# To set a radio station: R Tap on Z.
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. R Select System.
R Tap on Þ. R Select Audio.
R Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio R Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
station.
R Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.
# To call up the radio station list:
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
R Tap on Þ.
R Select 4.

# To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
R Tap on Þ.

14

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Wi-Fi hotspot

Wi-Fi hotspot

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE:

R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

The multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communica‐
tion devices such as a smartphone or tablet PC.
The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device
is used for the data connection.
Data volumes must be purchased via the Mercedes me Portal.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in
all countries.
R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the
multimedia system.
The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Acquired package
is used for the data connection.

OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A CONNECTION:

R QR code
The connection is set up by scanning the QR code shown on the multi‐
media system.
R Security key
The connection is established by entering the security key displayed on
the multimedia system.

15

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

# To activate Bluetooth®:
R Make sure that the mobile phone Bluetooth® is switched on.
R Tap © on the central display.
R Select Settings.
R Select System.
R Select Internet and Bluetooth.
R Activate Bluetooth®.

# To search for a mobile phone:

R Tap © on the central display.
R Select Phone.
R Select Z.
R Select Devices.
R Select Devices.
R Select Connect new device.

# To authorise a mobile phone:

R Select a mobile phone.

A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

16

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips MBUX Voice Assistant

MBUX Voice Assistant

Operating the MBUX Voice Assistant

YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOW‐
ING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT:

R Telephone
R Text message and e-mail
R Navigation
R Radio and media
R Vehicle functions
R Online functions

EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE VOICE COMMANDS:

R To operate the phone: Call my father.

R To manage e-mails: Show me my new e-mails.
R To operate the navigation: Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japa-
nese, in South London.
R To operate the radio: Which station am I currently listening to?
R To operate media: Play a similar track.
R To operate climate control: My feet are cold.
R To operate vehicle functions: Open the window.
R To call up the weather: Will it be sunny tomorrow?
R To ask a general knowledge question: Who painted the picture "The
Scream"?

17

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips ENERGIZING Packages

ENERGIZING Packages

Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

# To start an ENERGIZING programme:
R Briefly press © in the multimedia system display.
R Select Comfort.
R Select ENERGIZING COMFORT.
R Select a programme and start with ;.

# To configure an ENERGIZING programme:

R Select a programme.
R Select Settings.
R Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.

# To start Power Nap:

R Select Power Nap.
R Select ; for the desired seat.

# To start a training programme:

R Select Training.
R Select a programme and start with ;.
R To activate fragrancing for training, select Air freshener.

# To start Tips:
R Select Tips.
R Select an area of the body and start with ;.

18

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Driving Assistance package

Driving Assistance package

Functions of the Driving Assistance Package # Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 446)

# Active Stop-and-Go Assist

Depending on availability for the respective country of use, the vehicle may
(/ page 442)
be equipped with various functions which are provided to assist the driver.
The vehicle is thus fitted with cameras and sensors to monitor the vehicle # Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 466)
surroundings.
# Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 468)
# Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 432)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
# Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 470)
# Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 439)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

# Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 440)

# Active Brake Assist (/ page 451)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

# Active Steering Assist (/ page 442)

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

# Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 445)

19

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Parking Package

Parking Package

Functions of the Parking Package # Trailer Manoeuvring Assist: Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you
when reversing with a trailer. The reversing camera monitors the artic‐
Depending on availability for the respective country of use, the vehicle may be ulation angle between the vehicle and the trailer and adjusts it to
equipped with various functions which are provided to assist the driver with a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits your speed
parking and manoeuvring. The vehicle is thus fitted with cameras and sensors (/ page 505).
to monitor the vehicle surroundings.

Depending on the equipment version, the following systems and functions are
part of your Parking Package:

# Reversing camera: monitors the area behind the vehicle and relays an
image of this area on the driver display (/ page 479).

# 360° camera: a system comprising four cameras which record the imme‐
diate vehicle surroundings and relay an image on the driver display
(/ page 482).

# Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: an electronic parking assistance system

which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and the distance to
obstacles in the vicinity using ultrasound (/ page 487).

# Active Parking Assist: an electronic parking assistance system which

assists you when parking or exiting a parking space by changing gear,
accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle (/ page 491).

# Memory Parking Assist: can park your vehicle in, or exit a previously
recorded and stored parking space (/ page 500).

20

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)

AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
Starting and ending the charging process

# More notes on charging the high-voltage battery

(/ page 381)

# Overview of the charging cable control panel (/ page 389)

21

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)

High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)

DC charging (mode 4)
Starting and ending the charging process

# More notes on charging the high-voltage battery

(/ page 381)

# Overview of the charging cable control panel (/ page 389)

22

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Destination entry navigation

Destination entry navigation

Entering a navigation destination R Select POIs.

Select a POI category, e.g. j or enter a POI name or POI category in the
# Briefly press © in the multimedia system display. input line.
The zero layer is shown. If search results are displayed, limit them with Filter, for example by
The zero layer is your own personalised user interface with the digital search position or the desired travel time.
map in the foreground and the applications that you use the most. You R Select Contacts.
can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic Requirements:
menu.
A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system and contacts
# Select ª. have been downloaded.
SELECT THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR DESTINATION ENTRY: The contact contains a navigable address.
R Enter the geocoordinates as latitude and longitude in the input line.
R Enter a POI, an address or a three-word address in the input line.
Example 1: 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes, seconds and com‐
Online search results for POIs (if available) may contain additional infor‐ pass direction)
mation, for example opening times and prices. The information is provi‐
Example 2: 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees)
ded by an online map service.
R Select a destination on the map.
You can find further information about 3-word addresses at: http://
+what3words.com R Select Favourites.
R Select a destination suggestion. Requirements:
Requirements: The destinations have been saved as favourites.
The Navigation option is switched on in the user settings for Suggestions. R Select Received destinations.
The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show Requirements:
destination suggestions. There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations.
R Select Previous destinations. The destinations have been sent to the vehicle.
Select a previous destination.
You can save the destination as a favourite .

23

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features

New multimedia system features

Information about the telephone menu TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW

Via the telephone menu you can use the functions in connection with your
mobile phone.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED:

R Call lists
R Contacts
R Messages
R Device manager

USING CALL LISTS

If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists from
the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
mobile phone THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
R Making calls from the call list
mobile phone (two phone mode)
R Opening contacts on the call list
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone MESSAGES
5 Options In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send
6 Messages them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. In addition, you can conven‐
iently use the read-aloud function during the journey.
7 Calls up my devices
8 Numerical pad DEVICE MANAGER
9 Starts contact search In the device manager, you can connect your mobile phone with the multime‐
dia system.

24

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features

You have the option of using your mobile phone alone in single telephone R Privacy mode to transfer the call to the telephone or headphones
mode or together with another mobile phone in two phone mode.

USING CONTACTS Information on radio

If you permit the multimedia system to access the contacts in your mobile
phone, you can use these in the vehicle. You can store up to 8,000 contacts.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU VIA THE CONTACTS

MENU:

R Making telephone calls (calling a contact)

R Navigation
R Composing messages with the help of the MBUX voice assistant
R Additional options

The contacts from your mobile phone can be downloaded automatically or

manually. 1 Preview image
2 Active frequency band
CONDUCTING A CALL
3 Station name or set frequency
When conducting a call, additional functions are available apart from making,
accepting or rejecting a call. For example, you can switch between calls, con‐ 4 Settings
duct a call with several participants or conference calls. 5 Sound settings
6 Switches on traffic reports
It is also possible to accept or reject waiting calls. If you receive a call while
With DAB equipment: switches on radio announcements
already in a call, a message is displayed.
7 Station list
DURING A CALL YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: 8 Search

R Microphone off Using the radio menu you can play a multitude of radio stations and use the
Internet Radio TuneIn. Search for your preferred stations and save these as
R Fade in the numerical pad to send DTMF tones
favourites or in station lists.
R Add a call
R Hands-free mode to transfer the call to the front or rear passenger
% The function of TuneIn Internet radio is country-dependent.
compartment

25

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features

Radio text: this function shows you the station name, the track and the artist A Playlists and categories
for the song currently playing, for example. B Random playback
DAB: with the DAB function, graphically formatted additional information C Timeline
about a station can be shown, e.g. logos, album covers, music tracks, pro‐ D Controls playback
grammes, news or also service information. E Media search

Traffic announcements: Traffic messages can be displayed by pressing .. Using the Media application you can set and use the audio functions of your
multimedia system, for example. You can listen to music, for example.

Information on media USB: using the USB menu, you can play back your own audio data from a data
storage medium connected by USB, for example.

Bluetooth®: Using the Bluetooth menu, you can connect a Bluetooth® audio
device with the multimedia system and play back the available tracks on
the audio device. Connecting the device can be conveniently handled in the
device manager, so you can complete all settings with just a few clicks.

Online music: The Online music menu allows you to access music streaming
services.

Notes on comfort
1 Album cover The Comfort menu makes functions available that contribute to your well-
being when driving or taking a break.
2 Active media source
3 Track and artist SEAT COMFORT
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback The Seat menu allows you to flexibly adjust the contours of the seats to
list your needs by adjusting the side bolsters and lumbar support independently.
5 Repeat You can save these settings in your Mercedes me profile, so they can be
6 Settings called up each time you drive. With the Seat kinetics function, you can start a
programme that causes slight modifications of the seat position when you are
7 Additional options
driving. These modifications promote a healthy back.
8 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward
9 Additional categories

26

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features

MASSAGE PROGRAMME sumption values, for example. In addition, you can call up the Digital Owner's
In the Massage menu you will find the massage programmes that are available Manual via the Owner's Manual menu item.
for your vehicle. By selecting the desired programme you start it directly and it
runs for a period of approximately ten minutes, depending on the programme VEHICLE DATA
selected. With the High intensity function you can increase the effect of the THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE SHOWN, FOR EXAMPLE:
massage programme.
R Activity of the acceleration and brake pedal
AMBIENT LIGHT R Activity of the suspension strut
In the Ambient light menu you can set the colour and brightness for your R wheel angle
ambient lighting. Using the Link zones function, the ambience, accent and
R G-force display for the linear and lateral acceleration
impression zones can be regulated separately so that you can set the lighting
of your vehicle individually. ENGINE DATA
THE FOLLOWING DATA IS SHOWN:
Information about smartphone integration R Transmission oil temperature
Using the Smartphone Integration menu, various applications are available that R Engine/coolant temperature
can bring the functions of your mobile phone to the multimedia system dis‐ R Performance
play. Operation can by carried out via the touchscreen or voice control, for R Torque
example. R Boost pressure
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration CONSUMPTION DATA
to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Depending on your driving style, this display shows the current and average
Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐ fuel consumption. Together with the displays of vehicle and engine data, you
tooth® with the multimedia system. can adapt your driving style to be as efficient and economical as possible.
Use Android Auto for mobile phones with the Android operating system and
use Apple CarPlay® with your iPhone®. The full functionality of Android Auto Information about In-Car Calendar
and Apple CarPlay® is only possible with an Internet connection.
Using the In-Car Calendar menu, you can connect your online services with
the multimedia system.
Information about vehicle info
YOU THEN HAVE MULTIPLE OPTIONS AVAILABLE:
You can have important vehicle information displayed in the Info menu. At
a glance you will have an overview of vehicle and engine data or current con‐ R Organising your meetings and telephone conferences.

27

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features

R Managing your appointments. R Lights

R Have navigation to the location for a meeting. R System

ASSISTANCE MENU
Information on MB Apps (Digital Extras) With the Assistance menu you have direct access to the driver assistance
systems which are used in your vehicle and can either switch these on or off,
VARIOUS SERVICES AND ONLINE FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE VIA THE or configure according to your wishes.
MB APPS MENU:
VEHICLE MENU
R Managing Digital Extras HERE YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:
R Using the dashcam
R Automatic folding in of the outside mirrors when parking the vehicle
R Using the web browser to surf the Internet
R Automatic adjustment of the seat and steering wheel, for comfortable
entry and exit from the vehicle
You require a Mercedes me ID user account, and have to connect your vehicle
R Automatic activation of the 360° camera when selecting reverse gear
with the user account, in order to be able to use services.
LIGHT MENU
% If the Mercedes-Benz App is available on a mobile phone, the All the light settings can be made in the Lights menu. You can activate or
vehicle link can be made via the displayed QR code. deactivate the Intelligent Light System here, set for how long your vehicle
should remain lit after parking or unlocking or switch the function off.

Please not that the available features are country-dependent. SYSTEM MENU
All important settings for the multimedia system can be made in the System
menu.
Information on settings
YOU CAN CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:
In the Settings you can set the basic configuration for your multimedia system
and the vehicle. You have access to all functions in this menu, from switching R Setting the system language
the driver assistance systems on and off to display and language settings. R The configuration of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
R Setting of time and date
THE SETTINGS ARE STRUCTURED IN THE FOLLOWING MENUS:

R Assistance
R Vehicle

28

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

At the filling station

Refuelling the vehicle & WARNING

Risk of injury from fuels
& WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes
Fuels are highly flammable.
or clothing.
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐ # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
ded.
# Keep children away from fuel.
# Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the sta‐
tionary heater and keep switched off during filling. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the follow‐
ing:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse

them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do

not induce vomiting.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact

with fuel.

29

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. Vehicles with a petrol engine:

# Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. system, the engine and the emission control system.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into # Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine
the vehicle again during the refuelling process. fuel.

Petrol can contain up to 25 Vol.‑% ethanol by volume.

& WARNING
# See the information label in fuel filler flap for compatible fuels.
Risk of fire from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Further information about compatible fuels can be obtained at a quali‐
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is fied specialist workshop.
lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
Throughout Europe you can also find the compatibility labels on the
While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
may overheat without warning.
NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:
# Never refuel using petrol.
R Diesel
# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
R Petrol with metallic additives

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch on the vehicle.

30

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
system, the engine and the emission control system.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filters:

# Refuel using only sulphur-free diesel fuel.

In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only
low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less than
50 ppm.

Vehicles without diesel particulate filters:

# Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less

than 500 ppm.

NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:

R Petrol
R Marine diesel
R Heating oil
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil
R Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch on the vehicle.

31

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE
Do not refuel diesel-engined vehicles with petrol
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL:
* NOTE
Shorter maintenance intervals due to fuel with increased bio-con‐ R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
tents Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
When fuels with increased bio-contents are used, fuel residues with the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
increased separation volume may occur. If fuels with increased bio-con‐
tents (compatibility marks B10 and B20) are used on an ongoing basis,
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
this may lead to shorter maintenance intervals for the fuel filter.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
If the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time (several
weeks):

# Refuel the vehicle beforehand with diesel fuel with bio-con‐

* NOTE
tents < 10% to avoid possible deposits of bio-contents in the
Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank
fuel tank.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling
* NOTE
pump:
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL: # Do not switch on the vehicle.

R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

* NOTE
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

32

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

Requirements: # Press on the centre rear of the fuel filler flap 1.

R The vehicle is unlocked. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it.
R Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel tank was vented before
# Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
refuelling (/ page 377).
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place
Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. and refuel.

The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the infor‐ # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
mation label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

% Vehicles with diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for
refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being filled, your vehicle is
equipped with an incorrect fuelling protector. This function may
be deactivated in some countries due to local conditions. For
more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

% Vehicles with diesel engine: Do not run the fuel tank empty.
When the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 l
diesel before starting the vehicle.
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap
3 Tyre pressure table % Vehicles with diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diam‐
4 QR code for rescue card eter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from
a canister. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank
5 Fuel type
filler neck.

% Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel filler flap opens # Replace the fuel filler cap on the tank filler neck and turn clockwise until
automatically after the fuel tank has been vented (/ page 377).
it engages audibly.

# Close fuel filler flap 1.

33

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

Topping up AdBlue® R Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.
The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed
displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been driven, it will
* NOTE no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Add at least the indicated
Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel quantity of AdBlue®.
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel tank. R Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not
possThe AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Add
# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® tank. at least the indicated quantity of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait
approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank.

Plug-in hybrid:

* NOTE THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR IN ORDER ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY

Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage WHEN THE ADBLUE® TANK REQUIRES TOPPING UP:
# After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container. R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
reserve range. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
# Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the
vehicle. R Top up AdBlue In XXX km Electric only. See Owner's Manual. The low
AdBlue® level will result in the combustion engine being switched off
after the displayed remaining distance has been driven. From this point
Requirements: on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on
the state of charge of the high-voltage battery. Top up with AdBlue®
R The vehicle is unlocked.
immediately .
R Top up XX,X l AdBlue Only "Electric" available See Owner's ManualThe
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR IN ORDER ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY AdBlue® tank is empty. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric
WHEN THE ADBLUE® TANK REQUIRES TOPPING UP: mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery. Add
at least the indicated quantity of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait
R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.
reserve range. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining dis‐ You can display the AdBlue® range and level on the driver display in the menu
Service.
tance displayed has been driven. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .

34

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

% The AdBlue® range shown is highly dependent upon driving style

and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate
from the calculated range.

OPENING THE ADBLUE® FILLER CAP

# Unscrew the cap of the AdBlue® refill canister 4.

# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister 4

until hand-tight.

# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-
tight.
# Press on the centre rear of the fuel filler flap 1. # Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 4.
# Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 counter-clockwise and remove it. The filling process stops when the AdBlue® tank is completely full.
AdBlue® refill canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially
% You can also place the AdBlue® filler cap in the filler cap holder in emptied.
the hinge arm of the fuel filler flap. # Unscrew disposable hose 3 and close AdBlue® refill canister 4 in
reverse order.
TOPPING UP ADBLUE®
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you top up AdBlue® at a pump system. If
# Replace AdBlue® filler cap 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly
there is no AdBlue® pump system available you can also top up AdBlue® with a engages.
canister. # Close fuel filler flap 1.

# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.

35

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

% If it was no longer possible to start the vehicle due to the empty & WARNING
AdBlue® tank, it takes up to 60 seconds for topping up to be Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
detected.
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING
# Start the vehicle. SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

R You may come into contact with hot gases.

% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehi‐ R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating
cle. fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

Topping up the windscreen washer system # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
the charging process & WARNING
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐ Risk of injury due to moving parts
tem is under high voltage. Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
process. Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐

nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

36

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

# Open cap 1 by the tab.

& WARNING
Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐ # Top up the washer fluid.
ment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
& WARNING
parts described in the following.
Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched
on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
& WARNING wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if
changing the wiper blades.
it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust
system.
MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION
# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out
next to the filler opening. # Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.

# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐
bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 296).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

% Depending on the time of production of the vehicle, different

variants of wiper blades may be used.

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)

# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.

37

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it
will go.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal

position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it
will go.

# Press release knob 2.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in direction of arrow 3.
REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)
# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.
# Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1
until release knob 2 engages.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

# Switch on the vehicle.

# Press button î on the combination switch.

The wiper arms will return to their original positions.

# Switch off the vehicle.

38

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)

# Remove protective film 1 from the service indicator.

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow When the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the
1. wiper blades should be replaced.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking

position. Checking the engine oil level using the driv‐
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. er's display
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. Requirements

# Switch on the vehicle. R The engine has been warmed up.

R The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
# Press button î on the combination switch.
R The engine is running at idle speed.
The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
R The bonnet is closed.
# Switch off the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal
There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade. driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

39

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

Driver display: R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not
4 Service connected.
The engine oil level is shown.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER'S
DISPLAY: R Engine oil level System currently inoperative

R Engine oil level Measuring now…: the engine oil level cannot be deter‐
mined yet.
# Close the bonnet.

# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Information on washing the vehicle in a car
R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level wash
on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the
engine oil level is correct.
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing
R Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine the vehicle
oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min": Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while pay‐
# Add 1 l of engine oil.
ing attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has
R Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil been fully restored.
level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":

# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.

R For engine oil level, switch on vehicle

# Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.

40

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips At the filling station

R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.

* NOTE R The outside mirrors are folded in.
Damage from automatic braking
R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHI‐
R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
CLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:
R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
R Active Brake Assist wise the boot lid could open unintentionally.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
R HOLD function R For car washes with conveyor systems:
R Active Parking Assist - Neutral i is engaged.
- If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed,
To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
make sure the key is located in the vehicle. Park position j will
towing or in the car wash.
otherwise automatically be engaged.
R Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control
panel or deactivate the Sliding sunroof and roller sunblind option in the
* NOTE settings for the MBUX interior assistant (/ page 584).
Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is
suitable for the vehicle dimensions. % Removing the wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades
after washing the vehicle will help avoid smearing and reduce
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the wiper noise.
underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular

the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH,

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

R The HOLD function is switched off.
R The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.

41

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

Preparing for a holiday

Notes on adjusting the lights when you are ONCE THE HEADLAMPS HAVE BEEN CONVERTED:

driving abroad R Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.

R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the head‐
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives
available.
on the other side of the road.

Vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT: as a convenience function, the headlamps will

automatically adjust when you cross the border into countries in which traffic Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be tyres
adjusted manually on the Low beam menu (/ page 293).

THE AUTOMATIC LIGHT ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE: & WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres
R If automatic is selected on the Low beam menu
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
R If navigation and the navigation position are available
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any
damaged tyres immediately.
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, CHECK THE HEADLAMP SETTING AND
CHANGE IT MANUALLY IF NECESSARY:

R If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only dis‐
play message is shown.
R If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is
shown.

42

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres
& WARNING 4 mm.
Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident. Removing the safety vest
On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.

# Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.

MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR

R Summer tyres: 3 mm
R M+S tyres: 4 mm

# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐

bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. There is a safety vest stowage recess in the door stowage compartments of all
doors for storing the safety vests.
# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for
the minimum tread depth is reached. # To remove: pull out the safety vest bag 1 using the loop 2.

# Open the safety vest bag 1 and take out the safety vest.
CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT # To replace: fold the safety vest, roll it up and insert it into the safety vest
LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A bag 1.
LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD: # Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the underside of the armrest into the
safety vest stowage recess. Ensure that the loop 2 remains hanging out
R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 768). so that it is easy to grasp.
R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
R Check the valve caps. % Remove the packaging film from a new safety vest before sliding
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across it into the safety vest stowage recess. Otherwise, it may slide out
the entire width. unintentionally or the packaging may hinder its removal.

43

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

Observe the legal requirements for the individual countries.

Removing the warning triangle

1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron # Push both sides of the warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the
5 Do not tumble dry arrow and open it.
6 Do not dry clean
# Remove the warning triangle 2.
7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety The warning triangle is located in the boot lid.
vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

EXCHANGE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: First-aid kit (soft sided) overview
R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty.
R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded.
R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to
sunlight.

DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

R Please contact your local waste disposal company.

The first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the left or right side of the boot,
depending on the respective vehicle version.

44

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

Map data update overview The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle
is switched on.
As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have
UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL
a negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation
The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with
experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-
your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/
Benz.
Follow the menu path My Mercedes me account > Dashboard > Manage vehicle >
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP
Manage services > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a
DATA:
storage medium.
R Online map update
After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your
R Updates from the Mercedes me Portal vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the
R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has
Additional costs can be incurred in this process. been restarted, the updated map data is used.

ONLINE MAP UPDATE

REQUIREMENTS: Entering a POI or address
R Mercedes me connect is available. Requirements:
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R For the online search:
R The Online Map Update service is available for your region.
- There is an Internet connection.
R The service has been activated.
- Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
% The Online Map Update service is only available in certain coun‐ - The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have
tries. accepted the terms of use.
- Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update. - The service is available and has been activated.

The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the
European, North American, Korean and Japanese regions in which the vehicle % If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using
is located or is moved. the data of the digital map.

45

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

Multimedia system:
% Online search results for POIs may contain additional informa‐
4© 5ª
tion, for example opening times and ratings. The information is
provided by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all countries.

THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN 1:

R Town, street, house number or street, town

R Postcode
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
R Town, POI name
R Contact name
R Junctions in the following entry format: "road A" and "road B"
Example: entering a POI or address
1 Input line with current entry R Geo-coordinates (/ page 614)
2 Search result
3 Selects destination search, displays further destination searches with dou‐ # Hide the keyboard with a.
ble arrow
# Select the destination in the list.
4 Deletes an entry
The following menu shows the selected destination with the address
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
information and a corresponding map section.
6 Deletes the last character entered
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
7 Hides the keypad
8 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 548)
9 Sets the written language Searching for radio stations using station
A Switches to digits and special characters names or frequency entry
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
Multimedia system:
# Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order.
4 © 5 Þ Radio
The search results are displayed in a list.
# Select è.

46

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

# Enter a station name or frequency.

# Select a station.

47

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

Luggage and loading

Attaching a roof luggage rack * NOTE

Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐
& WARNING ble clearance height
Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged.
well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. # Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as # If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
drive in.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving # Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
style.
structures or other carrier systems into account.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data"
section.

48

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

* NOTE * NOTE
Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is fitted
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been If the sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted, the
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack.

# Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for # Do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof luggage rack is fitted.
Mercedes-Benz.
The sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle
# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding interior.
sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the boot lid

can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that
the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE
Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved
roof luggage racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack
if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE
Damage to the covers
# When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama slid‐ The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.
ing sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz. # Do not use metallic or hard objects.

The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the

vehicle interior. # Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.

49

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manu‐
facturer. & WARNING
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

Folding the rear seat backrests forward
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
& WARNING injury.
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
R A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or prop‐
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. erly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or
parts in the sweep of the seat. load compartment.

ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐

CIALLY:

R After the seat has been adjusted.

R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
wards

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Requirements

R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted.

R The rear armrest has been folded up.

50

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

FOLDING THE REAR OUTER SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD

You can fold the centre and right seat backrests forwards separately.

The left seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre
seat backrest.

If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold
the backrest back into place.

# Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position and locked
to the left seat backrest (/ page 261).

# To fold the left seat backrest forward: briefly press left button 1.
The left seat backrest folds forward together with the centre seat back‐
rest.
If the left seat backrest is not locked with the centre seat backrest, this
will be shown on the central display.

# To fold the right seat backrest forward: briefly press right button 1.
The right seat backrest will fold forwards.

% If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards,
fold the right seat backrest forwards.
# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into marked position 2.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. FOLDING THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS SEPARATELY
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold
the backrest back into place.

51

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

& WARNING
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
R A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or prop‐
erly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended.
# Press release catch 3.
R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or
# Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. load compartment.

ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐

Folding back the rear seat backrest CIALLY:

R After the seat has been adjusted.

& WARNING R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats wards
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.

# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
parts in the sweep of the seat. visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

52

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

* NOTE
Opening the stowage space under the boot
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the floor
seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the
& WARNING
seat backrest is folded back.
Risk of injury due to an open load trunk floor
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back If you drive when the trunk floor is open, objects could be thrown
the seat backrest. around and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly
in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction.

# Always close the trunk floor before a journey.

* NOTE
Damage to the handle in the boot floor
If the boot floor has been attached to the drip rail via the handle,
damage may arise when the boot lid is closed.

# Disconnect the handle before closing the boot lid and close
trunk floor.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

# Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
tion indicator 2 will be visible.

53

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

# Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2.

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch
Folding the ball neck out and in If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer
hitch itself may be damaged in the process.

& WARNING # Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching
Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a
fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is
# Always engage the ball neck as described.
permitted.

# When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the

information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing
& WARNING
eye."
Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not
been properly engaged. FOLDING THE BALL NECK OUT

There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!

# Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unob‐
structed.

# Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards.

* NOTE
Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer # Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
hitch, retract the ball neck.
# Keep the swivel range clear.

54

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. FOLDING THE BALL NECK IN
The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in
a vertical position. # Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out. The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
lock message appears on the driver display.

# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.

Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased
or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.

55

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly
behind the bumper.
Overview of the front stowage compartments
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the driver display will
disappear. & WARNING
OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT INDICATORS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐ Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
PLAY: If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 961) open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
R Display messages (/ page 883) all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a

Overview of the tie-down eyes sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251).
around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage

spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

1 Tie-down eyes

% Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehicles equipped with

the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK
Quickfold).

56

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

Locking/unlocking the glove compartment

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
1 Stowage spaces in the doors open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
2 Stowage compartment under the armrest with multimedia and USB con‐ all objects they contain.
nections
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with cup holders, USB sudden change in direction.
ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones
4 Glove compartment # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around in such situations.
% The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre con‐ # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
sole 3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 729).
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

57

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or anti-
clockwise 1 (to unlock).

58

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

Ice and snow

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and & WARNING

tyres Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to damaged tyres On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.

# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any # Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
damaged tyres immediately. surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.

MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR

R Summer tyres: 3 mm
R M+S tyres: 4 mm

# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐

bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for

the minimum tread depth is reached.

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT

LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A
LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 768).

59

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.

R Check the valve caps. * NOTE
Damage to body or suspension parts caused by fitted snow chains
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across
the entire width. Fitting snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC models can damage
body or suspension parts.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres
4 mm. # Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC models.

Setting the speed limit for winter tyres OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:

Multimedia system: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyre limit You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
# Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically
SETTING A SPEED approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains of the same
# Select Winter tyre limit. quality standard.
R Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.
# Select a speed.
R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist
Notes on snow chains when snow chains are fitted.

& WARNING
% You can permanently limit the speed for winter tyre mode
Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains
(/ page 432).
If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag
against the vehicle body or chassis components.

# Never fit snow chains to the front wheels. % You can deactivate ESP® to start off (/ page 423). This allows
the wheels to spin, achieving increased tractive power.
# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

60

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

Notes on windscreen washer fluid Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be
triggered erroneously.
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).
RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:

R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit

& WARNING
‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze con‐
system. tainer.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.
next to the filler opening.

Topping up the windscreen washer system

* NOTE
Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen & DANGER
washer fluid Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the charging process
the exterior lighting. During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
tem is under high voltage.
# Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for
use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. # Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
process.

* NOTE
Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind‐
screen washer fluids.

61

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ment
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR: e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

R You may come into contact with hot gases. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating parts described in the following.
fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

& WARNING
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
bonnet closed and call the fire service. Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust
system.

& WARNING # Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out
Risk of injury due to moving parts next to the filler opening.
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐

nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

62

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

# Open cap 1 by the tab.

# Top up the washer fluid.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched
on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before will go.
changing the wiper blades.
# Press release knob 2.

MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION # Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in direction of arrow 3.
# Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)
# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐
bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 296).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

% Depending on the time of production of the vehicle, different

variants of wiper blades may be used.

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)

# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.

63

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it
will go.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal

position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow
1.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking

position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

# Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1
until release knob 2 engages. # Switch on the vehicle.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. # Press button î on the combination switch.
The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.
# Switch off the vehicle.
# Switch on the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY
# Press button î on the combination switch. There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.
The wiper arms will return to their original positions.

# Switch off the vehicle.

64

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

Switching the stationary heater/ventilation

on/off via the control panel

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poison‐
ous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This
is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for
example.
# Remove protective film 1 from the service indicator. # Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces
without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
When the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the
wiper blades should be replaced. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from
snow when the vehicle or the auxiliary heating is running.

# Open a door or a roof hatch on the windward side of the

vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

65

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

& WARNING
Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust
On some models with a 48 V on-board electrical system, the auxiliary heating
gases
function can be activated when the vehicle is unlocked via the Mercedes-Benz
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. app. The following requirements must be fulfilled:
# When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that: R The vehicle has a wireless connection.
R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flamma‐ R The vehicle is linked to the user's Mercedes-Benz account.
ble materials.
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater
exhaust pipe unhindered. % If the fill level of the fuel tank is too low, auxiliary heating mode
R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flam‐ may be restricted.
mable materials.

* NOTE
Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary venti‐
lation operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the bat‐
tery.

# After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer

period of time.

# Set the temperature using the s and r arrows on the climate bar
Requirements:
on the central display.

% The following function is equipment-dependent. # Press button 1.

The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
R The vehicle has a stationary heater. # Set the function via the Mercedes-Benz app.
R The outside temperature is below 15°C.

66

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

THE COLOURS OF THE INDICATOR LAMP HAVE THE FOLLOWING MEAN‐

INGS:

R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.

R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

67

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

Help in the event of a breakdown

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning Removing the fire extinguisher

lights
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other
vehicle occupants.

# Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.

# Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

# Press button 1.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE HAZARD WARNING LAMPS WILL
SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY:

R The airbag has been deployed

R An emergency stop has been initiated (/ page 445)
R The vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a speed of more than
70 km/h to a standstill.

# Pull the tab 1 upwards.

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard # Fold the tab 1 down.
warning light system using the warning lamp button.

68

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

# Remove the fire extinguisher 2.

Removing the safety vest

1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
There is a safety vest stowage recess in the door stowage compartments of all vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
doors for storing the safety vests.
EXCHANGE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
# To remove: pull out the safety vest bag 1 using the loop 2.
R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty.
# Open the safety vest bag 1 and take out the safety vest. R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded.
# To replace: fold the safety vest, roll it up and insert it into the safety vest R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to
bag 1.
sunlight.
# Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the underside of the armrest into the
safety vest stowage recess. Ensure that the loop 2 remains hanging out
so that it is easy to grasp. DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

R Please contact your local waste disposal company.

% Remove the packaging film from a new safety vest before sliding
it into the safety vest stowage recess. Otherwise, it may slide out
unintentionally or the packaging may hinder its removal.
Observe the legal requirements for the individual countries.

69

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

Removing the warning triangle QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the
B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to
quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the
routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

You can find further information at: https://rk.mb-qr.com/de/

Starting assistance and charging the 12‑V‑

battery
# Push both sides of the warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the
PREPARING STARTING ASSISTANCE/CHARGING
arrow and open it.
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle.
# Remove the warning triangle 2.
# Shift the transmission to position j.
The warning triangle is located in the boot lid.
# Switch off the vehicle and all electrical consumers.

First-aid kit (soft sided) overview Open the bonnet.

#

Illustrations exemplary
The first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the left or right side of the boot,
depending on the respective vehicle version.

70

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

# Open the cover 1 of the jump-starting connection When the starting assistance process is complete:
point.
# First, remove the jump lead from earth point 4 and negative pole of
the donor battery, then from positive clamp 3 and positive pole of the
donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle
first.

# After removing the jump lead, close cover 2 of positive clamp 3.

# Close the cover 1.

If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possi‐
ble to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Open the cover 2 of the positive clamp 3 on the jump-starting con‐ CHARGING
nection point. # Connect the positive clamp 3 on the vehicle and the positive pole of
the charger with the charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp 3
STARTING ASSISTANCE
on the vehicle first.
# Connect positive clamp 3 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the
donor battery using the jump lead. Always begin with positive clamp 3 # Connect the negative terminal of the charger and the earth point 4 on
on your own vehicle first. the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger.

# On the assisting vehicle leave the engine running at idling speed. # Start the charging process.

# Connect negative terminal on the second battery and the earth point 4
on your vehicle to the jump lead. Begin with the donor battery first. When the charging process is complete:

# Start the engine of your own vehicle.

# First remove the charging cable from the earth point 4 and negative
terminal of the charger, then from the positive clamp 3 and positive
# Let the engines run for several minutes. pole of the charger. Begin each time with the contacts on the vehicle
first.
# Before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer in
your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. # After removing the charging cable, close cover 2 of positive clamp 3.

71

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

# Close the cover 1.

* NOTE
Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to
Notes on electrical fuses malfunction.

# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can
enter the fuse box.
& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse positioned correctly on the fuse box.
with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause determined and rectified
at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses contain‐
ing the correct amperage. ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:

R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

R All electrical consumers are switched off.
* NOTE
R The vehicle is switched off.
Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or
systems or their functions being considerably restricted. THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:

# Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respec‐ R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 760)
tive specified fuse rating. R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 761)
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 761)
Replace blown fuses with equivalent fuses, identifiable by their colour and R Fuse box in the boot (/ page 762)
label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in
the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the boot (/ page 762).

72

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

Notes on flat tyres R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 777).

& WARNING % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries
Risk of accident due to a flat tyre (/ page 784).
A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as steering
and braking.

tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. With the exception of some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equip‐
ped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find
# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare out which tyre-change tool kit is necessary and approved for a wheel change
wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ on your vehicle.
cialist workshop.
YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A
WHEEL:
Run-flat tyres:
R Jack
# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended
tyres (run-flat tyres). R Chock
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILA‐
BLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:

R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the jour‐ % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
ney for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the
MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (/ page 737). sticker affixed to the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of a malfunction,
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the
TIREFIT kit (/ page 738).
R Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz connect: you can make a call for break‐ The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag 1 in the boot.
down assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a break‐
down (/ page 670).

73

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

% When stowing the tool bag, ensure that it is adequately secured. TIREFIT kit storage location
PLUG-IN HYBRID

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS:

The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the left-hand side of the boot when delivered.
R Jack
Not plug-in hybrid
R Gloves
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin
R Folding chock
R Ratchet wrench for jack

Overview of the plug-in hybrid tyre-change

tool kit The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the left-hand side of the boot when delivered.

Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit may be located in a different
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag 1 in the boot floor.
position in the boot.

% DEPENDING ON THE RESPECTIVE POWER CATEGORY (LK),

THE TYRE INFLATION COMPRESSOR WEIGHS AS FOLLOWS:

R LK1 – 12 V/10 A, 120 W, 0.8 kg

R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.9 kg

74

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or elec‐
trical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor. * NOTE
The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. In the event Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over
of a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. long distances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high
speeds or over long distances.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
ground # A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods.

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

& WARNING
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE BATTERY IS DISCHARGED: Risk of accident when towing a vehicle with too much weight
IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOWED IS HEAVIER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE
R The vehicle cannot be started. GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS
R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied. CAN ARISE:
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission cannot be
R The towing eye breaks off.
shifted to position i or j.
R The combination oscillates and can capsize.

# Before towing, check whether the vehicle to be towed exceeds

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the transmission can‐ the permissible gross mass.
not be shifted to position i or if the display does not show
anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 756). A tow truck with
lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport. If a vehicle is to be towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found

on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 856).
# Fit the towing eye (/ page 757).

# Fasten the towing device.

75

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

* NOTE & WARNING

Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar Risk of accidents due to restricted safety-related functions during
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. towing
SAFETY-RELEVANT FUNCTIONS ARE RESTRICTED OR NO LONGER
AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 198).
R The vehicle is switched off.
# Do not activate the HOLD function.
R The brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
# Deactivate tow-away protection R The power supply or the on-board electrical system is defective.
(/ page 220).

# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 456). If your vehicle is being towed, considerably more force may be required
for steering and braking.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the transmission to posi‐
In addition, important vehicle display messages cannot be seen if the
tion i.
driver display is faulty.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door # Use a tow bar.
or front passenger door; the transmission otherwise automatically shifts
to position j. # Before towing, ensure that the driver's display is operational
and the steering can move freely.
# Release the electric parking brake.

* NOTE
Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the
vehicles could be damaged.

# Pull away slowly and smoothly.

76

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Expert knowledge

Expert knowledge

Additional functions of buttons & WARNING

OPENING AND CLOSING THE WINDOWS USING THE AIR-RECIRCULATION Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
BUTTON (CONVENIENCE CLOSING/OPENING) ence closing
When the air-recirculation mode is activated, the side windows can be closed When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
automatically, e.g. before entering a tunnel. When the air-recirculation mode is could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows.
deactivated, the side windows can be moved back to their original position.
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor
the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
& WARNING are in the closing area.
Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
ence closing
# To close windows: press and hold the button g in the climate bar
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
in the central display or the air conditioning control panel until the
could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the
windows move.
sliding sunroof.
The windows close and air-recirculation mode switches on.
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor
the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.

77

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Expert knowledge

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS

& WARNING Multimedia system:
Risk of entrapment from the convenience opening feature 4 © 5 Þ Radio
During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or # Select ..
become trapped between the side window and window frame.
The traffic information is switched on or off.
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side
windows.
Useful vehicle functions
# If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the W
button in the door to open the side windows. STORING THE PARKING POSITION OF THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE
MIRROR USING THE MEMORY BUTTON
The side windows stop.
Requirements
# To continue closing the side windows, pull on the W button.
R Reverse gear has not been engaged.

# To reopen closed windows: press and hold g the button in the

climate bar in the central display or the air conditioning control panel
until the windows move.
The windows move back to their original position and air-recirculation
mode switches off.

Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof closes or opens simulta‐
neously.

IF BODY PARTS BECOME ENTRAPPED IN THE SLIDING SUNROOF:

# To stop: press the 3 button.

# To open: pull the button 3 back. # Use button 2 to select the front-passenger outside mirror.
RESETTING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SETTINGS
# Press and hold the Climate menu entry on the climate bar of the multime‐ # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking posi‐
dia system for four seconds. tion using button 1.
The climate control settings will be reset to the basic settings. # Press the V button.

78

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Expert knowledge

# Confirm immediately using button 1 to store the setting. R The atmospheric air pressure has exceeded the range that is suitable for
the system.
% No more than three seconds may pass between the V button R Engine diagnostics require a running engine.
and button 1 being pressed. The mirror adjustment will be R The transmission oil temperature has exceeded the range that is suitable
cancelled after three seconds. for the system.
R The temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range.
R The system detects moisture on the windscreen when the air condition‐
Tips for on the move ing system is switched on.

VEHICLE CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP OR START

CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC ENGINE STOP:
Deactivating the function of the key
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the
R The ECO start/stop function is switched on.
KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorisation via
R The brake system does not require a running engine. KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that key. Activate the function of
R The atmospheric air pressure is within the range that is suitable for the the key so that all functions using the key are available once again.
system.
You can also deactivate the key's function to reduce the key's energy con‐
R The engine is at normal operating temperature.
sumption if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
R Engine diagnostics are not active.
R The transmission oil temperature is within the range that is suitable for # Press and hold the key button s.
the system.
# With the button s pressed, immediately press the key button Ü
R The temperature in the vehicle interior is within the set range.
twice in quick succession.
R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
The indicator lamp of the key lights up once briefly, and then again for
R The system detects that there is no moisture on the windscreen when longer.
the air conditioning system is switched on.
R The system does not detect a steep gradient.
% YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE
R The bonnet is closed. KEY:

CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC ENGINE START:

R Press any button on the key.

R The brake system requires a running engine.

79

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Quick start and Tips Expert knowledge

R Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage
compartment (/ page 330). % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loud‐
speakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are
faulty.
YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL
Overview of emergency call systems SYSTEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency R A corresponding message appears on the driver and media
call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and display .
the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
an accident site in places that are difficult to access.

Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically

(/ page 681) or manually (/ page 682). Emergency guide
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make In the event of an accident or breakdown, the emergency guide shows safety
an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. notes on the central display.
INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS THESE INCLUDE, FOR EXAMPLE:
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE
MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS: R Recommended actions when leaving the vehicle
R Procedure for safely removing seat belts in the event of an accident
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call whereby the vehicle comes to rest on its roof
system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete
failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be trans‐
mitted. THE EMERGENCY GUIDE IS ACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of R Occupant protection system has been triggered
the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
R An emergency call is made
gency call centre.
R Certain breakdown situations
The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can
be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is
switched on.
% The availability as well as the scope of the emergency guide can
R G: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
vary depending in the country and vehicle equipment.

80

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance

At a glance
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Cockpit 83

Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) 86

Indicator and warning lamps 89

Overhead control panel 92

Door operating unit and seat adjustment 94

Emergencies and breakdowns 97

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit

Left-hand-drive vehicles

83

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Cockpit

84

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Cockpit

1Steering wheel gearshift paddles 366 c Active Parking Assist 492 CAdjusts the steering wheel 242

2Combination switch 283 & Switches the stationary ý Switches the steering wheel
65 243
heater on/off heater on/off
3Driver's display 522
\ Quick vehicle access DControl panel:

4DIRECT SELECT lever 361

ú Fingerprint sensor 568 Driver's display 522

5ü Start/stop button 329

Ü Switches the MBUX multime‐ Cruise control or variable limiter 430
558
dia system on/off
è ECO start/stop function 342
I Active Distance Assist
a Switches sound on/off 435
577 DISTRONIC
6Central display 558
ø Adjusts the volume 578 EDiagnostics connection 118
7Glove compartment 56
A£ Hazard warning light system 68 FOpens the bonnet 713
8Stowage compartment 56
Control panel for the MBUX multi‐ G! Electric parking brake 410
B 567
9Switch panel for: media system
HLight switch 282
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 356

85

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)

Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)

Left-hand-drive vehicles

86

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)

87

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)

1± Increases recuperation 346 3q Reduces recuperation 346 6÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button 354

2Driver display: 4Central display: 7° Haptic accelerator pedal 349

õ Operational readiness 542 Plug-in hybrid settings 601 6 Depressurises and refills the
8 377
fuel tank
Trip computer 526 Energy flow display 602

ECO Assist 343 5û Sets charging times 601

88

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps

Driver display

89

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps

90

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps

1#! Turn signal lights 283 h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐ J! Electric parking brake (red) 970
A 978
tem
2ï Trailer hitch 966 KJ Brakes (red) 970
B; Engine diagnostics 967
ä Rear-axle level control (yel‐ J Brakes (yellow) 970
3 972 Cå ESP® OFF 972
low)
8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler
L 967
4# Electrical fault 967 ÷ ESP® 972 flap location indicator

5Ù Power steering (red) 966 D% Diesel engine: preglow MFuel level 526

Ù Power steering (yellow) 966 E_ Drive system: reduced power 965 NK High beam 283

Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) 966 Fp Petrol engine: reduced power 967 L Low beam 282

66 Restraint system 963 Gÿ Coolant temperature 967 T Side lights 282

7ü Seat belt 963 HCoolant temperature display 526 OR Rear fog light 283

8L Distance warning 972 ! Electric parking brake (yel‐ H Mercedes-Benz emergency

I 970 P 978
low) call system
9! ABS 972

91

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

92

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Overhead control panel

Sun visors (folding, available in | Switches automatic interior 3 Opens/closes the panorama
5 294 212
1extendable design as an optional lighting control on/off sliding sunroof roller sunblind
extra)
6G SOS button 670 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
9 138
c Switches the front interior lamps
2 294
lighting on/off Switches the right-hand reading
7 294 AInside rear-view mirror 300
lamp on/off
u Switches the rear interior
3 294
lighting on/off 3 Opens/closes the panorama Switches the left-hand reading
8 212 B 294
sliding sunroof lamp on/off
4; me button 670

93

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

Door operating unit and seat adjustment

94

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

95

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehi‐ W Opens/closes the left side FAdjusting the head restraints 233
1 196 8 207
cle window
Seat adjustment using the multi‐
9Í Operates the outside mirrors
G 236
2Opens the door 195 299 media system

3Adjusts the seats electrically 230 Ap Opens/closes the boot lid 200 Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft
H 225
position
w Switches the seat heating W Opens/closes the right side
4 238 B 207 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup‐
on/off window I 232
port
s Switches the seat ventilation W Opens/closes the rear right
5 239 C 207 Adjusting the seat backrest incli‐
on/off side window J 227
nation
V Operates the memory func‐ DD Rear-window roller sunblind 217
6 249 KAdjusting the seat height 227
tion
S Child safety lock for the rear
W Opens/closes the rear left E 180 Adjusts the seat cushion inclina‐
7 207 side windows L 227
side window tion

96

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

Emergencies and breakdowns

97

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns

1B-pillar with: 6Flat tyre 73 QR code for accessing the rescue

70
card
QR code for accessing the rescue 7Starting assistance 70
70
card BTow-starting or towing 75
8£ Hazard warning light system 68
2Safety vests 43 CFirst-aid kit (soft sided) 44
9Fire extinguisher 68
3; me button 670 DTIREFIT kit 738
AFuel filler flap with:
G SOS button 670 EWarning triangle 44
information label on fuel type 29
Checking and topping up operating
4 858
fluids
Information label on tyre pressure 769
5Tow-starting or towing 75

Back to Contents 98

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Digital Owner's Manual

Digital Owner's Manual

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual 100

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual
5 Open Digital Owner's Manual
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the
vehicle and the multimedia system.

# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual:
R Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side).
R Tips: provides you with information to deal with specific everyday situa‐
tions in your vehicle.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
1 Menu
If you do not have any connection to the internet within the vehicle,
2 Search
you can also scan the displayed QR code to view the animation on your
mobile communication device. The data tariff of the mobile communica‐ 3 Back
tion device is used for the data connection. 4 Contents section
R Messages: receive additional information about the messages on the Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, suchas warning notes, can be
driver display. expanded and collapsed.
R Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual.
Additional options for calling up the Digital Operator's Manual:

You can search for keywords using the search field Search in order to find Driver display: Call up concise information regarding display messages on the
quick answers to questions regarding operation of the vehicle. driver display. Pressing Õ will show brief information on the central display.

MBUX Voice Assistant: Call-up via the voice control system

100

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual

% For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated

while driving.

Back to Contents101

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes

General notes
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Declarations of conformity and country-

Protection of the environment 103 115 Implied warranty 125
specific information

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 105 Diagnostics connection 118 QR code for rescue card 126

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 106 Qualified specialist workshop 120 Data storage 127

Touch-sensitive control elements 108 Vehicle registration 121 Copyright 131

Mercedes-Benz app 109 Correct use of the vehicle 122

Operating safety 110 REACH regulation 123

Mounting the licence plate onto the front Notes for persons with electronic medical
114 124
licence plate bracket aids

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Protection of the environment

Protection of the environment

# Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE engine.
Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal
driving style # Do not warm up the vehicle while stationary.
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehi‐
operate the vehicle.
cle in front.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
protect the environment. Please observe the following recommenda‐
tions on operating conditions and personal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of
its maximum engine speed.
Operating conditions:
# Switch off the vehicle in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the
# Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
ECO start/stop function.
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for
once you no longer need them).
an economical driving style.
# Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental
protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

103

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Protection of the environment

PLUG-IN HYBRID

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the
high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the envi‐
ronment.

# Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a qualified special‐

ist workshop.

104

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU COUNTRIES ONLY:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly
disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles
Directive.

A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established

for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of
charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle
and conserving resources.

For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehi‐
cles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz
website for your country.

105

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE * NOTE

Environmental damage caused by not using recycled recondi‐ Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems
tioned components from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts AIRBAGS AND SEAT BELT TENSIONERS, AS WELL AS CONTROL
with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the UNITS AND SENSORS FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, MAY BE
implied warranty is valid as for new parts. INSTALLED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE:
# Recycled reconditioned components and parts from R doors
Mercedes‑Benz AG. R door pillars
R Sill
R Seats
R Cockpit
R Driver's display
R Centre console
R lateral roof frame

# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these

areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.

# Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts,
tyres and wheels or accessories relevant to safety that have not been
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems (e.g. the brake system)

106

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal

quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts
that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliabil‐
ity, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibil‐
ity for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been
officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.

Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if

they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet
the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the
vehicle's general operating permit.

THIS WILL BE THE CASE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

R The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general
operating permit was granted.
R Other road users could be endangered.
R The emissions or noise levels get worse.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 856) when
ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.

107

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Touch-sensitive control elements

Touch-sensitive control elements

In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped R When reaching a new area on the display surface, e.g. a pop-up window,
with touch-sensitive control elements. control elements, icons

THESE ARE LOCATED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE:

Despite meticulous development, Mercedes‑Benz AG cannot completely rule
R Roof and door operating unit out the possibility of haptic operation being affected by external microphones.
R Climate control
If you have any questions, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
R Steering wheel
R MBUX multimedia system WHEN USING TOUCH-SENSITIVE USER INTERFACE SURFACES, OBSERVE
THE FOLLOWING POINTS TO AVOID OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS:

The control elements feature touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. These R Do not affix stickers orsimilar objects on the surfaces
surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or trigger R Do not attach a smartphone‑ or other holders to the surface of the
functions, forexample. central display.
In the central display area, haptic acknowledgement is relayed through the R Protect the surfaces against moisture and wet conditions.
touch-sensitive surface, forexample in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or a R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (/ page 729).
change in user interface surface structure.

Haptic acknowledgement of the central display surface is generated by way of In addition to a symbol, some touch-sensitive control elements also feature
ultrasound. integrated indicator lamps. Ensure that the symbol of the control element is
pressed during use.
When engaged in haptic operation of the central display, always ensure ample
distance between head and display surface.

HAPTIC ACKNOWLEDGEMENT IS RELAYED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐

TIONS, FOREXAMPLE:

R When interacting with control elements on the display surface

R When scrolling in a list or table

108

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Mercedes-Benz app

Mercedes-Benz app

Notes on Digital Extras If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.

You can also activate various functions (Digital Extras) retroactively via
Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.

Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Activating Digital Extras via Mercedes me

Requirements:

R The vehicle has a wireless connection.

R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.

ORDERING AND ACTIVATING DIGITAL EXTRAS

# Place the Digital Extra that you would like to purchase for your vehicle in
your shopping basket in the Mercedes-Benz Store.

# Complete the order.

The Digital Extra will be activated while you are using the vehicle.
SPEEDING UP ACTIVATION
# Switch the vehicle off and lock it.

# Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle.
The Digital Extra will be activated. For some features, a notification will
also appear in the vehicle's multimedia system.

109

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Operating safety

Operating safety

If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is ren‐
& WARNING dered invalid.
Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".
If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any
required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system
failures. & WARNING
Risk of fire due to flammable material coming into contact with hot
# Always have the prescribed service‑ and maintenance work or parts of the exhaust system
any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop.
If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or twigs, come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system, they may ignite.

# When driving off-road or on unpaved surfaces, check the

& WARNING
underside of the vehicle at regular intervals.
Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to elec‐
tronic components # In particular, remove any trapped parts of plants or other flam‐
Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can mable material.
impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked
components or safety-relevant systems.
# If damage should occur, immediately inform a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.

# You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or

their software.

# Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried

out at a qualified specialist workshop.

110

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Operating safety

PLUG-IN HYBRID
* NOTE Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and at least one electric motor.
Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts The energy supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the
to the vehicle underbody or suspension components high-voltage on-board electrical system.
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR, THERE IS A
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE:

R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved

road
R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed
bump or pothole
R a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension

components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged
in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no
longer absorb the resulting force as intended.

If the underbody panelling is damaged, flammable materials such as

leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the
underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into con‐
tact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a quali‐

fied specialist workshop.

or

# If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull

over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention
to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified special‐
ist workshop.

111

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Operating safety

The components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked

& DANGER with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electri‐
Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged compo‐ cal system are orange.
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high
voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-
board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may
be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components
may cause a fire.

In the event of an accident or impact to the underbody, components of

the high-voltage on-board electrical system may be damaged although Example
the damage is not visible.
High-voltage components that can become very hot are marked with a sepa‐
# Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board rate warning sticker:
electrical system.

# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-

board electrical system components have been modified or
damaged.

# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-

board electrical system.

# After an accident, do not touch any components of the high- Vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise than vehicles
voltage on-board electrical system. with combustion engines.

# After an accident, have the vehicle transported away. When you drive in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other road
users owing to the significantly reduced operating noise.
# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electri‐
cal system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which
replaced if necessary. serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective measure
is prescribed by law.

This exterior noise by the sound generator (AVAS) is audible in the vehicle
interior at low speeds, and is not a malfunction.

112

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Operating safety

VEHICLES WITH A 48 V ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-
voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high
voltage.
Example
If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or
touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the
damage may not be visible.

# Never perform modifications to component parts of high-volt‐

age components.

# Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage com‐

ponents.

# Never touch component parts of high-voltage components

after an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage compo‐

nents. These components are marked with a high-voltage label:

113

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Mounting the licence plate onto the front licence plate bracket

Mounting the licence plate onto the front licence plate bracket

The information label can be found on the licence plate bracket, either
embossed or in sticker form.

* NOTE
Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the
licence plate on the front licence plate holder
If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate
holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction
or fail.

Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the
front licence plate holder:

# Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder

without advertising media or other holders.

# Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above

or to the side of the licence plate adapter.

114

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Declarations of conformity and country-specific information

Declarations of conformity and country-specific information

Electromagnetic compatibility The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle
and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been vehicle:
checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation
The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless com‐
UN-R 10.
ponents installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full
texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web
Country-specific information for regulatory address:

radio components https://certificates-of-conformity.corpinter.net/en

INFORMATION REGARDING MODIFICATIONS TO RADIO COMPONENTS

Modifications to radio components may invalidate the general operating per‐
mit for the radio component in question. The radio component manufacturer
shall accept no responsibility for such modifications.
You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
INFORMATION REGARDING CROSSING NATIONAL BORDERS
You must observe the radio regulatory provisions for the country in which you FOR ISRAEL ONLY:
are currently driving when operating the vehicle. It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component
that could affect the wireless specifications of the device, including software
WIRELESS VEHICLE COMPONENTS changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect
Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that recognize the EU manu‐ the device to an external antenna, without first obtaining approval from the
facturer's declaration of conformity: Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.

FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:

115

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Declarations of conformity and country-specific information

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle FOR NIGERIA ONLY:
and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the
vehicle:

The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment
installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory require‐
ments. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the
following web address:

https://certificates-of-conformity.corpinter.net/en
Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is
permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

FOR COUNTRIES OF THE EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION ONLY:

FOR BRAZIL ONLY:

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby
cause interference in properly approved systems. declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the
technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information
FOR JAMAICA ONLY: from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.
FOR UKRAINE ONLY:

The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby

declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the

116

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Declarations of conformity and country-specific information

technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information The manufacturer of the TIREFIT KIT guarantees that the TIREFIT KIT complies
from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. with the guideline 2014/30/EU. A complete text of the EU Declaration of
Conformity can be obtained by visiting the following website:

Battery https://certificates-of-conformity.corpinter.net/en

FOR EU COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNISE THE EU MANU‐

FACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:

You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:

For all 48 V and high-voltage batteries in the vehicle, once the applicable
requirements under regulation (EU) 2023/1542 come into effect, the required
information will be available at the following web address:

https://certificates-of-conformity.corpinter.net/en
The following information applies for the TIREFIT KIT:

The manufacturer of the TIREFIT KIT guarantees that the TIREFIT KIT complies
with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016. A complete text of
the UKCA Declaration of Conformity can be obtained by visiting the following
website:

TIREFIT kit https://certificates-of-conformity.corpinter.net/en

ONLY FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNISE

THE EU MANUFACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:

The following information applies for the TIREFIT kit:

117

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Diagnostics connection

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used,

for example, in the context of repair and maintenance work or for reading out & WARNING
vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
be connected in a qualified specialist workshop. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.

& WARNING This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics
connection # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the into the driver's footwell.
function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the
# For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and con‐ pedals.
nect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre. # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
top of one another.

118

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Diagnostics connection

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to

* NOTE emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to
Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnos‐ the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection
tics connection during the main inspection.
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

# Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a

considerable distance.

Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance
trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 336).

CONNECTING AND USING ANOTHER DEVICE WITH THE DIAGNOSTICS

CONNECTION CAN HAVE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:

R Malfunctions in the vehicle system

R Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

119

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Qualified specialist workshop

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This
particularly applies to safety-critical work.

ALWAYS HAVE THE FOLLOWING WORK CARRIED OUT ON YOUR VEHICLE

AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP:

R Safety-critical work
R Service and maintenance work
R Repair work
R Modifications as well as installations and conversions
R Work on electronic components
R Plug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system
R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-volt‐
age component of the 48 V on-board electrical system

Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service centre.

120

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Vehicle registration

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections
on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result
of the inspection.

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz

has your registration data.

IT IS POSSIBLE THAT YOUR VEHICLE HAS NOT YET BEEN REGISTERED IN

YOUR NAME IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.

R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or

vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for
example.

121

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Correct use of the vehicle

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise
certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IN PARTICULAR WHEN DRIV‐

ING YOUR VEHICLE:

R the safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements

and further supplementary documents
R technical data for the vehicle
R Traffic rules and ‑regulations of the country you are currently in
R Motor vehicle laws and safety standards of the country you are currently
in
R Radio regulatory requirements of the country you are currently in

122

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes REACH regulation

REACH regulation

For EU and EFTA countries only:

The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a
duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).

Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs

from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances.
According to supplier information and internal product information, there are
SVHCs known to Mercedes‑Benz AG that are found in individual components
of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

FURTHER INFORMATION CAN BE OBTAINED AT THE FOLLOWING

ADDRESSES:

R https://reach.mercedes-benz.com/de/home/
R https://reach.mercedes-benz.com/en/home/

123

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Despite meticulous development of their vehicle systems, Mercedes‑Benz AG This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public
cannot completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic charging point, forexample.
medical aids, suchas cardiac pacemakers. R vehicle components carrying live voltage
In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that can generate This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, forexam‐
magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets, regardless of the operating ple.
status of the vehicle. These fields may occur in the area around the multime‐
ALWAYS HAVE REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE WORK IN THE AREA OF THE
dia system and sound system, forexample, or in the area around the seats,
FOLLOWING COMPONENTS CARRIED OUT AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST
depending on the respective vehicle equipment.
WORKSHOP:
IN SOME CASES, THIS COULD RESULT IN THE FOLLOWING, DEPENDING
R vehicle components carrying live voltage
ON THE AIDS USED:
R transmission aerials
R Medical aids malfunctioning R multimedia system and sound system
R Adverse health effects
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if
in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is con‐
tinuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning,
Mercedes‑Benz AG recommends using fewer electrical vehicle systems and/or
maintaining a distance from the components.

Plug-in hybrid

WHEN CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY, KEEP A DISTANCE OF AT

LEAST AN ARM'S LENGTH BETWEEN THE MEDICAL AID AND THE FOLLOW‐
ING COMPONENTS:

R the power supply equipment

124

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Implied warranty

Implied warranty

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating
instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating
instructions.

This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied war‐

ranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

# Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on

proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle
damage.

125

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes QR code for rescue card

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the
B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to
quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the
routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

You can find further information at: https://rk.mb-qr.com/de/

126

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Data storage

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle LEGAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING THE DISCLOSURE OF DATA
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are generally obliged to provide
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS the authorities with data stored by the manufacturer upon request and to the
Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data extent required. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a
they receive, generate themselves or exchange with each other, forexample criminal offence.
from vehicle sensors. Some control units are required for the safe operation of
State authorities are themselves authorised to read out data from the vehicle
your vehicle. For example, some assist you when driving, suchas driver assis‐
in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework. In the case of an
tance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.
accident, information that can help with an investigation can be taken from the
The following section provides general information about data processing in airbag control unit, forexample.
the vehicle. Additional information regarding which vehicle data is collected,
OPERATIONAL DATA IN THE VEHICLE
saved and transmitted to third parties and for what purpose can be found in
To operate the vehicle, control units process data.
the information directly related to the relevant functional characteristics in the
respective Owner's Manual. This information is available online and digitally, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING DATA, FOREXAMPLE:
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
R Vehicle status information suchas the speed, longitudinal acceleration,
PERSONAL DATA lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat
A unique vehicle identification number identifies every vehicle. Depending on belts display
the country, this vehicle identification number can also be used to determine
R Ambient conditions, suchas temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor
the identity of the vehicle keeper, e.g.by the authorities. There are also other
ways of tracing data collected from the vehicle back to the keeper or driver,
suchas the license plate number. Generally, this data is volatile and will not be stored beyond the period of
operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units,
The data generated or processed by control units may therefore be attributa‐ forexample, vehicle keys, often contain data memories. Their use permits the
ble to a person or, in certain circumstance, become attributable to a person. temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the
Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and
inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, location, route or use technical events or faults.
patterns.

127

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Data storage

DEPENDING ON THE TECHNICAL EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your
STORED: request as part of repair or maintenance work.

R Operating status of system components, suchas fill levels, tyre pressure CONVENIENCE AND INFOTAINMENT FUNCTIONS
or battery status You can store the vehicle's convenience and individual settings and change or
R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, suchas lights or reset them at any time.
brakes
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOW‐
R System reactions in special driving situations, suchas an airbag deploy‐ ING SETTINGS, FOREXAMPLE:
ment or the intervention of stability control systems
R Information on events leading to vehicle damage R Seat and steering wheel positions
R Suspension tuning and climate control settings
In certain cases, storing data that would have otherwise been temporary may R Individual settings, suchas interior lighting
be required. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction,
forexample. Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle info‐
tainment functions yourself.
If you make use of services, e.g.repair services, maintenance work,– the stored
operating data can be read out and used together with the vehicle identifica‐ DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOW‐
tion number – if necessary. Service network employees suchas workshops and ING DATA, FOREXAMPLE:
manufacturers, and third parties suchas breakdown services can read out the
data. The same is true in the event of warranty claims and quality assurance R Multimedia data, suchas music, films or photos for playback in an inte‐
measures. grated multimedia system
R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free
In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the
system or an integrated navigation system
diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The selected operating data document
the vehicle's or individual components' technical conditions, help with fault R Entered navigation destinations
diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. R Data about the use of Internet services
To that end, these data, particularly information about component loads,
technical events, malfunctions and other faults, may be transmitted to the
This data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in
manufacturer along with the vehicle identification number. Furthermore, the
the vehicle or on a device connected to the vehicle, suchas a smartphone,
manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer
USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered this data yourself, you can
also uses operational data from the vehicle, e.g. for recalls. This data can also
delete it at any time.
be used to review the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.

128

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Data storage

This data is transmitted only from the vehicle to third parties at your request. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
This applies in particular when you use online services per your selected Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are
settings. described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's
Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection
SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION (E.G. ANDROID AUTO OR APPLE CARPLAY®) information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of
If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can connect your smartphone or online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, suchas the man‐
another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them using ufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected,
the control elements integrated into the vehicle. Images and audio from the processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so
smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for
is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when
of integration, thisincludes position data, day/night mode and other general consent has been given.
vehicle statuses. For more information, please consult the vehicle Owner's
Manual/infotainment system. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, acti‐
vated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services,
This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, suchas naviga‐ suchas an emergency call system.
tion or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smart‐
phone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The THIRD PARTY SERVICES
type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services
being used. The settings you can make, if any, depend on the specific app and are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's
your smartphone's operating system. data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac‐
turer has no influence on the content exchanged.

Online services For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the
service provider in question for information about the type, extent and pur‐
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION pose of the collection and use of personal data.
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be
exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network
connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or Data protection rights
by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample,
a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connec‐ Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your
tion. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are enti‐
the manufacturer or by other providers. tled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection
and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's
website or you will receive this information as part of the various services

129

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Data storage

and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the
manufacturer and its data protection officers.

At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a

fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

130

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
General notes Copyright

Copyright

FREE AND OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE

Information pertaining to licences for free and Open Source Software applica‐
ble for your vehicle, including updates, can be obtained online at:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Back to Contents131

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety

Occupant safety
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Brief overview of most important points 133

Information on the automatic functions of

141
the restraint system

Purpose and function of the restraint sys‐

145
tem

Seat belts 152

Airbags 153

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

Brief overview of most important points

Basic information R Keyword search: You can also find specific topics using the search field
in the Digital Owner's Manual.
IN PARTICULAR ENSURE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO ENABLE THE
COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO UNFOLD THEIR PROTEC‐ INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING SUBJECTS, AMONG OTHERS, IS NOT
TIVE POTENTIAL: PROVIDED IN THE CHAPTER "OCCUPANT SAFETY":
R Sit correctly (/ page 134). R Children in the vehicle (/ page 155)
R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 135). R Driving and driving safety systems (/ page 416)
- Function of the ü seat belt warning lamp (/ page 137). R Stowage areas (/ page 251)
- Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 137).
DEFINING GENERIC TERMS CLEARLY
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp has gone out after the self-test
(/ page 136). IN THIS OWNER'S MANUAL, THE FOLLOWING GENERIC TERMS ARE USED:

R The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of R Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions
the front passenger airbag (/ page 138). which help to minimise, as much as possible, the stresses on and conse‐
quences for vehicle occupants during an accident.
FOR CLEAR UNDERSTANDING
R Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the
The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions
vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially com‐
and behaviours that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.
ing into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and
THE INFORMATION IS STRUCTURED AS FOLLOWS: airbags, for example, are components of the restraint system.
R Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in
R The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provi‐ the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 155).
ded with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system
and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occupants. BE DILIGENT
R Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of
safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and func‐ protection, it is essential that your posture is correct and that the seat belt is
tions of the restraint system. correctly fastened.

133

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

Please bear in mind that carelessness regarding the seating position and put‐ IN ORDER FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED
ting on the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make LEVEL OF PROTECTION, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their
seat belts properly before starting every journey (/ page 134). R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly (/ page 223).
When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet
Information on the correct seat position over the centre of your shoulder.
R Keep your distance from the airbags, especially the front airbags. Set
The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint
the driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while
system to provide the intended level of protection.
making sure the seat belt is fastened correctly.
The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and R If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should main‐
the additional protection provided by the airbag. tain an sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of
them.
A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly perfectly upright and a
R Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle
correctly fastened seat belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it is
occupants and an airbag.
deployed.
R If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct
Keep in mind space considerations when choosing a seat. With the seat in the position of the driver's seat (/ page 223).
correct, nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof. Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the
driver's airbag to fully deploy.
WARNING R Assume a nearly upright sitting posture, with your buttocks positioned as
&
Risk of injury‑ or death due to an incorrect seat position far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and the seat
backrest.
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot provide
its intended protective function. Your back must lie as flatly and as firmly as possible against the seat
backrest.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following. R While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door
or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the
# Put the seat in the correct position.
airbags.
# Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly
supported by the seat cushion.
# Observe the following information.
Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other‐
wise be in the deployment area of the airbag.

134

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

R Fasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 135). EACH VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES IN
PARTICULAR:

Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly R The seat belt must not be twisted.
R The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can over the centre of your shoulder.
only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. R The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed
under your arm or behind your back.
& WARNING R The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible.
Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt
protective function. across your abdomen.
R After being tightened, the shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries,
against the body.
for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing
direction suddenly.
R Particularly during pregnancy, the instructions for wearing the seat belt
correctly must be followed consistently due to the change in stature.
# Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts The shoulder strap should run along the side of the abdomen.
fastened correctly and are sitting properly. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile
objects.
& WARNING R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used
used for persons with a smaller stature by one of the vehicle's occupants.
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a
suitable additional restraint system. person and the seat.
# Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint
system. If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the
chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 155)

Observe the following information on the correct seat position and posture Observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, lug‐
(/ page 134). gage or loads (/ page 251).

135

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

Fastening and adjusting seat belts * NOTE

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front
seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue
of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side,
e.g. the seat belt tensioner.

# Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

Function of the restraint system warning lamp

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few
# Always engage seat belt tongue 1 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system
2 of the corresponding seat. are then functional.
# To adjust the seat belt height: press button 3 on the seat belt outlet A MALFUNCTION HAS OCCURRED IN THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM IF:
and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
R the restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up or is lit contin‐
# To engage the seat belt outlet: release button 3 and ensure that the uously when the vehicle is switched on
seat belt outlet engages. R the restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up continuously or repeat‐
edly during a journey

If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the 6 restraint

system warning lamp lights up continuously.

136

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

& WARNING
Function of the seat belt warning lamp
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system The seat belt warning lamp ü on the driver's display is a reminder that the
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
not deploy as intended in an accident.
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts correctly (/ page 135).
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop. In addition, a warning tone may sound.

When the driver and the front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt
Plug-in hybrid: if the restraint system is malfunctioning, the automatic high- warning goes out.
voltage emergency shut-off may not function.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to malfunctioning automatic high-voltage NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
emergency shutoff
In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system
may not be deactivated as intended.

You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged compo‐
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system.

# Have the automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff checked

and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The colour of the symbol is intended to help you quickly identify the status of
# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately. the rear seat belt.

The rear seat belt status display in the driver display is a reminder that all
vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop. Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs
you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

137

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

POSSIBLE COLOUR OF THE SYMBOL: If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is installed
on it, make sure both before and during the journey that the status of the front
R Grey: the rear seat belt is not fastened. passenger airbag is correct for the situation.
R Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt
buckle of the displayed seat.
& WARNING
R Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt.
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
front passenger seat
If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again. function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
system.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
# Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐ # When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no
tor lamps (front passenger airbag) objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
seat.

Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON
and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds.

AFTER THE SELF-TEST, YOU CAN DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG AS FOLLOWS:

R Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up

continuously.
The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an
accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special passenger seat.
sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger
(/ page 160). seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

The indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG display the status of the front
passenger airbag.

138

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

R Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for

up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF & WARNING
indicator lamps go out. Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG
front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint OFF indicator lamp is lit.
system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too
close to the cockpit.
% If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the informa‐
tion in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 155). IF THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT IS OCCUPIED, ALWAYS ENSURE
THAT:

R the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is

correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
R the person is seated correctly.

# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of
the front passenger airbag is correct.

MALFUNCTION OF THE AUTOMATIC FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DEACTI‐

VATION
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system
warning lamp light up simultaneously.

In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint
system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.

Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

139

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

Disabling or enabling the front passenger air‐

bag
The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front
passenger airbag according to the situation.

This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or

child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger airbag.

Information on the child restraint system

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the
vehicle" (/ page 155).

NOTES ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER

SEAT

& WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be
struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

# NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat

with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the CHILD can occur.

Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing

child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 161).

140

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Function of the automatic front passenger

airbag shutoff
A PERSON ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT MUST OBSERVE THE FOL‐
LOWING INSTRUCTIONS:

R Sit correctly (/ page 134).

R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 135).

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front
passenger airbag according to the situation.
STATUS OF THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG IN RELATION TO THE STAT‐
MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: URE OF THE PERSON:
R The status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the R Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps"(/ page 138). continuously.
R When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an
the vehicle-specific information (/ page 161). accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front
passenger seat.
R Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF
indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. Observe
the following information on the correct seat position (/ page 134).
Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear
seat.

141

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

SYSTEM LIMITS
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG MAY OTHERWISE BE DISABLED BY MIS‐
TAKE, E.G. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATION: protection)
R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement
a vehicle armrest. pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
R The front passenger sits in such a way that they unload the seat surface.
PRE-SAFE® CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDEPEND‐
ENTLY OF EACH OTHER:

* NOTE R tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front R closing the side windows.
passenger seat is unoccupied R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
IN AN ACCIDENT, THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a
MAY DEPLOY UNNECESSARILY ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SIDE IF: more favourable seat position.
R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by
inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the
front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on,
generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mecha‐
# Stow objects in a suitable place. nism of a person's hearing.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

* NOTE
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to
front passenger seat is occupied. the seat and/or the object.

# Stow objects in a suitable place.

142

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM WILL NOT INITIATE ANY ACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are TIONS:
reversed.
R when reversing
You will need to perform certain settings yourself. or
R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact
# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest
slightly backwards.
The seat belt pre-tensioning releases. THE SYSTEM WILL NOT INITIATE ANY BRAKING APPLICATION IN THE
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory R whilst driving

or
occupant protection Plus) R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear Assist
impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDE‐

PENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER:
Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
R tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emp‐
tively move the upper body of the vehicle occupant in the front seat towards
R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency.
the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact
application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle
occupant.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are
If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the following dis‐
reversed.
play message appears: PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual .

143

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Seat belt adjustment function R Shutting off the fuel supply

R Plug-in hybrid: shutting off the hybrid drive system and high-voltage
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front on-board electrical system
seat, it may snug up by pulling at the shoulder until somewhat tight. Do not R unlocking the vehicle doors
hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. R lowering the side windows
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the R displaying the emergency guide on the central display (/ page 671)
multimedia system (/ page 144). R switching on the interior lighting

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment Function of the post-collision brake after an

via the multimedia system accident
Multimedia system: Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection severity of a further collision or even avoid it.
# Activate or deactivate Seat belt adjustment. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic brak‐
ing. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is
automatically applied.
Overview of the automatic measures after an
accident THE DRIVER CAN CANCEL AUTOMATIC BRAKING BY TAKING THE FOLLOW‐
ING ACTIONS:
DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND SEVERITY OF THE ACCIDENT, AND
R braking more strongly than automatic braking
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES
CAN BE IMPLEMENTED, FOR EXAMPLE: R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force

R automatic braking (post-collision brake) (/ page 144)

R activating the hazard warning lights
R triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 80)
R switching off the engine
To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and back on
(/ page 329). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, the
vehicle might no longer start.

144

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

Purpose and function of the restraint system

Overview of deployment situations (restraint R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact
system)
R

IN PARTICULAR ENSURE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS TO ENABLE THE The installation location of an airbag is identified by the symbol AIRBAG
COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO DEPLOY THEIR PROTEC‐ (/ page 153).
TIVE POTENTIAL:
Observe the information on how the restraint system works (/ page 145).
R Seat correctly (/ page 134).
R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 135).
- Function of the seat belt warning lamp (/ page 137).
Information on how the restraint system
- Function of the rear seat belt status display (/ page 137). works
R The restraint system warning lamp 6 does not light up after the The function of the restraint system depends on the severity of the impact
self-check (/ page 136). detected and the apparent type of accident.
R The indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG display the correct status of
the front passenger airbag (/ page 138). For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment
situations" (/ page 145).

DEPENDING ON THE DETECTED DEPLOYMENT SITUATION, THE COMPO‐ The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are
NENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN BE ACTIVATED OR DEPLOYED determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various
INDEPENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER: points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering of
the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the
R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover start of the impact.
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred
R Knee airbag: frontal impact
cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. They also do not provide an
R Side airbag: side impact indication of airbag deployment.
R Centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest: side impact

145

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. IF THE SEAT BELT TENSIONERS ARE TRIGGERED OR AN AIRBAG IS
This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected DEPLOYED, YOU WILL HEAR A BANG, AND A SMALL AMOUNT OF FINE
and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may POWDER MAY ALSO BE RELEASED:
be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If, e.g.
very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in R The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. R In general, the fine powder released is not hazardous to health but may
cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma
Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment sit‐ or other respiratory problems.
uation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the
by a correctly worn seat belt.
window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective
vehicle occupant.
Information on the limited protection provi‐
POTENTIAL PROTECTION PROVIDED BY EACH AIRBAG: ded by the restraint system
R Knee airbag: thighs, knees and lower legs
RISK DUE TO THE INCORRECT BEHAVIOUR OF VEHICLE OCCUPANTS
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN
R Window airbag: head PARTICULAR:
R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants
R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 134).
R Centre airbag: head and ribcage
R Do not stow any heavy, pointed, sharp or fragile objects in the pockets of
clothing items. Stow such objects in a suitable place.
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and
fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag gen‐
erally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the
airbag deploying.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified

specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a
seat belt tensioner has been triggered or an airbag deployed.

146

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have anchorage
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the
moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. seat belt tensioners.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. # Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no
objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
and door.
position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.

& WARNING
RISK DUE TO OBJECTS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR
Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag
EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the
PARTICULAR:
correct deployment of the airbag.
R They observe the information on the correct seat position (/ page 134).
The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even
R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.
or coat hooks.
# Always stow and secure objects correctly.
R Do not stow any heavy, pointed, sharp or fragile objects in the pockets of
clothing items. Stow such objects in a suitable place. # Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects
are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG (/ page 153)

symbol.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

R Notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251)

147

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

R Information on the centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest RISK DUE TO PETS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR
(/ page 153)
& WARNING
RISK DUE TO FITTING ACCESSORIES
Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones
tended in the vehicle
or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on
the door, on the side window or on the side trim. If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could
press buttons or switches, for instance.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must
be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. AN ANIMAL MAY:
Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and,
R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

& WARNING Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of
Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure
vehicle occupants.
Due to unsuitable protective covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle
occupants as they are designed to do. # Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
# You should only use protective covers that have been # Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suit‐
approved for the corresponding seat by Mercedes-Benz. able animal carrier.

In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could
be restricted due to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
correct status of the front passenger airbag (/ page 138).

148

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

RISK DUE TO MODIFICATION, DAMAGE OR WEAR TO THE COMPONENTS

OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM & WARNING
Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

& WARNING SEAT BELTS CANNOT PROVIDE PROTECTION IN THE FOLLOWING

Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system SITUATIONS:
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations R the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty,
are made to the restraint system. bleached or dyed
# Never alter the parts of the restraint system. R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
R modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt
# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component anchorage or seat belt retractor
parts or their software.

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabili‐ glass splinters.
ties, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been accident, for example.
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to func‐
tion as intended.

# Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt,
seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and
seat belt retractor.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and
clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an acci‐

dent at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

149

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

The seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit a dif‐
ferent multipoint seat belt, for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint & WARNING
system cannot provide the intended level of protection. Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or
Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be openings in the seat backrest.
incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are
These openings have no function.
damaged.

# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

& WARNING
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to modified seat belt systems # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a
If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the qualified specialist workshop.
seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an
accident.
RISK DUE TO COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM WHICH HAVE
# Only use the standard three-point seat belt. ALREADY BEEN DEPLOYED
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified
# Never modify the seat belt system. specialist workshop after an accident.

& WARNING
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components
Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to
it, the airbag can no longer function as intended. # Do not touch the airbag parts.

# Never modify the cover of an airbag. # Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist work‐
shop as soon as possible.
# Do not attach any objects to the cover.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol

(/ page 153).

150

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in

order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

& WARNING
Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt ten‐
sioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their intended protective func‐
tion.

# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners

immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

151

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Seat belts

Seat belts

Releasing the seat belts

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt
back with the seat belt tongue.

* NOTE
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in
the door or in the seat mechanism.

# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

152

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Occupant safety Airbags

Airbags

Overview of airbags Information on the centre airbag in the driv‐

er's seat backrest
When triggered, the centre airbag deploys between the front seats. Do not
stow any objects in the deployment area of the centre airbag.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251).

1 Knee airbag
2 Driver's airbag
3 Front passenger airbag
4 Window airbag
5 Side airbag
6 Centre airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the symbol AIRBAG.
An additional arrow symbol M indicates the installation location for certain
airbags.

Observe the information in "Overview of deployment situations"

(/ page 145).

Back to Contents153

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle

Children in the vehicle

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Key facts in brief 155

Important safety notes 157

Suitable child restraint systems for the

164
transport of children

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint

169
systems

Securing the child restraint system 173

Child safety locks 178

Occupant presence reminder 182

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Key facts in brief

Key facts in brief

Safely transporting children in the vehicle LEFT/RIGHT REAR SEAT (PREFERRED SEATS)
PREFERRED FASTENING SYSTEM:

® ISOFIX mounting brackets (/ page 169)

° or i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 170)

¯ and additionally fasten Top Tether if available (/ page 176).

ALTERNATIVE ATTACHMENT SYSTEM:

7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 177)

¯ Additionally fasten Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN TRANSPORTING CHILDREN: of the child restraint system (/ page 176).

R Never leave children unattended in the vehicle (/ page 158).

The following child restraint systems of the Universal category are approved:
R Secure children younger than twelve or of a height up to 1.50 m on U, UF, i-U, IUF. Please see the other alternatives for use (/ page 169).
the seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved
child restraint system (/ page 164) and secure small children in a FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
rearward-facing child restraint system. FASTENING SYSTEM:
R Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc‐
tions. 7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 177)

155

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Key facts in brief

BE SURE TO OBSERVE:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the
front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 138).

The following child restraint systems of the Universal category are approved:
U(*), UF. Please see the other alternatives for use (/ page 170).

(*) rearward-facing child restraint systems only in conjunction with automatic

airbag shutoff

REAR CENTRE SEAT

FASTENING SYSTEM:

7 Vehicle seat belt (/ page 177)

The following belt-secured child restraint systems of the Universal category

are approved: U, UF. Please see the other alternatives for use (/ page 170).

156

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

Important safety notes

Basic information THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS USED IN THIS OWN‐
BE DILIGENT ER'S MANUAL. A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS, FOR EXAMPLE:
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint
system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child R a baby car seat
carefully before every journey. R a rearward-facing child seat
R a forward-facing child seat
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle
occupant. R a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster
seat with a seat backrest and seat belt guide.
TO IMPROVE PROTECTION FOR CHILDREN YOUNGER THAN
TWELVE YEARS OR UNDER 1.50 M IN HEIGHT, MERCEDES-BENZ OBSERVE LAWS AND LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
URGENTLY RECOMMENDS THAT YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING: Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in
the vehicle.
R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this
Mercedes-Benz vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the
valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained
R The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and
at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
size of the child.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be
fitted: SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS IN THE VEHICLE
- ISOFIX mounting bracket: (/ page 169) ONLY USE THE FOLLOWING SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT
- i‑Size mounting bracket: (/ page 170) SYSTEMS:

- Securing with the vehicle seat belt: (/ page 170) R the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting bracket
R the vehicle's seat belt system
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally R the Top Tether anchorages
safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz
strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.

157

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

Simply attaching to the ISOFIX mounting brackets or i‑Size mounting brackets - Fitting an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system on the rear seat
on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incor‐ (/ page 174).
rectly. - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
(/ page 177).
When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size
child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross mass for the R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child
child and child restraint system (/ page 174). restraint system.

Important warning stickers & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in
ALWAYS SECURE A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CORRECTLY
the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can
& WARNING become detached.
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child
restraint system The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended.
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.
The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike
# Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instruc‐ vehicle occupants.
tions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
# Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instruc‐
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system tions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child transported unused in the vehicle.
restraint system.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover

designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

R Always observe the vehicle-specific information.

158

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

DO NOT MODIFY THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM AVOID DIRECT SUNLIGHT

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts
an increased risk of injury. could heat up.

# Never modify a child restraint system. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic
parts of the child restraint system.
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved
for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not
manufacturer. exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.

ONLY USE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE IN PROPER WORKING
CONDITION
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sun‐
light, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.

& WARNING # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child
restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been sub‐ OBSERVE WHEN STOPPING OR PARKING
jected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their inten‐
ded protective function. & WARNING
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. vehicle
# Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
been damaged or involved in an accident. intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems

# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a vehicle.
child restraint system again.

159

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

& WARNING
Overview of warning sticker in the vehicle
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY
CAN BE EXPECTED IN PARTICULAR TO

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLE BY:
1 Front passenger airbag warning (on the front passenger sun visor)
R releasing the parking brake. (/ page 161)
R changing the drive range. 2 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff warning (visible
R starting the vehicle. when the front passenger door is open) (/ page 163)

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

NOTES FOR VEHICLES WITH THE MBUX INTERIOR ASSISTANT
ALSO NOTE THE ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF THE MBUX INTERIOR ASSIS‐
TANT:

R If the child restraint system is not fastened, a corresponding message

appears in the driver display (/ page 583).

160

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

Notes on rear-facing and front-facing child IF IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYS‐
TEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOW‐
restraint systems on the front passenger seat ING INFORMATION:

R the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 140).

& WARNING R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front
Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint
passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled.
system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the continuously (/ page 138).
front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp R The front passenger airbag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG
is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be
The child could be struck by the airbag. deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing
child restraint systems.
# Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Information on the automatic front passenger
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
airbag shut-off
#

with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH

of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the
journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current
Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing situation.
child restraint systems (/ page 173).

Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor

161

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint
and the child restraint system system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the
affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff. front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
# Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system. The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is # Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The
always resting on the seat surface of the co-driver seat. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat
as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co- with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH
driver seat. of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

# It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manu‐

facturer's installation instructions.
% The front passenger airbag is enabled depending on the child
restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER
When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
vehicle-specific information (/ page 161). The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident.
If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing
REARWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat.
PASSENGER SEAT Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suita‐
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, ble rear seat.
the front passenger airbag must be deactivated. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp must light up continuously (/ page 138).
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT
PASSENGER SEAT
If a forward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The
status of the front passenger airbag depends on the child restraint system and
the stature of the child.

162

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Important safety notes

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously, or it is
not lit (/ page 138). Always observe the following information.
Notes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger airbag deactivation
& WARNING (/ page 160)Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child a special sticker which is visible when the front passenger door is opened.
restraint system
MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
IF YOU SECURE A CHILD IN A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM ON THE CO-DRIVER SEAT AND YOU POSITION THE CO- R Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger
DRIVER SEAT TOO CLOSE TO THE DASHBOARD, IN THE EVENT OF seat.
AN ACCIDENT, THE CHILD COULD:
R Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
R come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR R Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example the front passenger seat (/ page 161)
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off

# Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In

doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the
shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder
belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the
seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the co-driver seat accordingly.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's

installation instructions.

163

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

Information on the advantage of a rearward- R Authorisation number

Child restraint system size class
facing child restraint system
R

Approval categories under UN-R44

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It
is also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child
restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the
direction of travel and faces backwards.

Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to
the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during
an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Approval categories for child restraint sys‐

tems
ONLY CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING UNECE Example of an approval label
STANDARDS ARE PERMITTED FOR USE IN THE VEHICLE: R Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are
approved for installation in vehicles. Following overviews of the suitabil‐
R UN-R44 ity of seats for securing child restraint systems, they can be used on
R UN-R129 seats labelled U, UF or IUF.
The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint systems
IDENTIFICATION OF THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION, FOREXAMPLE, IS AVAILABLE ON THE secured using Top Tether or support points.
APPROVAL LABEL ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM:
R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category
R Approval category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child
restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
R Child weight group

164

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "Vehicle-specific" cate‐ PLEASE OBSERVE SUITABILITY OF THE VEHICLE SEATS
gory may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the R Suitability of seats for attaching ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint systems
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. (/ page 169)
R Suitability of seats for fastening belt-secured child restraint systems
Approval categories under UN-R129
(/ page 170)

Overview of recommended child restraint

systems
% Further information on the correct child restraint system can
be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
this purpose.

Example of an approval label ATTACHMENT WITH ISOFIX

R i‑Size child restraint systems and booster seats with seat backrest: suit‐ WEIGHT GROUP 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROXIMATELY 15
able for attachment to i‑Size mounting brackets. They can be used on the MONTHS)
seats marked i‑U. Type1 BABY SAFE plus (including base station)
Child restraint systems in this category can also be attached to ISOFIX
Size category E
bars if approved by the child restraint system manufacturer. i‑Size boos‐
ter seats with backrest can be used on seats marked U if the seat is Approval E1 04 301 146
approved for category B2/B3.
R Belted child restraint systems and belted booster seats without seat Order number2 B6 6 86 8224

backrest in the Universal category are suitable for attachment to seats 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95
marked U.
R Vehicle-specific child restraint systems (ISOFIX or belted attachment as
well as child booster seats with and without seat backrest): suitable for
attachment to seats marked i‑U or U if approved by the child restraint
system manufacturer.

165

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4 Type1 Dualfix 3 i-Size

YEARS)
Order number A 000 970 93 02
Type1 DUO plus
Order number A 000 970 73 02
Size category B1
FlexBase iSense

Approval E1 04 301 133 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer

Order number2 A 000 970 43 02

WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95 12 YEARS (KIDFIX M I-SIZE)
Type1 KIDFIX M i-Size
ATTACHMENT WITH I-SIZE (R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS)
WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, SIZE 40 TO 83 CM AND AGE FROM BIRTH TO Size category B2
APPROX. 15 MONTHS
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Type1 Baby Safe 3 i-Size
Order number A 000 970 89 02
Size category R2
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer

Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO
Order number A 000 970 68 02 12 YEARS (AMG KIDFIX M I-SIZE)
Order number A 000 970 73 02 Type1 AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
FlexBase iSense
Size category B2
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer

Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
WEIGHT UP TO 18 KG, SIZE 61 TO 105 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX.
Order number A 000 970 91 02
3 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer
Type1 Dualfix 3 i-Size

Size category F2X/R2

Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02

166

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

ATTACHMENT WITH THE SEAT BELT OF THE VEHICLE SEAT WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROX. 3 TO
12 YEARS) (KIDFIX XP)
WEIGHT CATEGORY 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND APPROX. 6 MONTHS) AND
WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND APPROX. 15 MONTHS) Type1 KIDFIX XP

Type1 BABY SAFE plus II Approval E1 04 301 304

Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 A 000 970 49 02

Order number2 A 000 970 38 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROX. 3 TO
12 YEARS) (AMG KIDFIX XP)
R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, SIZE 40 TO 83
CM AND AGE FROM BIRTH TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS) Type1 AMG KIDFIX XP

Type1 Baby Safe 3 i-Size Approval E1 04 301 304

Size category R2 Order number2 A 000 970 33 02

Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

Order number A 000 970 68 02

R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO 12 YEARS) (KIDFIX M I-SIZE)
Type1 KIDFIX M i-Size
WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4
YEARS) Size category B2

Type1 DUO plus

Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02

Approval E1 04 301 133 Order number A 000 970 89 02

Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer 2 with colour code 9H95

167

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT 15 TO 36 KG, SIZE 100 TO

150 CM AND AGE FROM APPROX. 3.5 TO 12 YEARS) (AMG KIDFIX M I-SIZE)
Type1 AMG KIDFIX M i-Size

Size category B2

Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02

Order number A 000 970 91 02

1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer

168

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

Overview of suitability of the seats for attach‐ WEIGHT GROUP 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND UP TO APPROXIMATELY 6 MONTHS)

ing ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint systems Size class –

Equipment
Left/right rear seat

ISOFIX IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY

E – ISO/R1 IL
DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the
® The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems",

restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 164). or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint
system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance WEIGHT GROUP 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROXIMATELY 15
with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables. MONTHS)
Size class – Left/right rear seat
CARRY COT Equipment

Size class – Left/right rear seat E – ISO/R1 IL

Equipment
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
F – ISO/L1 X
C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
G – ISO/L2 X
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child
group and/or size class. restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the
highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the
child restraint system.

169

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

WEIGHT GROUP 1 (9–18 KG AND APPROXIMATELY 9 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS) LEFT AND RIGHT REAR SEAT
Size class – Left/right rear seat i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ i‑U
Equipment F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)

i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
D – ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL

C – ISO/R3 IL (1) FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

B – ISO/F2 IUF i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ X
F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
B1 – ISO/F2X IUF
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

A – ISO/F3 IUF

Overview on the suitability of seats for fas‐

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the
recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child

tening belt-secured child restraint systems

restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in
this weight group.
Suitability of seats for fastening belt-secured child restraint systems
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the
highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the
child restraint system.
REAR SEATS
Weight category 0: to 10 kg

Overview of suitability of the seats for attach‐ Left/right rear seat U, L

ing i‑Size child restraint systems Rear centre seat1 U, L

Weight category 0+: to 13 kg

I‑SIZE IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY
DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS. Left/right rear seat U, L

° i‑Size child restraint systems can be attached to a seat with the Rear centre seat1 U, L
i‑Size marking (/ page 164).
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg

Child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with the

Left/right rear seat U, L
following i‑Size table may be attached.
Rear centre seat1 U, L

170

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 138).
Left/right rear seat U, L
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
Rear centre seat1 U, L
Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
Left/right rear seat U, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Rear centre seat1 U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
UN-R129 child restraint systems
Front passenger airbag enabled1 X
Left/right rear seat U, L, B2, B3
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Rear centre seat1 U, L, B2, B3
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
1 Child restraint systems with a support leg are not suitable for
this seat. Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
this weight category.

Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to
the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehi‐ UF, L
Front passenger airbag enabled1
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufactur‐
er's vehicle model list.
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint systems com‐

Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
plying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child seat cushion test equipment.

Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L

NOTES ON CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
R If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L

the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child

UN-R129 child restraint systems
restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 161).
R Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward- Front passenger airbag enabled1 UF, L, B2, B3
facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied,
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L, B2, B3

171

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the
seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the
seat cushion is in the lowest position.

2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag

deactivation. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be
on.

X Not suitable for children in this weight category.

U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in

this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to

the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehi‐
cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufactur‐
er's vehicle model list.

UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Uni‐

versal" category in this weight category.

B2, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint systems com‐

plying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child seat cushion test equipment.

172

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system

Securing the child restraint system

Adjusting the seat correctly removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it
correctly.
WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE LEFT OR RIGHT # The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof
REAR SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where
# Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
move the front seat slightly forwards.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is
If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended not put under strain by the head restraint.
when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maxi‐
mum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint 7 WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO
system manufacturer's installation instructions. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
# When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat:
adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
% Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended
and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. # When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated
child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that
®° ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING AN ISOFIX OR it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the
I‑SIZE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM: respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the seat backrest
of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the
# When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat:
backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been
adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it
# When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated correctly.
child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that # The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as
it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the
possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the seat backrest
of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the
backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been

173

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system

# The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder
possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where
possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is
not put under strain by the head restraint. # Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.

# Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, # Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat
move the front seat slightly forwards. cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion
is in the lowest position.
7 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE
FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM # Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT:
# Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 161). Fitting an ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child
# When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child restraint system
seat belt: remove the head restraint from the front passenger seat, if
possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately WARNING
&
replace the head restraint and adjust it correctly. Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far are not engaged
as possible, be resting against the seat backrest of the front passenger The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
seat. even while the vehicle is in motion.

# The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
intended and could cause additional injury.
# Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be
not put under strain by the head restraint.
restrained by the seat backrest.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
system.
backrest are engaged before every trip.
# Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat
into the highest position if possible. Always make sure that the shoulder

174

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock ° i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 170)
verification indicator will be visible.

& WARNING
Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child
and child restraint system together is exceeded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an
accident, for example.

# If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint

system with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child
and child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.

1 ISOFIX mounting bracket

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ON THE MASS OF THE CHILD 2 i‑Size mounting brackets
RESTRAINT SYSTEM:
Before every journey always ensure that the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint sys‐
R in the installation instructions and Owner's Manual provided by the man‐ tem or the i‑Size child restraint system is engaged in both mounting brackets
ufacturer of the child restraint system used on the vehicle.
R on a label on the child restraint system, if present
* NOTE
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of
system is still being adhered to. the child restraint system
WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOL‐ # Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.
LOWING:

O Always observe the area of use and the suitability of the seats for # Fold back the covers 1 or 2.
attaching a child restraint system.
# Attach the ISOFIX/LATCH or i‑Size child restraint system to both mount‐
® ISOFIX mounting brackets (/ page 169) ing brackets in the vehicle.

or

175

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system

Fastening a Top Tether

& WARNING
Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked
after Top Tether belts are fitted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.

As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform

their intended protective function. This may also cause additional inju‐
ries.
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 235).
# Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.

# Observe the lock verification indicator.

# Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.

# Fit the ISOFIX/LATCH or i‑Size child restraint system with Top Tether.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation
verification indicator will be visible. instructions.
¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:

The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables
an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with
ISOFIX or i‑Size and the vehicle.

# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head
restraint bars.

# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchor‐
age 3 without twisting.

176

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system

# Tension Top Tether belt 4. Comply with the child restraint system man‐ # For a child restraint system of the category "Universal" or "Semi-Univer‐
ufacturer's installation instructions. sal" ensure that this is approved for the vehicle seat.

# Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. # Fit the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 downwards (/ page 235). Make sitting surface of the seat.
sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt
4. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child
restraint system.
Fastening the child restraint system with the The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt
seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.

# When fitting on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether, if present
& WARNING (/ page 176).
Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
# When fitting on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat
belt outlet and the front passenger seat appropriately.
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards,
even while the vehicle is in motion.

R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt
with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as
intended and could cause additional injury.
R Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat
backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock
verification indicator will be visible.

177

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Child safety locks

Child safety locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock # Keep the key out of reach of children.

for the rear doors

& WARNING
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
CAN BE EXPECTED IN PARTICULAR TO
# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. vehicle.
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLE BY:

R releasing the parking brake.

R changing the drive range.
R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

178

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Child safety locks

& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle
IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN
PARTICULAR:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are

travelling in the vehicle.
# Press the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow 1 (activate) or 2
(deactivate).
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# Check functionality of the child safety lock.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the
"Notes on the additional door lock" section.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
The child safety locks on the rear doors secure each door separately. The
doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

179

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Child safety locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock & WARNING

for the rear side windows Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
& WARNING
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
Risk of accident– and injury due to children left unattended in the
vehicle # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
WHEN CHILDREN ARE LEFT UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY vehicle.
CAN BE EXPECTED IN PARTICULAR TO

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic. & WARNING
Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
vehicle
IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN
IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN PARTICULAR:
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLE BY:
R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
R releasing the parking brake.
R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
R changing the drive range.
R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.
R starting the vehicle.
# Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. travelling in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
lock the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
# Keep the key out of reach of children. lock the vehicle.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the
"Notes on the additional door lock" section.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

180

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Child safety locks

# To activate/deactivate: press the button 2.

THE REAR SIDE WINDOW CAN BE OPENED OR CLOSED AS FOLLOWS:

R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

R Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear
door or driver's door

181

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Children in the vehicle Occupant presence reminder

Occupant presence reminder

Function of the occupant presence reminder

The occupant presence reminder can help to remind you about a child who
may have been forgotten in the rear compartment of the vehicle. It activates
and deactivates automatically when the rear door is open for an extended
period of time and a child which the system presumes to be present could
enter or exit the vehicle.

When the vehicle is switched off, the Do not leave persons or animals in the
vehicle message appears on the driver's display if the system was already
automatically activated.

You can permanently deactivate the function in the multimedia system

(/ page 182). When the system is deactivated, the p indicator lamp in
the driver's display lights up.

Activating or deactivating the occupant pres‐

ence reminder in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection
# Activate or deactivate the function.

Back to Contents182

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing

Opening and closing

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Key 184 Anti-theft protection 219

Digital Vehicle Key 189

Doors 195

Boot 200

Side windows 207

Sliding sunroof 212

Roller sunblinds 217

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Key

Key

Overview of key functions This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

* NOTE
& WARNING Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the # Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.
vehicle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR

R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: Vehicle key
1 Indicator lamp
R releasing the parking brake. 2 Locking
R change the gearbox setting. 3 Unlocking (with embossed surface)
R start the vehicle. 4 Opens/closes the boot lid
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
% If the indicator lamp 1 does not light up after pressing the
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you button Ü or s, the battery is weak or possibly discharged.
and lock the vehicle. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
# Keep the key out of reach of children.
Replace the key battery (/ page 187).

184

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Key

THE KEY LOCKS AND UNLOCKS THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:

Changing the unlocking settings
R Doors
POSSIBLE UNLOCKING FUNCTIONS OF THE KEY:
R Fuel filler flap
R Socket flap (plug-in hybrid) R central unlocking
R Boot lid R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
R Plug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap/socket flap
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking,
the vehicle is locked again. Anti-theft protection is primed again. # To switch between settings: press the buttons Ü and s simulta‐
neously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes
Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This twice.
could impair the key's functionality.
OPTIONS IF THE UNLOCKING FUNCTION FOR THE DRIVER'S DOOR AND
FUEL FILLER FLAP HAS BEEN SELECTED:
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button Ü twice.
verification signal R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door
handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
Multimedia system: are unlocked.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close
# Switch the Acoustic lock on or off. OPTIONS IF THE UNLOCKING FUNCTION FOR THE DRIVER'S DOOR AND
FUEL FILLER FLAP/SOCKET FLAP HAS BEEN SELECTED (PLUG-IN HYBRID):
% Please observe:
R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button Ü twice.
The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal
must comply with the relevant national road traffic rules. In R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door
some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap/
verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accordance with socket flap are unlocked.
§16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic
regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these
regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbid‐ Deactivating the function of the key
den, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the key, the
activated.
KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorisation via

185

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Key

KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that key. Activate the function of # Press the release knob 1.
the key so that all functions using the key are available once again. The emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
You can also deactivate the key's function to reduce the key's energy con‐ # Fully remove the emergency key 2.
sumption if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time.
INSERTING THE EMERGENCY KEY
# Press and hold the key button s.

# With the button s pressed, immediately press the key button Ü

twice in quick succession.
The indicator lamp of the key lights up once briefly, and then again for
longer.

% YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE

KEY:
# Insert the emergency key 2 up to the marking 3 until it engages.

R Press any button on the key.

% You can use the emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key
R Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage ring.
compartment (/ page 330).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

REMOVING THE EMERGENCY KEY

186

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Key

Replacing the key battery Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 186).

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swal‐
lowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur
within two hours.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

# Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

# If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close # Press the emergency key 2 into the opening in the key in the direction
securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. indicated by the arrow until the cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not
press down on the cover 1.
# If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek
immediate medical attention.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
household rubbish.
# Insert the emergency key 2 into the opening and unclip and remove the
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible
covering 3.
manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. # Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until the battery 4 is ejected
from the key.

Requirements: # Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a
lint-free cloth.
R You need a CR 2032 lithium cell battery (3 V).

187

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Key

# Ensure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
impurities. R shielding due to metallic objects or induction loops for electrical gate
systems or automatic barriers
# Insert the front tabs of the covering 3 into the housing and then press
down on both sides.
# Ensure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the poten‐
# Ensure that the covering 3 is completely closed. tial source of interference.
# Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the housing and then press down YOU HAVE LOST A KEY
until it is completely closed. # Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Insert the emergency key again (/ page 186). # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Troubleshooting problems with the key

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE
POSSIBLE CAUSES:

R The key battery is at low capacity or is flat.

# Check the battery via the indicator lamp (/ page 184).

# Replace the key battery as necessary (/ page 187).

# Use the replacement key.

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 198).

# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE.
POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY IS IMPAIRED:

R high-voltage power lines

R mobile phones

188

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

Digital Vehicle Key

Function of the Digital Vehicle Key R Unlocking and locking the vehicle with the Digital Vehicle Key
(/ page 193)
Once you have activated a compatible, mobile end device as a Digital Vehicle R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key
Key, e.g. a smartphone, this can then be used in the same way as a conven‐ R Troubleshooting problems with the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 194)
tional vehicle key.

Information on setting up a user account and on activating the "Digital Vehicle

Key" service can be obtained by visiting https://www.mercedes.me.
Setting up the Digital Vehicle Key
Requirements:
THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY CAN THEN BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING
FUNCTIONS: R You have set up a Mercedes me user account: https://www.mercedes.me
R Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 196) R A compatible end device with the latest operating system version.
R HANDS-FREE ACCESS function (/ page 203) R The Mercedes-Benz app is installed on the end device (optional).
R Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) (/ page 209) R A Wallet‑app is installed on the end device.

R Anti-theft protection (/ page 219)

R You have received an email from Mercedes-Benz Connect.
If you have selected the "Digital Vehicle Key" equipment, you will receive
R Starting (/ page 329) or switching off (/ page 403) the vehicle
an email with information on how to set up the Digital Vehicle Key.
R Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the NFC function (emergency
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device.
unlocking) (/ page 193)
R The end device is sufficiently charged.
R Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode (/ page 330)

YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP AN END DEVICE

SETTING UP AND MANAGING THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:
AS A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:
R Setting up the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 189)
R using the Mercedes-Benz app
R Managing the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 191) R by email
R Removing the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 192)

189

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

R via MBUX multimedia system # Follow the steps on the end device.
When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:

% The power supply must be switched on to set up the end device.

# Place the end device in the storage compartment (/ page 330).
A key belonging to the vehicle must be detected within the vehi‐
# Follow the steps on the end device.
cle.
Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.

SETTING UP USING THE MERCEDES-BENZ APP or

# Open the Mercedes-Benz app.
# Set up the end device in the vehicle.
# Select the "Digital Vehicle Key" menu.
# Place the end device in the storage compartment (/ page 330).
# Follow the set-up stages in the Mercedes-Benz app. "Mercedes-Benz Digital Vehicle Key" is displayed on the end device.

# Press "Enter code".

When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:
The display for entering the code appears.
# Place the end device in the storage compartment (/ page 330).
# Enter the 8-digit code provided in the email.
# Follow the steps on the end device. When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:
Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.
# Follow the steps on the end device.
SET-UP BY EMAIL
Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.
# Open the email from Mercedes-Benz Connect.
SET-UP VIA MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
# Follow the displayed steps as described in the email. # Select the menus Settings, Vehicle, Open/close in the multimedia system.
Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.
# Select the menu Digital Vehicle Key .
or
# Follow the steps in the multimedia system.
# Open the link in the email with the end device you want to use as a Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in your end device's Wallet‑app.
Digital Vehicle Key.

190

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

SWITCHING EXPRESS MODE OFF OR ON

% You can now use the Digital Vehicle Key in the same way as the # Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.
conventional vehicle key (/ page 193).
# Switch express mode off or on.

% Setting up and managing the Digital Vehicle Key: % Express mode is switched on by default. This setting allows you
R Function (/ page 189)
to make the best possible use of the Digital Vehicle Key.
R To manage (/ page 191) If the express mode is switched off and the rechargeable
R To remove (/ page 192) battery of the end device is at very low capacity, you can no
longer unlock the vehicle via the NFC function.
R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key
Only switch off the express mode if you do not want to use the
Digital Vehicle Key function.

Managing the Digital Vehicle Key SETTING UP OTHER END DEVICES AS DIGITAL VEHICLE KEYS
Requirements: # Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.

R A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. # Select the menu "Invite people to use your Mercedes-Benz key".
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device (with the Digital Vehicle Key # Follow the steps on the end device.
activated).
R The end device is sufficiently charged.
% Mercedes-Benz recommends that the shared key be activated
immediately after sharing by using it on the vehicle.
YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR MANAGING A DIGITAL VEHI‐
CLE KEY:
SET UP AUTHORISATIONS FOR THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY
R Switch express mode (comfort mode) off or on YOU CAN ASSIGN THE FOLLOWING AUTHORISATIONS TO THE DIGITAL
Availability of this function is dependent upon the end device. VEHICLE KEYS:
R Set up other devices of family members or friends as Digital Vehicle Keys R Vehicle access and drive authorisation
R Set up authorisation for the Digital Vehicle Keys R Vehicle access authorisation code

# Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.

191

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

# Select the menu "Invite people to use your Mercedes-Benz key".

% You can remove individual users or your own Digital Vehicle Key
# Select the "Configure car key access" menu. from the end device.

# Follow the steps on the end device.

REMOVE VIA WALLET‑APP
# Open the Wallet‑app on the end device.
% Further information on the Digital Vehicle Key:
R Function (/ page 189) # Select the user whose Digital Vehicle Key is to be removed.
R Setting up (/ page 189)
# Follow the steps on the end device.
R Removing (/ page 192)
The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key
REMOVE VIA THE DEVICE MANUFACTURER PORTAL
# Log into the device manufacturer portal.

Removing the Digital Vehicle Key # Follow the steps.

The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
Requirements:
REMOVE VIA MERCEDES ME USER ACCOUNT
R A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device (with the Digital Vehicle Key
activated). R Remove the linked vehicle
R The end device is sufficiently charged. R Decline the terms of use and consents
R Delete the user account
YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR REMOVING A DIGITAL VEHI‐
CLE KEY: # Log in to the Mercedes me user account.

R via the Wallet‑app # Select one of the above options.

R via the device manufacturer portal The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.
R via Mercedes me user account REMOVE VIA MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
R via MBUX multimedia system THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

R Disconnect all Digital Vehicle Keys

192

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

R Change the Digital Vehicle Key of the main owner When the Digital Vehicle Key's rechargeable battery is at extremely low capa‐
R Disconnect the owner's Digital Vehicle Key city, it is possible to lock and unlock the vehicle with the NFC function (emer‐
gency unlocking).
R Remove a Digital Vehicle Key

# Select the menus Settings, Vehicle, Open/close in the multimedia system.

# Select the menu Digital Vehicle Key.

# Select one of the above options.

# Follow the steps in the multimedia system.

The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.

% Further information on the Digital Vehicle Key:

R Function (/ page 189) # Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the NFC function: hold the
R To set up (/ page 189) Digital Vehicle Key against the door handle in close proximity to the NFC
R To manage (/ page 191) antenna 1 for approx. five to ten seconds, from a distance of no more
than 1 cm.
R Changing the unlocking settings for the Digital Vehicle Key

% If the Bluetooth® connection is not working, or the rechargea‐

ble battery for the Digital Vehicle Key is at very low capacity,
Unlocking and locking the vehicle with the it is also possible to start the vehicle via the NFC function
Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 330).
Depending on the end device, you can also continue to use the
Requirements: KEYLESS-GO function for a certain amount of time, even if the
rechargeable battery in the Digital Vehicle Key is at very low
R The "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me: https:// capacity.
www.mercedes.me.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the end device (with the Digital Vehicle Key
activated).
R The end device is sufficiently charged.

193

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 198).

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that the key is carried about your
person as a security measure against functional restrictions # Have the vehicle and the Digital Vehicle Key checked at a qualified
(/ page 186). specialist workshop.
THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE.
POSSIBLE CAUSES OF DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IMPAIRMENT:
% Mercedes-Benz recommends placing the Digital Vehicle Key in
the storage compartment while driving (/ page 330). R high-voltage power lines
R mobile phones
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
Troubleshooting problems with the Digital R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate
Vehicle Key systems or automatic barriers

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK AND UNLOCK THE VEHICLE WITH THE DIGI‐ # Ensure sufficient distance between the Digital Vehicle Key and a poten‐
TAL VEHICLE KEY. tial source of interference.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
YOU HAVE LOST A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY.
R Bluetooth® is deactivated on the Digital Vehicle Key. # Remove the Digital Vehicle Key (/ page 192).
R The rechargeable battery for the Digital Vehicle Key is at low capacity or
is flat.

# Activate Bluetooth® on the Digital Vehicle Key.

# Check the state of charge for the Digital Vehicle Key's rechargeable
battery.

# If necessary, charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key.

# Using the NFC function of the Digital Vehicle Key for locking or unlocking
the vehicle (emergency unlocking) (/ page 193).

# Use the vehicle key.

194

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Doors

Doors

Notes on the additional door lock If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The additional door lock is only available for vehicles in the United Kingdom.
% After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.
& WARNING
Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating
door lock is activated the interior protection before locking the vehicle (/ page 221).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be
opened from the inside.
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
# Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the
vehicle. # United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock
(/ page 195).
# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the addi‐
tional door lock.

THE ADDITIONAL DOOR LOCK IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED IN THE

FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

R The vehicle is locked using the key.

R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
# Pull the door 1 handle.
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)

If the vehicle was locked with Mercedes-Benz Connect, the additional door
lock is not active (/ page 675).

195

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Doors

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-
from the inside GO
Requirements:

R The key is outside the vehicle.

R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is actuated are
closed.

% Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: You can use the Digital Vehi‐
cle Key in the same way as the conventional vehicle key.

# To unlock: press the button 1.

* NOTE
# To lock: press the button 2.
Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot
The red indicator lamp on the button 2 lights up when the vehicle is lid
locked.
R when using an automatic car wash
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. R when using a high pressure cleaner

Plug-in hybrid: the socket flap is also locked and unlocked. The socket flap # Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
can be opened even if a key is detected in the vehicle.
or
THE VEHICLE IS NOT UNLOCKED WHEN THE BUTTON 1 IS PRESSED:
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
R If you have locked the vehicle using the key from the vehicle.
R If you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:

196

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Doors

# Convenience closing: touch the recessed sensor surface 2 for a pro‐

* NOTE longed period.
Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the boot lid
R when using a car wash % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 209).
R when using a high-pressure cleaner

# In these situations, switch off the Digital Vehicle Key.

or
Troubleshooting problems with KEYLESS-GO
YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE USING KEYLESS-
# Ensure that the Digital Vehicle Key is at least 3 m away from GO.
the vehicle.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:

R The function of the key has been deactivated.

OBSERVE THE INFORMATION:
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
R on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 40) R The key battery is at low capacity or is flat.
R on using a high-pressure cleaner (/ page 724) Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: depending on the respective end
device, you can continue to use the KEYLESS-GO function for a certain
amount of time even when the Digital Vehicle Key's rechargeable battery
charge level is extremely low .

# Activate the function of the key (/ page 79).

# Check the battery via the indicator lamp (/ page 184).

# Replace the key battery as necessary (/ page 187).

# Use the replacement key.

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 198).

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inside surface of the door handle. # Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# To lock the vehicle: touch the sensor surface 1 or 2.

197

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Doors

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emer‐
POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF KEYLESS-GO IS IMPAIRED:
gency key
R high-voltage power lines
UNLOCKING THE DRIVER'S DOOR WITH THE EMERGENCY KEY
R mobile phones
R electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
% If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key,
R shielding due to metallic objects or induction loops for electrical gate
this triggers the Anti-Theft Alarm system.
systems or automatic barriers

# Ensure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the poten‐ % If you unlock the driver's door with the emergency key, the boot
tial source of interference. lid will not be unlocked.

Activating/deactivating the automatic locking % Information on starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode
feature (/ page 330).

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 186).

% The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched

on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

# Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A DANGER OF BEING LOCKED
OUT WHEN THE FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED:

R The vehicle is being towed or pushed.

R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.

# Pull out the door handle 1 slightly and hold it in position.

198

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Doors

# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into the opening 1 on
the door lock.

# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key
anti-clockwise as far as it will go.

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key
clockwise as far as it will go.

If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.

# Insert the emergency key 2 into the lock cylinder as shown.

# Turn the emergency key 2 anti-clockwise to position 1.

# Turn the emergency key 2 back to its starting position.

# Remove the emergency key 2 and release the door handle 1.

LOCKING THE DOORS

199

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

Boot

Opening the boot lid VEHICLES WITH BOOT LID CONVENIENCE CLOSING

& DANGER
Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid
is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

# Pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid opens.

* NOTE
or
Damage to the boot lid by obstacles above the vehicle
The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Press and hold the H button on the key.
# If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards.
# Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above
Release it as soon as it begins to open.
the boot lid.
# With the boot lid opening limiter activated, manually pull the stopped
boot lid upwards.
# Pull the boot lid handle.
If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic opening process,
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with
blockage detection will stop the boot lid. The automatic blockage detection
your foot below the bumper (/ page 203).
function serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

200

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

Closing the boot lid # Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is
outside the vehicle.

# To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid downwards using the handle
& WARNING
recess and push it closed.
Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently,
they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle % Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing: if you lightly push
occupants. the boot lid closed, the power closing function will automatically
pull the boot lid into the lock.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
VEHICLES WITH BOOT LID CONVENIENCE CLOSING
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around. & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid
# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against
slipping or tipping over. Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the
closing area.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.
Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
recognition.
R Press the H button on the key.
NOTE THAT THE BOOT LID WILL NOT BE LOCKED AND WILL POP BACK R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's
OPEN IF THE FOLLOWING SITUATION OCCURS: door.
R You have locked the vehicle and closed the boot lid while a key belong‐ R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.
ing to the vehicle is inside the vehicle and is detected. R Pull the boot lid handle.
and
R A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehi‐ # Pull the boot lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close.
cle.
# If the boot lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards.
Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your The boot lid will continue to close.
attentiveness.

201

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

% Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: this also applies to the Digital
Vehicle Key if the function is activated and the Digital Vehicle Key
is connected to the vehicle.

# With the boot lid completely open, press and hold the H button on
the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.
VEHICLES WITH HANDS-FREE ACCESS
# With the boot lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your
foot below the bumper (/ page 203).
# Push remote operating switch 1 until the boot lid is fully closed. BOOT LID AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION
The boot lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing
function. If an obstacle obstructs the boot lid during the automatic closing
process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function
serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# During the closing process, ensure that no body parts remain within the
closing area.

# Press closing button 1 on the boot lid.

VEHICLES WITH KEYLESS-GO
# Press locking button 2 on the boot lid.
If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid will close and the
vehicle will be locked.

202

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

THE KICKING MOTION TRIGGERS THE OPENING OR CLOSING PROCESS

& WARNING ALTERNATELY.
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
R If you stop the boot lid opening process with a kicking motion, the boot
THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:
lid is closed with the next kicking motion.
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R If you stop the boot lid closing process with a kicking motion, the boot
R towards the end of the closing procedure lid is opened with the next kicking motion.

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE BOOT LID CAN ONLY BE CLOSED WITH
someone being trapped.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS:
# Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.
R If the vehicle is switched on and the key's unlock function has been set
# If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: so that only the driver's door is unlocked when activated (/ page 185).
R Press the H button on the key. R If the vehicle has been centrally locked from the inside (/ page 196).
R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 200) and closing (/ page 201) the
R Pull the boot lid handle. boot lid.

% A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is opening or closing.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

& WARNING
Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-
FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

# Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within

the detection range of the sensors.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS allows you to open and close the boot lid, or even stop
the opening and closing process at any point, by performing a kicking motion
under the bumper. The transmission must be in position j for this function.

203

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot R The key is behind the vehicle.
lid If the key is not recognised:
R when using an automatic car wash - Take the key in your hand.
R when using a high pressure cleaner or
- Ensure that the function of the key is activated (/ page 79).
# Deactivate the function of the key in these situations.
R Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: The Digital Vehicle Key is behind the
or vehicle.
R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle when performing the kicking
# Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away motion.
from the vehicle.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper when performing the kicking
motion.
Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: R Do not carry out the kicking motion too slowly.
R The kicking motion must be towards the vehicle and back again.
NOTE R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Perform the kicking motion to the left or to
*
Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the boot lid the right of the ball head.
R when using a car wash
R when using a high-pressure cleaner

# In these situations, switch off the Digital Vehicle Key.

or

# Ensure that the Digital Vehicle Key is at least 3 m away from

the vehicle.
1 Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking motions are not successful, wait ten seconds.
Ensure that you are standing firmly on the ground when performing the kicking
motion. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

204

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

SYSTEM LIMITS
Switching separate boot locking on and off
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
CASES: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close
R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
R The kicking motion is performed with a prosthetic leg. SWITCHING SEPARATE BOOT LOCKING ON
# Select Block boot.
THE BOOT LID COULD BE OPENED OR CLOSED UNINTENTIONALLY IN THE # Create a PIN.
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# Confirm the PIN with OK.
R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g.
when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. # Enter the PIN again and confirm it.
R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel The boot will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally.
dispenser, a charging cable or luggage.
R Tension belts, tarps or other covers are pulled over the bumper. % If an accident has been detected, the boot will unlock even if
R A protective mat with a length reaching over the loading sill down into separate locking is switched on.
the detection range of the sensors is used.
R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
SWITCHING SEPARATE BOOT LOCKING OFF
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: Work is being carried out on the trailer # Select Block boot.
hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.
# Enter the PIN.
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 79) or do not carry the key about If the PIN is correct, separate boot locking will be switched off and the
your person in such situations. PIN deleted.

Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening

limiter
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close
# Activate or deactivate Opening height limiter.

205

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Boot

This function prevents the boot lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for exam‐
ple.

206

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Side windows

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
& WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, par‐
Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window ticularly when unattended.
When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or # Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
become trapped between the side window and window frame.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side
lock the vehicle.
window.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull
it in order to close the side window again.
Requirements:

R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing
area in the process.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing
area.

# If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or

press the button in order to reopen the side window.

207

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Side windows

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
THE REVERSING FUNCTION DOES NOT REACT:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

R during resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped

in these situations.

1 Closing # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are
2 To open in the closing area.
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open
the side window again.
# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point
of resistance or pull and release it.

To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again.

Automatic function of the side windows
#

When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side win‐
dows. IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE SIDE WINDOWS WILL BE CLOSED AUTO‐
MATICALLY WHEN THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF:
The function will also be available until the doors are closed again.
R if it starts to rain
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SIDE WINDOWS Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side R in extreme temperatures
window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function serves
R after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system volt‐
solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
age)
# During the closing process, ensure that no body parts remain within the R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
closing area.

The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.

208

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Side windows

Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely R The sliding sunroof opens.
if the sliding sunroof is open. R The panoramic sliding sunroof opens.
If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window R The driver's seat ventilation is switched on.
concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process,
the automatic function may be deactivated. The automatic function will be
active again the next time the vehicle is started. % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed,
the roller sunblind is opened first.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle # Interrupt convenience opening: Release the Ü button.
before starting a journey)
# Continue convenience opening: Press and hold the Ü button again.

& WARNING
Risk of entrapment when opening a side window Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or outside)
become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side WARNING
&
window. Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during conveni‐
ence closing
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trap‐
ped. When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body
could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof.
Requirements:
# When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor
R The key is in immediate proximity to the vehicle. the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts
are in the closing area.
# Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: Requirements:

R The vehicle is unlocked. R The key is in immediate proximity to the vehicle.

R The side windows open.

209

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Side windows

# Press and hold the s button on the key. A SIDE WINDOW CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE CAUSE.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.

R The vehicle is locked. # Adjust the side windows.

R The side windows are closed.
R The sliding sunroof is closed. Adjusting the side windows
R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button. # Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again
# To continue convenience closing: press and hold the s button until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one
again. more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

% Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO

(/ page 196). If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

# Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again
until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one
Resolving problems with the side windows more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

& WARNING # If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection slightly, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
is not activated
THE SIDE WINDOWS CANNOT BE OPENED OR CLOSED USING THE CONVE‐
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, NIENCE OPENING FEATURE.
the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trap‐
ped. R The key is not in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. R The key battery is at low capacity or is flat.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 184).
button again to reopen the side window.

210

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Side windows

# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 187).

211

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof & WARNING

Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving
sunroof. parts, particularly if unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING # When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being lock the vehicle.
opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

# During the opening and closing process, make sure that no & WARNING
body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being
# If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame
or
or sliding roof.
# Touch the control panel during automatic operation. # During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body
The opening/closing process will be stopped. parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
# If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

# Touch the control panel during automatic operation.

The opening/closing process will be stopped.

212

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof

* NOTE * NOTE
Malfunction due to snow and ice Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is fitted
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. If the sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted, the
sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack.
# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.
# Do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof luggage rack is fitted.

The sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle

* NOTE interior.
Damage caused by moisture ingress
# Do not open the sliding sunroof if it has just rained.

# Do not open the sliding sunroof immediately after washing the

vehicle in a car wash.

* NOTE
Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.

# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are operated using control panel
1.

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind
is open.

# To open: swipe backwards across control panel 1 and hold it.

# To close: swipe forwards across control panel 1 and hold it.

# To raise or lower: press control panel 1 briefly.

213

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof

# To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across con‐ AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ROLLER SUNBLIND
trol panel 1. If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the
roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function
# To cancel automatic operation: press control panel 1 again. serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
# Keep the opening area and the guide rails free of debris (e.g. ice, snow or
AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SLIDING SUNROOF leaves).
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the
sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts or
serves solely as an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. objects are in the range of movement.

# Keep the opening area and the guide rails free of debris (e.g. ice, snow or
& WARNING
leaves).
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
# When closing the sliding sunroof, make sure that no body parts or In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin
objects are in the closing area. objects, e.g. fingers.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts
& WARNING
are in the range of movement.
Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function # If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.
THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:
or
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
R towards the end of the closing procedure. # Touch the control panel during automatic closing.
R during resetting. The closing process will be stopped.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are
in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
or
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding
# Touch the control panel during automatic closing. sunroof.
The closing process will be stopped.

214

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof

THE SLIDING SUNROOF WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE

VEHICLE HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding
R if it starts to rain sunroof
Rain will be detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be low‐
R in extreme temperatures ered slightly at the rear.
R after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system volt‐ # Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range
age)
of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
R if there is a malfunction in the power supply
# If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel.
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the
vehicle interior.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, it Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof
and the side windows will then be deactivated.
& WARNING
RAIN CLOSING FUNCTION WHEN DRIVING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised is closed again
sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been
blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maxi‐
AUTOMATIC LOWERING FUNCTION mum force.
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised
at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries!
speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

# Touch the control panel during automatic closing.

The closing process will be stopped.

215

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Sliding sunroof

THE SLIDING SUNROOF CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
CAUSE.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind
% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding
sunroof.
# Swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 212) and hold it
repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.
# Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control # Swipe across and hold the control panel until the roller sunblind is
panel (/ page 212) and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. completely closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. # Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

# Repeat the previous step.

The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.
Vehicles without a panoramic sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof is not
operating smoothly.

# Reset the sliding sunroof.

Resetting the sliding sunroof

# Swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 212) and hold it
repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely open.

# Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.

# Close the sliding sunroof.

Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof or the
roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.

216

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Roller sunblinds

Roller sunblinds

Extending the rear side window roller sun‐ Extending or retracting the rear-window roller
blinds sunblind

* NOTE & WARNING

Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller
If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. sunblind
Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of move‐
# Always move the roller sun blind by hand. ment.
# Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and rear side # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement.
windows opened at the same time.
# If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again.
The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The
roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.

* NOTE
Damage caused by objects
Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

# Do not place any objects on the rear shelf.

# Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

# Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto brackets 2 at the
top of the window.

217

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Roller sunblinds

# To extend or retract: press button 1.

218

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Anti-theft protection

Anti-theft protection

Function of the immobiliser THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROXIMATELY
TEN SECONDS IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct
R After locking the vehicle with the key
key.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off,
and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

FUNCTION OF THE ATA SYSTEM
IF THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED, A VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARM IS
ISSUED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

R when a door is opened

R when the boot lid is opened
R when the bonnet is opened The indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is primed.
R when the interior protection is triggered (/ page 221)
THE ATA SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING
R when the tow-away protection is triggered (/ page 220)
SITUATIONS:

R After unlocking the vehicle with the key

% Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: The ATA system works with R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
the Digital Vehicle Key in the same way as with the conventional
R After unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle
vehicle key.
Key)

219

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Anti-theft protection

R After pressing the Start/Stop button with the key in the storage compart‐ TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COM‐
ment (/ page 330) PONENTS ARE CLOSED:

DEACTIVATING THE ATA R Doors

# Press the button Ü, s or H on the key. R Boot lid

or
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED:
# Press the Start/Stop button with the key in the storage compartment
(/ page 330)
R After pressing the button Ü or H on the key
R After pressing the Start/Stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
# Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: Press the Start/Stop button with the ment (/ page 330)
Digital Vehicle Key in the storage compartment (/ page 330). R After pressing the Start/Stop button with the Digital Vehicle Key in the
DEACTIVATING THE ALARM USING KEYLESS-GO: storage compartment (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key)
# Cover the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle. R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The distance between key and vehicle here should not be greater than This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
1 m. R After unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. Key)
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Function of tow-away protection

Information on collision detection for a parked vehicle (/ page 413).
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of
inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY PRIMED AFTER ABOUT
60 SECONDS: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close 5 Vehicle protection
R After locking the vehicle with the key
# Activate or deactivate Tow-away protection.
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:) R The vehicle is unlocked again.
R A door is opened.

220

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Opening and closing Anti-theft protection

R The vehicle is locked again. R After unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle
Key)
When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Function of interior protection
R

When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO A FALSE ALARM:
movement is detected in the vehicle interior.
R When there are moving objects suchas mascots in the vehicle interior
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROX‐ R If a side window is open
IMATELY TEN SECONDS:
R If the sliding sunroof is open
R After locking the vehicle with the key R If the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. Priming/deactivating interior protection
R After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key:)
Multimedia system:
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COMPO‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close 5 Vehicle protection
NENTS ARE CLOSED: # Activate or deactivate Interior protection.
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
R Doors
R Boot lid R The vehicle is unlocked again.
R A door is opened.
INTERIOR PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED: R The vehicle is locked again.

R After pressing the Ü or H button on the key

R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the storage compart‐
ment (/ page 330)
R After pressing the start/stop button with the Digital Vehicle Key in the
storage compartment (vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key)
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

Back to Contents221

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing

Seats and stowing

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position 223 Cup holders 266

Notes on grab handles 224 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 271

Seats 225 Sockets 273

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the

Steering wheel 241 275
front

Easy entry and exit feature 245 Fitting/removing the floor mats 278

Memory function 248

Stowage areas 251

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING WHEN ADJUSTING STEERING WHEEL 1, SEAT

& WARNING BELT 2 AND DRIVER'S SEAT 3:
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING following points into consideration:
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: R You are sitting in an upright position
R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
head restraint
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your R You can move your legs freely
seat belt.
R You can see all the indicators on the driver display clearly
R You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
R Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 135).

223

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Notes on grab handles

Notes on grab handles

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly,
the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage.
This may result in injuries.

# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or

to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

224

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Seats

Adjusting the front seat mechanically & WARNING

Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged
& WARNING The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly
when unattended. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before
starting the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
& WARNING YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
parts in the sweep of the seat.
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle". seat belt.

225

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have
could be trapped and thereby injured. not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐ In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself.
ment buttons and become trapped.
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body
parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjust‐
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
ment system. position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being & WARNING
adjusted incorrectly Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
front passenger seat
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
system.
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
# Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no
at about eye level. objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
seat.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible

to the back of your head.

226

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2 until the desired seat
If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, height has been reached.
the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. # To set the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 3 forwards or
This may result in injuries.
backwards until the required position has been reached.
# Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or
to assist in getting in and out of the seat.
Adjusting the front seat manually and electri‐
cally (with Seat Comfort Package)
* NOTE
Damage to the seats when adjusting & WARNING
The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats. Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly
# When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects when unattended.
in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted
When adjusting a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant, e.g.
on the seat guide rail.

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 1 and slide the # Make sure that no part of the body is within the seat's range of
seat into the desired position. motion when adjusting a seat.

227

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants
could be trapped and thereby injured.
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐
This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
ment buttons and become trapped.
# Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before
# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body
starting the vehicle.
parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjust‐
ment system.

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
& WARNING
vehicle is in motion
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING adjusted incorrectly
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
seat belt. at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible

to the back of your head.

228

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position Damage to the seats when adjusting
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats.
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
# When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical

position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.

& WARNING
Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
front passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
system. 1 Seat backrest inclination
2 Seat height
# Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
3 Seat cushion inclination
# When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no 4 Seat cushion length
objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger 5 Seat fore-and-aft posi‐
seat. tion
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 5 and slide the
seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

229

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Adjusting the front seat electrically & WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
& WARNING vehicle is in motion
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
when unattended.
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
lock the vehicle. R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
seat belt.
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted & WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
When adjusting a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant, e.g.
on the seat guide rail. If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants
could be trapped and thereby injured.
# Make sure that no part of the body is within the seat's range of
motion when adjusting a seat. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust‐
ment buttons and become trapped.

# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".
parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjust‐
ment system.

230

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the
adjusted incorrectly front passenger seat
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. system.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted. # Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that # When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger
at about eye level. seat.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible

to the back of your head. * NOTE
Damage to the seats when adjusting

& WARNING The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats.
Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position
# When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects
The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have in the footwell, under or behind the seats.
not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no
direct feedback on the switch while pressing it. Feedback is provided only by
# Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
the movement of the seat.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical
position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoulder.

231

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Head restraint height

2 Seat cushion inclination
3 Seat cushion length 1 Higher
4 Seat fore-and-aft posi‐ 2 Softer
tion 3 Lower
5 Seat height 4 Firmer
6 Seat backrest inclination # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest.
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 249).

% The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when

you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.

232

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Head restraints Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible
to the back of your head.
ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS MECHANICALLY (TWO-
WAY HEAD RESTRAINTS)

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: # Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob 1.
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering # To raise or lower: pull the head restraint upwards or push it downwards.
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion # Let go of release knob 1.

# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS MECHANICALLY (4-WAY
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your HEAD RESTRAINT)
seat belt.
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
& WARNING
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted. # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
seat belt.
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.

233

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

# To move forwards or backwards: pull the head restraint forwards or

& WARNING push it backwards.
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly # Let go of release knob 1.
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted VEHICLES WITH ELECTRIC SEAT ADJUSTMENT
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.

# To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint using the buttons on the
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible door operating unit (/ page 230).
to the back of your head.
# To move forwards or backwards: take hold of the head restraint on
VEHICLES WITH MANUAL AND ELECTRIC SEAT ADJUSTMENT both sides and press release knob 1.

# Pull the headrest forwards or push it backwards.

# Let go of release knob 1.

# Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob 1.
The head restraint will be unlocked in all directions of movement simul‐
taneously.

# To raise or lower: pull the head restraint upwards or push it downwards.

234

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINTS OF THE REAR SEATS MANUALLY # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and push
the head restraint down until it engages.
& WARNING FITTING/REMOVING THE REAR SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS
Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
adjusted incorrectly
& WARNING
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, adjusted incorrectly
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted. correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area,
e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.
# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
at about eye level. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that
the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible at about eye level.
to the back of your head.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible
to the back of your head.
REMOVING
You can remove the head restraints only in vehicles with folding rear seat
backrests.

# To raise: push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull the
head restraint up until it engages.

235

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat

ADJUSTING THE AIR CUSHIONS

# On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar or Side
bolsters.

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 50).

# Press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint upwards as far as it
will go.
Release knob 1 will extend.

# Push both release knobs 1 and 2 at the same time in the direction of
the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

FITTING
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly (/ page 50).

# Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until it engages.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

236

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

Setting automatic seat adjustment # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.

# Set the size using the scale.

& WARNING # Select Start positioning.
Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat
after calling up a driver profile The driver's seat and steering wheel positions will be adjusted to the
body size that has been set.
Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat
to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
pants could be injured in the process. % You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user
account for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the
# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being vehicle and the Mercedes-Benz connect profiles, you can adopt
adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body these settings for your vehicle. Further information on MB apps
parts are in the seat's range of movement. (/ page 676).

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the

adjustment process by:
% You can change the driver's seat and steering wheel position
# a) Tapping the warning message on the central display. set by the vehicle using control buttons (/ page 227). You can
adjust the exterior mirrors to suit your preferences using operat‐
or ing switch (/ page 299).

# b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat

adjustment switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped. Overview of massage programmes
R Classic massage Relaxing back massage
Multimedia system: R Mobilizing massage Mobilising massage with upward-moving massage
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Position seat automatically waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the
supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
MANUALLY ADJUSTING DRIVER'S SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL POSITION
R Activating massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage
TO BODY SIZE
waves
The vehicle will calculate suitable driver's seat and steering wheel positions on
the basis of the driver's body size and set them directly. R Relaxing massage Relaxing back massage with ascending wave-like move‐
ments and then soothing movements

237

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

R Depth waves Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood

flow and metabolic processes in the lower back and legs
Resetting seat settings
R Deep workout Wave-like movements in the cushion are combined with Multimedia system:
wave-like movements from the backrest and can stimulate blood circula‐ 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
tion and metabolism in the lower back, buttocks and legs # Select Reset.

# Select ß for the desired seat.

% The Depth waves and Deep workout programmes are available
only for the driver's seat.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Selecting a massage programme for the front & WARNING

seats Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion
Multimedia system: and seat backrest padding to become very hot.
4 © 5 Comfort
In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity
# Select Massage. or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# Select a massage programme (/ page 237).
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
# Start the programme for the desired seat with ;.

# To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐
ted after it has been switched on repeatedly.
# To stop the massage: select É.

% The availability of this function is equipment-dependent.

238

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

* NOTE % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three
Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the heating levels after around 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat
seat heater is switched on heating is switched off.
When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to
objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child
seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. % If you switch the power supply off and on again within
20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driv‐
# Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats er's seat will remain active.
when the seat heater is switched on.

Requirements Switching the seat ventilation on/off

R The power supply is switched on. Requirements

R The power supply is switched on.

# Press button 1 for the respective seat repeatedly until the desired
heating level is reached.
# Press button 1 for the respective seat repeatedly until the desired
Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up.
blower setting is reached.
If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light
up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

239

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Seats

% If you switch the power supply off and on again within

20 minutes, the previous seat ventilation setting for the driver's
seat will remain active.

240

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Steering wheel

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel manually UNLOCKING

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's # Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
seat belt. # Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.

& WARNING
Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

241

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Steering wheel

LOCKING
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

# Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
# Check and make sure that the steering column is locked by moving the seat belt.
steering wheel.

& WARNING
Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

242

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Steering wheel

1 To move up # To switch on: push the switch to position 1.

2 To move back If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.
3 To move down
# To switch off: push the switch to position 2.
4 To move forward
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 249). When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Decoupling the steering wheel heater from
Depending on the vehicle version, the steering wheel heater can be switched
the seat heating
on/off via a switch on the steering wheel. Requirements:
REQUIREMENTS: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.
R The vehicle is switched on. R The steering wheel heater and the seat heating are linked.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating settings
The function is active by default and the steering wheel heater will automati‐
cally be activated and deactivated when the seat heating is switched on and
off.

243

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Steering wheel

# Tap on Switch on steering wheel heater.

The steering wheel heater will be decoupled from the seat heating.

244

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit
& WARNING feature
Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become
of the easy entry and exit feature trapped.
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the
# Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat.
driving off.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

# Move the steering wheel adjustment lever.

The adjustment process is stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

# Press the switch for seat adjustment.

The adjustment process is stopped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
lock the vehicle.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

245

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature

Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by
pressing one of the memory function position switches. % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not
already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will move forwards
or backwards only if it is not already in the ideal position for
& WARNING
getting in or out of the vehicle.
Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and
exit feature
Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit THE STEERING WHEEL AND THE DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE BACK TO THE
feature, particularly when unattended. LAST DRIVING POSITION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is
closed.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.
lock the vehicle.

THE LAST DRIVE POSITION WILL BE SAVED WHEN:

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
R You switch off the vehicle.
In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment
function must have been switched on (/ page 237). R Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the
memory function.
WHEN THE EASY ENTRY AND EXIT FEATURE IS ACTIVE, THE STEERING R Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the
WHEEL AND DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE AS FOLLOWS: memory function.
R The steering wheel will move upwards.
R The driver's seat will move forward or backward to a position suitable for Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position
getting in or out of the vehicle. switches to stop the adjustment process.

THIS WILL OCCUR IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: Setting the easy entry and exit feature
R You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open. Requirements:
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.
R The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (/ page 237).

246

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Easy entry and exit feature
# Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off.

% If you are using a custom user profile, this information will

be used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause
the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct
position automatically. Further information about user profiles
(/ page 570).

247

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Memory function

Memory function

The memory function & WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by chil‐
& WARNING dren
Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped,
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you especially if they are unsupervised.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
made.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the
lock the vehicle.
vehicle is stationary.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

& WARNING You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.
Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐ Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the
tion memory function.
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. YOU CAN SAVE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS FOR THE FRONT SEAT:

# During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest
that no body parts are in the area of movement of the seat or in the lumbar region
the steering wheel. R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and
seat backrest
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button
R Driver's side: steering wheel position and outside mirror positions on the
or seat adjustment switch immediately.
driver's and front passenger sides
The adjustment process is stopped.
R Head-up display

248

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Memory function

Operating the memory function & WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by chil‐
& WARNING dren
Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped,
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you especially if they are unsupervised.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
made.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and
# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the
lock the vehicle.
vehicle is stationary.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

& WARNING You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.
Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
tion STORING
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could become trapped.

# During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure

that no body parts are in the area of movement of the seat or
the steering wheel.

# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button

or seat adjustment switch immediately.
The adjustment process is stopped.

# Adjust the front seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the
outside mirrors to the desired position.

# Press the memory button V and then release it.

249

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Memory function

# Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three

seconds.
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

# To call up: press the preset position button 4, T or U.

The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button,
the front seat, outside mirrors, head-up display and steering column
continue to move into the stored position automatically.

250

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle & WARNING

Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
& DANGER If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently,
Risk of exhaust gas poisoning they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon occupants.
monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
sudden change in direction.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
# Never drive with the boot lid open. around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from slipping or tipping over.
functioning correctly. Observe the notes on airbags (/ page 153).

251

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's and front-passenger
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or footwell
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, Objects in the driver's and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain travel or block a depressed pedal.
all objects they contain.
This jeopardises the operating‑ and road safety of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's or front-passenger footwell.
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around in such situations.
# Always ensure that the pedals have sufficient free space.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. top of one another.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff: Objects trapped
under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the auto‐
matic front passenger airbag shut-off or damage the system. Therefore please
observe the notes on the function of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff
(/ page 140).

252

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process, which

* NOTE changes the surface characteristics.
Damage to the vehicle caused by spilled liquids
If liquids are spilled in the vehicle, parts of the vehicle may be dam‐ THE HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE DEPENDENT
aged. ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE LOAD WITHIN THE VEHICLE. YOU SHOULD
BEAR THE FOLLOWING IN MIND WHEN LOADING THE VEHICLE:
# Always securely close containers containing liquids that you
have brought with you. R Never allow the payload including occupants to exceed the maximum
permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle.
# Clean the vehicle as soon as possible if liquids are spilled.
These are shown on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 856).
# If larger quantities of liquids are spilled, have the vehicle R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
checked in a qualified specialist workshop.
R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the tension
evenly.
& WARNING
Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims
NOTES ON DRIVING WITH ROOF LOAD
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you
come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn R Distribute the roof load and vehicle load evenly, and place heavy objects
yourself. at the bottom. Also observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
R Drive with care. Avoid sudden starting, braking and steering manoeuvres
# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tail‐
or fast cornering.
pipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this
area. R When carrying a roof load or when the vehicle is fully loaded or occu‐
pied, select drive program ; or A. These are configured for good
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. stability (/ page 353).

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface characteris‐ % Further information on storage compartments and stowage facili‐
tics, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth ties can be found in the Digital Owner's Manual.
and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface charac‐
teristics are particular to leather, and are not material defects.

253

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

OVERVIEW OF THE FRONT STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, 1 Stowage spaces in the doors
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain 2 Stowage compartment under the armrest with multimedia and USB con‐
all objects they contain. nections
3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with cup holders, USB
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones
sudden change in direction. 4 Glove compartment
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around in such situations. % The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre con‐
sole 3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 729).
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

254

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

OPENING AND CLOSING THE STOWAGE COMPARTMENT IN THE FRONT # To open: slide the cover of the stowage compartment in the front centre
CENTRE CONSOLE console all the way forwards in the direction of the arrow using handle
1.
& WARNING # To close: briefly push handle 1 of the open cover of the stowage
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
compartment in the front centre console forwards.
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
The cover will automatically close the storage compartment in the front
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
centre console.
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain. OPENING AND CLOSING THE STORAGE COMPARTMENT IN THE FRONT
ARMREST
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
& WARNING
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
around in such situations. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. all objects they contain.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or bulky objects in the boot. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around in such situations.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

255

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
# To open: press release catch 1 downwards. all objects they contain.
The covers of the storage compartment in front armrest 2 will open
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
automatically in the direction of the arrow.
sudden change in direction.
# To close: move the covers of the storage compartment in front armrest
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
2 inwards in the direction of the arrow.
around in such situations.
The storage compartment in the front armrest is now closed.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

256

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

OPENING THE ELECTRONICS COMPARTMENT IN THE REAR-COMPART‐

MENT CENTRE CONSOLE

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a

# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or anti- sudden change in direction.
clockwise 1 (to unlock).
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
around in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage

spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,

fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

257

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

# Briefly press cover 1.

The electronics compartment in the rear centre console will open. & WARNING
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.
Through-loading feature in the rear bench
THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:
seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)
R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
FOLDING THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
& WARNING R A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or prop‐
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats erly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended.
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or
load compartment.
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐
CIALLY:

R After the seat has been adjusted.

R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
wards

Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
Requirements

R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted.

R The rear armrest has been folded up.

258

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

FOLDING THE REAR OUTER SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD

You can fold the centre and right seat backrests forwards separately.

The left seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre
seat backrest.

If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold
the backrest back into place.

# Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position and locked
to the left seat backrest (/ page 261).

# To fold the left seat backrest forward: briefly press left button 1.
The left seat backrest folds forward together with the centre seat back‐
rest.
If the left seat backrest is not locked with the centre seat backrest, this
will be shown on the central display.

# To fold the right seat backrest forward: briefly press right button 1.
The right seat backrest will fold forwards.

% If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards,
fold the right seat backrest forwards.
# Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into marked position 2.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. FOLDING THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS SEPARATELY
If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold
the backrest back into place.

259

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

& WARNING
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
R A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or prop‐
erly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended.
# Press release catch 3.
R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or
# Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. load compartment.

FOLDING BACK THE REAR SEAT BACKREST ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐
CIALLY:
& WARNING
R After the seat has been adjusted.
Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
wards
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat.
Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer
visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

260

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

LOCKING AND RELEASING THE RELEASE CATCH OF THE CENTRE REAR

* NOTE SEAT BACKREST
Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the
seat backrest
& WARNING
The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
seat backrest is folded back.
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant.
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body
the seat backrest.
parts in the sweep of the seat.

& WARNING
Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged
The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional
injury.
R A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or prop‐
# Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. erly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended.
R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or
# Swivel seat backrest 1 back until it engages. load compartment.
If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verifica‐
tion indicator 2 will be visible. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPE‐
CIALLY:

R After the seat has been adjusted.

R After the load compartment enlargement has been folded for‐
wards

261

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verifica‐
tion indicators will be visible.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened cor‐
rectly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
You can lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the
boot against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded
forwards only together with the left seat backrest.

1 Tie-down eyes

% Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehicles equipped with

the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK
Quickfold).

# To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards. Overview of bag hooks

Overview of the tie-down eyes & WARNING

Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251). The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occu‐
pants.

# Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.

# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag

hooks.

262

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251).

* NOTE
The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. Damage to the handle in the boot floor
If the boot floor has been attached to the drip rail via the handle,
damage may arise when the boot lid is closed.

# Disconnect the handle before closing the boot lid and close
trunk floor.

1 Bag hook

Opening the stowage space under the boot

floor
# Pull handle 1 up and hook it into drip rail 2.
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to an open load trunk floor
If you drive when the trunk floor is open, objects could be thrown
around and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly
in the event of sudden braking or abrupt changes in direction.

# Always close the trunk floor before a journey.

263

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Attaching a roof luggage rack * NOTE

Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks
& WARNING The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been
Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as # Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for
well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.
Mercedes-Benz.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding
well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is fitted.
# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the boot lid
style.
can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data"
the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
section.

* NOTE
Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐ * NOTE
ble clearance height Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved
roof luggage racks
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged. The panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack
if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height. approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not # When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama slid‐
drive in. ing sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
# Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
structures or other carrier systems into account. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the
vehicle interior.

264

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Stowage areas

# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manu‐
* NOTE facturer.
Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is fitted
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
If the sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted, the
sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack.

# Do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof luggage rack is fitted.

The sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle

interior.

* NOTE
Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

# Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.

265

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Cup holders

Cup holders

Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from & WARNING

the centre console Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
& WARNING
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain
‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the
all objects they contain.
vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
motion. sudden change in direction.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown
may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants around in such situations.
may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be
scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
lose control of the vehicle. spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or bulky objects in the boot.
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

REMOVING THE WING OF THE CUP HOLDER
The wing of the cup holder can be removed to stow smaller items in the cup
holder.

266

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Cup holders

# If necessary, open the cover of the storage compartment in the front

% The installation and removal as well as the operation of the wing centre console.
of the cup holder are shown using the example of a cup holder
with double wing. # Place the wings of the cup holder onto the bar in the storage compart‐
ment as shown.

# Slide snap-in brackets 2 outwards until they engage.

OPERATING THE WINGS OF THE CUP HOLDER

# Push snap-in brackets 1 of the wing inwards in the direction of the

arrow until they release.

# Pull the wing of the cup holder out of the storage compartment upwards.
# Press button 1 and/or 3.
FITTING THE WINGS OF THE CUP HOLDER
Wings 4 of the cup holder will fold upwards.

The wings of the cup holder can be folded down until the wings engage and
remain in the folded position. The cup holder's holding function will then not
be available.

% When you are using the cup holder for different containers, the
wings of the cup holder automatically adjust to the diameter of
the container.

267

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Cup holders

FITTING THE CUP HOLDER HOUSING REMOVING THE CUP HOLDER HOUSING

# Insert cup holder housing 1 into the stowage compartment in the front # Push catch 1 on the cup holder housing forwards.
centre console on a slight angle. The cup holder housing is released.
# Engage hook 2 in the side opening in the stowage compartment.

# Press the front part of housing 3 downwards until it engages.

# Pull the front part of housing 3 upwards with a slight jerk.

# Disengage hook 2 from the side opening in the stowage compartment

of the front centre console.
# Push catch 1 on the cup holder housing backwards.
The cup holder housing is locked.

268

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Cup holders

# Remove cup holder housing 1 from the stowage compartment of the

front centre console on a slight angle. * NOTE
Damage to the cup holder

% The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath it can be The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat arm‐
removed for cleaning, e.g. with clean, lukewarm water. rest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.

# The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup
holder is closed.
Opening the cup holder and mobile phone # Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is
holder in the rear armrest open.

& WARNING OPENING THE CUP HOLDER IN THE REAR ARMREST

‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in
motion.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container
may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants
may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be
scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may # Press cover trim 1 twice.
lose control of the vehicle.
The cup holder will open in the direction of the arrow.
# Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. # Place a container in or remove a container from the cup holder.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. CLOSING THE CUP HOLDER IN THE REAR ARMREST
# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
# Press cover trim 1.

269

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Cup holders

OPENING THE MOBILE PHONE HOLDER IN THE REAR ARMREST

# Press cover trim 1 once.

The mobile phone holder will open in the direction of the arrow.

# Place the mobile phone in or remove it from the holder.

CLOSING THE MOBILE PHONE HOLDER IN THE REAR ARMREST
# Press cover trim 1.
The mobile phone holder and the cup holder will both open.

# Press cover trim 1 a second time.

The mobile phone holder will be closed.

% The mobile phone holder is designed for two mobile phones or

one tablet. You can also charge the devices in the holder by
inserting the charging cable into the devices through the opening
on the underside of the holder.

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251).

270

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Ashtray and cigarette lighter

Using the ashtray #

#
Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251).
To open the ashtray: fold lid 1 upwards.

NOTE
# To close the ashtray: press lid 1 down.
*
Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to
intense heat % You can remove the top part of the ashtray for cleaning or emp‐
The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and tying by twisting it. Clean the ashtray, e.g. with clean, lukewarm
could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. water.

# Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.

Using the rear ashtray

# Place ashtray 2 in one of the cup holders in the centre console or in the
rear compartment. Ashtray in the rear door (example)

# Check that it is seated firmly.

271

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Ashtray and cigarette lighter

# Place the ashtray in one of the cup holders in the rear compartment or in
the holder in the rear door.

# Check that it is seated firmly.

# Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 251).

OPENING THE ASHTRAY
# Fold cap 1 upwards.

If you are not using the ashtray, close it and place it in the holder in the rear
door or in the cup holder in the rear compartment.

272

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Sockets

Sockets

Using the 12 V socket # Fold up socket cap 1.

# Insert the plug of the device.

Requirements

R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A).

USB ports
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOL‐ DEPENDING ON ITS EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOLLOWING USB
LOWING 12 V SOCKETS: PORTS:

R In the front passenger footwell R In the stowage compartment in the front centre console
R In the electronics compartment in the centre console of the rear R In the stowage compartment under the front armrest
passenger compartment R In the electronics compartment in the centre console of the rear
passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has either one or two USB
ports in the stowage compartment in the front centre console and beneath the
front armrest.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has two USB connections in
the rear centre console.

Example: 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell

273

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Sockets

Example: USB ports in the electronics compartment in the centre console of

the rear passenger compartment
When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a USB device, such as a
mobile phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charging cable. The USB device
can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) depending on the vehicle equipment.

274

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they may slide
be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles will not always be
all objects they contain. able to retain all objects that they contain in the event of an accident.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a
sudden change in direction. sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown # Always stow objects such that they cannot be thrown around
around in such situations. in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged,
fragile or bulky objects in the boot. fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

275

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by
compartment liquids
Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compart‐
constitute a fire hazard. ment may be damaged.

# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage com‐
in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those partment.
made of metal.

Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to
Requirements: the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. R The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to
the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched
You can find a list of compatible mobile phones at: https://
on.
www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of
the mobile phone tray.

NOTE
R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone tray may
*
Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
stowage compartment R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may
also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these
may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. R To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exte‐
rior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. This does
# Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other not apply to protective covers which are required for wireless charging.
objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone
stowage compartment.

276

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

Wireless charging of the mobile phone in the front storage compartment

# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat as possible in the
front storage compartment with the display facing upwards 1 next to
the USB ports.

When the charging symbol is shown in the driver display, the mobile phone
is being charged. Malfunctions during the mobile phone charging process are
also shown in the central display.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm
water.

RADIO EQUIPMENT APPROVAL NUMBERS FOR BRAZIL

This device operates in secondary mode, that is to say it has no protection
against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and
must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.

This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Direc‐

tive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets
the applicable technical requirements.

More information is available on the ANATEL website. https://

www.anatel.gov.br

# For more information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle com‐

ponents which receive and/or transmit radio waves see (/ page 115).

277

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Fitting/removing the floor mats

Fitting/removing the floor mats

FITTING FLOOR MATS

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
depressed pedal.

This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's footwell.

# Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the

pedals.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed. # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the
footwell.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
top of one another. # Press studs 1 onto holders 2.

# Adjust the corresponding seat.

REMOVING FLOOR MATS
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards.

# Pull the floor mat off holders 2.

# Remove the floor mat.

278

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Seats and stowing Fitting/removing the floor mats

INSERTING OR REMOVING FLOOR MATS ON THE SECOND ROW OF SEATS

# To insert: push the corresponding seat on the first row of seats forwards
and lay the floor mat in the rear footwell such that it fits neatly.

# To remove: push the corresponding seat on the first row of seats for‐
wards and remove the floor mat from the rear footwell.

Back to Contents279

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight

Light and sight

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Exterior lighting 281

Interior lighting 294

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer

296
system

Mirrors 299

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

Exterior lighting

Notes on adjusting the lights when you are ONCE THE HEADLAMPS HAVE BEEN CONVERTED:

driving abroad R Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.

R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
Vehicles with static LED headlamps: it is not necessary to convert the head‐
R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be
lamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries in which traffic drives
available.
on the other side of the road.

Vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT: as a convenience function, the headlamps will

automatically adjust when you cross the border into countries in which traffic Information about lighting systems and your
drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be responsibility
adjusted manually on the Low beam menu (/ page 293).
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the
THE AUTOMATIC LIGHT ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE: vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the
prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situa‐
R If automatic is selected on the Low beam menu tion.
R If navigation and the navigation position are available

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, CHECK THE HEADLAMP SETTING AND

CHANGE IT MANUALLY IF NECESSARY:

R If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only dis‐
play message is shown.
R If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is
shown.

281

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

Light switch For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking
lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are
OPERATING THE LIGHT SWITCH also switched on in the parking lights position.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will
be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING (EXCEPT STANDING AND PARKING LIGHTS)

WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE DRIVER'S DOOR IS
OPENED.

R Observe the notes on locator lighting (/ page 293).

SWITCHING ON ACCIDENT SCENE LIGHTING

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Switch on the hazard warning lights (/ page 68).

1 W Left-hand parking lights
2 X Right-hand parking lights # Turn the light switch from the à position to the L position.
3 T Standing lights and licence plate lighting The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off.
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) THE ACCIDENT SCENE LIGHTING WILL BE SWITCHED OFF IF:
5 L Low beam/high beam
6 R Activates or deactivates the rear fog light. R you switch off the hazard warning lights.
R you turn the light switch back to Ã.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the standing lights
will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. R the battery is insufficiently charged.

# Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance AUTOMATIC DRIVING LIGHTS FUNCTION
with the relevant legal stipulations. When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime
running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light condi‐
tions.
* NOTE
Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Do not have the standing lights switched on over a period of several
hours.

282

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

& WARNING
Operating the combination switch for the
Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor lights
visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped beam may not be
switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.

# In such cases, turn the light switch to L.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle
lighting.
SWITCHING THE REAR FOG LIGHT ON/OFF
Requirements
1 High beam
R The light switch is in the L or à position. 2 Turn signal light, right
3 Headlamp flashing
# Press button R. 4 Turn signal light, left

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
# Use the combination switch to select the desired function.
SWITCHES ON HIGH BEAM
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1.

When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam L will
be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.
SWITCHING OFF HIGH BEAM
# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the
direction of arrow 3.

283

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

HEADLAMP FLASHING # Press button 1.

# Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE HAZARD WARNING LAMPS WILL
SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY:
TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS
# To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of R The airbag has been deployed
resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. R An emergency stop has been initiated (/ page 445)
The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. R The vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a speed of more than
70 km/h to a standstill.
# To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the
point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
VEHICLES WITH ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST: When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off
automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard
R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to warning light system using the warning lamp button.
operate for the duration of the lane change.
R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was
not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate DIGITAL LIGHT adaptive functions
automatically.
FUNCTION OF DYNAMIC LOW BEAM
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It
lights also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

R Active Headlamps (/ page 285)

R Cornering Light (/ page 285)
R Motorway mode (/ page 285)
R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 286)
R Bad weather light (/ page 286)
R City lighting (/ page 286)
R Topographical compensation (/ page 286)

284

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

The system will be active only when it is dark. THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

ACTIVE HEADLAMPS FUNCTION R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the
steering wheel is turned
R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is
turned

Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on

both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position.
It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.
R The headlamps will follow your steering movements. MOTORWAY MODE FUNCTION
R Relevant areas will be better illuminated during a journey. Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, ena‐
bling better visibility.
The functions will be active when low beam is switched on.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are
driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the
light in advance.

CORNERING LIGHT FUNCTION

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IF A MOTORWAY JOURNEY IS DETECTED

BY MEANS OF:

R the vehicle's speed

R the multifunction camera
R the navigation system

The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide
angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for THE FUNCTION WILL NOT BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched
R at speeds below 80 km/h
on.

285

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

ENHANCED FOG LIGHT FUNCTION R In illuminated parts of urban areas

The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumi‐
nation of the edge of the carriageway. FUNCTION OF THE TOPOGRAPHICAL COMPENSATION
Based on available map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to
different road heights. This means that the headlamp range will remain virtu‐
ally constant when you are driving uphill or downhill.

% Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this

function.

ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS OF DIGITAL LIGHT

THE FUNCTION IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED UNDER THE FOLLOWING
DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting
CONDITIONS:
the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL
R At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on. LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations.

THE FUNCTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED UNDER THE FOLLOW‐ % The availability of the functions is country-dependent.
ING CONDITIONS:

R When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached. % The assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT may be an on-
R When the rear fog light is switched off. demand feature (/ page 109).

FUNCTION OF THE BAD WEATHER LIGHT

The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming THE SYSTEM WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
individual areas of the headlamps. There will be less glare for the driver and
R The light switch is in the à position.
other road users as a result.
R High beam is switched on.
THE CITY LIGHTING FUNCTION
City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a
broad distribution of light.

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R At low speeds

286

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

IF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST DETECTS A CORRESPONDING SITUATION, A TRI‐

% Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, ANGLE WILL BE PROJECTED ONTO THE ROAD IN THE FOLLOWING CASES
certain functions may be disabled due to different legal require‐ AT SPEEDS OF AT LEAST 30 KM/H:
ments, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When
you cross a border, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the R You are driving in the opposite direction to the permissible direction of
applicable requirements. travel, e.g. on a motorway slip road.
R You are driving towards a stop sign without reducing your speed.
SPOTLIGHT R You are driving towards a red traffic light without reducing your speed.

Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 461).

NOTES

The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps in
four short bursts at persons detected within the lane markings. You will also
be made aware of the position of the person by a projected symbol.

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:

IF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST DETECTS A ROADWORKS ZONE, THE SYSTEM
R You are driving outside illuminated areas. WILL PROVIDE SUPPORT AS FOLLOWS:
R The system detects a lane marking. R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter
a roadworks zone.
WARNINGS
R When you drive through a roadworks zone, guide lines that roughly
match the width of the vehicle will be projected onto the road. The guide
lines will be switched off temporarily on tight bends.

287

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least 30 km/h, the course of the
lane change as displayed will be brighter. This enables you to identify possible
dangers in the new lane at an early stage.

Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 446).

LANE KEEPING AND BLIND SPOT WARNING

Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 461).

COLLISION WARNING

AT SPEEDS OF AT LEAST 30 KM/H, A TRIANGLE THAT INDICATES A LANE

CORRECTION AND ITS DIRECTION WILL BE PROJECTED ONTO THE ROAD
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at least 30 km/h, a collision R You leave the lane unintentionally.
warning symbol will be projected onto the road. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist
(/ page 470).
Observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist (/ page 451).
R You switch on the turn signal light while an object or obstacle is in your
LANE CHANGE WARNING blind spot.
Observe the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 466).

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING DYNAMIC LOW BEAM

Requirements:

R The vehicle is switched on.

288

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

Multimedia system:
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 DIGITAL LIGHT
# Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam. ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST FUNCTION

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ENHANCED ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS

& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
% The availability of the functions is country-dependent.
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:

R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians

% This function is a Digital Extra (/ page 109). R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
# Select Supporting projections.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise
# Activate or deactivate the desired projections.
other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
# Activate or deactivate Welcome/farewell projection.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be
If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activated, a deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
high-resolution greeting or farewell will be played back for a short period users.
of time when the vehicle is opened or switched off. You can choose
between the Digital Rain and Star Wave sequences. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time.
% More information on locator lighting (/ page 293).
More information on the exterior switch-off delay time Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic
(/ page 293). conditions.

DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow

R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the
vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

289

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

% Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available on demand (/ page 109). % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen
near the overhead control panel.

SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST ON/OFF

& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:

R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians

R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES BETWEEN

THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT: On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise
other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.
R Low beam
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be
R High beam
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
users.
AT SPEEDS GREATER THAN 30 KM/H:
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
R If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automati‐ switch off the high beam in good time.
cally.

SWITCHING ON
HIGH BEAM WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING
# Turn the light switch to the à position.
CASES:

R At speeds below 25 km/h

# Switch on high beam using the combination switch.

R If other road users are detected If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will
light up on the driver's display.
R If street lighting is sufficient

290

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

SWITCHING OFF R if there is soiling on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
# Switch off high beam using the combination switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting
the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS FUNCTION

& WARNING
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:

R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians

R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to
BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT:
recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late. R Low beam

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be R Partial high beam
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road R High beam
users. R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam
# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
switch off the high beam in good time. ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light close to
the legally permitted maximum.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area.
traffic conditions. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver
apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: with reduced brightness.

R in poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow

291

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

AT SPEEDS BELOW 25 KM/H OR WHEN THERE IS SUFFICIENT STREET SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS ON/OFF
LIGHTING:
& WARNING
R Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically.
Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:
AT SPEEDS ABOVE 30 KM/H:
R road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on
automatically.
R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R If other road users are detected, partial high beam will be switched on
R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier
automatically.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to
AT SPEEDS BELOW 40 KM/H: recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late.
R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be
deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road
AT SPEEDS ABOVE 50 KM/H: users.
R If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not rain‐ # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and
ing heavily, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. switch off the high beam in good time.
R If other road users are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will automati‐
cally switch off and partial high beam will switch on.
SWITCHING ON
R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be
switched off automatically.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.

# Switch on high beam using the combination switch.

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the _ indicator lamp
% The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen
will light up on the driver's display. When partial high beam or high beam
near the overhead control panel.
is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up.
SWITCHING OFF
# Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

292

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Exterior lighting

Setting low beam

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 DIGITAL LIGHT 5 Low beam
# Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay

time
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
5 Exterior lighting switch-off delay
# Set a switch-off delay time.
When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be
activated for the set time.

Activating/deactivating locator lighting

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
# Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.

When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds
after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is
parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be
deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.

293

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Interior lighting

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting # To switch on or off: press button 1.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Ambient light

SETTING THE COLOUR

# Select Colour.
1 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off.
# Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.
2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off.
3 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/ # Set the desired colour or colour scheme.
off.
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS
# To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective # Select Brightness.
reading lamp 4 or 5.
# Adjust the brightness.
OPERATING UNIT INSIDE THE GRAB HANDLE (REAR)

% Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting

will automatically switch between day and night modes.

ACTIVATING THE BRIGHTNESS FOR ZONES

# Select Brightness.

# Switch off Link zones .

1 p Rear reading lamp
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately.

294

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Interior lighting

ACTIVATING EFFECTS WARNING WHEN EXITING

R If an object is detected in the blind spot while you are getting out of the
& WARNING
vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red.
Risk of accident if ambient lighting and active ambient lighting
effects are not switched on Further information on the exit warning (/ page 466).

The warning support effects are fully active only if the respective driv‐
ing or driving safety systems are switched on on the driving assistance
menu.
Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay
time on/off
# Ensure that the respective driving or driving safety systems are
switched on. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Interior/exterior lighting
5 Interior lighting switch-off delay
% Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; # Activate or deactivate Interior lighting switch-off delay.
you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers (/ page 416). If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a
short time after the end of the journey.
# Select Effects.

# Activate the desired effect.

% Different effects will be available depending on the vehicle

equipment.

MULTI-COLOUR ANIMATION

R The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.

CLIMATE

R If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour
of the ambient lighting will change briefly.

295

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 40).

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched
on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
1 g Windscreen wipers off # Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before
2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal changing the wiper blades.
3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION
5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
# Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately.
# Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the com‐
# í Single wipe: press button 1 as far as the point of resistance. bination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 296).
# î Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.
resistance.
% Depending on the time of production of the vehicle, different
variants of wiper blades may be used.

296

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)

# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it
will go.
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal
blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it position.
will go.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.
# Press release knob 2.
FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 1)
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in direction of arrow 3.
REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)
# Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.

297

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

# Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 # Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.
until release knob 2 engages.
# Switch on the vehicle.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
# Press button î on the combination switch.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. The wiper arms will return to their original positions.
# Switch on the vehicle. # Switch off the vehicle.
# Press button î on the combination switch. MAINTENANCE DISPLAY
There is a service indicator at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.
The wiper arms will return to their original positions.

# Switch off the vehicle.

FITTING THE WIPER BLADES (VARIANT 2)

# Remove protective film 1 from the service indicator.

When the colour of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the
wiper blades should be replaced.
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow
1.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking

position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.

298

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Mirrors

Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors & WARNING

Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the
& WARNING outside mirror
Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in
vehicle is in motion view are in fact closer than they appear.
YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING # Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the
R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering road users driving behind you.
wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion ADJUSTS THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS
# Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's
seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your
seat belt.

# Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mirror.

299

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Mirrors

% In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via
a natural head movement to the left or right(/ page 584).
& WARNING
Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror
# Use button 1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror. electrolyte

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS IN/OUT (VEHICLES WITH ELECTRI‐ Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror
CALLY FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS) breaks.
# Briefly press button 3. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or
% If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the out‐ be swallowed.
side mirrors must be moved briefly using button 3. Only then # If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the follow‐
will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. ing:
R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with
ENGAGING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS water and seek medical attention.
If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immedi‐
ately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek
# Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the
medical attention.
outside mirror into the correct position until it audibly engages.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
3. medical attention immediately.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside R Immediately change out of clothing which has been con‐
mirror will now be set to the correct position. taminated with electrolyte.
R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention
immediately.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the inside mirror and the outside mirror
on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a
headlamp hits the sensor on the inside mirror.

300

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Mirrors

SYSTEM LIMITS
Storing the parking position of the front-
THE SYSTEM WILL NOT GO INTO ANTI-DAZZLE MODE IF:
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
R The vehicle is switched off.
STORING
R Reverse gear is engaged.
R The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐

tion function
The parking position makes parking easier.

THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL SWIVEL DOWNWARDS

IN THE DIRECTION OF THE REAR WHEEL ON THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE WHEN:

R the parking position is stored (/ page 301). # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
R the front-passenger mirror is selected. # Engage reverse gear.
R reverse gear is engaged.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking posi‐
tion using button 1.
THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL MOVE BACK TO ITS
ORIGINAL POSITION WHEN: CALLING UP
# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
R you shift the transmission to another transmission position.
R you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h. # Engage reverse gear.
R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking
position.

301

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Light and sight Mirrors

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror

folding function
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing
# Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-in.

Back to Contents302

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control

Climate control
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Overview of climate control systems 304

Operating the climate control system 307

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control 6 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 311) or G Calls
up the fine particulate status display (/ page 308)
An interior filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment or Plug-in hybrid vehicles: Activates/deactivates pre-entry climate control
must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level 7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Only use filters approved by 8 r Reduces the temperature
Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified spe‐
9 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 309)
cialist workshop.
A ± Calls up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 308)
B Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 309)
Overview of the THERMATIC climate bar C J Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(/ page 307)

The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated.
% The airflow will automatically be reduced in the event of an
incoming call to keep noise sources to a minimum. The airflow
can be adjusted again via 4.

% The availability of individual functions depends on country and

equipment.

Front climate bar on the central display (example)

1 0 Synchronisation function (/ page 311)
Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar
j Switches climate control on/off (/ page 307)
2 Temperature indicator example: LOW is the lowest temperature setting The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated.
3 s Increases the temperature
4 J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 307)
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen

304

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

% The airflow will automatically be reduced in the event of an

incoming call to keep noise sources to a minimum. The airflow
can be adjusted again via 4.

% The availability of individual functions depends on country and

equipment.
Front climate bar on the central display (example)
1 0 Synchronisation function (/ page 311)
j Switches climate control on/off (/ page 307)
¿ Switches the A/C function on/off (/ page 309) Overview of the rear operating unit
2 Temperature indicator example: LOW is the lowest temperature setting The rear operating unit is available only for vehicles with the THERMOTRONIC
(driver's or front passenger side) air conditioning control panel.
3 s Increases the temperature (driver's or front passenger side)
4 J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (driver's or front
passenger side)(/ page 307)
5 ¬ Demists the windscreen
6 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 311) or G Calls
up the fine particulate status display (/ page 308)
or Activates/deactivates residual heat utilisation (/ page 312)
or Plug-in hybrid vehicles: Activates/deactivates pre-entry climate control
7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off
8 J Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control (driver's or front
passenger side) (/ page 307)
9 r Reduces the temperature (driver's or front passenger side) 1 Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents in the rear passenger
A Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (driver's side) (/ page 309) compartment, left
B ± Calls up the air-conditioning menu (/ page 308) 2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left
C Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode (front passenger side) 3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, left, or switches cli‐
(/ page 309) mate control on/off (/ page 307)
4 Switches climate control on/off (/ page 307)

305

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Overview of climate control systems

5 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, right, or switches

climate control on/off (/ page 307)
6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right
7 Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents in the rear passenger
compartment, right
8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 309)
9 Sets the air distribution to the right rear footwell vents
A Synchronisation is activated (/ page 311)
B Sets the air distribution to the rear left footwell vents
C Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, left (/ page 309)
The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operat‐
ing unit or the multimedia system (/ page 311) depending on the vehicle's
equipment.

306

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off % If you switch off climate control by pressing j, fragrancing, if
enabled, will also be switched off automatically.
SWITCHING ON CLIMATE CONTROL
# Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J on the climate bar on the
central display.
% If climate control is switched off via j, OFF will be shown on
or the climate bar.

# Press and hold ±.

or Switching climate control on/off via the rear

# Select ± and then press j.
operating unit
SWITCHING ON
or

# Press Ã.
SWITCHING OFF CLIMATE CONTROL
# Set the airflow to level 0 via J on the climate bar on the central
display.

or

# Press j.
If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly.
Switch climate control off only briefly.

# Press button 4.

307

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

or
Calling up the air conditioning menu using the
# Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using buttons 3 and 5. climate bar
or The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar
is always shown on the lower edge of the central display.
# Press buttons 2, 6, 1 or 7.
# Select the Climate menu entry in the air conditioning bar.
SWITCHING OFF
The First row of seats menu is opened.
# Press button 4.
JUMPING DIRECTLY TO THE AIR QUALITY MENU
or # Select the G fine particle status display in the air conditioning bar.
# Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons 3 and 5. The Air quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air clean‐
ing taking place is shown.

% If rear climate control is switched off via button 4, OFF will be

shown on the displays.
% The fine particle status display is on the home screen next to the
temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current
particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle.
The measurement values are shown with the µg/m3 units (micro‐
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via grammes per cubic metre).
the climate bar
The fine particle value measured in the vehicle interior can be influenced by
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. the incoming air in heating mode, especially at a high blower setting. This can
lead to an unrepresentative display of the fine particle value.
# Press ¿ on the climate bar on the central display.

% The availability of individual functions depends on the country

% Switch off the A/C function only briefly, otherwise the windows
and equipment.
may mist up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when
cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

308

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

Demisting the windscreen via the climate bar Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode
is active. This is not indicative of a fault.
SWITCHING ON
# Press ¬ on the climate bar on the central display.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
SWITCHING OFF
# Press ¬, Ã or j on the climate bar on the central dis‐ In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior temperature is controlled automati‐
play. cally and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

or # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

# Set the airflow to 0.

% You can increase or reduce the airflow via a controller by press‐
ing J on the climate bar of the multimedia system. The air‐
% When the demist function is activated via ¬, some functions
flow will automatically be reduced in the event of an incoming
(e.g. the temperature setting or the air distribution) will be auto‐
call. You will still be able to adjust the airflow manually by
matically deactivated.
pressing J. In automatic mode, five levels can be set via the
controller and seven levels can be set without automatic mode.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via # To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust
the air-conditioning menu the air distribution, e.g. P.

Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats Setting climate control to automatic mode via
Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehu‐ the rear operating unit
midification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activa‐
ted. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the In automatic mode, the temperature is automatically regulated by the temper‐
central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central ature of the dispensed air and the airflow.
display.

# Select A/C (A/C).

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up
more quickly.

309

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

Setting air distribution and air vents using the

air conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu

SETTING THE AIR DISTRIBUTION

# Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.

# Select an air distribution option using the ¯, P or O buttons.

# Set the airflow.

# Press button 1.

% When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one

Overview of the air distribution settings zone is always active. However, several air distribution options
can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate
THE SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY INDICATE THE VENTS control for the vehicle interior and the footwells simultaneously.
THROUGH WHICH THE AIRFLOW IS BEING DIRECTED: In doing so, the ¯ climate control for the windscreen can
only be selected for the first seat row. When automatic mode
¯ Demister vents is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automati‐
cally deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched
P Centre air vents
off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved.
O Footwell vents

310

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

Setting rear climate control using the air con‐ Switching the synchronisation function on/off
ditioning menu via the air-conditioning menu
Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 4 Climate menu 5 First row of seats

SETTING THE TEMPERATURE The synchronisation function controls the climate control centrally. The driv‐
er's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically
# Select Second row of seats.
adopted for each climate zone.
# Set the temperature.
# Select SYNC (SYNC).
SETTING THE AIRFLOW
# Select Second row of seats.
Demisting the windows
# Set the air flow with s or r.
WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE INSIDE
CONTROLLING THE REAR CLIMATE CONTROL AUTOMATICALLY
# Pressà on the climate bar on the central display.
# Select AUTO.
# If the windows remain misted up: press ¬ on the climate bar on the
% When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the central display.
temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. To deacti‐ WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE OUTSIDE
vate the defrost function, press either ¬, Ã or j set the # Switch on the windscreen wipers.
air flow to level 0 (/ page 309).
# Pressà on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

REQUIREMENTS:

R The fine particulate status display is visible on the climate bar.

311

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

# Press g on the climate bar on the central display.

Activating/deactivating ionisation
The interior air will be recirculated.
Multimedia system:
Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while. 4 Climate menu 5 Air quality
When ionisation is activated, the air in the vehicle interior is enriched with
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist negatively charged oxygen ions. These can promote the well-being of the
up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. vehicle occupants.

# Select Ionisation.

Switching residual heat mode on/off via the

% The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activa‐
climate bar ted or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function
is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed.
Requirements:

R The residual heat function is available.

R The vehicle is parked. Fragrance system
R The coolant temperature is sufficiently high.
SETTING THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue Requirements
heating the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the tempera‐
R The THERMATIC (2-zone) or THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control
ture set.
panel is available.
# To switch on or off: select Residual heat on the climate bar of the central R The climate control system is switched on.
display. R The glove compartment is closed.
The residual heat function will automatically switch off after a while. R A flacon is inserted.

% If residual heat utilisation is activated, the two buttons for set‐ Multimedia system:
ting the temperature and air distribution will automatically be 4 Climate menu 5 Air quality
deactivated. The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle
interior from a flacon located in the glove box.

312

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

# Select Air freshener.

# Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.

INSERTING OR REMOVING THE FLACON OF THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM

& WARNING
Risk of injury from liquid perfume
If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it
could come into contact with their eyes.

# Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

1 Cap
# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been
2 Flacon
drunk.
# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
# If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin,
rinse your eyes with clean water. # To remove: After opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven
seconds and pull out the flacon.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.
If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the
manufacturers' safety notes on the perfume packaging.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons empty and do not refill it.
: Full flacons may not be disposed of with household waste. REFILLABLE FLACON
# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
#
Full flacons must be handed in at a pollutant collection
point. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.

# Screw the cap back onto the flacon.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the
separate information sheet attached to the flacon.

313

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
TIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL
unlocked IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE
OPERATION:
FUNCTION OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS
UNLOCKED R Fragrancing
The seats can be briefly pre-heated or pre-cooled before you get into the R Ionisation
vehicle.
SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS
UNLOCKED IN THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
% This function is available only in plug-in hybrid vehicles and
Multimedia system:
some models with a 48 V on-board electrical system.
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐

TIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED DURING PRE-COOLING: % This function is available only for plug-in hybrid vehicles.

R Automatic climate control

In some models with 48 V on-board electrical systems, the pre-entry climate
R Blower control function can be activated only when the vehicle is unlocked via the
R Seat ventilation Mercedes-Benz app. The following requirements must be fulfilled:

R The vehicle has a wireless connection.

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
TIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED DURING PRE-HEATING:

R Automatic climate control # Activate or deactivate the function.

R Blower
SELECTING SEATS
R Seat heating # Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right.
R Steering wheel heater
The seat-specific functions of pre-entry climate control (e.g. seat heat‐
R Mirror heater ing) will be performed for the selected seats.
R Rear window heater
When pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar on the
central display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated
vehicle.

314

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE

VEHICLE IS UNLOCKED
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
Requirements: PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME FUNCTION

% This function is available only in plug-in hybrid vehicles and & WARNING
some models with a 48 V on-board electrical system. Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
R The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is charged sufficiently.
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
R The function has been activated via the multimedia system or the
Mercedes-Benz app. # Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
vehicle.
# To switch on: unlock the vehicle.
The climate control functions are activated for up to five minutes for
pre-heating and pre-cooling. & WARNING
Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked cannot be activated Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion
more than three times when the vehicle is switched off. and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

# To switch off: press & on the climate bar on the central display, In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity
or switch off via the Mercedes-Benz app in some models with a 48 V or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
on-board electrical system. they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN STARTED:

R Seat heating To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐
R Seat ventilation ted after it has been switched on repeatedly.
R Fragrancing
R Ionisation % The pre-entry climate control at departure time function is avail‐
able only for plug-in hybrid vehicles.

315

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventilated or cooled to the set SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL AT DEPARTURE TIME VIA THE
temperature when the vehicle is parked. MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
Multimedia system:
When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority will be
4 Climate menu 5 Pre-entry climate ctrl
given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum state of
charge. SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME

THE RUNNING TIME OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL MAY BE REDUCED

IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES: % The option to adjust the pre-entry climate control at departure
time function via the multimedia system is available only for
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment. plug-in hybrid vehicles.
R The high-voltage battery is not fully charged.

% The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry cli‐
With active pre-entry climate control, the state of charge of the high-voltage
mate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state
battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.
of charge and range at the time selected. Additional information
If available, seat ventilation will be activated in the cooling and ventilation on the charging settings: (/ page 601)
modes.
# Select Edit departure time ´.
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
TIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED IN HEATING MODE, IF AVAILABLE: # Select a departure time or set a new departure time.
R Seat heating SETTING REPEAT DAYS
R Steering wheel heater # Select Edit departure time ´.
R Mirror heater
# Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding days on
R Rear window heater which this departure time is to apply.

When the set temperature changes, climate control mode will automatically
# Press OK to confirm.
switch: SELECTING SEATS
# Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right.
R from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, or
Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.
R from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode, or
R from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode

316

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

When pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar on the Requirements:
central display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated
vehicle. If the departure time is selected, the LED on the climate bar of the R The vehicle has a wireless connection.
central display will light up yellow. R The vehicle is linked to the user's Mercedes-Benz account.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPAR‐

TURE TIME Plug-in hybrid vehicles:

R The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently.

& WARNING R The function has been activated via the multimedia system.
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system:
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. R The 48 V battery is charged sufficiently.
# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the
vehicle. # To switch on: Plug-in hybrid vehicles: set the departure time
(/ page 316).
Pre-entry climate control for departure time will switch on a maximum of
WARNING 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for
&
Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating another five minutes if departure is delayed.

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: pre-entry climate control
and seat backrest padding to become very hot. at departure time can be activated via the Mercedes-Benz app. Pre-entry
climate control will switch on a maximum of five minutes before the
In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity selected departure time.
or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
# Switching off pre-entry climate control at departure time ahead of
time:
# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. R Press & on the climate bar on the central display.
R Switch off the preselection of the time on the climate menu.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐ R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: switch off the func‐
ted after it has been switched on repeatedly. tion via the Mercedes-Benz app.

317

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

IF PRESENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE

THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN STARTED: & WARNING
Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating
R Seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion
R Seat ventilation and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNC‐
or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or
TIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL
they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE
OPERATION: # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.
R Fragrancing
R Ionisation To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactiva‐
ted after it has been switched on repeatedly.

Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry Requirements:

climate control R The vehicle is switched off.

Air-conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes in the

& WARNING
case of plug-in hybrids, e.g. if the journey is interrupted.
Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the
vehicle # Press & on the climate bar on the central display.
If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to The red or blue indicator lamp below & on the climate bar on the
intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. central display will light up or go out.
# Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the # Set the temperature using the arrows w on the climate bar on the
vehicle. central display.
THE COLOURS OF THE INDICATOR LAMP HAVE THE FOLLOWING MEAN‐
INGS:

R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.

R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.

318

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

R Yellow: the departure time is preselected. SWITCHING THE STATIONARY HEATER/VENTILATION ON/OFF VIA THE
CONTROL PANEL

Stationary heater/ventilation & DANGER

STATIONARY HEATER/VENTILATION FUNCTION Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poison‐
ous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This
% The following function is equipment-dependent.
is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for
example.
R The air inside the vehicle will be heated or ventilated to the set tempera‐
ture.
# Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces
without an air extraction system, e.g. in garages.
R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below
the outside temperature. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from
R If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode will automatically snow when the vehicle or the auxiliary heating is running.
switch to heating mode or heating mode will automatically switch to
ventilation mode.
# Open a door or a roof hatch on the windward side of the
vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated behind the right
front wheel.
& WARNING
Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust
gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

# When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:

R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flamma‐
ble materials.
R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater
exhaust pipe unhindered.
R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flam‐
mable materials.

319

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

* NOTE
Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary venti‐
lation operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the bat‐
tery.

# After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer

period of time.

Requirements:
# Set the temperature using the s and r arrows on the climate bar
on the central display.
% The following function is equipment-dependent.
# Press button 1.
R The vehicle has a stationary heater. The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out.
R The outside temperature is below 15°C. # Set the function via the Mercedes-Benz app.
R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
THE COLOURS OF THE INDICATOR LAMP HAVE THE FOLLOWING MEAN‐
INGS:
On some models with a 48 V on-board electrical system, the auxiliary heating
function can be activated when the vehicle is unlocked via the Mercedes-Benz R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
app. The following requirements must be fulfilled: R Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected.
R The vehicle has a wireless connection.
R The vehicle is linked to the user's Mercedes-Benz account.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

SETTING THE STATIONARY HEATER/VENTILATION VIA THE MULTIMEDIA

% If the fill level of the fuel tank is too low, auxiliary heating mode SYSTEM
may be restricted.
Requirements:

R The vehicle has a stationary heater.

320

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

Multimedia system:
4 Climate menu 5 Stationary heater

SELECTING THE DEPARTURE TIME

# Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME
# Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
# To open or close: hold the centre of air vent 1 and turn it to the left
# Select the pen beside the time. (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.
# Set a time. # To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of air vent 1 and move it
up or down or to the left or right.

Air vents ADJUSTING THE REAR AIR VENTS

ADJUSTING THE FRONT AIR VENTS & WARNING

Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
& WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a suffi‐
cient distance from the air vents.
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a suffi‐
cient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle
interior.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle
interior.

TO GUARANTEE THE FLOW OF FRESH AIR THROUGH THE AIR VENTS INTO
THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, NOTE THE FOLLOWING:

R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (/ page 721).

321

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Climate control Operating the climate control system

# To open or close: turn controller 1 to the left or right as far as it will

go.

# To set the airflow direction: hold the centre of controller 1 and move
it up or down or to the left or right.

Back to Contents322

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking

Driving and parking

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Driving 324 Driving and driving safety systems 416

DYNAMIC SELECT 353 Trailer hitch 508

Automatic transmission 361 Bicycle rack function 515

Function of 4MATIC 371 Vehicle towing instructions 518

Refuelling 372

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in

381
hybrid)

Parking 403

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

Driving

Notes on plug-in hybrids & DANGER

NOTES ON PLUG-IN HYBRID OPERATION Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the
high-voltage battery

WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.
&
Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage # Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual
battery odours, smoke or burn marks.
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electro‐
lyte and gases may leak out. # Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at
a sufficient distance.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
# Call the fire service.
# Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek
medical attention straight away.
The hybrid system combines a combustion engine with an electric motor.

CHARACTERISTICS WHEN THE VEHICLE IS AT A STANDSTILL:

R The combustion engine will generally be switched off.

R Idle speed will occur only in certain instances.

CHARACTERISTICS WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STARTED:

R If the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, it will be possible to

start the vehicle with the electric drive system without the combustion
engine (noiseless start).

324

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R If the high-voltage battery for the electric drive system is not sufficiently R The high-voltage battery will be charged.
charged or the vehicle conditions for a silent start are not met, the
vehicle will start with the combustion engine.
NOTES ON ELECTRIC MODE:

R Vehicles with hybrid systems generate significantly less noise when sta‐
% Depending on the system, it may be that even though the tionary and when being driven than vehicles with combustion engines.
high-voltage battery is charged, electric mode has restricted or R When you drive in electric mode, the vehicle may not be heard by other
no availability. When the combustion engine has run for long road users owing to the significantly reduced operating noise.
enough and the ambient conditions permit, electric mode will be
It is for this reason that the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator,
available without restriction once more.
which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety
system is prescribed by law.
CHARACTERISTICS WITH MODERATE POWER OUTPUT REQUESTS: The external noise produced by the sound generator can be heard in the
vehicle interior at low speeds and does not constitute a malfunction.
R The combustion engine will be switched off as often as possible during a
journey. R If not all the vehicle conditions for electric mode are met, the combus‐
tion engine will be switched on.
R Depending on the drive program selected and the state of charge of the
high-voltage battery, the vehicle can be accelerated under electric power R Performance restrictions in electric mode are possible as a result of the
up to a speed of approximately 140 km/h. operating temperature of the high-voltage battery and drive system, the
ambient temperature and ageing of the high-voltage battery.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles can be accelerated under electric power up to a
speed of approximately 125 km/h. R In electric mode, the maximum power will not be permanently available
and may drop to continuous output.

CHARACTERISTICS WITH HIGH POWER OUTPUT REQUESTS:

R The electric motor will support the combustion engine (boost effect), e.g.
% Vehicles with diesel particulate filters: during regeneration of
when the vehicle is pulling away or accelerating. the diesel particulate filter, drive programs may be unavailable
or restricted and the state of charge of the high-voltage battery
R The high-voltage battery will be discharged.
may change.

CHARACTERISTICS WHEN THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL IS RELEASED DUR‐

NOTES ON THE ACOUSTIC VEHICLE ALERTING SYSTEM:
ING THE JOURNEY:
R The sound generator will produce speed-dependent driving noises when
R The electric motor will be operated as an alternator when in overrun
the vehicle is driving forwards or reversing up to a speed of approx‐
mode and during braking.
imately 30 km/h.

325

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R This will help other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to MANUALLY DISCONNECTING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL
hear your vehicle better. SYSTEM
R From a speed of 20 km/h, the acoustic vehicle alerting system will gradu‐
ally switch off. & DANGER
R The sound generator will be off when the vehicle is stationary. Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged compo‐
nents of the high-voltage on-board electrical system
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high
% Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the sound generator of the acoustic voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-
vehicle alerting system will also produce a selectable noise while board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may
the vehicle is stationary. be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components
may cause a fire.

In the event of an accident or impact to the underbody, components of

the high-voltage on-board electrical system may be damaged although
the damage is not visible.

# Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board

electrical system.

# Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-

board electrical system components have been modified or
damaged.

# Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-

board electrical system.

# After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-

voltage on-board electrical system.

# After an accident, have the vehicle transported away.

# Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electri‐

cal system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary.

326

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

Requirements # Observe additional label 3 for high-voltage disconnect device

2.
ONLY DISCONNECT THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
MANUALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: # Press release tab 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull it out.

R The restraint system warning lamp 6 lights up in the driver display, # Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the direction of the arrow until
e.g. after an accident. it engages.
R The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and restraint system The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched off.
components have not been triggered.
All work on the hybrid drive system– (including after disconnecting the high-
voltage on-board electrical system manually–) may only be carried out in a
OPERATING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE DISCONNECT DEVICE
qualified specialist workshop.

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Shift the transmission to position j.

# Apply the electric parking brake.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Open the bonnet.

327

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle R Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: a Digital Vehicle Key with drive
authorisation is detected.
R The brake pedal is not depressed.
& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
vehicle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR

R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
# To switch on the power supply: press button 1 once.
R releasing the parking brake.
You can, for example, switch on the windscreen wipers.
R change the gearbox setting.
R start the vehicle. THE POWER SUPPLY WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS ARE MET:
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
R You open the driver's door.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
R You press button 1 twice more.
and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. # To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice.
Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver display.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. THE VEHICLE WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING
Requirements: CONDITIONS IS MET:

R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised. R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in
position j or the electric parking brake is applied.

328

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R You press button 1 once.

& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button vehicle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
results in poisoning.

# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

R releasing the parking brake.

R change the gearbox setting.
& WARNING
Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment R start the vehicle.
or on the exhaust system # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Flammable materials may ignite.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
# Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign and lock the vehicle.
materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust sys‐
tem. # Keep the key out of reach of children.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

Requirements:

R The key is in the vehicle and is recognised.

R Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: a Digital Vehicle Key with drive
authorisation is detected.

329

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

Starting the vehicle in emergency operation

mode

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
results in poisoning.

# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,

# Shift the transmission to position j or i. running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equip‐ WARNING
&
ment and press button 1 once. Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment
or on the exhaust system
# If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked
space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver display: Flammable materials may ignite.
start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation # Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign
mode) (/ page 330).
materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust sys‐
tem.
% You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and
hold button 1 for about three seconds or press button 1 three
times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes
concerning this under "Driving tips" (/ page 336).

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on

the driver display.

330

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
vehicle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR

R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample. # Remove key 1 from the key ring.

# Place key 1 on symbol in marked space 2.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
The vehicle will start after a short time.
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
If you remove key 1 from marked space 2, it will still be possible
R releasing the parking brake. to continue driving the vehicle. For further engine starts, however, key
R change the gearbox setting. 1 must be located on symbol in marked space 2 during the entire
journey.
R start the vehicle.
# Have key 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
IF THE VEHICLE DOES NOT START:
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you # Place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there.
and lock the vehicle.
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop but‐
# Keep the key out of reach of children.
ton.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. % You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/
START THE VEHICLE WITH THE KEY IN THE STOWAGE SPACE. stop button (/ page 328).
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See
Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on
the vehicle in emergency operation mode. the driver display.

331

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IN THE STOW‐
AGE SPACE
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv‐
REQUIREMENTS: ices
R The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehicle Key" pre-installation. COOLING OR HEATING THE VEHICLE INTERIOR BEFORE STARTING A
JOURNEY
R A Digital Vehicle Key with drive authorisation is detected.
You can cool or heat the vehicle interior before starting a journey.

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE:

% Alternatively, you can use the vehicle key for emergency opera‐
tion mode. R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the vehicle key engine starting via smartphone.
about your person in case of function restrictions. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
If the vehicle does not start and the Searching for key in stowage tray or R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket… See Owner's Manual display
message appears on the driver display, you can start the vehicle in emergency
operation mode. % Further information can be found in the Mercedes-Benz App.

CHARGING THE STARTER BATTERY BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY

You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of
the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone
to charge the battery. The vehicle will automatically be switched off after ten
minutes.

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE:

# Place the Digital Vehicle Key in marked space 1.
R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow
# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop but‐ engine starting via smartphone.
ton. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
It may take a few seconds until the engine starts. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
# When the Key not detected display message appears on the driver dis‐
play, press the Start/Stop button again.

332

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

STARTING THE VEHICLE (REMOTE ONLINE)

& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
& DANGER
vehicle
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and IN PARTICULAR
results in poisoning. R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater, R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

& WARNING MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment
or on the exhaust system
R releasing the parking brake.
R change the gearbox setting.
Flammable materials may ignite.
R start the vehicle.
# Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign
materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust sys‐ # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
tem.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
and lock the vehicle.

WARNING
# Keep the key out of reach of children.
&
Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the
engine This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintention‐
Requirements:
ally during service or maintenance work.
R Park position j is selected.
# Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before
carrying out maintenance or repair work. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
R The hazard warning light system is switched off.
R The bonnet is closed.

333

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R The doors are closed and locked. R Then shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter.
R Do not shift down manually in order to brake.
# Start the vehicle using your smartphone. R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. by driving at full throttle.
After every vehicle start, the engine will run for ten minutes. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
R Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to
You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must full speed after 1500 km.
start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle with your
smartphone again.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been
YOU CAN SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE AT ANY TIME AS FOLLOWS: replaced.

R Via the Mercedes-Benz App PLEASE ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING RUNNING-IN NOTES:
R By pressing the Ü or s button on the key
R In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust auto‐
matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has
been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached
% Further information can be found in the Mercedes-Benz App. when this teaching-in process has concluded.
R Brake pads, brake discs and tyres that are either new or have been
SECURING THE ENGINE AGAINST STARTING BEFORE CARRYING OUT replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after driving sev‐
MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR WORK: eral hundred kilometres. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
# Switch on the hazard warning light system or unlock the doors. applying greater force to the brake pedal.

# Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Engine output and engine torque (Mercedes-
Running-in notes AMG vehicles)
TO PRESERVE THE ENGINE DURING THE FIRST 1500 KM: % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine
R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values
within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances
R Do not drive faster than 140 km/h.
(basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).
R Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;.
Plug-in hybrid: use drive program Î, n or o.

334

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

INFLUENCING VARIABLES INCLUDE: Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 419).

R Location above sea level

R Fuel quality Pulling away with optimised acceleration
R Outside temperature
R Engine and gearbox operating temperature WARNING
&
Risk of skidding and accidents due to wheelspin
The p engine operating temperature warning lamp will remain lit until If you pull away with optimised acceleration, individual wheels could
the engine and the gearbox have reached their operating temperature. The spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.
temperature indicators on the driver display will also be blue.
There is a higher risk of skidding and accidents when ESP® is deactiva‐
Engine output and engine torque will be reduced. Factor this into your driving ted in particular.
style.
# Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the vicin‐
When the pengine operating temperature warning lamp goes out and the ity of the vehicle.
temperature indicators are white, full engine output and engine torque will be
available.
Requirements

% If the temperature indicators on the driver display are red, the R The vehicle is run in (/ page 334).
temperatures are too high. Engine output and engine torque will R The vehicle and tyres are in good condition.
be reduced again. Factor this into your driving style and observe
R The road surface is high-grip.
the warning lamps and display messages that are shown on the
driver display. R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

Notes on optimised acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best
possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill.

Do not use optimised acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could

spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of
skidding and/or accident.

335

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

* NOTE % After you pull away with optimised acceleration, components

Increased wear due to optimised acceleration of the drivetrain may become very hot, which means that opti‐
mised acceleration values may be reached again only after a few
When pulling away with optimised acceleration, all components of the
minutes.
drivetrain are subjected to a very high load.

This can lead to increased component wear.

# Do not always pull away with optimised acceleration. Notes on driving

# Engage the h drive position (/ page 366). & WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell
# Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi‐ Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a
tion. depressed pedal.
# Select drive program C(/ page 356, 357). This will jeopardise the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Deactivating ESP® (/ page 423). # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get
into the driver's footwell.
# Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot.
# Make sure that there is always sufficient clearance for the
# Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot. pedals.
# After no more than five seconds, quickly take your left foot off the brake, # Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed.
but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on
top of one another.
# Switch on ESP® once the acceleration procedure is complete.
ENDING OPTIMISED ACCELERATION
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

# Reactivate ESP®.

336

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

& WARNING & DANGER

Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
INCORRECT FOOTWEAR INCLUDES, FOR EXAMPLE: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
R shoes with platform soles results in poisoning.
R shoes with high heels
# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
R slippers
running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
There is a risk of an accident.

# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the

pedals safely. & WARNING
Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slip‐
pery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine
& WARNING braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.
Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving
If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted # Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the
or no longer available. engine braking effect.

This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boost‐
ing, for example.
& DANGER
You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases
example. If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poison‐
ous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This
# Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.
is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.

# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from
snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.

# Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the
wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

337

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull
system may overheat. away immediately.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the
engine has reached its operating temperature.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at

the same time while driving. * NOTE
Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring.
* NOTE
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.
Engine damage due to excessive engine speed
You will damage the engine if you drive at excessive engine speeds. # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

# Do not drive at engine speeds in the red area of the rev coun‐ # Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
ter, or shown in red in the driver display. workshop.

* NOTE * NOTE
Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips
brake pedal The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is
# Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving. used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery.

# To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery.
good time.

338

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R Drive with care. Avoid sudden starting, braking and steering manoeuvres
* NOTE or fast cornering.
Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐ R If trailer operation is permitted, observe the notes on trailer operation
ble clearance height (/ page 508).
If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance
height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged. NOTES ON DRIVING ON ROADS TREATED WITH DE-ICING SALT
The braking effect is limited on road surfaces treated with de-icing salt.
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height.
PLEASE THEREFORE BEAR IN MIND THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
drive in. R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brake linings, the braking
distance can increase considerably or braking may be one-sided.
# Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐ R Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead.
structures or other carrier systems into account.

REMOVE SALT BUILD-UP AS FOLLOWS:

% Please bear in mind that all speed values stated in this Owner's R Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions
Manual are approximate values and are subject to a certain toler‐ R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when
ance. starting the next journey

NOTES ON AQUAPLANING
OBSERVE THE NOTES ON DRIVING WITH A ROOF LOAD, TRAILER OR
Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road
FULLY LADEN VEHICLE.
surface.
Driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer, or with the vehicle fully laden
or occupied, changes the handling and steering characteristics of your vehicle. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES DURING HEAVY PRECIPITATION OR IN
CONDITIONS IN WHICH AQUAPLANING MAY OCCUR:
THEREFORE PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
R Reduce speed.
R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and trailer load. Also observe
the information in the technical data in this respect. R Avoid tyre ruts.
R Distribute the roof load and vehicle load evenly, and place heavy objects R Avoid sudden steering movements.
at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle R Brake carefully.
(/ page 251).

339

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R more direct steering resulting in improved control of the vehicle

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres
R improved cornering of the vehicle
(/ page 42).

NOTES ON DRIVING THROUGH WATER ON THE ROAD Information on the AMG ceramic high-per‐
Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. formance composite brake system
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.
The brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF YOU NEED TO DRIVE THROUGH WATER: braking. This effect can also occur after washing the vehicle.

R The water, when calm, should reach no higher than the lower edge of the THE NOISE DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
vehicle body. R speed
R Drive at a walking pace at most, otherwise water may enter the vehicle R brake force
interior or engine compartment.
R environmental conditions, e.g. temperature and air humidity
R Vehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which
may exceed the maximum permissible depth of water.

% Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist work‐

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, shop after it has been subjected to extreme loads.
paying attention to the traffic conditions, until the braking effect has been fully
restored.

ECO start/stop function

Function of rear axle steering
ECO START/STOP FUNCTION
The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear
axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of % Plug-in hybrid: this function is not available.
the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater mobility and
improved driving stability for the vehicle.

REAR AXLE STEERING HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS: % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not
available in all drive programs. Observe the status indicator on
R reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking the driver display concerning this.
effort

340

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

THE ENGINE WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOW‐ R The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter
ING SITUATIONS IF ALL VEHICLE CONDITIONS FOR AN AUTOMATIC glide mode at 20 km/h.
ENGINE STOP ARE MET:

R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i. ECO START/STOP FUNCTION SYMBOLS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY:
R You depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed. R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the
engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
IF THE SYSTEM HAS DETECTED ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not
THE ENGINE WILL NOT STOP: all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
R Neither the è nor the ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a
R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.
standstill: a stop inhibitor to prevent a short stop has been detected (e.g.
R The vehicle that stopped in front of you pulls away again. a stop sign).
R You manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or
there is a malfunction.
This prevents the engine from stopping briefly.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave
% If the system detects a stop inhibitor to prevent a short stop (e.g. the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In
a stop sign), the engine will not stop. addition, the following display message will appear on the driver display:
If you activate the HOLD function or engage park position j, the
Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before exiting
engine can be switched off in spite of such a stop inhibitor.
If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after
THE ENGINE WILL RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: three minutes.

R You engage transmission position h or k.

R You depress the accelerator pedal.
R The vehicle requires an automatic engine start.
R You release the brake pedal.
R You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does
not roll.

341

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

SWITCHING THE ECO START/STOP FUNCTION ON/OFF

# Press upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until it displays the

è symbol.

% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are
# Press button 1.
displayed can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 351).
An indicator will appear on the driver display when you switch the ECO
start/stop function on/off.
# Press corresponding button 2.

% s will be shown permanently on the driver display while the THE SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENT STATUS OF THE ECO START/
STOP FUNCTION:
ECO start/stop function is deactivated.
R s (red): switched off
SWITCHING THE ECO START/STOP FUNCTION ON/OFF (MERCEDES-AMG R è (green): activated
VEHICLES) R ç (yellow): inactive
Observe the notes on the ECO start/stop function in the vehicle Owner's
Manual.

% Plug-in hybrid: the ECO start/stop function is not availa‐

ble.

% You can also switch the ECO start/stop function on or off via the
start/stop button or via the multimedia system.

342

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

ECO display function % You can call up the ECO display function via the Classic menu
(/ page 524).

ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-

board electrical system)
For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist information (/ page 347).
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's
display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of
your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO display menu shows a ball
% ECO Assist is active only in drive programs ; and A.
2 that will roll forwards or backwards in the direction of travel on a stylised
road according to the driving characteristics. ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the
system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel
Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style 3. and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears
Ball 2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel
the ball will light up in orange. economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill
gradient.
THE ECO DISPLAY ASSESSES THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA FOR AN ECO‐
NOMICAL DRIVING STYLE: If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you will also
need to brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for
R Coasting at the right times
example, you start driving again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the
R consistent speed vehicle in front is very short.
R moderate acceleration

The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using
stars 1. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other
if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the
background.

343

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

IN ADDITION TO A VEHICLE IN FRONT ¥, ECO ASSIST CAN DETECT THE

FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS 2 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIP‐
MENT:

~ Roundabout

¢ Sharp bend

1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation & Junction

2 Route event ahead £ T-junction
If in drive program ; a route event or vehicle that requires an adjustment
¤ Downhill gradient
of your driving style for more efficiency is detected ahead, corresponding
symbol 2 and the ý symbol (grey) will be displayed. ¦ Speed limit
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý symbol will turn green and recu‐
peration in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient,
also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead % In drive program A, ECO Assist will react only to the "vehicle
(not for a vehicle in front) and you then press the accelerator pedal again, you in front" route event without displaying the ¥ route event or
will end control by ECO Assist. ý recommendation.

THE ECO ASSIST DISPLAY WILL BE HIDDEN AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING

CASES: SYSTEM LIMITS
If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist
R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time. will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available when
R You depress the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening for a route guidance is not active. Not all information and traffic situations can be
route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front). foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.
R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
ahead. from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐

ING SITUATIONS:

R if there is poor visibility, e.g. owing to insufficient illumination of the

road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray

344

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections The deceleration in overrun mode may not be sufficient depending on the
R if the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera driving situation. There is no deceleration to a standstill. Also brake with the
service brake if necessary. Always adapt your speed to the driving situation
R if the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured
and keep sufficient distance.
R if road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient
lighting, or because they are obscured
% If you brake heavily, the mechanical brake is also used. This
R if the digital road map of the navigation system has incorrect or outdated
means that the maximum recuperation energy cannot be recov‐
information
ered. The more proactively you accelerate and brake, the more
R if signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes efficiently energy can be recuperated.
R if the radar sensors are dirty or obscured
R when you drive on roads with steep gradients
SYSTEM LIMITS
R if there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles
WITH RECUPERATION IN OVERRUN MODE, THE BRAKING EFFECT OF THE
ELECTRIC MOTOR IS ONLY REDUCED OR NON-EXISTENT IN THE FOLLOW‐
Recuperative brake system (plug-in hybrid) ING SITUATIONS:

R when the high-voltage battery state of charge increases

FUNCTION OF THE REGENERATIVE BRAKE SYSTEM
R if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature

% The function is only available for plug-in hybrids. MANUALLY SETTING REGENERATIVE DECELERATION

The regenerative brake system converts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec‐ % The function is only available for a plug-in hybrid.
trical energy during overrun mode and braking. You can use the steering wheel gearshift paddles to adjust the
intensity of recuperation in overrun mode in drive programs
Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motor is operated n, o and Î in transmission position h.
as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge
the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you take your foot off the
accelerator while driving in transmission position h or k, recuperation starts
in overrun mode.

The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when
coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.

345

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

THE FOLLOWING RECUPERATION LEVELS ARE AVAILABLE:

% When the vehicle is started again, the standard setting is also
R hà Intelligent, anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist set.
(/ page 347)
R hq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely When changing to transmission position k, the current recuperation level is
R h Normal recuperation adopted with the exception of hÃ. If hà was previously selected, the
R h± Increased recuperation: Strong vehicle deceleration in overrun vehicle deceleration of the recuperation level h is set in transmission posi‐
mode, e.g. for driving downhill tion k. With a subsequent change to transmission position h, the previously
selected variable recuperation hà is set again.

DEFAULT SETTING: The driver display shows the currently set recuperation level next to the trans‐
mission position display.
R hÃ: If the ECO Assist function in the multimedia system is switched
on (/ page 349). SETTING RECUPERATIVE DECELERATION MANUALLY (MERCEDES-AMG
R h: If the ECO Assist function in the multimedia system is switched off. VEHICLES)
Requirements:

% hà is only available if the ECO Assist function in the multi‐

R Drive program Î, o, A, C or B is selected.
media system is switched on and if the function of the radar R ESP® is activated – ESP® ON.
sensors is not impaired. Please also note the information on the R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not activated.
vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 416).

# Select transmission position h.

# Increase recuperation: Pull shift paddle 1 briefly.

# Reduce recuperation: Pull shift paddle 2 briefly.

# Default setting: Pull and hold shift paddle 1 or 2 re-engage transmis‐

sion position h. The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when
coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery.

346

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R d and two segments light up: increased recuperation, strong deceler‐

% When the vehicle is started again or transmission position h is ation in overrun mode, e. g. for driving on downhill gradients
engaged again, standard recuperation is automatically set.
R d and three segments light up: maximum recuperation, maximum
deceleration in overrun mode
# Press display button 1.
The display button shows the d symbol with a three-part segment
display for setting the recuperation. % In drive programs Î, A and o, the intensity of the
recuperation is adjusted as needed for downhill gradients: the
steeper the incline, the higher the recuperation. Depending on
% If the display is greyed out, the requirements are not met and the situation, it may nevertheless be necessary to additionally
setting is not possible. depress the brake pedal.
If the potential to charge the high-voltage battery is reduced,
e.g. due to a high state of charge or because the high-voltage If the charge potential of the high-voltage battery has to be reduced due to
battery is not yet at operating temperature, it may not currently an increasingly high state of charge, e.g. when driving downhill for a long time,
be possible to set a recuperation level. The Desired recuperation the recuperation level is automatically reduced. The Recuperative deceleration
level currently unavailable message is then shown in the driver temporarily reduced message is then shown in the driver display.
display.
When the d symbol is shown with a red ! on the display
button, the regenerative brake system is malfunctioning. Observe ECO Assist (plug-in hybrid)
the information on warning lamps and display messages which
are shown in the driver display. ECO ASSIST FUNCTION

# To increase recuperation: turn rotary switch 2 clockwise in the q % The following function depends on the equipment and the coun‐
direction. try and is available only for plug-in hybrids.

# To decrease recuperation: turn rotary switch 2 anti-clockwise in the

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the
± direction.
system to help optimally adjust your driving style for the route ahead, save
THE FOLLOWING RECUPERATION LEVELS ARE AVAILABLE AND ARE fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle
SHOWN ON DISPLAY BUTTON 1: nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum
fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and
R d and no segments light up: no recuperation, the vehicle rolls freely
downhill gradient.
R d and one segment lights up: standard recuperation

347

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you will also THE ECO ASSIST DISPLAY WILL BE HIDDEN AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING
need to brake with the service brake. This will be the case particularly if, for CASES:
example, you start driving again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the
vehicle in front is very short. R You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
R You depress the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening
THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES: because of a route event ahead. This does not apply in the case of a
vehicle in front.
R The function is activated in the multimedia system (/ page 349).
R ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route
R The hà recuperation level is selected (/ page 345).
ahead.
R Manual shifting p is not activated.
R Drive program C is not selected. IN ADDITION TO A VEHICLE IN FRONT ¥, ECO ASSIST CAN DETECT THE
FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS 2 DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIP‐
MENT:

~ Roundabout

¢ Sharp bend

& Junction

£ T-junction
1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
2 Route event ahead ¤ Downhill gradient
If a route event that you can deal with more efficiently by adjusting your ¦ Speed limit
driving style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý symbol
will be displayed in grey. SYSTEM LIMITS
If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý symbol will turn green and recu‐
will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available when
peration in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient,
route guidance is not active. Not all information and traffic situations can be
also apply the service brake.
foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.
If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead and you press the accelerator
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
pedal, you will end control by ECO Assist. This does not apply in the case of a
from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
vehicle in front.

348

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐ THE ROUTE-BASED OPERATING-MODE STRATEGY WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE
ING SITUATIONS: FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:

R if there is poor visibility, e.g. owing to insufficient illumination of the R Drive program n is selected .
road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray R The Route-based option is selected for drive program n on the
R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections DYNAMIC SELECT menu (/ page 357).
R if the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera R Route guidance is active.
R if the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient.
R if road signs are hard to detect (e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient
lighting) or because they are obscured
When the function is active, data on the further course of the route will be
R if the digital road map of the navigation system has incorrect or outdated analysed. This includes e.g. road type, speed limits and elevation data.
information
R if signs are ambiguous (e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes) THE HYBRID SYSTEM WILL THEN ADAPT THE OPERATING STRATEGY TO
THE FURTHER COURSE OF THE ROUTE:
R if the radar sensors are dirty or obscured
R when you drive on roads with steep gradients R Use of electrical energy and the combustion engine will be adapted.
R if there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery will be controlled accord‐
ingly.
ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING ECO ASSIST
R Electrical energy will be reserved especially for electric mode, e.g. urban
Multimedia system:
route sections or areas with low emission zones.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving
R The vehicle will automatically select the operating mode.
# Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of the haptic accelerator pedal

Function of the route-based operating-mode
(plug-in hybrid)
strategy (plug-in hybrid)
The haptic accelerator pedal has an additional point of resistance followed by
increased pedal resistance to help you drive in all-electric mode.
% The following function is country-dependent and available only
in conjunction with an integrated navigation system. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ADDITIONAL POINT OF RESISTANCE:

R Available only in drive program Î

349

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

R Is used when the power availability display (POWER) of the electric drive
system in the power meter is full (/ page 541) % If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are
R Indicates the maximum available electric performance
displayed can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 351).
The subsequent increased pedal resistance indicates that the journey is
being continued with the combustion engine.
# Press the corresponding button 2.
THE COLOUR OF THE BUTTON SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY
AMG Real Performance Sound SELECTED SOUND CHARACTERISTIC:

SELECTING A SOUND CHARACTERISTIC WITH THE AMG STEERING R Blue: Balanced – comfortable
WHEEL BUTTON R Red: Powerful – sporty

% You can select a comfortable (Balanced) or a sporty (Powerful) % Plug-in hybrid: Only in the sporty sound characteristic (Power‐
sound characteristic using the steering wheel button or the mul‐ ful) does the vehicle also produce a stationary noise and speed-
timedia system (/ page 359). dependent driving noises up to approx. 100 km/h.

Function of the AMG steering wheel buttons

# Press the upper or lower 1 display button repeatedly, until it displays

the ö symbol.

Plug-in hybrid: the display button 1 shows the N symbol for the sound The AMG steering wheel buttons are an additional control element with two
buttons on the steering wheel.
characteristic.
You can assign two vehicle functions of your choice to the control element.
You can change between the available functions for the corresponding button

350

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

1 by pressing the upper or lower part of the display buttons 2 repeatedly.

The display buttons 1 show each function selected.
Setting the AMG steering wheel buttons
Multimedia system:
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE EQUIP‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
MENT:
5 AMG steering-wheel buttons
å ESP® (/ page 420)
OVERVIEW OF THE AMG SETTINGS SELECT MENU
The left display buttons on the steering wheel can be set in the SETTINGS
ä AMG RIDE CONTROL (/ page 474)
SELECT menu.
B Manual gearshifting (/ page 367)

ç ECO start/stop function (/ page 342)

ö AMG Real Performance Sound (/ page 350)

N Plug-in hybrid: AMG Real Performance Sound (/ page 350)

e Camera views (/ page 482)

(Example of representation) Representation and arrangement of content
g AMG DYNAMICS (/ page 354) equipment-dependent.
1 Selection area for the available functions
¨ Plug-in hybrid: Boost Strategy (/ page 478)
2 Adjustable steering wheel buttons
3 Calls up setting mode
% Individual functions may be hidden. How functions are displayed # Select the appropriate steering wheel button.
and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the
SETTING THE STEERING WHEEL BUTTON
multimedia system (/ page 351).

% The SETTINGS SELECT menu can also be called up using the

If you have assigned a specific function to one of the display buttons 1, you AMG button in the centre console or by pressing and holding the
can operate this function with the corresponding button 2. respective display button.
The assignment of the display buttons 1 remains stored even after a vehicle
restart. But the operating status of the respective function is reset to the # Select the upper or lower display button in the central display.
default.

351

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving

# Press ´ and select the desired function for assignment from 1.

ADDING NEW FUNCTIONS FOR SELECTION
# Select the upper or lower display button in the central display.

# Press q in selection area 1 and select the desired function from the
list.
The selected function is assigned to selection area 1 and can be selec‐
ted from there for the steering wheel buttons.
DELETING BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
# Select the upper or lower display button in the central display.

# Press ´.

# Press £ at the desired function to delete the selected assignment of

the display button.

352

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

DYNAMIC SELECT

Function of DYNAMIC SELECT R Sporty driving

R Sporty, but with an emphasis on stability
DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to R Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style
the current driving conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics. You will
R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch
be able to select the following drive programs.
of road

% Depending on the engine line-up and equipment, the vehicle will

N HYBRID (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
have different drive programs.
R Comfortable and economical driving
The drive program selected will appear on the driver display. R Balance between traction and stability
R Recommended for all road conditions
= INDIVIDUAL
R Full development of all intelligent hybrid functions
R Custom settings (/ page 357) R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
R The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system
B SPORT+ depends on the driving conditions and the route

R Very sporty driving

A COMFORT
R Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteer and understeer characteristics
for an even more active driving style R Comfortable and economical driving
R Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch R Balance between traction and stability
of road R Recommended for all road conditions

C SPORT

R Maximum output is available

353

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

Î ELECTRIC (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Plug-in hybrid: this also applies to drive programs n, Î
and o.
R Electric mode – driving without the combustion engine is possible up to
approximately 140 km/h
DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM, THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS WILL
R Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
CHANGE THEIR CHARACTERISTICS:
R Adaptation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for electric mode
R Depending on the equipment, the maximum set speed for cruise control, R Drive
the limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limited to the - Engine and transmission management
maximum speed possible in electric mode - Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R Activation of the combustion engine via the pressure point of the accel‐ - Availability of Glide mode
erator pedal (kickdown)
R ESP®
R Vehicles with DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL: suspension
O BATTERY HOLD (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
- Suspension and damping
R Prioritises maintaining the state of charge of the high-voltage battery, R Steering
e.g. for subsequent journeys in inner cities/low-emission zones R Sound characteristics of the engine in the vehicle interior (equipment-
R The selection of the appropriate drive type by the hybrid system dependent)
depends on the driving conditions and the route
Adjustable recuperation in overrun mode
Function of DYNAMIC SELECT (Mercedes-
R

; ECO AMG vehicles)

R Particularly economical driving DYNAMIC SELECT allows a drive program to be selected quickly according to
the current driving conditions or the desired vehicle characteristics.
R Balance between traction and stability
R Recommended for all road conditions
% Depending on the engine line-up and equipment, the vehicle will
have different drive programs.
% The ESP® settings in the ; and A drive programs are
designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive pro‐ YOU CAN SELECT THE FOLLOWING DRIVE PROGRAMS:
grams especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer opera‐
R o Slippery
tion and when the vehicle is fully laden or fully occupied.

354

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

- Optimised pulling-away and driving characteristics in wintry and - Balance between stability and sportiness
slippery road conditions - Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear
- Drive with combustion engine only (plug-in hybrid) stretch of road
R o Battery Hold (plug-in hybrid) - Drive with the combustion engine and reinforced boost effect
- Prioritises maintaining the state of charge of the high-voltage (plug-in hybrid)
battery, e.g. for subsequent journeys in inner cities/low-emission R B Sport+
zones - Particularly sporty driving
- Emphasises the vehicle's own oversteer and understeer character‐
- The hybrid system will select the appropriate drive type depending istics
on the driving conditions - Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear
R Î Electric (plug-in hybrid) stretch of road
- Electric mode: driving without the combustion engine is possible - Drive with the combustion engine and reinforced boost effect
up to approximately 125 km/h. (plug-in hybrid)
R I Race
- Limits the maximum set speed for cruise control, the limiter and - Maximum sportiness
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to the maximum speed possible - Driving characteristics suited for the racetrack with maximum or
in electric mode racetrack-optimised boost effect (plug-in hybrid)
- Activates the combustion engine and changes to the A drive - Particularly firm suspension tuning
program via the first point of resistance of the haptic accelerator - Sporty sound from the exhaust system
pedal
R A Comfort
% The I drive program is available only for the
- Comfortable and economical driving Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S E PERFORMANCE model and for vehi‐
- The hybrid system will select the appropriate drive type depending cles with the AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package.
on the driving conditions (plug-in hybrid)
R = Individual The I drive program offers driving characteristics suited to the racetrack
- Custom settings for drive system, transmission, AMG DYNAMICS, and must not be used on normal roads. The I drive program may be
suspension and sound activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads.
R C Sport
Plug-in hybrid: if the boost strategy is activated in the I drive program,
- Sporty driving
the electric drive output will be metered in a way that is optimised for a

355

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

racetrack. It will then be possible to use the maximum boost effect only
deliberately via kickdown (/ page 478). % You can adjust certain agility functions of AMG DYNAMICS using
the AMG steering-wheel buttons.
Mercedes-AMG recommends selecting the Î (plug-in hybrid) or A drive
program when in city traffic or stop-and-go traffic.

DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM SELECTED, THE FOLLOWING VEHI‐ Selecting a drive program
CLE CHARACTERISTICS WILL CHANGE:

R Drive
- Energy supply for the electric drive output (plug-in hybrid)
R AMG DYNAMICS
- The four agility functions, Basic, Advanced, Pro and Master, will be
selected automatically depending on the drive program.
- The steering, shift timing point, all-wheel drive and stabilisation
functions will be adapted to the selected drive program.
- When ESP® is activated, the Pro agility function will be selected
in the I drive program. The Master function will be selected
automatically when ESP® is switched to SPORT Æ or is switched # Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the left or right.
off ¤. The drive program selected will appear on the driver display.
R Real Performance Sound
R Sound of the drive system in the vehicle interior
R Suspension
R Steering
R Availability of Glide mode

% You can set the drive program characteristics using the multime‐
dia system (/ page 359).

356

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

Selecting a drive program (Mercedes-AMG SELECTION VIA THE CENTRAL DISPLAY (MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM)

vehicles)
SELECTION WITH THE RIGHT-HAND AMG STEERING-WHEEL BUTTON

# Turn rotary switch 2. # Press button 3 and select the drive program via the central display
The selected drive program will appear on display button 1 and on the (/ page 359).
driver display.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multime‐

% Individual drive programs may not be shown. How drive pro‐ dia system
grams are displayed and the order in which they are displayed
can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 359). Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
# To select the = drive program directly: press display button 1. SETTING THE I DRIVE PROGRAM
# Select = Individual.
% Plug-in hybrid: it is not possible to directly select the = drive
program by pressing display button 1. In a plug-in hybrid, use
# Select and set a category.
display button 1 to set the recuperation level (/ page 346).
% A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction with a sporty
suspension mode.

357

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

SETTING THE H DRIVE PROGRAM (PLUG-IN HYBRID) within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances
# Select Hybrid. (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).
INFLUENCING VARIABLES INCLUDE:
# Select Route-based or Standard.
If route guidance is active and the Route-based option has been activa‐ R Sea level
ted, the electrical energy is distributed intelligently over the entire route. R Fuel quality
In built-up areas, electric mode is preferred, while on the motorway the R Outside temperature
combustion engine is used. R Operating temperature of the engine
With the Standard option, the vehicle drives in its standard drive program
(Î Electric or n Hybrid). There is no distribution of electrical
Adjust your driving style accordingly.
energy over the entire route. The high-voltage battery is exhausted and
The p warning lamp in the driver display is on until the engine
the vehicle is then driven by the combustion engine.
has reached operating temperature.

Displaying vehicle data

% The values displayed serve only as guidance. The values for
Multimedia system: engine output and engine torque shown on the central display
4 © 5 Info may deviate from the actual values.
# Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
% The p warning lamp to show the power output limitation after
starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Info
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
# Select Engine. Multimedia system:
The engine data is displayed. 4 © 5 Info
# Select Consumption.
% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.
output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values

358

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting AMG DYNAMIC SELECT in the MBUX SETTING DRIVE PROGRAMS USING THE AMG BUTTON

multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT

SETTING THE = INDIVIDUAL DRIVE PROGRAM USING THE MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM

(Example of representation) Representation and arrangement of content

equipment-dependent.
1 AMG drive program settings
2 Drive programs
3 ESP® (/ page 420)
# Press the AMG button in the centre console.
(Example of representation) Representation and arrangement of content # Select = Individual.
equipment-dependent.
1 Drive program settings # Select and set a category.
# Select the appropriate setting option.
% A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction with a sporty
suspension mode.

SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE DRIVE PROGRAMS (EQUIPMENT-DEPEND‐

ENT):

R AMG DYNAMICS:
Basic/Advanced/Pro/Master

359

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

R Suspension:
Comfort/Sport/Sport+
R Sound:
Balanced/Powerful
R Drive (can only be set in the = Individual drive program):
Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic/Race
R Transmission:
p/h

The settings of the drive programs can be adjusted individually. The setting
mode for the drive programs can also be called up by pressing and holding the
current configuration in selection area 2.

FURTHER SETTING OPTIONS

R Setting ESP®

360

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING

FUNCTION OF THE DIRECT SELECT LEVER Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
vehicle

WARNING IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN

&
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting IN PARTICULAR

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly
and do not accelerate at the same time. IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

R releasing the parking brake.

R change the gearbox setting.
R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children.

361

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury when the transmission position is not
engaged
The current transmission position will be highlighted on the driver's
display.

If the selected transmission position is not highlighted, the vehicle may

pull away in the wrong direction or roll away.

# After changing the transmission position, always check the

transmission position display on the driver's display.
j Park position
k Reverse gear
If the transmission position is not highlighted on the driver's display
even after a short time: i Neutral
h Drive position
# Pay attention to the display messages.
ENGAGING REVERSE GEAR R
# Pull away carefully and check the engaged transmission posi‐
tion. & WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting
# When parking, engage the parking brake and secure the vehi‐
cle against rolling away. If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.
# Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly
and do not accelerate at the same time.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current
transmission position will be highlighted on the driver's display.

362

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
past the first point of resistance. to the first point of resistance.
ENGAGING NEUTRAL N
% To shift into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the
& WARNING selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting resistance.
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle
freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly PROCEED AS FOLLOWS IF YOU WANT THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
and do not accelerate at the same time. TO REMAIN IN NEUTRAL I, EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF OR
THE DRIVER'S DOOR IS OPENED:
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is at a
standstill.

# Release the brake pedal.

# Switch off the vehicle.

The Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P

message will appear on the driver display.

363

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

ENGAGING PARK POSITION P

% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the
automatic transmission will remain in neutral i.
& WARNING
Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: Make sure that a vehicle key
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
or Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle and that the automatic
vehicle
transmission remains in neutral i.
IF THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DOES NOT STAY IN NEU‐ IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
TRAL I: IN PARTICULAR

R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

R Restart the vehicle and repeat the procedure.
R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
PARK POSITION J WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE RE-ENGAGED AS SOON AS
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET:
IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
R You switch to transmission position h or k. MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
R You press the button j.
R releasing the parking brake.
R change the gearbox setting.
R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children.

364

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

* NOTE % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j

Damage due to engaging park position j while the vehicle is is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission
rolling position display.
If you shift the transmission into park position j while the vehicle is
rolling, the transmission may be damaged. PARK POSITION J WILL BE ENGAGED AUTOMATICALLY IF ONE OF THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET:
# If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
R You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position h or k.
# Only engage the park position j when the vehicle is station‐
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission
ary.
position h or k.
R When the vehicle is rolling, you switch it off in transmission position h
or k and bring it to a standstill.
R When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position i, bring
the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary.
R Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle.

% To manoeuvre with the driver's door open, open the driver's door
while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position
h or k again.
# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 403).

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

# When the vehicle is stationary, press button 1.

When the j transmission position display is shown, park position is
engaged. If the j transmission position display is not shown, apply the
parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

365

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

ENGAGING DRIVE POSITION D

Rocking the vehicle free (Mercedes-AMG
& WARNING
vehicles)
Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting Rocking the vehicle free may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the slush or snow.
transmission position h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.
To rock the vehicle free, move the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards and down‐
# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the wards past the point of resistance to switch between transmission positions
vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly h and k.
and do not accelerate at the same time.
% The maximum speed for rocking the vehicle free is approximately
9 km/h.

Manual gearshifting
% For plug-in hybrids, observe the information regarding the regen‐
erative brake system (/ page 345).

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
WHEN THE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IS IN TRANSMISSION POSITION
H, IT WILL SHIFT GEARS AUTOMATICALLY. THIS DEPENDS, AMONG
OTHER THINGS, ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can shift
R The selected drive program
it manually with the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If permitted, the auto‐
R The position of the accelerator pedal matic transmission will shift to a higher or lower gear depending on the steer‐
R The vehicle speed ing wheel gearshift paddle pulled.

366

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

YOU HAVE TWO OPTIONS FOR MANUALLY SHIFTING THE AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION: % You can activate or deactivate manual shifting permanently in
the multimedia system.
R Temporary setting
R Permanent setting
Manual shifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The gears will shift automatically when manual shifting is deactivated.

Temporary setting: % You can also permanently activate and deactivate manual gear‐
shifting via the multimedia system (/ page 359).
# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2.
Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission posi‐
tion display will show p and the current gear.

% How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various

factors.
MANUAL SHIFTING CAN BE DEACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: # Press upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly until it displays
the . or B symbol.
R When the drive program is changed
R When the vehicle is restarted
R When transmission position h is engaged again % If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
R Driving style How functions are displayed and the order in which they are
displayed can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 351).
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.
# To activate/deactivate: press the corresponding button 2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.
THE SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY SELECTED TRANSMIS‐
# To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. SION POSITION:
The transmission position display will show h. R B (red): manual shifting
R . (blue): automatic transmission

367

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

Plug-in hybrid: automatic transmission must be selected for electric mode. If

you select manual mode in drive program Î, the drive program will change
to A and the combustion engine will start. If you are driving in electric
mode in drive program o or A and select manual mode, the combustion
engine will start.

SHIFTING UP AND DOWN

If the engine speed is too high or too low, you will not be able to change gear
* NOTE using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. In this case, segments 3 will light
Damage to the engine due to shifting up too late up red on the driver's display.
The automatic transmission does not shift up in manual mode even
when the engine's limiting speed is reached.
Permanently activating/deactivating manual
The fuel supply is interrupted in order to prevent the engine from
overrevving. shifting
# Shift up before the engine speed reaches the red area in the Multimedia system:
rev counter. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving
# Permanently activate or deactivate the function.

Gearshift recommendation
When manual gearshifting is activated, gearshift recommendation will assist
you in adopting an economical driving style.

# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.

# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.

368

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

# When gearshift recommendation 1 appears on the driver's display, shift R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake
to the recommended gear. applications).

Using kickdown % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco"
setting for the drive in the drive program =.
# Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point
of resistance.
Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.
To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to
the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. GLIDE MODE CAN ALSO BE PREVENTED BY THE FOLLOWING PARAME‐
TERS:

Glide mode function R Incline

R Downhill gradient
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption when you employ an antici‐
R Temperature
patory driving style.
R Height
GLIDE MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING: R Speed
R The combustion engine is switched off depending on the driving situa‐ R Operating condition of the engine
tion. All the vehicle functions will remain active. R Traffic situation
R The transmission position display h is shown in green.

Function of glide mode (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

GLIDE MODE WILL BE ACTIVATED IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE
MET:
cles)
Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption when you employ an antici‐
R Drive program ; is selected.
patory driving style.
R The speed is within a suitable range.
R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep inclines or tight bends. When you drive in Glide mode, the J symbol will appear on the driver's dis‐
R There is no trailer coupled up to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack play and the combustion engine will be switched off. All the vehicle functions
fitted. will remain active.
R The state of charge of the battery is sufficient.

369

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Automatic transmission

GLIDE MODE WILL BE ACTIVATED IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE

MET:

R The ECO start/stop function is switched on.

R Drive program = is selected with the "Moderate" or "Reduced" drive
setting.
R The speed is within a suitable range.
R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep inclines or tight bends.
R The state of charge of the battery is sufficient.
R You are no longer depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.

370

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Function of 4MATIC

Function of 4MATIC

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS,
4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins
due to insufficient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of
road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsi‐
ble in particular for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

% In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can

be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary.

371

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle & WARNING

Risk of injury from fuels
& WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes
Fuels are highly flammable.
or clothing.
# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐ # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
ded.
# Keep children away from fuel.
# Before refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if fitted, the sta‐
tionary heater and keep switched off during filling. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the follow‐
ing:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse

them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do

not induce vomiting.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact

with fuel.

372

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour. Vehicles with a petrol engine:

# Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. system, the engine and the emission control system.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into # Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine
the vehicle again during the refuelling process. fuel.

Petrol can contain up to 25 Vol.‑% ethanol by volume.

& WARNING
# See the information label in fuel filler flap for compatible fuels.
Risk of fire from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Further information about compatible fuels can be obtained at a quali‐
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is fied specialist workshop.
lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
Throughout Europe you can also find the compatibility labels on the
While the vehicle is running, component parts in the exhaust system fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
may overheat without warning.
NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:
# Never refuel using petrol.
R Diesel
# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
R Petrol with metallic additives

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch on the vehicle.

373

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
system, the engine and the emission control system.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filters:

# Refuel using only sulphur-free diesel fuel.

In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only
low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less than
50 ppm.

Vehicles without diesel particulate filters:

# Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less

than 500 ppm.

NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:

R Petrol
R Marine diesel
R Heating oil
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil
R Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch on the vehicle.

374

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE
Do not refuel diesel-engined vehicles with petrol
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL:
* NOTE
Shorter maintenance intervals due to fuel with increased bio-con‐ R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
tents Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
When fuels with increased bio-contents are used, fuel residues with the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
increased separation volume may occur. If fuels with increased bio-con‐
tents (compatibility marks B10 and B20) are used on an ongoing basis,
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
this may lead to shorter maintenance intervals for the fuel filter.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
If the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time (several
weeks):

# Refuel the vehicle beforehand with diesel fuel with bio-con‐

* NOTE
tents < 10% to avoid possible deposits of bio-contents in the
Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank
fuel tank.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling
* NOTE
pump:
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine
IF YOU HAVE ACCIDENTALLY REFUELLED WITH THE WRONG FUEL: # Do not switch on the vehicle.

R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to
the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

* NOTE
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

375

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

Requirements: # Press on the centre rear of the fuel filler flap 1.

R The vehicle is unlocked. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it.
R Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel tank was vented before
# Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2.
refuelling (/ page 377).
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place
Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. and refuel.

The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the infor‐ # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
mation label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

% Vehicles with diesel engine: The tank filler neck is designed for
refuelling at diesel filling pumps.
In order to prevent incorrect fuel from being filled, your vehicle is
equipped with an incorrect fuelling protector. This function may
be deactivated in some countries due to local conditions. For
more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

% Vehicles with diesel engine: Do not run the fuel tank empty.
When the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 l
diesel before starting the vehicle.
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap
3 Tyre pressure table % Vehicles with diesel engine: Use a filler neck with a large diam‐
4 QR code for rescue card eter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from
a canister. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank
5 Fuel type
filler neck.

% Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: the fuel filler flap opens # Replace the fuel filler cap on the tank filler neck and turn clockwise until
automatically after the fuel tank has been vented (/ page 377).
it engages audibly.

# Close fuel filler flap 1.

376

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid R The yellow ; engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up.

with petrol engine)

* NOTE
Damage to the fuel filler flap when opening it
If an attempt is made to open a fuel filler flap that is not unlocked, the
fuel filler flap or the opening mechanism may be damaged.

# Only refuel when the fuel filler flap has opened automatically.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)

# Pull switch 1 once briefly.
Indicator lamp 2 will flash and the Please wait Depressurising fuel tank NOTES ON TOPPING UP ADBLUE®
message will appear on the driver display. AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of die‐
sel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly,
When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator lamp 2 will light up
only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
continuously.
The Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refuelling message will appear on ADBLUE® IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING:
the driver display and the fuel filler flap will open automatically.
R non-toxic
R colourless and odourless
% Depressurising the fuel tank may take several minutes.
R non-flammable

The fuel tank can be depressurised only if the conditions described above are
fulfilled. Otherwise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat the process. If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be
released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.

% IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A MALFUNCTION: Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue®
away from children.
R Indicator lamp 2 flashes initially and then goes out.

377

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth

out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once. * NOTE
Contamination of the vehicle interior due to AdBlue® leakage
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858). # After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue® refill container.
ADBLUE® IS AVAILABLE HERE: # Avoid carrying AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the
R AdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist work‐ vehicle.
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
R AdBlue® is available at many filling stations from AdBlue® filling pumps. Requirements:
R Alternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g.
R The vehicle is unlocked.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue®
refill canisters or AdBlue® refill bottles.
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR IN ORDER ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
WHEN THE ADBLUE® TANK REQUIRES TOPPING UP:
% Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle
R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
filler neck does not drip.
reserve range. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual. The low
TOPPING UP ADBLUE®
AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance after the remaining dis‐
tance displayed has been driven. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
* NOTE R Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km.
Engine damage due to AdBlue® being in the fuel
The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed
# AdBlue® must not be used to fill the fuel tank. displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been driven, it will
no longer be possible to start the vehicle. Add at least the indicated
# Only use AdBlue® to fill the AdBlue® tank. quantity of AdBlue®.
# Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank. R Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine start not
possThe AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle. Add
at least the indicated quantity of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait
approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.

Plug-in hybrid:

378

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR IN ORDER ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY OPENING THE ADBLUE® FILLER CAP
WHEN THE ADBLUE® TANK REQUIRES TOPPING UP:

R Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The AdBlue® level has fallen below the
reserve range. Top up with AdBlue® immediately .
R Top up AdBlue In XXX km Electric only. See Owner's Manual. The low
AdBlue® level will result in the combustion engine being switched off
after the displayed remaining distance has been driven. From this point
on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on
the state of charge of the high-voltage battery. Top up with AdBlue®
immediately .
R Top up XX,X l AdBlue Only "Electric" available See Owner's ManualThe
AdBlue® tank is empty. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric
# Press on the centre rear of the fuel filler flap 1.
mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery. Add
at least the indicated quantity of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and wait # Turn AdBlue® filler cap 2 counter-clockwise and remove it.
approx. 60 seconds. Start the vehicle.

% You can also place the AdBlue® filler cap in the filler cap holder in
You can display the AdBlue® range and level on the driver display in the menu
the hinge arm of the fuel filler flap.
Service.

TOPPING UP ADBLUE®
% The AdBlue® range shown is highly dependent upon driving style
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you top up AdBlue® at a pump system. If
and operating conditions. The actual range can therefore deviate
there is no AdBlue® pump system available you can also top up AdBlue® with a
from the calculated range.
canister.

379

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Refuelling

% If it was no longer possible to start the vehicle due to the empty

AdBlue® tank, it takes up to 60 seconds for topping up to be
detected.

# Start the vehicle.

% Avoid storing AdBlue® refill containers permanently in the vehi‐

cle.

# Unscrew the cap of the AdBlue® refill canister 4.

# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the opening of AdBlue® refill canister 4

until hand-tight.

# Screw disposable hose 3 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-
tight.

# Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister 4.

The filling process stops when the AdBlue® tank is completely full.
AdBlue® refill canister 4 can be removed when it has been only partially
emptied.

# Unscrew disposable hose 3 and close AdBlue® refill canister 4 in

reverse order.

# Replace AdBlue® filler cap 2 and turn it clockwise until it audibly

engages.

# Close fuel filler flap 1.

# Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.

380

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery * NOTE

Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery due to not observ‐
* NOTE ing the following recommendations
High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of and the
lengthy periods of time amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decreases
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-discharge. over the course of its life. Due to this, both the maximum electrical
range that can be achieved by the vehicle and its maximum electrical
Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for output can be impaired.
several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery.
THE FOLLOWING FACTORS COULD ACCELERATE THE AGEING OF
# To avoid damage, please observe the following recommenda‐ THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:
tions when handling the high-voltage battery.
R a high level of charge, especially if the vehicle is idle for a lengthy
period of time
R frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4)
R leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient tem‐
peratures

# To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following rec‐

ommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

381

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

DEPENDING ON THE EQUIPMENT AND NATIONAL VERSION, YOUR VEHI‐

* NOTE CLE IS EQUIPPED WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING VEHICLE SOCKETS:
Damage to the drive system when charging the high-voltage bat‐
tery at extreme altitudes R Type 1 for AC charging (mode 2/3)
The drive system may be damaged if the high-voltage battery is charged R Type Combo 1 for AC charging (mode 2/3) and DC charging (mode 4)
at elevations greater than 4,000 m above sea level. R Type 2 for AC charging (mode 2/3)
R Type Combo 2 for AC charging (mode 2/3) and DC charging (mode 4)
It may then no longer be possible to continue the journey.

# Avoid charging processes at extreme altitudes.

RECOMMENDATIONS WHEN HANDLING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:

R Quick-charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) only

when required.
R Charge the high-voltage battery on average up to a state of charge
of 80 %. From a state of charge of 80 % the charging time increases
significantly.
R In case of longer idle times, switch off the vehicle with a state of charge
of the high-voltage battery between 25% and 30%. Do not permanently
Combo 1 vehicle socket
connect the high-voltage battery to power supply equipment.
R If leaving the vehicle idle for long periods, avoid high outside tempera‐
tures wherever possible.
R Check the high-voltage battery's state of charge every six weeks
(/ page 402).
R Make sure to charge the high-voltage battery if the state of charge is
below 15%.
R Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a
long period. Otherwise the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery
cannot be monitored.
R When using the high-voltage battery only with low states of charge, fully
charge the high-voltage battery twice a year.
Combo 2 vehicle socket

382

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

1 AC charging connection type 1 or type 2 SYSTEM LIMITS

THE PERFORMANCE OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY MAY BE IMPAIRED
2 Socket extension for DC charging
BY THE FOLLOWING:

R high or low outside temperatures

% When using a CCS charging cable (Combined Charging System) R electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. oper‐
for charging with direct current at a vehicle socket type Combo, ating the air conditioning system
both connections on the vehicle socket 1 and 2 are used for R extended idle periods without charging
charging.

THE CHARGING TIME OR THE CHARGING POWER OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE

CHARGING OPTIONS FOR THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY (MODE 2, 3 OR 4): BATTERY MAY BE INCREASED BY THE FOLLOWING:
R while driving by means of recuperation R high or low outside temperatures
R stationary AC charging: R a low or high state of charge of the high-voltage battery
- at a mains socket (mode 2) R the maximum available charging current of the charging device
- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
R stationary DC charging (vehicles with vehicle socket type Combo):
- at a rapid-charging station (mode 4) Storing the charging cable
Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the charging cable bag provided,
Depending on the country-specific vehicle equipment and your vehicle's and secure the charging cable bag in the boot or load compartment with the
charging cable, single-phase AC charging is also possible. included retaining strap. Otherwise, the charging cable bag with the charging
cable is not sufficiently secured.
Observe the different mains requirements of your current location when charg‐
ing. Only use charging cables which conform to the mains requirements.
Consult a qualified electrician or your local mains operator if you have any
questions.

It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox

or charging station due to the higher charging power and better charging
efficiency offered.

383

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load compartment # Tighten retaining strap 2 so that the knot around tie-down eye 3 is
tight and secure.
As delivered, charging cable bag 1 with retaining strap 2 is located in the
boot or load compartment. To secure the charging cable bag, the retaining # Hook the snap hook of retaining strap 2 in a tie-down eye of charging
strap must be attached to tie-down eye 3. Do not use bag hooks to attach cable bag 1.
the retaining strap.

# Feed the loop end of retaining strap 2 through tie-down eye 3 in the
boot or load compartment.

# Feed the end with the snap hook through the loop of retaining strap 2.

384

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at R Multiple sockets

a mains socket (mode 2) # Only use a socket adapter that has been tested and approved
by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an
& DANGER electric vehicle. Never use several socket adapters. For charg‐
Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts ing at the mains socket, only use appropriate socket adapters
Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly for AC charging.
installed components could cause fires or an electrical shock, for exam‐ # Observe the safety notes in the Owner's Manual for the socket
ple.
adapter.
# Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that:

R has been properly installed and ONLY THE FOLLOWING CHARGING CABLES MAY BE USED:
R has been inspected by a qualified electrician. R The charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
R A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle.
# For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with
the vehicle or an original Mercedes‑Benz charging cable.
The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. The
# Purchase these parts at a Mercedes‑Benz service centre and charging times when charging the high-voltage battery at a mains socket are
obtain advice there. considerably longer than when charging at a wallbox or charging station.

When doing so, always observe the local information.

Mercedes‑Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their
suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Do not leave the charging cable operating unit hanging loose from a mains
socket.
# Never use a damaged charging cable.
DO NOT LIFT THE OPERATING UNIT BY THE FOLLOWING COMPONENT
# Do not use: PARTS:

R Extension cables R the charging cable plug

R Extension reels R the mains plug

385

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

When charging, protect the charging cable operating unit from excessive heat
such as direct sunlight. Otherwise the charging process may be aborted.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at
a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed
components could cause fires or an electrical shock, for example.

# Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that:

R has been properly installed and

R has been inspected by a qualified electrician.

# For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been
tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the
high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.

# Never use damaged charging cables.

# Do not extend the charging cable.

# Only use a socket adapter that has been tested and approved
by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an
electric vehicle. Never use several socket adapters. Only use
socket adapters suitable for AC charging when charging with
alternating current at a wallbox or charging station.

# Observe the safety notes in the Owner's Manual for the wall‐
box.

386

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally availa‐ instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes-Benz Charge
ble charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging (/ page 617).
cable is stowed in a bag in the load compartment.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the
Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufac‐ charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed
turer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging los‐
ses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur e.g. owing
to heat build-up during charging or from running auxiliary consumers. Further
& DANGER
information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist
Risk of fatal injury if damaged component parts are used
workshop.
If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to a charging
station, this may lead to fires or an electrical shock, for example.

# Visually inspect the charging station for obvious signs of dam‐

age, e.g. serious damage to the housing or charging cable
connection.

# Never use damaged charging cables.

# Do not extend the charging cable.

# Only use a socket adapter that has been tested and approved
by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in
an electric vehicle. Never use several socket adapters. When
charging at a charging station with alternating current (mode
3), only use the corresponding socket adapters for charging
with alternating current and when charging at a fast charging
station with direct current (mode 4), only use socket adapters
for direct current charging.

# Be sure to observe the safety notes at the charging station.

Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g.
using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site operating

387

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at & DANGER

a quick charging station (mode 4) Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
the charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
& DANGER
tem is under high voltage.
Risk of fatal injury if damaged component parts are used
If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to a charging # Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
station, this may lead to fires or an electrical shock, for example. process.

# Visually inspect the charging station for obvious signs of dam‐

age, e.g. serious damage to the housing or charging cable Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g.
connection. using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site operating
instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes-Benz Charge
# Never use damaged charging cables. (/ page 617).
# Do not extend the charging cable. The charging cable for the vehicle must be no longer than 30 m owing to the
# Only use a socket adapter that has been tested and approved legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of sig‐
by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in nals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close
an electric vehicle. Never use several socket adapters. When proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable
charging at a charging station with alternating current (mode may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if
3), only use the corresponding socket adapters for charging this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
with alternating current and when charging at a fast charging The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the
station with direct current (mode 4), only use socket adapters charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed
for direct current charging. by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging los‐
# Be sure to observe the safety notes at the charging station. ses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur e.g. owing
to heat build-up during charging or from running auxiliary consumers. Further
information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop.

388

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

Maximum permissible charging current for 3 Supply voltage indicator

Charging process display
charging at a mains socket 4
5 Temperature monitor display
The charging cable supplied is set to a country-specific maximum charging 6 Safety system display
current. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted MAINS CURRENT DISPLAY 3 POWER
value for that country.
Display Meaning
# Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charg‐
ing current for the relevant mains socket or the building set-up checked Lights up white There is supply voltage.

by a qualified electrician.
CHARGING PROCESS DISPLAY 4 CHARGING
# When abroad, observe the country-specific laws when charg‐
Display Meaning
ing.
Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging.
If you have questions concerning the charging current or if there is a malfunc‐
tion, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. TEMPERATURE MONITOR DISPLAY 5 TEMPERATURE
Display Meaning

Overview of the charging cable control panel Lights up red The green LED flashes simultaneously: over‐
temperature – The charging power is reduced.
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following two mode 2 charging The green LED does not flash: overtempera‐
cables. The control panel of the respective mode 2 charging cable shows the ture – The charging process is stopped.
current status of the charging process.
Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug – the
charging process is stopped.

1 Gen5 charging cable

2 Gen4 charging cable

389

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

SAFETY SYSTEM DISPLAY 6 FAULT replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a qualified specialist work‐
shop, depending on the readout.
Display Meaning

Flashes red Charging cable or internal malfunction –

Charging not possible Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehi‐
Reset charging cable control panel (Gen5
charging cable 1) cle socket
Lights up red White LED is off: power supply malfunction –
Charging process not possible, use a different % Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with
(Gen5 charging cable 1)
mains socket. one of the following vehicle sockets.
White LED is on: vehicle malfunction – charg‐
ing process not possible, reset the charging
cable control panel. The socket flap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.
Lights up red Infrastructure malfunction – Charging process
(Gen4 charging cable 2) not possible, use a different mains socket

If the temperature monitor 5 indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect

the charging cable from direct sunlight.

GEN4 CHARGING CABLE 2

If the charging cable control panel detects residual current or a malfunction,
the charging process is interrupted. The charging process is resumed automat‐
ically when the malfunction has been rectified.

GEN5 CHARGING CABLE 1

When all four displays light up, the charging cable control panel is performing Combo 1 vehicle socket
a self-test.
1 Socket lamp
Reset the Gen5 charging cable control panel: if the safety system 6 2 Charging process indicator lamp
indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, first reset 3 Locking status indicator lamp
the charging cable control panel. To do this, disconnect the charging cable
from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately five
seconds. If the malfunction persists after the charging cable is reconnected,
charging at the mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be

390

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

R Lights up orange (for approx. 90 s): charging break

R Flashes orange: connection is being established
R Flashes red (for approx. 60 s): malfunction in vehicle; charging not possi‐
ble

Starting the alternating current charging proc‐

ess (mode 2/3)

& DANGER
Combo 2 vehicle socket Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket

1 Socket lamp The charging process uses high voltage.

2 Charging process indicator lamp If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
3 Locking status indicator lamp aged, you could receive an electric shock.
The upper curve of the socket lamp 1 is used for the lighting and flashes # Only use an undamaged charging cable.
or lights up as with indicator lamp 3. The lower curve is used for the status
display and flashes or lights up as with indicator lamp 2. # Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
ing over the cable.
The colour and signalling of the indicator lamps 2 and 3 have the following
meaning. # Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
ist workshop as soon as possible.
LOCKING STATUS % 3
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle
R Lights up white: vehicle socket unlocked; insert or remove charging cable socket.
R Flashes white: malfunction during locking or unlocking

STATUS OF THE CHARGING PROCESS # 2

R Lights up green (for approx. 90 s): charging process completed

R Flashes green: charging; active energy flow

391

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

* NOTE * NOTE
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐ to incorrect handling
ble limiting values during the charging process. Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to fully insert the charging
cable connector into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise damage the
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging
R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact. cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
R The notes on handling the charging cable and operating unit on
the charging cable were observed.
Requirements:
# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much
heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked. R The transmission is in position j.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The charging cable is not under tension.
* NOTE
Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT AND THE NATIONAL VER‐
there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle SION, YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING VEHI‐
socket from dirt and damage. CLE SOCKETS:

# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before R Type 1 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage R Type Combo 1 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode 4)
which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again. R Type 2 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
R Type Combo 2 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode 4)

392

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

% The socket flap 1 can also be opened via the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 601).

# Press catch 7 to the right and open the socket cover 2.

% On vehicles with a Combo vehicle socket, only the connection 6

is required for the charging cable plug. Only open the upper part
of the socket cover 2.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

# For charging at a mains socket, fully insert the mains plug into the mains
socket of the external power source.

# Fully insert the charging cable plug into vehicle socket 6. If the wall‐
box/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, fully insert
the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station
socket.
Make sure that the inserted charging cable is not under tension.
If the charging station is enabled, the indicator lamp 5 # and the
lower status display 4 flash in orange, and in green as soon as the
high-voltage battery is being charged.

Combo 2 vehicle socket When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be
started or moved.
# Press on the centre rear of the socket flap 1 and swing the socket flap
to the front. At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown on the
The indicator lamp 3 % and upper status display 4 light up white. driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction is the point
in time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.

393

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

% Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling sys‐ Ending the alternating current charging proc‐
tem may audibly switch on during the charging process. ess (mode 2/3)

% If the vehicle is idle for long periods and connected to the mains & DANGER
supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. pre- The charging process uses high voltage.
entry climate control).
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock.
% The vehicle is equipped with an electric fuse that protects # Only use an undamaged charging cable.
against overvoltages in the mains supply. This electric fuse can
be triggered e.g. in severe storms and result in tripping of the # Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
building's circuit breaker and in an interruption of charging. ing over the cable.
These functions protect the vehicle.
After the building's circuit breaker is reset, the charging process
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐
resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power ist workshop as soon as possible.
supply without the building's circuit breaker being tripped, it may # Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle
take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically.
socket.

394

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT AND ON THE NATIONAL VER‐

* NOTE SION, YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH ONE OF THE FOLLOWING VEHI‐
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port CLE SOCKETS:
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐
R Type 1 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
ble limiting values during the charging process.
R Type Combo 1 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode 4)
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE R Type 2 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3)
PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
R Type Combo 2 for AC charging (mode 2 or 3) and DC charging (mode 4)
R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact.
R The notes on handling the charging cable and operating unit on COMBO 1 VEHICLE SOCKET
the charging cable were observed.

# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much

heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked.

* NOTE
Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle
socket from dirt and damage.

# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before

closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage % Vehicles equipped only with a Type 1 vehicle socket for AC
which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again. charging have no charging interruption button 3.

Requirements:
# Type Combo 1 vehicle socket: press the charging interruption button
3.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.

395

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

COMBO 2 VEHICLE SOCKET

% As an alternative, and only if the charging interruption button
3 is not working, you can unlock the vehicle using the vehicle
key or centrally from inside to end the charging process. If the
indicator lamp % 1 then lights up white, the vehicle socket is
unlocked for around 30 seconds.

% The charging process can also be ended via the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 601).

# Type 1 vehicle socket: unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key or cen‐
trally from inside.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up % Vehicles equipped only with a Type 2 vehicle socket for AC
white. The vehicle socket is unlocked. charging have no charging interruption button 2.
# Press and hold button 2 on the charging cable connector and remove
the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. # Type Combo 2 vehicle socket: press the charging interruption button
2.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
% If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, repeat the unlock‐ white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
ing procedure. If the charging cable plug is still locked, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
% As an alternative, and only if the charging interruption button
# Close the socket cover and the socket flap. 2 is not working, you can unlock the vehicle using the vehicle
key or centrally from inside to end the charging process. If the
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the indicator lamp % 1 then lights up white, the vehicle socket is
socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging unlocked for around 30 seconds.
cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 383).

396

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

% The charging process can also be ended via the multimedia sys‐ Starting the DC charging process (mode 4)
tem (/ page 601).
& DANGER
# Type 2 vehicle socket: Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key or cen‐ Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket
trally from inside. The charging process uses high voltage.
The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
white. The vehicle socket is unlocked for around 30 seconds.
aged, you could receive an electric shock.

# Only use an undamaged charging cable.

% If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, repeat the unlock‐
ing procedure. If the charging cable plug is still locked, contact a # Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
qualified specialist workshop. ing over the cable.

# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐

# Close the socket cover and the socket flap. ist workshop as soon as possible.
# Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the # Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle
socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging socket.
cable safely in the vehicle (/ page 383).

% The indicator lamp % 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit for

some time after the charging cable plug has been disconnected
and then goes out.

397

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

* NOTE * NOTE
Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐ to incorrect handling
ble limiting values during the charging process. Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to fully insert the charging
cable connector into the vehicle socket. You may otherwise damage the
THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.
PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
# If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging
R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact. cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.
R The notes on handling the charging cable and operating unit on
the charging cable were observed.
Requirements:
# If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much
heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked. R The transmission is in position j.
R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
R The charging cable is not under tension.
* NOTE
Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with
there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle
one of the following vehicle sockets.
socket from dirt and damage.

# Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before

closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

398

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

% The socket flap 1 can also be opened via the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 601).

# Press catch 7 to the right and open the socket cover 2.

% Connections 6 and 8 are required for the CCS charging

cable plug. Both sections of the socket cover must therefore be
opened 2.

Combo 1 vehicle socket

# Fully insert the CCS charging cable plug into the vehicle socket.
Make sure that the inserted charging cable is not under tension.
If the charging station is enabled, the indicator lamp 5 # and the
lower status display 4 flash in orange, and in green as soon as the
high-voltage battery is being charged.

When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be
started or moved.

At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown on the
driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction is the point
in time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged.
Combo 2 vehicle socket

# Press on the centre rear of the socket flap 1 and swing the socket flap % Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling sys‐
to the front. tem may audibly switch on during the charging process.

The indicator lamp 3 % and upper status display 4 light up white.

399

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

% If the vehicle is idle for long periods and connected to the mains * NOTE
supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port
as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. pre-
Charging cable and charge port may generate heat within the permissi‐
entry climate control).
ble limiting values during the charging process.

THE HEAT GENERATED BY THE CHARGING CABLE AND CHARGE

Ending the direct current charging process PORT IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

(mode 4) R The power supply of the mains and the charging cable are intact.
R The notes on handling the charging cable and operating unit on
the charging cable were observed.
& DANGER
Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket # If the charging cable or the charge port generate too much
The charging process uses high voltage. heat, have the power supply of the mains supply checked.

If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are dam‐
aged, you could receive an electric shock.
* NOTE
# Only use an undamaged charging cable. Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open
# Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when
# Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driv‐
there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle
ing over the cable.
socket from dirt and damage.
# Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified special‐ # Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before
ist workshop as soon as possible.
closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage
# Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.
socket.
Requirements:

R The vehicle is unlocked or the vehicle is locked and the distance

between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.

400

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

# Press and hold button 2 on the charging cable plug and remove the
% Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with charging cable plug from the vehicle socket.
one of the following vehicle sockets.

COMBO 1 VEHICLE SOCKET % If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, unlock the vehicle
and repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable plug is
still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

# Close the socket cover and the socket flap.

COMBO 2 VEHICLE SOCKET

# Press the charging interruption button 3.

The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.

% As an alternative, and only if the charging interruption button # Press charging interruption button 2.
3 is not working, you can unlock the vehicle using the vehicle
key or centrally from inside to end the charging process. If the The charging process is ended. The % indicator lamp 1 lights up
indicator lamp % 1 then lights up white, the vehicle socket is white. The vehicle socket is unlocked.
unlocked for around 30 seconds.

% The charging process can also be ended via the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 601).

401

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)

% As an alternative, and only if the charging interruption button Function of the charge level display in the
2 is not working, you can unlock the vehicle using the vehicle driver display
key or centrally from inside to end the charging process. If the
indicator lamp % 1 then lights up white, the vehicle socket is
unlocked for around 30 seconds.

% The charging process can also be ended via the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 601).

# Remove the charging cable plug from the vehicle socket. 1 Remaining range at current state of charge
2 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
3 Maximum state of charge (as per the setting)
% If you cannot remove the charging cable plug, unlock the vehicle 4 Remaining time until fully charged (up to the selected maximum state of
and repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable plug is charge)
still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop. 5 Dynamic charge level display
6 Current charging power
# Close the socket cover and the socket flap.
% The indicated remaining range 1 may vary due to various fac‐
% The left indicator lamp % 1 on the vehicle socket remains lit tors, e.g.driving style or topography.
for some time after the charging cable plug has been disconnec‐
ted and then goes out. When the vehicle is switched off and connected to the mains supply, the
driver display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes.

% The value of current charging power 6 can differ from the dis‐
play on the charging station.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the prediction for the remaining range 1 and the
maximum state of charge 3 are not displayed.

402

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

Parking

Parking the vehicle & WARNING

Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
& WARNING vehicle
Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
vehicle rolling away IN PARTICULAR
If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an
R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.
R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.
the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.

# apply the parking brake. IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:
# Switch the transmission to position j.
R releasing the parking brake.
R change the gearbox setting.
WARNING R start the vehicle.
&
Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
# Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into and lock the vehicle.
contact with hot vehicle components.
# Keep the key out of reach of children.
# In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

403

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

# Apply the electric parking brake.

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Engage transmission position j when the vehicle is stationary and the
brake pedal is depressed (/ page 364).
# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Switch off the vehicle by pressing button 1.

# Release the service brake slowly.

* NOTE
Damage caused by vehicle being lowered # Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
Vehicles with rear axle level control The vehicle can be lowered due
to differences in temperature or extended non-operational times. This
% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side win‐
can cause damage to parts of the body.
dows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if
# When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure the driver's door is closed.
that there are no obstacles such as kerbs under or in the
immediate vicinity of the body.
% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side win‐
dows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four
minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Automatic vehicle shut-off upon locking

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic engine shut-off.

WHEN YOU LEAVE THE VEHICLE READY TO DRIVE, THE VEHICLE WILL BE
TURNED OFF WHEN LOCKED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

R The ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

R Transmission position j is engaged.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal. R The driver's door is closed.
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be met:
# On inclines, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the
kerb if it starts moving. - The vehicle is locked using the vehicle key.

404

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is locked via KEYLESS-GO

on the door handle of a closed door.
Garage door opener
- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is locked via the locking PROGRAMMING BUTTONS FOR THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER
button on the boot lid.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
% The engine will continue to run if the vehicle is not locked as Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
described after you have left it. In this case, switch off the vehi‐ monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
cle manually. results in poisoning.

Automatic vehicle shut-off after a period of time (equipment-dependent)

# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
When the engine is running, the following display message will appear on
the driver display when you leave the vehicle or after a certain holding time
in transmission position j : Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when
& WARNING
locked or automatically in XX mins
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
The vehicle will then switch off automatically after a total holding time of garage door
20 minutes. When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement.
% To avoid automatic shut-off after a period of time, acknowledge
the corresponding message on the central display of the multi‐ # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the
media system. garage door's movement.

THE ENGINE WILL CONTINUE TO RUN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the
R If the vehicle is not locked as described after you have left it garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
R If automatic shut-off is not indicated by the display message Requirements:
R If automatic shut-off after a period of time has been deactivated via the
R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of
corresponding message on the central display
movement of the door.
R The vehicle is switched on.
In this case, switch off the vehicle manually.

405

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

R The vehicle has not been started. # Press and hold the button 6 of the remote control 5 until one of the
following signals appears:
R The indicator lamp 4 lights up green continuously. Programming is
% The garage door opener function is always available when the complete.
vehicle is switched on. R The indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Programming was successful.
Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door sys‐
tem must be carried out.

# If the indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the
process.

# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the
scope of delivery for the garage door opener.

SYNCHRONISING THE ROLLING CODE

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program.
The indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. & DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
yellow. results in poisoning.

# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,

# Release the previously pressed button. running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.
The indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.

# Point the remote control 5 from a distance of between 1 cm and 8 cm

towards button 1, 2 or 3.

406

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

& WARNING
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement.

# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the

garage door's movement.

Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the # Press the programming button on the door drive unit.
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
Requirements: # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the
R The door system uses a rolling code. door closes.
R The vehicle is within range of the garage door or door drive. When the door closes, programming is completed.
R The vehicle, as well as persons and objects, are located outside the
range of movement of the door. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL

% The garage door opener function is always available when the
vehicle is switched on.
& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
results in poisoning.

# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,

running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

407

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

# Hold the remote control 5 at various angles in front of the inside mirror
& WARNING from a distance of between 1 cm and 8 cm. You should test every
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
# Hold the remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door front of the inside mirror. You should test every position for at least
if they stand within its range of movement. 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the

# Press the button 6 on the remote control 5 again before transmission
garage door's movement. ends on remote controls that transmit only for a limited period.

# Angle the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit towards the
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the remote control.
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.
% It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using
% The garage door opener function is always available when the the remote control in the inside mirror, even after you have suc‐
vehicle is switched on. cessfully performed the measures described above. In this case,
contact the HomeLink® Hotline.

% SUPPORT AND ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMING INFORMATION:

R from the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 0800 046 635 465 or

+49 (0) 7132 3455 733 (chargeable)
R online at https://www.homelink.com

# Check whether the transmitter frequency of the remote control 5 is

supported.

# Replace the batteries in the remote control 5.

408

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

OPENING OR CLOSING THE GARAGE DOOR

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
results in poisoning.

# Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,

running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes.

& WARNING # If the indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a the previously pressed button again and hold pressed until the door
garage door opens or closes.
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage
CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER MEMORY
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement.
& DANGER
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust gases
garage door's movement. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and
results in poisoning.
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. # Never leave the engine and, if present, the stationary heater,
Requirements: running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the

vehicle is switched on.

409

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

# If the indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3.

& WARNING The entire memory has been deleted.
Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage Electric parking brake
door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door
if they stand within its range of movement. FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (AUTOMATIC APPLICA‐
TION)
# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the
garage door's movement.
& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the vehicle
garage. Ensure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR
% The garage door opener function is always available when the R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.
vehicle is switched on.
R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN

MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

R releasing the parking brake.

R change the gearbox setting.
R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
# Press and hold the buttons 1 and 3. and lock the vehicle.
The indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # Keep the key out of reach of children.

410

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

% The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the
THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED IF THE TRANSMISSION IS IN
vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
POSITION J AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED:

R The vehicle is switched off. FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (AUTOMATIC RELEASE)
R The driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is opened. THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS RELEASED WHEN THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS ARE FULFILLED:

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking R The driver's door is closed.
brake (/ page 412). R The vehicle has been started.
R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS pedal, or you shift from transmission position j to h or k on level
ALSO APPLIED: ground.
R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed.
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
R The driver's seat belt is not properly fastened.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened, the following condition must be
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. met:
R In addition, one of the following conditions must be met: - You shift from transmission position j.
- The vehicle is switched off.
- The driver's seat belt is not fastened. When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the
- There is a system malfunction. driver display goes out.
- The power supply is insufficient.
- The vehicle is idle for a long period.
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: in the following situations, the
electric parking brake is also applied:
- Following completion of a parking procedure.
- If an error occurs during a parking procedure.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red indicator lamp ! lights
up on the driver display.

411

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

APPLYING/RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE MANUALLY APPLY

& WARNING
Accident– and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the
vehicle
IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN
IN PARTICULAR

R Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users.

R get out of the car and are hit by traffic.
R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN # When the vehicle is stationary, push handle 1.
MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY: The red ! indicator lamp on the driver display lights up.
R releasing the parking brake.
R change the gearbox setting. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red !
indicator lamp is lit continuously.
R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. RELEASE

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you
and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children.

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

412

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

# Switch on the vehicle. YOU WILL THEN RECEIVE INFORMATION REGARDING THE FOLLOWING:

# Pull handle 1. R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
The red ! indicator lamp on the driver display goes out. R The force of the impact.
EMERGENCY BRAKING
THE FOLLOWING SITUATION CAN LEAD TO INADVERTENT ACTIVATION:

R The parked vehicle is moved, forexample in a double-decker garage.

% Deactivate tow-away protection to prevent inadvertent activa‐

tion. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection
will also be deactivated.
You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multi‐
media system (/ page 414).

SYSTEM LIMITS
# Press and hold handle 1.
DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the message Release parking brake is
displayed and the red ! indicator lamp flashes. R if damage is caused to the vehicle without impact, for example, if an
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp on the driver display lights R if an impact occurs at low speed
up. R if the electric parking brake is not applied

Information on collision detection for a % You are responsible for your vehicle. You should therefore always
parked vehicle ensure that your vehicle is free of damage and is roadworthy.

If an impact is detected with tow-away protection switched on in the vehicle,

and collision detection is active, a message is displayed in the multimedia
system when the vehicle is switched on.

413

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

Setting collision detection for a parked vehi‐ COPYING THE COLLISION PHOTOS TO A USB FLASH DRIVE
Connect a USB flash drive (/ page 696).
cle
#

# Select Manage collision photos.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/close 5 Vehicle protection # Select Copy (USB).
# Activate or deactivate the function via Collision notification. All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE COLLISION PHOTOS FUNCTION

Please note that legal restrictions regarding automatic recording of the vehicle % Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices to
surroundings may be in place in certain countries. ensure secure operation.

# Activate or deactivate Collision photos.

DELETING COLLISION PHOTOS
# Select Manage collision photos.
% A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos
are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the # Select Delete.
photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not All collision photos are deleted.
been deleted already.

TRANSFERRING THE COLLISION PHOTOS WITH THE MERCEDES ME APP Notes on parking up the vehicle
# Select Upload collision photos. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer
damage through disuse.
# Select Upload automatically.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.
# Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes
me app.
The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop.

% Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the
collision photos in the Mercedes me app.

414

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Parking

Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is
tery's period out of use) switched on.

STANDBY MODE FUNCTION

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING STANDBY MODE (PARKING UP THE VEHICLE)
Requirements:
% This function is not available for all models.
R The vehicle is switched on.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended R The vehicle has not been started.
periods of non-operation.

STANDBY MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING: Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other functions
R The starter battery is preserved. # Activate or deactivate Standby mode.
R The maximum non-operational time appears in the driver's display.
R The connection to online services is interrupted.

IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE FULFILLED, STANDBY MODE CAN

BE ACTIVATED OR DEACTIVATED USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:

R The vehicle is switched on.

R The vehicle has not been started.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconven‐

ience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the
vehicle.

CHARGE THE STARTER BATTERY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

R The vehicle's non-operational time has to be extended.

R The starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode.

415

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving,
parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They & WARNING
are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not Risk of accident if the detection capability of the vehicle sensors
relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is or cameras is impaired
always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for If the areas of the vehicle sensors or cameras are obscured, damaged
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to or dirty, some driving and driving safety systems may no longer function
the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of correctly. There is a risk of an accident.
the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.
# Always keep the areas of the vehicle sensors and cameras
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your clear of obstructions and clean.
driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions. # Have damage to the bumpers, radiator grille or stone chipping
in the area of the cameras in the windscreen repaired at a
qualified specialist workshop.
% Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previ‐
ously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when chang‐
ing drivers. Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or
ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

416

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

% The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for

the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image
on the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving

safety systems
DRIVING AND DRIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
R ABS (/ page 418)
1 Multifunction camera R BAS (/ page 419)
2 Cameras in the exterior mirrors
R ESP® (/ page 419)
3 Front radar
R ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (/ page 420)
4 Front camera
5 Corner radars R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 422)
6 Ultrasonic sensors R ESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 423)
7 Reversing camera R EBD (/ page 425)
In particular, keep the sensor and camera areas free of dirt, ice or slush. R STEER CONTROL (/ page 425)
(/ page 727). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detec‐ R HOLD function (/ page 425)
tion ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional number R Hill Start Assist (/ page 427)
plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, car foils or rock chip protection films
in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure there are no R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 427)
overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 427)
R Cruise control (/ page 428)
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator shell, or after an impact,
have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. R Limiter (/ page 429)
Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras in the windscreen R Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 456)
repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 461)
R Traffic light view (/ page 465)
R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (/ page 473)

417

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R Rear-axle level control(/ page 473) R Active Emergency Stop Assist

R AMG RIDE CONTROL (/ page 474) R Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
R RACE START (/ page 475) R Active Lane Keeping Assist
R DRIFT MODE (/ page 476)
PARKING SYSTEMS
DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE R Reversing camera (/ page 479)
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 432)
R 360° camera (/ page 482)
R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 439)
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487)
R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 440)
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 491)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 451)
R Memory Parking Assist (/ page 500)
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 442)
R Trailer Manoeuvring Assist (/ page 505)
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 445)
R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 446)
R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 442) % The availability of individual functions depends on country and
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning equipment.
(/ page 466)
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 470)
R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 143) Function of ABS
THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) REGULATES THE BRAKE PRESSURE
IN CRITICAL DRIVING SITUATIONS:
% The availability of some functions or partial functions of the Driv‐
ing Assistance Package depends on the equipment or country. R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is
The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may differ from insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
the functions listed here. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
THE FOLLOWING DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS ARE ALSO
AVAILABLE WITHOUT THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE,
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The
ALBEIT WITH RESTRICTED FUNCTIONALITY:
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
R Active Brake Assist

418

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

SYSTEM LIMITS
R ABS is active from speeds of approximately 5 km/h.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred FUNCTION OF ESP®
and the yellow ! ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the
vehicle is started. CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS ACTIVATED
THE ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®) CAN MONITOR AND
IMPROVE DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
Function of BAS TIONS WITHIN PHYSICAL LIMITS:

R when starting off on wet or slippery roads

& WARNING R when braking
Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist
System)
IF THE VEHICLE DEVIATES FROM THE DIRECTION DESIRED BY THE
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking
DRIVER, ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOL‐
situation is increased.
LOWING WAYS:
# Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking
R One or more wheels are individually braked.
situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
R The engine output is adapted according to the situation.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED, THE Å WARNING LAMP LIGHTS UP CON‐
additional brake force. TINUOUSLY:

IF YOU DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL QUICKLY, BAS IS ACTIVATED: R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R The drive wheels could spin.
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. WHEN THE ÷ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS
HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT:

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
deactivated. R Do not deactivate ESP®.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when starting
off.

419

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN
THE FOLLOWING WAYS:
& WARNING R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.
INFLUENCE OF DRIVE PROGRAMS ON ESP®
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to different weather and road condi‐
tions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected
drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated (/ page 353).
TO IMPROVE TRACTION, ESP® CAN BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS: FUNCTION OF ESP® (MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES)
R when using snow chains YOU CAN SELECT BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING MODES OF THE ELEC‐
R in deep snow TRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®):
R on sand or gravel R ESP® ON
R ESP® SPORT
R ESP® OFF
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances
traction.
CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS ACTIVATED
ESP® MONITORS AND IMPROVES DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION,
If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
malfunction.
R When starting off on wet or slippery roads.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: R When braking.
R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 961) R Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer operation from speeds of 65 km/h,
if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from side to side.
R Display messages (/ page 883)
R When there is a strong crosswind and a driving speed of approximately
ETS/4ETS 80 km/h to 200 km/h.
ETS/4ETS traction control (Electronic Traction System) is part of ESP® and
makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road.

420

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering
WAYS: characteristics are desired, e.g. on cordoned-off roads.

R One or more wheels are braked. Driving with ESP® SPORT or with ESP® deactivated requires an extremely quali‐
R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. fied and experienced driver.
R The drive system output is adapted according to the situation.
If ESP® SPORT is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷
warning lamp flashes. ESP® then only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree.
ESP® is activated every time the vehicle is started regardless of whether ESP®
SPORT or ESP® OFF was selected before the engine was switched off. ESP® SPORT ALSO HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:

WHEN THE ÷ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS R ESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree.
HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT: R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
R The engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive
R Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather condi‐
wheels can spin.
tions.
The power of the drive system is only slightly limited according to the
R Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. situation and the drive wheels can spin.
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when starting off. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction
on loose surfaces.
CHARACTERISTICS OF ESP® SPORT
R ESP® continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied.
WARNING R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combina‐
&
Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly tion is no longer active.
R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding
and having an accident. CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED
# Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described
below. & WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.
When ESP® SPORT is selected, the warning lamps å and Æ light up
continuously. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

421

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

When ESP® is switched off, the warning lamps å and ¤ light up continu‐ If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a
ously. malfunction.

DEACTIVATING ESP® HAS THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS: OBSERVE THE DISPLAY MESSAGES AND INDICATOR AND WARNING
LAMPS WHICH ARE DISPLAYED:
R Driving stability will no longer be improved.
R The drive wheels could spin. R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 961)
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. R Display messages (/ page 883)
R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combina‐ ETS/4ETS (ELECTRONIC TRACTION SYSTEM)
tion is no longer active.
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
R Crosswind Assist is no longer active.
ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN
THE FOLLOWING WAYS:
% Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP® R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
when braking hard.
R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

IT MAY BE BEST TO ACTIVATE ESP® SPORT OR DEACTIVATE ESP® IN THE FUNCTION OF ESP® CROSSWIND ASSIST
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS: ESP® CROSSWIND ASSIST DETECTS SUDDEN GUSTS OF SIDE WIND AND
HELPS THE DRIVER TO KEEP THE VEHICLE IN THE LANE:
R When using snow chains.
R In deep snow. R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx.
R On sand or gravel. 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one
side.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances
traction.

% Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no lon‐

ger apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

422

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

FUNCTION OF ESP® TRAILER STABILISATION ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ESP® (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)

Multimedia system:
& WARNING 4© 5ß 5y
Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot % ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when
prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can
centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this. otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
# Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and
weather conditions. # Select ESP®.

# Select On or å Off.
WHEN DRIVING WITH A TRAILER, ESP®
TRAILER STABILISATION CAN STA‐
BILISE YOUR VEHICLE IF THE TRAILER BEGINS TO SWERVE FROM SIDE ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously
TO SIDE: on the driver display.

R ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h . Observe the information on the warning lamps and the display messages
R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake appli‐ which may be shown on the driver display.
cation on one side.
SETTING ESP® WITH THE AMG STEERING WHEEL BUTTON
R In the event of severe swerving, the drive system output is also reduced
and all wheels are braked.
% You can also adjust ESP® via the multimedia system
(/ page 359).
ESP® TRAILER STABILISATION MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNC‐
TION IF:

R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the

vehicle.

423

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# To adjust ESP®: press upper or lower display button 1 repeatedly, until # To activate® ESP: briefly press button 2 when ESP® SPORT is selected
it displays the å symbol. or ESP® is deactivated.
The road in the å button symbol lights up blue.
The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps go out.
% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are When the ÷ symbol is shown with a red ! on the display button, ESP®
displayed can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 351). is malfunctioning. Observe the information on warning lamps and display mes‐
sages which are shown in the driver display.
THE ROAD COLOUR OF THE Å BUTTON SYMBOL INDICATES THE CUR‐
SETTING ESP® IN THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM (MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES)
RENT SETTING:
Multimedia system:
R å (blue): ESP® ON 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
R å (yellow): ESP® SPORT
R å (red): ESP® OFF % Depending on the equipment, the AMG DYNAMIC SELECT menu
can also be accessed via the AMG button in the centre console.

# To set ESP® SPORT: briefly press button 2 when ESP® is activated.

ESP® is always activated when the engine is started. The road in the å
The road in the å button symbol lights up yellow.
button symbol lights up blue.
The å and Æ warning lamps appear in the driver display.
# To set ESP® SPORT: when ESP is activated, briefly press å to change
# To deactivate ESP® : set ESP® SPORT then press and hold the button 2. to the Sport programme.
The road in the å button symbol lights up red. The road in the å button symbol lights up yellow.
The å and ¤ warning lamps appear in the driver display.
# Switch off ESP® : set the program ESP® SPORT and press and hold å
to switch off ESP.
% If you switch off ¤ ESP® in the drive program I, AMG The road in the å button symbol lights up red. The å and ¤
Dynamics automatically switches to the Master level. warning lamps appear in the driver display.

# Switch onESP® : in ESP® SPORT or when ESP® is switched off, briefly

press å.
The road in the å button symbol lights up blue.

424

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

The å and Æ or ¤ warning lamps go out. SYSTEM LIMITS

STEER CONTROL MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE
% FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
You can also set ESP® via the steering-wheel buttons
(/ page 423). R ESP® is deactivated.
R ESP® is malfunctioning.
R The steering is malfunctioning.
Function of EBD
ELECTRONIC BRAKEFORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) IS CHARACTERISED BY If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the power steering.
THE FOLLOWING:

R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. HOLD function
R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.
HOLD FUNCTION
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to
Function of STEER CONTROL depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely
steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. standing still remains with the driver.

THIS STEERING RECOMMENDATION IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐ SYSTEM LIMITS

TIONS: The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is
not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when
R both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road stationary.
surface when you brake
R The gradient must not be greater than 30 %.
R the vehicle starts to skid

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you brake and both right wheels or both left
wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface, you will receive a steering
recommendation. If the vehicle is skidding, you will not receive a steering
recommendation.

425

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION

# Depress the accelerator pedal to start off.
& WARNING
or
Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when
you leave the vehicle # Depress the brake pedal until ë disappears from the driver display.
IF THE VEHICLE IS ONLY BRAKED WITH THE HOLD FUNCTION IT THE HOLD FUNCTION IS ALSO DEACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
COULD, IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ROLL AWAY: TIONS:
R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R The parking position j is engaged.
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator R The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE VEHICLE IS HELD BY THE PARKING
leave it. POSITION J AND/OR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE:

R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.

Requirements R The vehicle is switched off.
R The vehicle is stationary. R There is a system malfunction.
R The driver's door is closed or the driver is correctly belted. R The power supply is insufficient.
R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly.
the ECO start/stop function.
The HOLD function is deactivated.
R The electric parking brake has been released.
R The transmission position h, k or i is engaged. # Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.

ACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION

# Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further
until the ë display appears on the driver display.

# Release the brake pedal.

426

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Function of Hill Start Assist ATTENTION ASSIST

FUNCTION OF ATTENTION ASSIST
& WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motor‐
Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away ways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra‐
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. tion on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break.

# Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator ATTENTION ASSIST serves solely as an aid. It cannot always promptly detect
pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill fatigue or lapses in concentration. The system is not a substitute for a well-
Start Assist. rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular, timely breaks to
allow for adequate recovery.

HILL START ASSIST HOLDS THE VEHICLE FOR A SHORT TIME WHEN YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN TWO SETTINGS:
STARTING OFF UPHILL UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.
R The transmission position h or k for starting off uphill is selected. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the
R The electric parking brake has been released. attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration is detected, the driver display
accelerator pedal and depress it without the vehicle rolling away immediately. shows the warning: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!. You can acknowledge
the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and
ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration,
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

ADAPTIVE BRAKE LIGHTS WARN FOLLOWING TRAFFIC IN AN EMER‐

GENCY BRAKING SITUATION WITH THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

R flashing the brake lamps

R activating the hazard warning lights (/ page 68)

If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps
flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY:
noticeable warning.
R journey time since the last break.

427

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R the attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST R If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving
situations.
The more segments 1 of the circle displayed, the higher the detected atten‐ R If ESP® is not available
tion level. Fewer segments 1 are displayed in the circle as the attention level
decreases. Observe also any information regarding display messages that can be dis‐
played on the driver display.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot
issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. THE ATTENTION ASSIST DROWSINESS OR ALERTNESS ASSESSMENT IS
RESET AND RESTARTED WHEN CONTINUING THE JOURNEY IN THE FOL‐
If the driver display shows a warning, the MBUX multimedia system offers to
LOWING SITUATIONS:
search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this
rest area. R You switch off the vehicle.

When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched

R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change
on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. drivers or take a break).

SYSTEM LIMITS SETTING ATTENTION ASSIST

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance
If the system is unavailable due to a fault, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning 5 ATTENTION ASSIST
lamp Û lights up continuously on the driver display.
SETTING THE SENSITIVITY
FUNCTIONALITY OF ATTENTION ASSIST IS RESTRICTED, AND WARNINGS # Select Z next to ATTENTION ASSIST.
MAY BE DELAYED OR NOT ISSUED AT ALL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
TIONS IN PARTICULAR: # Select Standard or Sensitive.

R If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE MICROSLEEP WARNING
R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes)
# Activate or deactivate Microsleep warning.

R If there is a strong side wind

R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of Cruise control and limiter
acceleration)
R If the Active Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist FUNCTION OF CRUISE CONTROL
DISTRONIC is active Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver.
R If the clock is set to the incorrect time.

428

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Forexample, the stored speed is not deleted if you accelerate to overtake. DO NOT USE CRUISE CONTROL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise
control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. R in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic, on winding roads
You can set any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up R on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose trac‐
to the set winter tyre limit. tion and the vehicle could then begin skidding.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ R when visibility is poor
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).
FUNCTION OF THE LIMITER
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set
of 250 km/h. speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY YOU CAN LIMIT THE SPEED AS FOLLOWS:
h Grey: cruise control is selected but not yet active or temporarily in R Variable: for short-term limitation of the driving speed, e.g. in built-up
passive mode. areas
h Green: cruise control is active. R Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode

A stored speed is shown below the display h and is indicated in the You can set any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up
speedometer. to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is
stationary if the vehicle has been started.
SYSTEM LIMITS
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).

On long and steep downhill gradients, you must change down to a lower gear Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: The limiter is available up to a maximum speed of
in good time. This is particularly important when driving a laden vehicle. You 250 km/h.
are thus making full use of the engine's braking effect. This will take some of
the strain off the brake system and prevent the brakes from overheating and NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
wearing too quickly.
M Grey: variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.

M Flashing grey: variable limiter is temporarily in passive mode.

M Green: variable limiter is activated.

429

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

A stored speed is shown below the display M and is indicated in the VARIABLE LIMITER
speedometer.
R The variable limiter is selected.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the
variable limiter switches to passive mode. The M passive message appears
on the driver display and the indicator M starts flashing.

THE VARIABLE LIMITER IS REACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐

TIONS:

R If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.

R If the stored speed is called up.
R If you store a new speed.

OPERATING CRUISE CONTROL OR THE VARIABLE LIMITER

Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to stored speed
J Adopts the stored/detected speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current ± Deactivates cruise control/variable limiter
speed, the vehicle decelerates.
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease speed
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the h Selects cruise control
stored speed. M Selects the variable limiter
Operating cruise control and the variable limiter:
Requirements:
# Press the corresponding button with only one finger or swipe across the
CRUISE CONTROL control panel.

R The transmission is in position h.

Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter:
R The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. # To select cruise control: press h.
R Cruise control is selected. # To select the variable limiter: press M.

430

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of the
% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable control panel 1.
limiter is selected by a different button (/ page 435).
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.

Activating cruise control or the variable limiter: or

# Press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1. # Briefly press ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.

The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle via The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten
cruise control, or is restricted by the variable limiter. (e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h).

or or

# Press J. # Press and hold ® or ¯ on the control panel 1.

The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle via The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten,
cruise control, or is restricted by the variable limiter. and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h.
If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle
or
speed is stored.
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist
# Press ® on the control panel 1.
DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is
deleted. % When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you
cannot increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed: 1 km/h.

# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of the
Adopting a detected speed:
control panel 1.
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detec‐
ted a traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed on
the driver display:

431

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# Press J. SETTING THE SPEED LIMIT FOR WINTER TYRES

The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and Multimedia system:
the vehicle maintains, or does not exceed this speed. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyre limit
# Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter: SETTING A SPEED
# Press ±.
# Select Winter tyre limit.

# Select a speed.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® ESP®
or if intervenes, cruise control
is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is & WARNING
deleted. Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR
INFORMATION ON THE PERMANENT LIMITER
BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE:
If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter
tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or
multimedia system (/ page 60). slower than the currently driven speed.
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears on the driver display. When front or does not react to relevant objects.
you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch
off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has # Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to
been restarted or if the set speed is changed. brake at all times.

The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the
and the driven speed remains below the set speed. stored speed.

432

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Dis‐ Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist
tance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A
of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active LIMITED REACTION:
Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warn‐
ing. R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unex‐
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the pected obstacles
vehicle in front.
R to complex traffic conditions
# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
action.
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warn‐
ings nor intervene in such situations.

# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react

accordingly.

% Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC described for vehicles without

Driving Assistance Package may be a Digital Extra (depending on
the respective country of use) (/ page 109).

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing

roads. If vehicles are detected ahead the set distance is maintained, if neces‐
sary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes
depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed.

The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the
steering wheel.

433

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

AVAILABLE SPEED RANGE: suchas a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning indicates
that the driver must now reassume control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not
R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 160 km/h accelerated any further.
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).
% The adjustable set speed may differ if a speed limit (e.g. winter
tyre limit) is stored.

OTHER FEATURES OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:

R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program

R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is
switched on to change to the overtaking lane Notification on the driver display in the menu Assistance
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
- Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges 1 Vehicle in front
(except bicycles and motorcycles) 2 Distance indicator
- Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways 3 Set specified distance
or multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-depend‐ The vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in
ent) the lane to the right of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to
overtake on the left, for example, on UK motorways.

% In the Active Distance Assist menu, it is possible to set the PERMANENT STATUS DISPLAY
driving mode of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Depending ç Grey: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active.
on the selected drive program, the driving behaviour is energy-
ç Green speedometer, grey vehicle: Active Distance Assist
saving, comfortable or dynamic (/ page 441).
DISTRONIC active, speed set.

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if ç Green: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detec‐
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can ted.
automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 sec‐
onds if the system detects that the driver is touching the steering wheel.
If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off,

434

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highligh‐ R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.
ted in the speedometer. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC's status display is
greyed out when in passive mode.
In addition, one or more wheels may lose grip due to braking or acceleration
If the speed of the vehicle in front or the ascertained target speed due to on smooth or slippery roads, and the vehicle may begin skidding. If ESP®
the route event ahead is less than the stored speed, the segments in the intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
speedometer light up.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
If you increase or decrease the set specified distance 3, the h display
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
appears briefly.
OPERATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC AND THE VARIABLE
% The green vehicle symbol ç is displayed cyclically when the LIMITER
vehicle is ready to pull away.
& WARNING
Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist
% If the accelerator pedal is depressed while Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
DISTRONIC is operational, the system can be switched to pas‐ ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A
sive mode. The ç suspended message appears briefly on the LIMITED REACTION:
driver display.
R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unex‐
SYSTEM LIMITS
pected obstacles
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
R to complex traffic conditions
INSTANCES, FOREXAMPLE:
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in
greatly varying light conditions. As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warn‐
ings nor intervene in such situations.
R If the windscreen in the camera's area is dirty, misted up, damaged or
covered. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. accordingly.
R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradi‐
ents.

435

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Dis‐
Assist DISTRONIC tance Assist DISTRONIC
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50%
BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE: of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warn‐
R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. ing.
R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or
slower than the currently driven speed.
# Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the
vehicle in front.
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in
front or does not react to relevant objects. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive
action.
# Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to
brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the

& WARNING
stored speed.
Risk of accident due to speed adaptation via Active Speed Limit
Assist
The speed limit adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high
or otherwise erroneous in certain circumstances:

R with speed limits below 20 km/h

R due to weather, e.g. in wet or foggy conditions

# Ensure that the speed driven always complies with the traffic
regulations.

# Adjust the speed driven to the current traffic and weather

conditions.

436

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Requirements: K Increases/decreases the specified distance

I Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist
ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:
DISTRONIC
R The electric parking brake has been released. # To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter:
R ESP® is switched on and is not intervening. press the respective button with only one finger or swipe across the
R Transmission position h is engaged. control panel.
R All the doors are closed. SWITCHES BETWEEN THE VARIABLE LIMITER AND ACTIVE DISTANCE
R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. ASSIST DISTRONIC
# Press I.

VARIABLE LIMITER: ACTIVATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC OR THE VARIABLE

LIMITER
R The variable limiter is selected. # To activate without a stored speed: press ®, ¯ or J. Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle via
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or is restricted by the variable limiter.

or

# To activate with a stored speed: press J. Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle via
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or is restricted by the variable limiter.
If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is
stored.
J Adopts the stored/detected speed
± Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/the variable lim‐
iter % When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted.
1®¯ Control panel to increase/decrease speed When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the speed
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

437

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

INCREASING OR DECREASING THE SPEED

# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of the % A speed restriction shown on the driver display is only adopted
control panel 1. while driving, not when stationary.
R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
PULLING AWAY WITH ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of the # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from
control panel 1.
the brake pedal.
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. # Press J.

or or

# Briefly press the top ® or bottom ¯ of the control panel 1. # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly.
The stored speed is increased or decreased by 10 km/h. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remain active.

or INCREASING OR DECREASING THE SPECIFIED DISTANCE FROM THE VEHI‐

CLE IN FRONT
# Press the top ® or bottom ¯ of the control panel 1 and hold # Press K.
pressed. The h display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one
The stored speed is increased or decreased in 10 km/h increments. level.
If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest
or
level.
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

# Press the top ® of the control panel 1.

ADOPTING THE SPEED RESTRICTION SHOWN ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press
®, ¯ or J.

# Adopt the displayed speed restriction: press J.

The speed restriction shown on the driver display is adopted as the
stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front,
but only up to the stored speed, or restricts its speed accordingly.

438

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

DEACTIVATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC OR THE VARIABLE FUNCTION OF ACTIVE SPEED LIMIT ASSIST
LIMITER
& WARNING
& WARNING Risk of accident due to speed adaptation via Active Speed Limit
Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being Assist
active when you leave the driver's seat The speed limit adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active or otherwise erroneous in certain circumstances:
Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
R with speed limits below 20 km/h
# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and R due to weather, e.g. in wet or foggy conditions
secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you
leave the driver's seat. # Ensure that the speed driven always complies with the traffic
regulations.

# Press ±. # Adjust the speed driven to the current traffic and weather
conditions.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Dis‐
tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed
deactivated. limits is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed
(/ page 441). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not accepted.

Adjustment of travel speed is initiated no later than when the vehicle is level
with the traffic sign. For signs indicating entry into an urban zone, the speed
is adapted according to that permitted within the built-up area. The speed
restriction indicator on the driver display is always refreshed when the vehicle
is level with the traffic sign.

If you are driving on German motorways with no speed limit, the system uses
the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If
you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the
recommended speed of 130 km/h is adopted.

439

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been switched to passive mode by FUNCTION OF ROUTE-BASED SPEED ADAPTATION
pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the
stored speed are adopted. WARNING
&
Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current
weather and traffic conditions into consideration. Adjust your speed accord‐ Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily
ingly when necessary. unavailable in the following situations:

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ R If the driver does not follow the calculated route
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416). R If map data is not up-to-date or available
R In the event of roadworks
SYSTEM LIMITS
The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs R In bad weather or road conditions
(/ page 461). R If the accelerator pedal is depressed
R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as
the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a specific time or due # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
to weather conditions) cannot be unequivocally detected by the system.

Adjust your speed in these situations. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be
adapted to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected,
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable
or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accel‐
erates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front,
vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.

Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system

(/ page 441).

THE FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS ARE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT:

R Bends
R Roundabouts
R T-junctions
R Turns and exits

440

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic (/ page 632)) R Road narrowing
R Varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, forexample, at
ALSO, THE SPEED IS REDUCED IF THE TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR IS toll stations
SWITCHED ON AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IS DETECTED: R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice
R If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
R Turning off at junctions trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.
R Driving on slowing-down lanes
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other SETTING THE DRIVING STYLE FOR ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC
road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic Requirements:
lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐
still. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out auto‐
Multimedia system:
matically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is
confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist

SELECTING A DRIVING STYLE

SPEED ADJUSTMENT IS CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:
# Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable.
R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is
presumed that the route event is not deemed relevant for the driver
% Additional information on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. (/ page 435).
SYSTEM LIMITS
Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into SETTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT
account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations # Select Route based or Speed limit.
and driving at a suitable speed.
When these functions are active, the travel speed is adjusted depending
IN DIFFICULT CONDITIONS, THE SPEED SELECTION MADE BY THE SYS‐ on the route events ahead or in accordance with a speed restriction.
TEM MAY NOT ALWAYS BE SUITABLE. THIS APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS, FOREXAMPLE:

R The road's course is not clearly visible

441

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.

% IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE
DETECTED SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE MAX‐
IMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED: When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active, the ¬ status display appears in
the driver display.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
SYSTEM LIMITS
R Cruise control
The system limits of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering
R Variable limiter Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist.

% Additional information on speed adjustment (/ page 440). Active Steering Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STOP-AND-GO ASSIST
Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with
separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds & WARNING
and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐
front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a tioning
safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no
guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in
Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on lane.
the steering wheel at all times so that you can intervene at any time to correct
the course of the vehicle and keep it in the lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe
the traffic carefully.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416). # Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.

IF ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET, ACTIVE STOP-AND-GO

ASSIST ACTIVATES AUTOMATICALLY:

R You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or major high-speed road.

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active (/ page 435).
R Active Brake Assist is available (/ page 451).
R Active Steering Assist is switched on and active (/ page 444).

442

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

& WARNING % During the transition from active to passive mode, the Ø sym‐
Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes bol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is in
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause passive mode, the Ø symbol is shown as grey on the driver
unexpected steering interventions. display.

# Steer according to traffic conditions.

% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering
Assist may be unavailable.
Active Steering Assist is available up to a speed of 210 km/h.

The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate STEERING AND TOUCH DETECTION
steering interventions. Depending on the vehicle speed, Active Steering Assist The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times to
uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. ensure that they can intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle
and keep it in lane. The driver must anticipate a change from active to passive
% Depending on the respective country of use, Active Steering mode or vice versa at any time.
Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference in the lower
speed range. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can also assist
when driving outside the centre of the lane, forexample, to form
an emergency corridor.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steer‐
ing Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this
case. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a consid‐
STATUS DISPLAY OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST erable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel,
Ø Grey: activated and in passive mode an initial visual warning is issued. The notification 1 appears on the driver
display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to
Ø Green: activated and active the system, a repetitive warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning
message.
Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition
from active to passive mode, system limits detected If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an
emergency stop may be initiated (/ page 445).
Ø White, red hands: "hands on the steering wheel" prompt

443

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

The warning is not issued or stops as soon as the system detects the driver R If the roadway is narrow and winding.
touching or steering the steering wheel. R If there are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, suchas
object markers.
The touch detection may be limited or inoperative if there is no direct contact
between the hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there R If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel. trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual
THE SYSTEM DOES NOT PROVIDE ASSISTANCE IN THE FOLLOWING CON‐
warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.
DITIONS:
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
R in very tight bends and when turning
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).
R when crossing junctions
SYSTEM LIMITS R at roundabouts or toll stations
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In R when actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indica‐
some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in tor
the lane or to drive through exits.
R when the tyre pressure is too low
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
SITUATIONS:
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly
varying light conditions or dense shadows on the carriageway. Requirements:
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
R If there is insufficient road illumination.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of
the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
Multimedia system:
R If there are no lane markings in a given lane, or the markings are not
easily discernible or change quickly, forexample, in a construction area 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving
or at junctions. # Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.
R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow.
R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings
can therefore not be detected.

444

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Active Emergency Stop Assist monitors the steering wheel, as well as the
accelerator and brake pedals. If the system detects a lack of driver activity or
the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane, a warning can be issued and an
emergency stop initiated.

Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: The system is available from a

ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST ISSUES THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS
speed of approx. 60 km/h.
IN SUCCESSION:
Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If Active Steering Assist is
R Display message 1 appears on the driver display.
switched off, the system is available from a speed of approx. 60 km/h.
R In addition to the display 1, a warning tone sounds.
IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS THAT THE VEHICLE IS IN DANGER OF LEAVING R The Emergency stop initiated To cancel: operate steering wheel and a
THE LANE, A WARNING CAN BE ISSUED AND AN EMERGENCY STOP INITI‐ pedal message appears on the driver display, a continuous warning tone
ATED. sounds and the vehicle will no longer accelerate. Additionally, a slight
R The driver has not touched the steering wheel for a certain while, or no tensioning of the belt will be generated as required.
steering movement is detected for a lengthy period (depending on the R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until the vehicle comes to a
respective vehicle equipment). standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also effected.
R Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is depressed.

% Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: If Active Distance

% Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If Active Steering Assist DISTRONIC is active and the driver unfastens the seat belt
Assist is switched on and active, the system only monitors the and opens the driver's door, an emergency stop can be initiated
steering wheel. If the driver has not touched the steering wheel immediately.
for a certain time, a warning may be issued despite pedal actua‐
tion. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If possible, a lane change to the
Observe also the instructions on the touch detection of Active adjacent lane is performed (country-dependent). It is possible to change lanes
Steering Assist (/ page 442). across one lane and only to the outside lane, not to the hard shoulder.

When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is

deactivated. Depending on the respective country of use, the hazard warning
light system is also switched on.

445

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

WHEN THE VEHICLE HAS SLOWED TO A STANDSTILL: R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 470)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 451)
R the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
R the vehicle is unlocked.
R if possible, an emergency call is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
call centre. ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST IS INACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
CASES:
Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop
Assist by turning the steering wheel.
R Active Lane Keeping Assist has reached a system limit.
R ý Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched off (white status display).
YOU CAN CANCEL AN INTERVENTION BY ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP R ü Active Lane Keeping Assist is not ready (grey status display).
ASSIST AFTER AUTOMATIC BRAKING IS INITIATED BY PERFORMING ONE
OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

R Accelerating or braking: braking is cancelled, but the warning message, Active Lane Change Assist
warning tone and electric power steering remain active.
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST
R Steering: electric power steering is cancelled, the warning message and
warning tone remain active, and the vehicle continues to be braked
& WARNING
Risk of accident when changing lanes into an occupied adjacent
lane
% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a
Active Lane Change Assist can not always clearly determine whether
maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active
the adjacent lane is free, in particular if vehicles are approaching at
Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled
speeds which differ greatly to that of your own vehicle, or in the case of
until the vehicle has been restarted.
narrow vehicles, suchas motorcycles.

SYSTEM LIMITS A lane change can be initiated even if the adjacent lane is occupied.
FOR THE DETECTION OF VEHICLES AND OTHER OBSTACLES, OBSERVE # Ensure before initiating the lane change that the adjacent lane
THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: is clear, and that the action does not pose any danger to other
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 432) road users.

R Active Steering Assist (/ page 442) # Pay attention to other road users when changing lanes.
R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 446)

446

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

THE SYSTEM IS NOT AVAILABLE AND MUST BE REACTIVATED:

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to abrupt failure of the Active Lane Change R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist were
Assist function already activated before the vehicle entered the motorway.
If the system limits for Active Lane Change Assist are reached, it can R The system briefly no longer recognises the road being travelled on as
not be guaranteed that the system remains active. a motorway or a main road similar to a motorway, e.g. at a motorway
junction.
Active Lane Change Assist will then no longer provide any ancillary
steering torque.
As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a suitable road again, you can
# Always perform and monitor the lane change with your hands reactivate it using the buttons J, ® or ¯.
on the steering wheel. Pay attention to the surrounding traffic
Depending on the respective country of use, Active Lane Change Assist acti‐
conditions and intervene as required by steering and/or brak‐
vates again automatically. The message Indicating briefly starts lane change is
ing.
then shown on the driver display.

Active Lane Change Assist is activated via the turn signal indicator, and sup‐
ports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque.

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET FOR THIS FUNCTION:

R You are driving on a motorway or on a main road similar to a motorway.

R The travel speed is between approximately 80 km/h and 180 km/h.
R A dashed boundary marking separates the adjacent lane.
R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane.
R The sensors have detected a vehicle with sufficient distance behind your
own vehicle once since the last vehicle start.
Notification on the driver display in the menu Assistance
R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system
(/ page 450). 1 Green arrow: lane change initiated
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are activa‐ 2 Red arrow: lane change cancelled
ted on the motorway.
If Active Lane Change Assist is available, the notification ± appears with
green arrows on the driver display. If the system has been activated but is

447

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

not currently available, the notification ± appears with grey arrows on the AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE
driver display.
& WARNING
If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane, and a lane change is
Risk of accident due to erroneously triggered lane change
permitted, the lane change is initiated as soon as the driver activates the turn
signal indicator. The lane change is indicated to the driver by a green flashing The system cannot always clearly recognise all situations in which a
arrow next to the steering wheel symbol ± . In the Assistance menu, a lane change makes sense.
green arrow 1 indicating the respective adjacent lane appears on the driver
The system can initiate a lane change even though the traffic situation
display. The message Lane change to the left, for example, also appears.
is not suitable or the neighbouring lane is not available, not usable or
ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST CAN BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING occupied.
SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE: # Always monitor the traffic situation.
R The environmental conditions change (e.g. obstacle detected). # If necessary, cancel the lane change: Hold the steering wheel
R The driver takes their hands off the steering wheel. or countersteer slightly and return the vehicle to its own lane.
R The driver steers too vigorously or steers in the opposite direction.
R The driver switches on the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction.
The automatic lane change is a sub-function of Active Lane Change Assist. It
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist are deactiva‐ can assist the driver in deciding when a lane change is appropriate, as well as
ted. its subsequent execution.
R The lane change cannot be executed by the vehicle as intended.
You can cancel a lane change initiated by the system at any time by holding
the steering wheel or countersteering slightly and returning the vehicle to its
A CANCELLATION OF ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST IS DISPLAYED AS lane.
FOLLOWS:
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED FOR AN AUTOMATIC
R The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. LANE CHANGE:
R A corresponding message appears on the driver display.
R The conditions for activating Active Lane Change Assist are fulfilled.
R In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds.
R Automatic lane change is switched on in the multimedia system
(/ page 450).
R Your hands are on the steering wheel.
R You are driving on a motorway or on a main road similar to a motorway,
in a country for which this function is approved.

448

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R The road currently being travelled allows lane changes. There are no tight R If the driver has initiated a lane change in a given direction or has
bends, forexample. changed lanes themselves, no lane change is initiated in the opposite
R The travel speed is between approximately 80 km/h and 140 km/h. direction for a certain period of time. The automatic lane change is then
temporarily switched to passive mode for this direction.

% If you are not in a country for which this function is approved, The same cancellation conditions apply to the automatic lane change as for
the menu item for automatic lane change is not available in the the lane change initiated by the driver with Active Lane Change Assist.
multimedia system.
IN ADDITION, THE AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE CAN BE CANCELLED
UNDER THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES IN PARTICULAR:
ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST CAN INITIATE AN AUTOMATIC LANE
CHANGE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE: R During the lane change, the system detects a construction site separated
by traffic cones, in its own or in the adjacent lane.
R The set desired speed for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be
R The system recognises that the reason for a lane change no longer exists.
reached due to a slower vehicle in front.
R The driver removes their hands from the steering wheel during the lane
R There is little traffic, and the set desired speed for Active Distance Assist
change.
DISTRONIC can also be achieved in a slower lane.
R A lane change is necessary in order that the route entered in the naviga‐ NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY
tion system, or the road currently being navigated can be followed. The If the automatic lane change is available, in place of the notification ±, the
lane change can already take place before the prompt to do so appears notification A appears in green.
in the navigation system.
R The system detects that the lane being travelled in is about to end. If the automatic lane change is available, but not all conditions for activation
of the function are currently fulfilled, the A‑ symbols are shown in grey. In
certain countries, only one A can be shown in grey. The automatic lane change
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR, ACTIVE LANE CHANGE is then temporarily switched to passive mode for this direction. This will be
ASSIST DOES NOT PERFORM AN AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE: implemented, forexample, if the driver has cancelled an automatic lane change
or has initiated a lane change themselves.
R If the vehicle is already in a lane which should be used to follow the
route entered in the navigation system. If the system deems a lane change appropriate and has to adjust the travel
R The system detects that the adjacent lane is about to end. speed accordingly, the green A flashes on the side to which a lane change is to
R If the driver has cancelled an automatic lane change, no lane change will take place.
be initiated in this direction for a certain period of time. The automatic
When the automatic lane change is initiated, the driver display shows a vehicle
lane change is then temporarily switched to passive mode for this direc‐
with an arrow pointing to the adjacent lane to which the lane change is to take
tion.

449

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

place, and a warning tone sounds. In addition, the reason for a lane change, R Another vehicle changes to the same lane simultaneously, e.g. incoming
for example an overtaking manoeuvre, can be shown. traffic from slip roads.

If the automatic lane change is cancelled, on the display A the A on the

side to which a lane change was to take place is shown in red. Under certain % Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while
circumstances, warning messages can also be displayed and an additional
a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been
warning tone sounded.
delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable during this
SYSTEM LIMITS teach-in process, and no arrows are displayed next to the Active
For Active Lane Change Assist, the system limits of Active Steering Assist Steering Assist symbol Ø.
(/ page 442) apply.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
IN ADDITION, THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).
FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
SETTING ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST
R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty (/ page 416).
Multimedia system:
R The exterior lighting indicates a defect. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving
R The system does not recognise a suitable road, e.g. in narrow bends or 5 Active Lane Change Assist
shortly after a slip road.
ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST WITHOUT AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE
R The vehicle is within a construction site.
# Select between the On or Off setting options.

AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE MAY BE INOPERATIVE OR IMPAIRED IN THE

FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR, AND MAY LEAD TO LANE % If the Active Steering Assist was switched off, then the Active
CHANGES BEING INITIATED ERRONEOUSLY: Lane Change Assist cannot be operated.

R The vehicle is before or within a construction site and/or the system has
detected a construction site separated by traffic cones. ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST WITH AUTOMATIC LANE CHANGE
R The vehicle is within a section with temporary lane closures or lane
# Manual triggering Select from the setting options Off or Manual and auto-
openings. matic triggering.
R The system can no longer detect the lane marking correctly.
R It is raining heavily. % If the Active Steering Assist was switched off, then the Active
Lane Change Assist cannot be operated.

450

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

% Alternatively, automatic Lane Change Assist can be activated or
deactivated in the quick-access menu. R Distance warning function
R Collision warning
R Autonomous braking function
% Further information on automatic lane change (/ page 446).
R Situation-based brake force boosting
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package and Active Steering Assist:
Evasive Steering Assist
Active Brake Assist R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: intersection start-off func‐
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST
tion

& WARNING
Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehi‐
Active Brake Assist cles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds
traffic situations. and the L distance warning lamp lights up.
IN SUCH CASES, ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MIGHT:

R Give a warning or brake without reason

R Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintain‐
ing a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and
for braking in good time. Notification on the driver display in the menu Assistance

# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely 1 Distance insufficient
on Active Brake Assist alone.
2 Red radar waves
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance to the vehicle in front 1 is
displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also

451

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. owing
2 appear in front of your vehicle. to activation of another driving system, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp
ê appears in the driver display.
% Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an addi‐ If the system is unavailable owing to soiled or damaged sensors or a fault,
tional haptic warning is given in the form of slight, repeated or if the functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist Ó warning lamp
tensioning of the driver's seat belt. appears on the driver display.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in
critical situations. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:
In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autono‐ DISTANCE WARNING FUNCTION
mous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone and distance warning From approximately 30 km/h, you are warned by the distance warning function
lamp L are simultaneous with the braking action. if the safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead is insufficient at the cur‐
rent speed for several seconds. In this case, the distance warning lamp L in
If you apply the brakes yourself in a critical situation or apply the brakes
the driver display lights up. If the distance to the vehicle in front continues to
during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs.
decrease at higher speeds, the distance warning lamp L begins to flash.
The brake pressure increases up to maximum emergency braking if necessary.
COLLISION WARNING
The collision warning function can assist you in the following situations from
approximately 7 km/h with an intermittent warning tone and the distance
warning lamp L .

VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occur‐ cles ahead.
red, pop-up 1 appears in the driver display and then automatically disap‐ R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary
pears after a short time. vehicles, pedestrians walking along the road and moving cyclists ahead.
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
If the autonomous braking function or the situation-based braking assistance pedestrians and cyclists.
is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection by PRE-
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary
SAFE® may also be initiated.
pedestrians and cyclists.

452

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary
vehicles.
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving
cles ahead.
cyclists ahead.
R at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary
vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
pedestrians and cyclists.
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary
vehicles. SITUATION-BASED BRAKE FORCE BOOSTING
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, situation-related brake force boosting
cyclists ahead. can intervene in the following situations:
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:
pedestrians and cyclists.
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
AUTONOMOUS BRAKING FUNCTION cles ahead.
From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function can
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving
intervene in the following situations:
cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking along the road and stationary vehi‐
VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: cles.
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐ pedestrians and cyclists.
cles ahead.
R at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary
R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists.
cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking along the road and stationary vehi‐
cles.
VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing
pedestrians and cyclists. R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
cles ahead.
VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE: R at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing
vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
R at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching moving vehi‐
R at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary
cles ahead.
vehicles.
R at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing
vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.

453

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving INTERSECTION START-OFF FUNCTION (ONLY VEHICLES WITH DRIVING
cyclists ahead. ASSISTANCE PACKAGE)
R at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary
pedestrians and cyclists.

CANCELLING A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST

YOU CAN CANCEL A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST AT
ANY TIME BY:

R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown.

R Releasing the brake pedal. If a risk of collision with crossing traffic is detected when moving off or at
walking pace, three red arrows consecutively light up in the driver display in
the direction of the crossing road user, together with the distance warning
ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MAY CANCEL THE BRAKE APPLICATION WHEN
lamp L. If the situation is particularly critical, the arrows begin to flash. A
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED:
warning tone will also sound. If you do not react to the warning, acceleration
R You steer to avoid an obstacle. can be restricted or autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations.
R There is no longer a risk of collision. The autonomous braking can also prevent you from moving off and keep the
vehicle stationary. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.
also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the distance warning
REACTION TO ONCOMING ROAD USERS (ONLY VEHICLES WITH DRIVING lamp L and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking action.
ASSISTANCE PACKAGE)
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occur‐
ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CAN ALSO REACT TO DETECTED ONCOMING ROAD red, a pop-up appears in the driver display and automatically disappears after
USERS: a short time.
R Reaction up to a speed of approximately 100 km/h If Active Brake Assist is set to Late the purely visual warning stage and restric‐
R Warning of oncoming road users through warning tone and distance tion of acceleration are deactivated. If the situation is particularly critical,
warning lamp L there can still be a visual warning, a warning tone and initiation of autonomous
R Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an braking.
accident

454

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST SYSTEM LIMITS

Full system performance is not yet available for a short time after switching
WARNING on the vehicle or after driving off. As long as the functions are restricted, the
&
Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Æ warning Active Brake Assist warning lamp can also be shown in the driver
display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex
before full system performance is available.
traffic situations clearly.
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION, PARTICULARLY
Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
R in snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, glare, in direct sunlight or in varying light
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
conditions.
on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. (/ page 416)
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. R if the sensors are impaired owing to interference from other radar sour‐
ces, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.
# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
R if a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to displayed.
the path of your vehicle. R in complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly
identified.

EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST HAS THE FOLLOWING FEATURES:

R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detec‐
tion range.
R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles. R If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other
R Help through additional steering assistance if it detects an evasive objects.
manoeuvre. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished
R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during an evasive manoeu‐ from the background.
vre. R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. owing to special
R Assistance in taking evasive action, and straightening of the vehicle. clothing or other objects.
R Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of R if the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
approximately 110 km/h. R on bends with a tight radius.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be cancelled at any time
by counter steering.

455

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

SETTING ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST SETTING WARNING TIMING

Requirements: # Select Z alongside Active Brake Assist.

R The vehicle is switched on. # Select Early, Medium or Late.

Multimedia system: % If the ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs of fatigue or a

4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance microsleep, depending on the country, the system can issue a
warning earlier than set. Further information about ATTENTION
# Activate or deactivate the function. ASSIST (/ page 427).

% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐

try.
Speed Limit Assist
FUNCTION OF SPEED LIMIT ASSIST
% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist
activated.
% Speed Limit Assist uses Open Street Map data provided under
the Open Database Licence (ODbL) terms. For more information,
When switching off the Active Brake Assist, the distance warning function, see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.
the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and the Active Evasive
Steering Assist are switched off.
Speed Limit Assist records speed restrictions with a multifunction camera and
shows them in the driver display.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears
on the status bar of the driver display. Depending on the country Optionally, maximum permissible speeds can also be shown in the head-up
and vehicle's equipment, the system will be switched back on display.
when the vehicle is next started.
The camera also detects further speed restrictions indicated by an additional
sign (e.g. in wet conditions).

% The setting after starting the vehicle depends on the country. Stop signs are detected by the system, which prevents the engine from being
switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

456

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

THE FOLLOWING SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN USING SPEED LIMIT display shows only one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed. If
ASSIST: two speed signs are shown on the driver display, forexample, when speed
limits are detected, the value of the left-hand speed restriction 1 is always
R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather condi‐ transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
tions. for acceptance and is shown on the head-up display.
R Observe actual traffic signs.
R Observe applicable traffic rules and regulations. Important information from other systems can cause traffic signs to be hidden
for a short time.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐ If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416). speed, e.g. due to a lack of signage, the following display appears on the
driver display:
NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY

This display is shown permanently in the vehicle when travelling in countries

which do not support Speed Limit Assist. Speed Limit Assist is not available in
all countries.

If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault

or soiling of the windscreen, a corresponding display message appears on the
driver display. Depending on the respective country of use, the Speed Limit
Example
Assist warning lamp ê also lights up on the driver display.
1 Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction % Please also note the information on the display messages
3 Additional sign with restriction (/ page 883).

% Traffic signs that affect the maximum permissible speed, e.g. WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED
indicating the beginning or end of motorways, can also be detec‐ The system can warn you if you are about to exceed the maximum permissible
ted. speed. Depending on the respective country of use, you can set how much
the maximum permissible speed may be exceeded in the multimedia system
before a warning is issued. You can select in the settings whether the warning
The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver display simultane‐
should be issued visually, with the traffic sign flashing in the driver display,
ously. The system always prioritises displaying speed restrictions. The head-up
or as a combination of visual and acoustic warning. Selection of the type of

457

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

warning is confirmed via a notification on the driver display, depending on the IN PARTICULAR, THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC LAWS MUST BE TAKEN INTO
respective country of use. ACCOUNT, E.G. ON:

R maximum design speed or speed restriction for which the vehicle is

approved
R permissible gross mass with or without towing vehicle
R required number of years with a corresponding driving licence
R type and condition of the road used
R the weather conditions
Example
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the vehicle/trailer combination
1 Visual warning only can be transferred to the manual or automatic speed transfer during the
2 Warning off journey (depending on the respective equipment).

On the system side, relevant additional signs for speed restrictions and clear
% The type, duration and activation threshold of the speed limit road category traffic rules can be considered for the vehicle combination
warning, as well as the option of setting the timing of the activa‐ (depending on the respective country of use).
tion threshold upon which the warning is issued, are subject to
legislation valid for the respective country in which the vehicle is No maximum permissible speed can be selected for a bicycle rack in the
delivered. multimedia system. When using a bicycle rack, observe the specifications for
the maximum permissible speed in the Owner's Manual.
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION SYSTEM LIMITS
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
% Observe also the notes on trailer operation (/ page 508). SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly

If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly, the central display shows variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
the query about the type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections
(/ page 514).
R Soiling of the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera, or if
The driver is solely responsible for ensuring that the maximum permissible the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
speed is adapted manually in the Trailer type category.

458

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are
dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, % The acoustic speed limit warning can also be switched off and on
insufficiently illuminated or askew. via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of
R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly, or
the central display or via a voice control command (availability of
even at all due to technical factors suchas transmission frequency.
these functions is country-dependent).
R If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
at road works, at exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel roads,
and pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights. CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING
R If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard. # Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.
R If the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
deviates from the navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or after SPEED ON OR OFF
road works.
R After sharp turns and in tight bends, if traffic signs are outside the % The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
camera's field of vision. switched off at the factory.
R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs affixed or attached to them.
R If transport devices are used that are attached to the trailer coupling, The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each
e.g. bicycle racks, the system may react to restrictions for trailers. change of the displayed speed in the driver display.
SETTING SPEED LIMIT ASSIST # Activate or deactivate the function.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist
% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING try.

% The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD
the respective country). This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

# Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.

# Switch off Speed limit warning .
Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.
deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the
driver's door is opened (depending on the equipment).

459

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE DETECTED CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING
SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE # Change the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.
SPEED:
SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC SPEED ON OR OFF
R Cruise control
R Variable limiter % The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
switched off at the factory.

% Additional information on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each
(/ page 435). change of the displayed speed on the driver display.

# Activate or deactivate the function.

SETTING SPEED LIMIT ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Speed Limit Assist % Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐
try.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING

SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD

% The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.
the respective country).
# Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.
# Switch off Speed limit warning . Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.
Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains
deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVATED, THE DETECTED
driver's door is opened (depending on the respective equipment). SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
SPEED:

% The acoustic speed limit warning can also be switched off and on R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the R Cruise control
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of R Variable limiter
the central display or via a voice control command (availability of
these functions is country-dependent).

460

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

THE FOLLOWING SHOULD ALSO BE OBSERVED WHEN USING TRAFFIC

% Additional information on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC SIGN ASSIST:
(/ page 435).
R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather condi‐
tions.

Traffic Sign Assist R Observe actual traffic signs.

R Observe applicable traffic rules and regulations.
FUNCTION OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
% This function can be a Digital Extra (/ page 109). wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).

NOTIFICATIONS ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY

Traffic Sign Assist detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera
and compares them with the information from the digital road map of the
navigation system. It supports you by showing detected speed restrictions and
no-overtaking zones on the driver display.

Maximum permissible speeds can also be shown on the head-up display.

The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible
speed.
Example
In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can
warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are 1 Permissible speed
about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction
The camera also detects and analyses traffic signs with a restriction indicated
4 Maximum permissible speeds up ahead
by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions).
Maximum permissible speeds are always shown as a priority over other traffic
Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs on the driver display. Actual signs, such as no-overtaking zones, forexample. The head-up display shows
traffic signs and speed restrictions are always prioritised over traffic signs and only one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed. If two speed signs
speed restrictions shown on the driver display. are shown on the driver display, forexample, when speed limits are detected,
the value of the left-hand speed restriction 1 is always transmitted to the

461

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for acceptance and R exits
is shown on the head-up display. R restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations
Important information from other systems can cause traffic signs to be hidden
for a short time. Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation
system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a motor‐
DEPENDING ON THE RESPECTIVE COUNTRY OF USE, TRAFFIC SIGN way exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a junction, the display
ASSIST CAN ALSO DETECT AND DISPLAY OTHER TRAFFIC SIGNS 1, on the driver display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been
INCLUDING: detected.
R speed restrictions
R end of the speed restriction % Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system to
ensure optimum functioning of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 45).
R overtaking restrictions
R play streets
Depending on the respective vehicle equipment and country of use, the sys‐
R signs showing the start or end of motorways and dual carriageways
tem may also display upcoming speed restrictions on the driver display and
head-up display. The driver display can also show the distance to an upcoming
lower limit speed. Information from the digital road map of the navigation sys‐
tem is used for this purpose. The Assistance menu can also display a dynamic
visualisation of the speed restrictions ahead.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible

speed, e.g. due to a lack of signage, the following display appears on the
driver display:
Detected traffic signs (examples)

TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN ALSO DETECT THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. This display is shown perma‐
SIGNS 3, FOR EXAMPLE, AND EVALUATE RELEVANCE OF THE RESTRIC‐
nently in the vehicle when travelling in countries which do not support Traffic
TIONS WHERE NECESSARY USING AUXILIARY VEHICLE SENSORS:
Sign Assist.
R in wet conditions
If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault
R slippery road surfaces or soiling of the windscreen, a corresponding display message appears on the
R in fog driver display. The Traffic Sign Assist ê warning lamp also lights up on the
R temporary restrictions driver display in certain countries.

462

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ADDITIONAL WARNING FUNCTIONS

% Please also note the information on the display messages from Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the
Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 883). wrong way down a section of road, forexample, on motorway slip roads or
one-way streets.
WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED
Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, pro‐
The system can warn you if you are about to exceed the maximum permissible
vided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic
speed. Depending on the respective country of use, you can set how much
Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.
the maximum permissible speed may be exceeded on the multimedia system
before a warning is issued. You can switch off the warning, or select in the Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of
settings whether the warning should be issued visually, with the traffic sign approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintention‐
flashing in the driver display, or as a combination of visual and audible warn‐ ally. In this case, the sign must be unambiguous, forexample, if the system
ing. Selection of the type of warning is confirmed via a notification on the detects more than one stop sign, or if a stop sign is confirmed using the
driver display, depending on the respective country of use. digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several different signs are
detected.

Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of
approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive through a red light uninten‐
tionally.

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED:

R Several traffic lights have been detected.

Example
R All traffic lights detected are red.
1 Visual warning only R At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger
2 Warning off side beside the vehicle's lane.
R The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red,
yellow, and green.
% The type, duration and deployment stages of the speed limit
warning, as well as the option of setting the timing of the deploy‐
ment stages upon which the warning is issued, are subject to % Where available, you can turn the warnings on and off in the
legislation valid for the respective country in which the vehicle is Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further warnings(/ page 465).
delivered.

463

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

TRAILER OPERATION SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
% Refer to the chapter pertaining to the trailer hitch (/ page 508). SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly

If a trailer or bicycle rack is connected correctly, the central display shows variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
the query about the type of trailer and its maximum permissible speed R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections
(/ page 514). R If there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction
camera, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.
The driver is solely responsible for ensuring that the maximum permissible
speed is adapted manually in the Trailer type category. R If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are
dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned,
IN PARTICULAR, THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC LAWS MUST BE TAKEN INTO insufficiently illuminated or askew.
ACCOUNT, E.G. ON: R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly, or
even at all due to technical factors suchas transmission frequency.
R maximum design speed or speed restriction for which the vehicle is
approved R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect,
incomplete or out of date.
R permissible gross mass with or without towing vehicle
R If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
R required number of years with a corresponding driving licence
at road works, at exits and slip roads, adjacent lanes or parallel roads,
R type and condition of the road used and pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights.
R the weather conditions R If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard.
R If the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and
The maximum permissible speed adapted to the vehicle/trailer combination deviates from the navigation system's route guidance, e.g. at or after
can be transferred to the manual or automatic speed transfer during the road works.
journey (depending on the respective equipment). R After sharp turns and in tight bends, if traffic signs are outside the
camera's field of vision.
On the system side, relevant additional signs for speed restrictions and clear
road category traffic rules can be considered for the vehicle combination R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs affixed or attached to them.
(depending on the respective country of use). R If you use transport equipment secured to the vehicle with a trailer cou‐
pling, suchas a bicycle rack, restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations
No maximum permissible speed can be selected for a bicycle rack in the may be considered valid if applicable.
multimedia system. When using a bicycle rack, observe the specifications for
the maximum permissible speed in the Owner's Manual.

464

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

SETTING TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SWITCHING THE ACOUSTIC SIGNAL FOR A NEW MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE
Multimedia system: SPEED ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED LIMIT WARNING % The acoustic signal for a new maximum permissible speed is
switched off at the factory.

% The speed limit warning is switched on by default (depending on

the respective country). The function determines whether a subtle, non-intrusive sound supports each
change of the displayed speed in the driver display.

# Switch off Speed limit warning . # Activate or deactivate the function.

Following country-specific legislation, the speed limit warning remains
deactivated until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the % Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐
driver's door is opened. try.

% The acoustic speed limit warning can also be switched off and on ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF TRAFFIC
via quick-access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the SIGN ASSIST
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of # Activate or deactivate Further warnings.
the central display or via a voice control command (availability of
these functions is country-dependent). The available functions are switched on or off.
SET THE TYPE OF WARNING FOR OTHER FUNCTIONS
CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED LIMIT WARNING # Select Visual only or Visual and audible.
# Change the warning to Visual only or Visual and audible.
SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD Traffic light view
This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW
# Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light
by displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is
% Availability of the function is subject to country-specific legisla‐ displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded
tion. out when the vehicle drives off.

465

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
Requirements:
FUNCTION OF BLIND SPOT ASSIST AND ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST
R The Traffic light view option is switched on. WITH EXIT WARNING
R A traffic light view is available.
& WARNING
Multimedia system: Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic light view Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking
you at a greatly different speed.

% This function is not available in all countries. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐

If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
light view is shown on the central display.

When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.
& WARNING
# Activate D or deactivate E Traffic light view. Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
USING OTHER AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO THE FOLLOWING:
# Select Z.
R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot
# Select On request or Automatic. area
If On request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Please tap R if vehicles travelling at a much faster speed approach and then
here for traffic light view. message is displayed. The camera image is overtake
shown after confirmation of the message.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such
When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed situations.
when the traffic light view is available.
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐
tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

466

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the outside mirror flashes
area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle. for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you
overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
The systems can detect vehicles travelling from speeds of approximately
12 km/h and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. They Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
are only an aid and are not a substitute for the driver paying attention. wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).

STATUS DISPLAY ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY EXIT WARNING

¸ Grey: the system is activated but inoperative.

& WARNING
¸ Green: the system is activated and operational. Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or
road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed.

The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when

opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

Notification on the driver display in the menu Assistance

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind
Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a stationary
1 Warning lamp in the outside mirror vehicle about approaching vehicles.
2 Red radar waves If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up
If a vehicle is detected from approximately 12 km/h and immediately moves in the corresponding outside mirror.
into the monitoring range, the warning lamp in the relevant outside mirror
If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a
lights up in red. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in the exterior mirror 1 also
warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and
lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out.
the warning lamps in the corresponding outside mirror flash red.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you activate the turn signal
Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as
indicators in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds once
the hand of a vehicle occupant moves into the area of the door.
and the warning lamp flashes red in the corresponding outside mirror. Red
radar waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic.

467

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar
% Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambient lighting: the continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to
Warning assistance of the ambient lighting can be activated and the side for other traffic or obstacles.
deactivated (/ page 294).
Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, e.g. trucks,
for a prolonged period.
% The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when
and may vary according to the setting.
reverse gear is engaged.

The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational if transport
Assist is active. equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the
electrical connection has been correctly established.
After the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning continues to function for a
few minutes. If a door is opened when the vehicle is switched off, the exit ADDITIONALLY, THE EXIT WARNING MAY BE LIMITED IN THE FOLLOW‐
warning is active again for a few minutes. When the outside mirror warning ING SITUATIONS:
lamp flashes three times, the exit warning is no longer available. R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle spaces
occupants. The responsibility for opening the doors and exiting the vehicle R when people approach the vehicle
remains with the vehicle occupants at all times. R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

SYSTEM LIMITS You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
BLIND SPOT ASSIST AND ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST MAY BE LIMITED
IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR: BRAKE APPLICATION FUNCTION IN ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST

R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured % The brake application function is only available for vehicles with
R in poor visibility, e.g. owing to fog, heavy rain or snow Driving Assistance Package.
R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorcycles
R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitored
R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Course-correcting
brake application helps in this case to avoid collision with another vehicle.

468

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

The course-correcting brake application is available to you from a speed of

approx. 30 km/h - 60 km/h (depending on the country) up to a speed of
approx. 200 km/h.

& WARNING
Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot
Assist
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.
in the exterior mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display 1
# Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active indicating the danger of a side collision appears on the driver display.
Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting
In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This
brake application.
brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the
# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. opposite direction or accelerate.

SYSTEM LIMITS
Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not
& WARNING recognise the dangers (/ page 466).
Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist
EITHER A COURSE-CORRECTING BRAKE APPLICATION WHICH IS NOT
ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST DOES NOT REACT IN THE FOLLOWING APPROPRIATE TO THE DRIVING SITUATION, OR NONE AT ALL, MAY
SITUATIONS: OCCUR IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:
R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of
R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a greatly different speed. your vehicle.

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such
R An approaching vehicle leaves too little lateral distance between you.
situations. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
R You brake or accelerate significantly.
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and main‐
tain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.
R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist.
R ESP® is deactivated.
R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected.

469

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R Transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the There is no steering intervention if you leave your lane without activating the
trailer coupling and the electrical connection has been correctly estab‐ turn signal indicators, but there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle in
lished. your own lane.

SWITCHING BLIND SPOT ASSIST OR ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST ON OR Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assistance Package: If the sys‐
OFF tem detects an obstacle, e.g. another vehicle, in the adjacent lane, there is
Multimedia system: steering intervention despite the direction indicators.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
DEPENDING ON THE COUNTRY, ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST CAN
# Activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot Assist. ALREADY REACT IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS FROM A SPEED OF
APPROXIMATELY 45 KM/H:

Active Lane Keeping Assist R If your own vehicle is overtaken by another road user and a risk of
collision is detected, there is course-correcting steering intervention.
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST R If a recognised lane marking is crossed, a warning is given by tangible
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle using the
feedback from the steering wheel.
multifunction camera (/ page 416).

It can protect you against unintentionally departing your lane. The system can
guide you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention,
and warn you with tangible steering wheel feedback.

Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h
and 200 km/h.

THE SYSTEM CAN INTERVENE IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET: IN THE FOLLOWING CASES THE WARNING 1 APPEARS ON THE DRIVER
R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. DISPLAY AND A WARNING TONE SOUNDS:

R You touch this lane marking with one of your front wheels. R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts more than
approximately ten seconds.
If you activate the turn signal indicators, there is no steering intervention on R There are two or more steering interventions by the systems within
that side. approximately three minutes, without steering action by the driver.

You can set the sensitivity of the system in the Active Lane Keeping Assist
settings in order to determine the level of assistance. You can also determine

470

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

whether the system is to react to broken lane markings, or only to continuous

lane markings (/ page 472).

If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected signs of drowsiness, the most sensitive

setting is automatically selected (/ page 427).

STATUS DISPLAYS OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

ý White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched off.
Notification on the driver display in the Assistance menu
If ESP® is switched off or a tyre pressure loss warning is indicated,
Active Lane Keeping Assist is automatically switched off. If one of your front wheels moves onto a detected lane marking, this is high‐
lighted in red in the Assistance menu on the driver display.
ý Yellow: There is a malfunction. Also note any display messages.
SYSTEM LIMITS
ü Grey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched on but not ready. IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE MAY BE NO COURSE-CORRECT‐
ING STEERING INTERVENTION, BUT A WARNING MAY BE GIVEN IN THE
ü Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is switched on and ready. If the
STEERING WHEEL DEPENDING ON THE SITUATION:
system is only ready on one side, only the lane marking on that side
is shown in green. R if you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
ü Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane
R if a driving safety system is intervening, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist
by a course-correcting steering intervention. If a tangible warning is R if you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or
also given in the steering wheel, the status display flashes. The lane high rates of acceleration.
marking of the affected side is shown in red. R if transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.
Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: If both lane mark‐
ings are shown in red on the status display at the same time, Active
Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop (/ page 445). THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

R if there is poor visibility, e.g. owing to insufficient illumination of the

road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray
R if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
R if there is soiling on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction
camera, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured.

471

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R if the bumper is soiled in the area of the radar sensors, or if these are SETTING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST
damaged or obscured Multimedia system:
R if there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are pres‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
ent for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
R if the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. SETTING THE SENSITIVITY
R if the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and the lane markings # Select Z.
can therefore not be detected.
R if the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one # Select Early, Med. or Late.
another or merge.
The last setting selected will be applied the next time the vehicle is started.
R if the lanes are very narrow and winding.

% The standard setting of this function is country-dependent.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may other‐
wise fail to recognise potential dangers (/ page 416).
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ASSISTANCE WHEN LANE MARKINGS ARE
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST INTERRUPTED
Multimedia system: # Select Advanced support.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision avoidance
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist The last setting selected will be applied the next time the vehicle is started.
# Activate or deactivate the function.
% The standard setting of this function is country-dependent.
Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via
quick-access.
% This function must be activated for vehicles without Driving
% The setting after starting the vehicle depends on the country. Assistance Package for Emergency Stop Assist to be available
in full measure.
Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 445).

472

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function & WARNING

DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the sus‐ Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering
pension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. Vehicles with rear axle level control system: when you unload lug‐
gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns
THE DAMPING IS SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH WHEEL AND IS AFFECTED to the set level shortly afterwards.
BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody
R the road surface conditions could thus become trapped.
R the vehicle load
The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.
R the drive program selected
R the driving style # When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the
vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.
The drive program can be adjusted using DYNAMIC SELECT.

NOTE
Function of the rear axle level control system *
Damage caused by vehicle being lowered
Vehicles with rear axle level control The vehicle can be lowered due
% The rear axle level control system is only available for plug-in to differences in temperature or extended non-operational times. This
hybrids. can cause damage to parts of the body.

# When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure
that there are no obstacles such as kerbs under or in the
immediate vicinity of the body.

The rear axle level control system ensures a constant vehicle level on the rear
axle, even with a laden vehicle.

THE REAR AXLE LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEM CONSISTS OF:

R air suspension on the rear axle

R automatic level control system for load compensation

473

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

AMG RIDE CONTROL R SPORT ensures a firmer suspension setting. Select this suspension set‐
ting when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
FUNCTION OF AMG RIDE CONTROL roads.
AMG RIDE CONTROL is an electronically controlled damping system for R SPORT + ensures a very firm suspension setting.
improved driving comfort and increased driving safety.

THE DAMPING IS ADJUSTED INDIVIDUALLY TO EACH WHEEL AND

DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

R driving style, e.g. sporty

R road condition, e.g. undulations
R Individual selection of SPORT, SPORT + or COMFORT

# Press the upper or lower 1 display button repeatedly, until it displays

The suspension tuning depends on the selected drive program.
the ä symbol.
In each drive program, you can also select the tuning individually using the
AMG steering wheel button (/ page 474). After every change of drive pro‐
gram, automatic suspension tuning is active again. % If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are
displayed can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 351).
% When the vehicle is started again, the COMFORT setting is acti‐
vated automatically.
# Press the corresponding button 2.
SELECTING SUSPENSION TUNING WITH THE AMG STEERING WHEEL BUT‐ The selected suspension setting is shown on the driver display as a
TON message.
THE Ä SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY SELECTED MODE:
% You can also adjust the suspension setting via the multimedia R ä (blue): COMFORT
system (/ page 359).
R ä (yellow): SPORT
R ä (red): SPORT +
YOU CAN SELECT FROM THREE DIFFERENT SUSPENSION SETTINGS:

R COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspension setting. Select this sus‐

pension setting if you prefer a comfortable driving style.

474

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

RACE START ACTIVATING RACE START

INFORMATION ON RACE START & WARNING

Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
% RACE START is available only for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP® mode selected, there is
an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
RACE START enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. A suitably # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐
high-grip road surface is required for this, and the tyres and vehicle must also ity of your vehicle.
be in good condition.

Requirements:
% You can use RACE START only after the vehicle has been run in
for approximately 1,500 km. R The vehicle is switched on and the transmission and the engine are at
normal operating temperature. The temperature indicators on the driver
display are white instead of blue.
% RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE R The driver's door is closed.
START may be activated and used only on dedicated race cir‐
R All vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened properly and are
cuits, not on public roads.
seated correctly.
Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 420).
R The front wheels are in the straight-ahead position.
R The vehicle is on level ground.
R The vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) and the
& WARNING
parking brake is released.
Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
R The transmission is in position h.
If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP® mode selected, there is
an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. R One of the C, B or I drive programs is selected (/ page 354).

# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐

ity of your vehicle. % RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE
START may be activated and used only on dedicated race cir‐
cuits, not on public roads.
Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 420).

475

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully. RACE START will be deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator
The engine speed will increase. The seat belts on the driver's and front pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions is no longer
passenger seats will be pre-tensioned. fulfilled. The RACE START cancelled message will appear on the driver display.
In vehicles with active ambient lighting, a special animation of the ambi‐
ent light will play. % After being used several times in short succession, RACE START
will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven.

% If the activation conditions are not fulfilled, RACE START cannot

be used. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual mes‐
sage will appear on the driver display.
DRIFT MODE
FUNCTIONS OF DRIFT MODE
# The RACE START Release brake to start message will appear on the driver
display. % DRIFT MODE is available only for the
Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S E PERFORMANCE model.

% In this phase, you can adjust RACE START depending on the road
DRIFT MODE allows you to intentionally make the vehicle unstable and
conditions. You can vary the engine speed by pulling on one of
induce oversteer (drifting). All activation conditions must be fulfilled for this
the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The segments on the driver
(/ page 477).
display will flicker rapidly.

% You can use DRIFT MODE only after the vehicle has been run in
% If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START for approximately 1,500 km.
will be cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message will appear
on the driver display.
% Only a highly skilled and experienced driver should drive in
DRIFT MODE.
# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 420).
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START
active message will appear on the driver display.

476

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Requirements:
& WARNING
Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning R ESP® is deactivated (/ page 423).
When you use DRIFT MODE, ESP® is not available. R Drive program I is selected (/ page 354).
R The doors, the bonnet and the boot lid/tailgate are closed.
There is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.
R The vehicle is started and the transmission and the engine are at normal
# Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal roads. operating temperature.
R The transmission is in manual mode – manual gearshifting is activated
# DRIFT MODE may only be activated and used on closed race (/ page 367).
circuits, not on public roads.

# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐ ACTIVATING DRIFT MODE
ity of your vehicle.

% Only a highly skilled and experienced driver should drive in

When DRIFT MODE is active, power will be delivered only to the rear wheels. DRIFT MODE.
ESP® and 4MATIC+ will be deactivated. Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (/ page 420).

ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING DRIFT MODE

& WARNING
Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use DRIFT MODE, ESP® is not available.

There is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

# Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal roads. # Pull steering wheel gearshift paddles 1 and 2 and hold them for half a
second.
# DRIFT MODE may only be activated and used on closed race
If all activation conditions are fulfilled, the driver display will show a
circuits, not on public roads.
message reading DRIFT MODE Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN
# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicin‐ and the â warning lamp will flash.
ity of your vehicle.

477

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# To cancel: pull the steering wheel gearshift paddle 1.

Boost strategy
The driver display will show a message reading DRIFT MODE cancelled
and the â warning lamp will go out. FUNCTION OF THE BOOST STRATEGY

# To confirm: pull the steering wheel gearshift paddle 2.

% The boost strategy is available only for the
The driver display will show a message reading DRIFT MODE active and Mercedes‑AMG C 63 S E PERFORMANCE model.
the â warning lamp will light up.
DEACTIVATING DRIFT MODE The boost strategy is used to increase performance on a race track and can be
# Pull steering wheel gearshift paddles 1 and 2 and hold them for half a selected only in the I drive program.
second.
The boost strategy is part of AMG TRACK PACE and can be activated either
The DRIFT MODE active message and the â warning lamp will go out.
via the steering-wheel button (/ page 478) or via the settings for Track Race
DRIFT MODE WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE DEACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOW‐ (/ page 599).
ING SITUATIONS:
You can set the energy flow and thus the energy supply of the electric drive
R ESP® is activated. power depending on the race distance and track characteristics.
R Manual shifting is deactivated – the transmission is in position h.
R The I drive program is switched off. For long races, activate the boost strategy to use the maximum boost effect
exclusively via kick-down as needed. Deactivate the boost strategy for short
R The vehicle is switched off. races in order to use the maximum electric output at all times.
R Automatic switch-off is required by the vehicle.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BOOST STRATEGY WITH THE STEERING-
WHEEL BUTTON
% After drifting and before continuing your journey, check the Requirements
wheels and tyres for damage. In particular, check the tyre tread
depth and tyre contact surface over the entire width of the tyres R Drive program I is selected (/ page 354).
(/ page 42). R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient.

% You can also activate or deactivate the boost strategy via the
Track Race settings (/ page 599).

478

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

When a boost process is active through kickdown, the BOOST message

will appear on the driver's display and the ¨ symbols on the driver's
display and on the display button will light up yellow.

Reversing camera
FUNCTION OF THE REVERSING CAMERA
# Press the upper or lower 1 display button repeatedly, until it displays The reversing camera serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐
the ¨ symbol. ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
vring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no persons, animals
or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.
% In the as-delivered condition, the ¨ symbol will be hidden and
the boost strategy will not yet be assigned to any display button. % The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as it
would appear in the inside mirror.

% If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden.
How functions are displayed and the order in which they are
displayed can be set in the multimedia system (/ page 351).

% If the display is greyed out, the requirements for the boost strat‐
egy are not fulfilled and it is not possible to activate it.

# Press the corresponding button 2.

THE SYMBOL SHOWS THE CURRENT STATUS:

R ¨ (blue): boost strategy is activated

R ¨ (yellow): boost strategy is deactivated

When the boost strategy is activated, the driver's display will also show
the ¨ symbol in blue.

479

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

CAMERA PERSPECTIVE ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY WIDE-ANGLE VIEW

Example Example

1 Menu Parking Assistance 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487)
2 Path indicating the route the wheels will take at the current steering angle 2 Activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(dynamic) (/ page 490)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 3 Switching between standard view and wide-angle view
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
5 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m
from the rear area
6 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487)
7 Trailer view (depending on the respective vehicle equipment)
8 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 490)
9 Switching between wide-angle view and reversing camera with top view

% When Active Parking Assist is active, the paths 2 are displayed

in green (/ page 491).

480

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

TRAILER VIEW
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to functional limitations of the reversing cam‐
era
Functional limitations of the reversing camera could lead to a risk of
collision with persons or objects.

# Do not use the reversing camera if its functions are limited.

# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in

the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

THE REVERSING CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION, OR WILL ONLY PARTI‐

Example
ALLY FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487) R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.
2 Yellow guide line, locating aid R The boot lid is open.
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of R The weather conditions are poor, e.g.:
the trailer hitch
- heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
4 Ball head of the trailer hitch
R The light conditions are poor, e.g.:
SYSTEM LIMITS
- at night or if a light is shining into the camera.
If the system is not ready for operation, the message System inoperative
appears on the driver display and/or on the central display. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Observe the notes on
cleaning the reversing camera (/ page 727).
If a camera perspective is selected and the central display is temporarily black R The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the
or does not show a camera image, the camera system is also faulty or is not camera, its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist work‐
ready for operation. shop.
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted
due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted
rack). due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle
rack).

481

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

CAMERA PERSPECTIVES ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY

% The contrast of the display can be impaired by incidental light or
other light sources, e.g., when driving out of a garage. Particular
attention must be afforded in this case.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, its use is

considerably restricted due to pixel errors.

Observe also the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 416).

360° Camera Example

FUNCTION OF THE 360° CAMERA

1 Menu Parking Assistance
THE 360° CAMERA IS A SYSTEM COMPRISING FOUR CAMERAS:
2 Image from the front camera
R Front camera 3 3D view right-hand side of the vehicle
R Reversing camera 4 Switching between standard view and wide-angle view
R Two outside mirror cameras 5 Switching between reversing camera and trailer view (depending on the
respective vehicle equipment)
6 Activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 490)
The cameras record the immediate surroundings of the vehicle and provide
assistance, e.g. during parking or at exits which are difficult to see. 7 3D auto view
8 3D view left-hand side of the vehicle
The cameras serve solely as aids and may show a distorted view of obstacles,
show them incorrectly or even omit them altogether. They are not a substitute
for you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for % The warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is shown in
safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Ensure that there are no all views (/ page 487).
persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring
and parking.
% Availability of the 3D view 3, 8 and 3D auto view 7 functions
is dependent upon the respective equipment.

482

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

FUNCTION OF THE GUIDE LINES TOP VIEW WITH THE IMAGE FROM THE FRONT OR REVERSING CAMERA

Example Example

1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487)
from the rear area 2 Path indicating the current steering angle
2 Path indicating the route the wheels will take at the current steering angle
3D VIEW, LEFT/RIGHT-HAND SIDE OF THE VEHICLE
(dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
& WARNING
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
Risk of accidents due to objects not being displayed or being
displayed as heavily distorted
% When Active Parking Assist is active, paths and guide lines are Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be
displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 491). heavily distorted or not displayed at all.

# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the

manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

483

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Example Example

1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487) 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487)
2 Switching between 3D view and 2D view 2 Guide lines
The virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you The virtual camera moves to the standard view, facing forward from the rear
change the transmission position, the view is automatically adapted. above the roof. The view changes automatically when approaching obstacles.

If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to a 3D view with free rotation.
% Display of the area beneath the vehicle may deviate from the You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.
actual circumstances.
WIDE-ANGLE VIEW
3D AUTO VIEW

% The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a conventional

mirror image in the 3D views.

Example

1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 487)

2 Switching between standard view and wide-angle
view

484

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

TRAILER VIEW
If you select the trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the
following display appears:

Example

5 Switching to the reversing camera or trailer view

Example
SYSTEM LIMITS
If the system is not ready for operation, the message System inoperative
1 Switching between standard view and trailer view appears on the driver display and/or on the central display.
2 Yellow guide line, locating aid If a camera perspective is selected and the central display is temporarily black
3 Ball head of the trailer hitch or does not show a camera image, the camera system is also faulty or is not
4 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of ready for operation.
the trailer hitch

& WARNING
% In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the Risk of accident due to functional limitations of the 360° camera
trailer hitch.
If the function of the 360° camera is restricted, there is a risk of colli‐
sion with persons or objects.
When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the
trailer, the display changes to the side camera view:
# Do not use the 360° camera in case of functional limitations.

# Ensure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in

the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

THE 360° CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION, OR WILL ONLY PARTIALLY FUNC‐
TION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h.

485

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R The doors are open. CALLING UP THE 360° CAMERA VIEWS USING THE BUTTON
R An outside mirror is not completely extended.
R The boot lid is open.
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g.:
- heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
R The light conditions are poor, e.g.:
- at night or if a light is shining into the camera.
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Refer to the notes on
cleaning the 360° camera (/ page 727).
R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are
damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their set‐
ting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. # Press button 1.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the
# Select the Camera views menu.
vehicle is carrying a heavy load and this can result in inaccuracies in the guide # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 482).
lines and in the display of generated images.
SELECTING A VIEW FOR THE 360° CAMERA (REVERSE GEAR)
The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted # Engage reverse gear.
due to additional vehicle attachments (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle
rack). # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 482).
MANAGING 360° CAMERA WITH GPS-ACTIVATION POSITIONS
% Contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt direct sunlight Multimedia system:
or other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. Particu‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera
lar attention must be afforded in this case.
RENAMING AN ACTIVATION POSITION

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, its use is % You can determine activation positions in the Camera views menu
considerably restricted due to pixel errors. (/ page 482).

Observe also the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 416). # Select u for the desired activation position.

486

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# Select Edit. Passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multi‐
media system (/ page 490).
# Enter a name and confirm.
The activation position is stored under the new name. In order that front or rear obstacles to the side can be displayed, the vehicle
must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle
DELETING AN ACTIVATION POSITION has travelled a distance of one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be
# Select u for the desired activation position. shown.
# Select Delete entry. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for
you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
# Confirm the prompt. manoeuvring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that
The activation position is deleted. there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while
OPENING THE CAMERA COVER manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
Multimedia system:
DISPLAYS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera
# Select Open camera cover.

% The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after

the vehicle is switched on or off.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Example: vehicles with 360° camera

FUNCTION OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC 1 Ready for display at the front and rear
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which 2 Ready for display all around
monitors the area surrounding your vehicle . The distance between your vehi‐ 3 Ready for display all around and obstacles detected
cle and a detected obstacle is displayed visually and acoustically.

The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side.
These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper
while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and
there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued.

487

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Example: vehicles with reversing camera

1 Ready for display at the front and rear

2 Ready for display all around
3 Ready for display all around and obstacles detected Example: vehicles with 360° camera

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective

areas 1 to 3 of the display are shown in blue.

THE COLOUR OF THE DISPLAY CHANGES DEPENDING ON THE DISTANCE

TO THE DETECTED OBSTACLE:

R Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)

R Yellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m
R Orange: approx. 0.7 m - 0.4 m
R Red: < 0.4 m

Example: vehicles with reversing camera

Vehicles with 360° camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending
on the position and distance of the obstacles detected.
IF YOU ARE NOT IN THE CAMERA & PARKING MENU AND AN OBSTACLE IN
An intermittent warning tone also sounds depending on the distance to the THE VEHICLE'S PATH IS DETECTED, A POP-UP WINDOW 1 APPEARS ON
obstacle detected. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IF THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET:
system. In the Warn early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 1 m.
R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than
In the standard setting, from a shorter distance of 0.4 m.
12 km/h.

488

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than After the vehicle is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past
18 km/h. them before a new warning can be issued.

OBSERVE ALSO THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

R Reversing camera (/ page 479)

R 360° camera (/ page 482)

Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; otherwise the sys‐
tem cannot function properly (/ page 416).
Head-up display (example)
Vehicles with trailer hitch: If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle rack
is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly estab‐
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance
lished, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone.
of approximately 1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m at the sides 3 can also be
displayed on the head-up display. PROBLEMS WITH PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately
SYSTEM LIMITS
three seconds and then goes out, and the é symbol appears on the driver
PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC DOES NOT NECESSARILY TAKE INTO
display, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference.
ACCOUNT THE FOLLOWING OBSTACLES:
Start the vehicle again and check whether Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works
R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects in a different location.
R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or IF A WARNING TONE ALSO SOUNDS, THE CAUSES MAY BE AS FOLLOWS:
loading ramps of lorries
R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors (/ page 727).
R Objects placed next to the vehicle R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunc‐
tion: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
OBSTACLES ON THE SIDES ARE NOT SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
TIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

R You park the vehicle and switch it off.

R You open the doors.

489

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC SETTING THE WARNING TONES OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
* NOTE 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking 5 PARKTRONIC
Vehicle damage when parking or manoeuvring due to nearby
SETTING WARNING TONES
objects
# Select Set warning tones.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects in the close-
up range. # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone pitch.
# When parking or manoeuvring, pay particular attention to ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING AUDIO FADEOUT
objects that are under or above the sensors, e.g. flower pots # Select Audio fadeout and activate or deactivate Audio fade for warnings.
or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects may otherwise be The volume of the media source currently playing is reduced when a
damaged. warning tone sounds in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC.

or
Requirements:
# Select Audio fadeout and activate or deactivate Audio fadeout in trans.
R The camera menu is open. position R.
R Or: the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up window is displayed.
The volume of the media source currently playing is reduced when
reverse gear is engaged.
# Tap = on the central display. SETTING WARNING TIMING
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indica‐
# Select Time of warning.
tor lamp does not light up or the symbol é is displayed, Parking Assist # Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.
PARKTRONIC is not active.
# Activate or deactivate Side warning.
% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the
vehicle is started.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in

the quick-access menu.

490

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Active Parking Assist The parking space is freely selectable. The parking procedure is executed with
the vehicle reversing.
FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
VEHICLES WITH 360° CAMERA

& WARNING R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the roadway

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐ R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the roadway (either forwards
tion range of Active Parking Assist or reversing as desired)
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such from mark‐
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE: ings (forexample at the roadside)
R Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
The parking space is freely selectable. The parking direction (forwards or
There is a danger of collision! reversing) can also be freely selected, depending on the orientation of the
parking space.
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
If Active Parking Assist is available, the notification Ç appears on the
driver display. When the system detects parking spaces, the notification È
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system which uses
appears. The arrows show the side of the roadway on which free parking
ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera or 360° camera. When
spaces are located. These are then shown on the central display.
you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automati‐
cally measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated
based on the calculated path of your vehicle. The parking and unparking
Active Parking Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐
procedures are assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐
vring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no To start the parking procedure, press the button c (/ page 492) or go to
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path. the navigation view (e.g. when near the destination) and select Active Parking
Assist (/ page 561).
Active Parking Assist offers the following functions:
ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST WILL BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
VEHICLES WITH REVERSING CAMERA
TIONS:
R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the roadway
R You press the button c again.
R Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to the roadway
R You begin steering.

491

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R You select the park position j. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.
R You engage the electric parking brake. R When snow chains are fitted.
R ESP® intervenes. R When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
R You open the driver's door. R Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
R If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
SYSTEM LIMITS
R On steep downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%.
If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.
R If the vehicle level has been offset, e.g. mounting the kerb on one side
OBSERVE ALSO THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS: (vehicles with level control).

R Reversing camera (/ page 479) PARKING WITH ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST

R 360° camera (/ page 482)
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
Objects above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g.
tion range of Active Parking Assist
protruding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or parking space boun‐
daries are not detected when measuring the parking space. These are also not IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
subsequently taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore prematurely guide
you into the parking space or brake too late.
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
Certain environmental conditions, suchas snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to
a parking space being mismeasured. Parking spaces that are partially occupied There is a danger of collision!
by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or may be measured incor‐
rectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level road surfaces with adequate
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
grip.

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking
spaces in which parking is not permitted or on unsuitable surfaces.

DO NOT USE ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS,

FOR EXAMPLE:

R In extreme weather conditions, suchas ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.

R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.

492

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐
ing out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can
drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking pro‐

cedure with Active Parking Assist. Parking Assist menu (example for left-hand side of the screen)

# Select the menu Parking Assistance 2.

Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are shown on the central
display.

At speeds greater than approximately 16 km/h, the camera perspective on the

right-hand side of the screen switches off.

# Press the button 1.

Parking Assist menu (example)

493

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

When the vehicle is at a standstill, the indicated vehicle path 4 into the vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission
currently selected parking space 5 also appears. position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.

# When a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.

# If necessary, select another parking space.

# Vehicles with 360° camera: to change the parking direction, tap the
selected parking space again.

# To start the parking procedure: press the button 1 again.

or Immediate parking from the menu Camera views

# Depress the brake pedal and select Start parking procedure 6 (depend‐
# Select the Camera views menu.
ing on the respective vehicle equipment).
# When the vehicle is stationary and in transmission position k, and the
symbol 7 appears in the camera image: press the button 1 again.
# Take your hands off the steering wheel and release the brake pedal.
or
The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
The duration of the parking procedure is indicated by a progress bar. # Depress the brake pedal and select Start parking procedure 6 (depend‐
The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking pro‐ ing on the respective vehicle equipment).
cedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in
The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space.
accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal
indicator accordingly.
% The parking space and parking direction cannot be changed in
Following completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist fin- immediate parking.
ished message appears.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When necessitated by legal

requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position
during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new

494

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

EXITING A PARKING SPACE WITH ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.

& WARNING # Start the vehicle.

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
tion range of Active Parking Assist
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.

R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

WARNING
# Press button 1.
&
Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pull‐
ing out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can
drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking pro‐

cedure with Active Parking Assist.

Requirements: Parking Assist menu (example for left-hand side of the screen)

R The vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera. # Select the menu Parking Assistance 2.

495

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

# If necessary, change the direction of exit 3. PAUSING ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST

# To initiate the unparking procedure: press the button 1 again.

& WARNING
or Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
tion range of Active Parking Assist
# Depress the brake pedal and select Start unparking procedure 4 IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
(depending on the respective vehicle equipment). THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
# If necessary, change the transmission position. Observe any messages
displayed on the driver display and central display. R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.
The duration of the unparking procedure is indicated by a progress bar. There is a danger of collision!
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when the unparking pro‐ # In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
cedure is initiated, and automatically switched off again when it is completed.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with
the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. You can interrupt the parking or unparking procedure of Active Parking Assist
by performing one of the following actions, forexample:
After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Ø Active
Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message prompt you to take # Depress the brake pedal.
control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear
yourself again.
# Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the boot or the bonnet.

If you do not react to the prompt to reassume control of the vehicle, the
# Apply the electric parking brake or activate the HOLD function.
system will brake the vehicle to a standstill. # To resume the parking or unparking procedure: gently depress the
accelerator pedal.

% If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking

Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal gently to
start the parking or unparking procedure.

496

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused park‐
ing procedure. Ensure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the
Manoeuvring assistant
manoeuvring range. Observe also the system limits of Active Parking Assist. FUNCTION OF DRIVE AWAY ASSIST
AUTOMATIC BRAKING FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST
& WARNING
Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive
& WARNING
Away Assist
Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
tion range of Active Parking Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic
situations.
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE: # Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
on Drive Away Assist alone.
R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the
traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive
There is a danger of collision! action.
# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If
the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is
Persons or objects detected in the vehicle's path may trigger a sudden braking
briefly restricted to approximately 2 km/h.
action, which will in turn halt the parking or unparking procedure. The vehicle
will then remain at a standstill. The parking or unparking procedure is resumed A RISK OF COLLISION MAY ARISE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR
if you depress the accelerator pedal. EXAMPLE:
Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals.
unparking procedure. Ensure once again that no persons, animals or objects
R If the driver engages an incorrect gear.
are in the vehicle's path. Observe also the system limits of Active Parking
Assist. R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force.

DRIVE AWAY ASSIST IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

R If the vehicle was stationary and the transmission position was changed
to k or h.

497

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R If the vehicle has rolled less than approximately 1.0 m since coming to a FUNCTION OF CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING
standstill.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. & WARNING
Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the
The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring cross traffic warning
assistance menu (/ page 500). The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and
traffic situations.
If a critical situation is detected, the symbol É appears in red in the
selected view in the Camera & parking menu.
# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely
on the cross traffic warning alone.

% If Drive Away Assist is not available, the L symbol appears # Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the
in grey. If the Camera & parking menu is not open on the central traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive
display, the symbol appears together with the Parking Assist action.
PARKTRONIC pop-up.

The cross traffic warning can warn you of crossing traffic when exiting a
Drive Away Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you having parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent
to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring, to the vehicle.
parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no persons,
animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path. THE CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CON‐
DITIONS:
SYSTEM LIMITS
The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 491). R Warning for crossing traffic behind: the vehicle is driving in reverse at a
speed slower than approx. 10 km/h.
On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is limited. R Warning for crossing traffic ahead: the vehicle is driving forwards at a
If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle rack is attached to the trailer hitch, speed slower than approx. 10 km/h and the camera image is shown on
and the electrical connection is correctly established, Drive Away Assist is not the central display (/ page 486).
available when reversing.
The Warning for crossing traffic ahead can be deactivated or activated in the
Manoeuvring assistance menu.

Depending on the respective country, the Warning for crossing traffic behind can
also be deactivated or activated (/ page 500).

498

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

If a critical situation is detected, the symbol L appears in red in the If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is
selected view in the Camera & parking menu. not possible.

WARNING FOR CROSSING TRAFFIC BEHIND THE CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS:
R The vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detec‐
ted. R on uphill gradients
R If the Camera & parking menu is not opened and a critical situation is R Warning for crossing traffic behind: if a transport device, e.g. trailer or
detected, a warning appears on the central display together with the bicycle rack is attached to the trailer hitch, and the electrical connection
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up. is correctly established.

FUNCTION OF CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING

WARNING FOR CROSSING TRAFFIC AHEAD

R If Active Parking Assist is active, the vehicle can be braked automatically & WARNING
when crossing traffic is detected. Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring
brake function
R A warning appears if Active Parking Assist is not active, but the Camera
& parking menu is open. The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people.
Other obstacles are not detected by the function.
R If the Camera & parking menu is not open, the system cannot react to
crossing traffic. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all.

# Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely

The cross traffic warning serves solely as an aid, and is not a substitute for you
on the manoeuvring brake function alone.
paying attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring,
parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no persons, # Be ready to brake.
animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path.

SYSTEM LIMITS Close-range braking can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle
is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the
% If the cross traffic warning is not available, the N symbol vehicle's path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.
appears in grey.
CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING CAN INTERVENE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDI‐
TIONS:
The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 491).
R The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h.

499

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R The camera image is shown on the central display (/ page 486). SWITCH PARKING SUPPORT ON OR OFF
Multimedia system:
Depending on the respective country, close-range braking can be deactivated 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking
or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu (/ page 500).
% This function is a Digital Extra (/ page 109).
When close-range braking is triggered, the symbol º appears in red in the
selected view in the menu Camera & parking.
# Select Manoeuvring assistance.
% If close-range braking is not available, the symbol M appears # Switch the desired parking support on or off.
in grey.

Close-range braking serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for you hav‐
Memory Parking Assist
ing to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu‐ FUNCTION OF MEMORY PARKING ASSIST
vring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path.
& WARNING
SYSTEM LIMITS Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detec‐
OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: tion range of Memory Parking Assist
IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE,
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 491) THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:
R 360° camera (/ page 482)
R Memory Parking Assist may steer too early.
R Reversing camera (/ page 479)
R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

THE CLOSE-RANGE BRAKING FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE FOL‐ This result in a collision.
LOWING SITUATIONS:
# In these situations, do not use Memory Parking Assist.
R on uphill gradients
R if transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the
Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle using a previously stored parking
trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.
space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 500 m
(100 m per parking or unparking procedure.

500

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

During parking or unparking, the system can travel a previously stored dis‐ RECORDING A PARKING PROCEDURE USING MEMORY PARKING ASSIST
tance of up to approximately 100 m to or out of the desired parking space, for
Requirements:
example, from the driveway entrance into the garage.
R There are no public roads included within the travel route, e.g. entirely
Within a radius of approximately 150 m, only one parking or unparking proce‐
within your own property.
dure can be recorded.
R The system needs reference points in the surroundings to orient itself,
Only use Memory Parking Assist on private property. Use on public roads, e.g. suchas fences, walls or trees. A certain distance must therefore be driven
in public parking spaces, is not permitted. after starting the vehicle. If insufficient reference points are detected in
the surrounding area, no new route can be recorded.
Memory Parking Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for R Sufficient distance is maintained between the vehicle and surrounding
you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe objects as the parking procedure is being recorded.
manoeuvring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that
no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle's path.

SYSTEM LIMITS
Observe the system limits of Active Parking Assist (/ page 491).

Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist
may not be detected during the parking procedure.

Drawbars of parked trailers that protrude into the parking space, for example,
may not be detected.

DO NOT USE MEMORY PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS,

FOR EXAMPLE:
# Press the button 1.
R In extreme weather conditions, suchas ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
The Camera & parking view opens on the central display.
R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.
R When snow chains are fitted.

501

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

% In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename
stored parking procedures.

PARKING WITH MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements:

R A parking procedure has been recorded.

# Select the menu Memory Parking Assist 2.

# Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired starting point of the

assisted parking procedure, e.g. a driveway entrance.

# To start recording: tap 3.

% If not all conditions for a recording are met, the symbol 3 is

greyed out.
# Press the button 1.
# To start the recording, press the button 1. The Camera & parking view opens on the central display.

# Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed a speed of
8 km/h.

# To stop recording: stop the vehicle and tap 3 again.

The recording is stored.

It is also possible to record the unparking procedure using the same method
with Memory Parking Assist. Refer to the information on the central display.

502

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

EXITING A PARKING SPACE WITH MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements:

R The unparking procedure was recorded together with the corresponding

parking procedure and stored separately, without switching off the vehi‐
cle in between.
R The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Assist.
Alternatively, manually position the vehicle at the starting point of the
recorded unparking procedure.

# Select the Memory Parking Assist 2 menu.

# Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting point of the stored park‐
ing procedure.

# To start the parking procedure: press 6.

# Select the stored parking procedure from the list.

# Follow the instructions on the central display.

The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

# Press the button 1.

% The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You The Camera & parking view opens on the central display.
are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accord‐
ance with the traffic conditions.

# Following completion of the parking procedure, secure the vehicle

against rolling away.

503

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

SETTING MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking
5 Memory Parking Assist

RENAMING A RECORDING
# Select Manage tracks.

# Select u next to the desired recording.

# Enter a name and confirm with OK.

# Select the menu Memory Parking Assist 2. DELETING A RECORDING

# Select Manage tracks.
STARTING THE UNPARKING PROCEDURE
# Press 6. # Select u next to the desired recording.

# Confirm the saved unparking procedure. # Select Delete entry.

# Follow the instructions on the central display. DELETING ALL RECORDINGS

The vehicle drives the recorded route.

# Select Manage tracks.

# Select u next to one of the desired recordings.

% The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You # Select Delete all.
are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accord‐
ance with the traffic conditions.
% Alternatively, you can delete all data in Memory Parking Assist by
resetting the multimedia system (/ page 593).
# Take control of the vehicle after the unparking procedure has been com‐
pleted.

504

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist Trailer Manoeuvring Assist serves solely as an aid. It is not a substitute for
you having to pay attention to your surroundings. The responsibility for safe
FUNCTION OF TRAILER MANOEUVRING ASSIST manoeuvring, parking and exiting parking spaces remains with you. Ensure that
there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while
manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
% This function can be a Digital Extra (/ page 109).
You can enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system,
or use a straightening or 90° manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening
manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and
& WARNING
straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction.
Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers
Trailers with a steered axle or a fifth wheel cannot be used with Trailer Observe the notes on trailer operation (/ page 508).
Manoeuvring Assist.
SYSTEM LIMITS
Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn.
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 491)
# Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with fixed
R 360° camera (/ page 482)
drawbars and axles.
R Reversing camera (/ page 479)

NOTE THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING

*
Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations SITUATIONS:
The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to R The uphill gradient is greater than approximately 15 %.
overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations.
USING TRAILER MANOEUVRING ASSIST
# Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations
while manoeuvring. Requirements:

R The vehicle has been started and is stationary.

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. The R A trailer is selected in the Vehicle menu (/ page 514).
reversing camera monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and the R A trailer has been detected.
trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist also limits R The uphill gradient is less than approximately 15 %.
your speed.
R The boot lid is closed.

505

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

R The electric parking brake is not applied. You can select various manoeuvres in the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist menu.
R The driver's seat belt is fastened. The manoeuvres available depend on the trailer's current articulation angle
and length.

# To adjust the articulation angle: select 4. To change the articulation

angle, swipe to the left or to the right across the entire range of the
camera image in the central display.

or

# To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select 2.

The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direc‐
tion of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short
countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversing,
which then guides it back to the desired line. This allows the vehicle
# Engage reverse gear k. to align with the trailer, while at the same time maintaining the trailer's
direction.
# Press the button 1.
or
The camera image is shown on the central display.
# To activate the 90° manoeuvre:
# Take your hands off the steering wheel.
R Align the vehicle in the same direction (line) as the trailer.
R Select 3 (left or right).

The system calculates the articulation angle so that a trailer can be

manoeuvred into a driveway at the most acute angle possible when it
is perpendicular to its own vehicle. After the manoeuvre, the vehicle is
aligned again in the trailer's direction.
# Accelerate and brake as required.

% This image is shown as an example and is without trailer.

506

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

% The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the

trailer. The system calculates this by driving the vehicle forwards,
including cornering. Before the trailer length has been calculated,
the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23°. The longer
the trailer, the greater the maximum articulation angle (max.
approximately 60°).

% Be aware of all surroundings and always remain ready to brake.

507

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

Trailer hitch

Notes on trailer operation & WARNING

Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving
* NOTE If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may
The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installa‐ start to swerve.
tion of trailer hitches
This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The
The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-remov‐
car/trailer combination may even overturn.
able trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited. # Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/
trailer combination by increasing your speed.
# Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of
trailer hitches. # Reduce the speed and do not countersteer.

# Brake if necessary.

* NOTE
Damage to the engine due to overheating
# If you have a trailer hitch retrofitted, modifications to the
engine cooling system may be necessary depending on the
vehicle type.

If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the fastening points
on the vehicle frame.

508

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in

your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for % When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the
trailer operation. Trailer Manoeuvring Assist function (/ page 505).

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON THE TONGUE WEIGHT: Folding the ball neck out and in
R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible
tongue weight & WARNING
R use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.
DO NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING VALUES: # Always engage the ball neck as described.
R permissible trailer load
R permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle
R gross vehicle weight rating of the towing vehicle & WARNING
Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards
R permissible gross mass of the trailer
The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not
R maximum permissible speed of the trailer
been properly engaged.

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY: There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!

R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a # Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unob‐
maximum load structed.
R the lighting of the connected trailer is operational # Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards.

In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination may not
exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating
permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed
for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

509

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

FOLDING THE BALL NECK OUT

* NOTE
Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
# When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer
hitch, retract the ball neck.

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer
hitch itself may be damaged in the process.
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching
approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack). # Keep the swivel range clear.
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a
# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is
permitted. The ball neck will fold out from under the rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash.
# When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the
information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing
eye."

510

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in
a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check
lock message appears on the driver display.

# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.

Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased
or dry (grease-free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.

FOLDING THE BALL NECK IN

# Push the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly
behind the bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message on the driver display will
disappear.
OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT INDICATORS ON THE DRIVER DIS‐
PLAY:

R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 961)

R Display messages (/ page 883)

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.

# Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.

The ball neck will fold up under the rear bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash.

511

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer R adapter cable

THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF

& WARNING THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:
Risk of injury due to a change in vehicle level
Vehicles with rear axle level control system: the vehicle level may be R the trailer is connected correctly
changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or uncou‐ R the trailer lighting system is in working order
ple the trailer during this time, you may become trapped. In addition,
other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the
A CORRECTLY CONNECTED TRAILER INFLUENCES, AMONG OTHER
vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.
THINGS, THE FUNCTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:
Observe the following when coupling or uncoupling:
R ESP® trailer stabilisation
# Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid. R Trailer Manoeuvring Assist
R Active Lane Keeping Assist
# Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate
DYNAMIC SELECT. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R Active Parking Assist
# Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.
R Blind Spot Assist
R Active Blind Spot Assist
THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF R Drive Away Assist
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET: R Cross traffic warning
R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position. R Close-range braking
R Vehicles with rear axle level control system: ensure that the vehicle is R Reversing camera
at the normal level (/ page 473). R 360° camera
Use normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted R Rear-axle level control
in trailer operation on public roads.

TRAILERS WITH A 7-PIN PLUG CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE VEHICLE

WITH THE FOLLOWING ADAPTERS:

R adapter plug

512

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

COUPLING UP A TRAILER # Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an
adapter cable).
* NOTE # Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during
Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge
cornering.
Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES, A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR ON THE
damage the starter battery. DRIVER'S DISPLAY EVEN IF THE TRAILER HAS BEEN CONNECTED COR‐
RECTLY:
# Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer
battery. R LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system.
R The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum cur‐
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away. rent (50 mA).

# Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
% Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply
# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up
up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the
to the vehicle.
ignition lock.

UNCOUPLING A TRAILER

& WARNING
Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a
trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your
# Open the socket cap. hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

# Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on the socket.

# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

# Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as it will go.

# Let the cap engage.

513

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Trailer hitch

* NOTE
Configuring settings for trailer operation
Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake Multimedia system:
The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Trailer type
brake.
CONFIGURING SETTINGS FOR A TRAILER
# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. The settings on this menu make it possible to calculate a route suitable for the
selected trailer and optimise the calculated arrival time.

# Select the desired trailer type.

& WARNING
Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable # Enter the maximum permissible speed of the selected trailer.
Vehicles with rear axle level control system: the vehicle may lower # To save changes: select Confirm.
when you disconnect the trailer cable.

This could result in other people becoming trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

# Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the imme‐

diate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the
trailer cable.

# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

# Uncouple the trailer.

# Place the cover on the ball head.

% Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch

the vehicle on and then off again.

514

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Bicycle rack function

Bicycle rack function

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of accident due to improper handling of the bicycle rack Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or
THE BICYCLE RACK MAY DETACH FROM THE VEHICLE IN THE FOL‐ improperly used bicycle rack.
LOWING CASES: # Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly
as described below.
R If the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
R If the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
R If the bicycle rack is attached to the ball neck below the ball head.
* NOTE
FOR YOUR SAFETY AND THE SAFETY OF OTHER ROAD USERS, Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING: # When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached,
fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer
R Always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. hitch, retract the ball neck.
R Always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi‐
cle.
R Use the bicycle rack only for transporting bicycles.
* NOTE
R Always secure the bicycle rack properly by attaching it to the ball The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installa‐
head and, if possible, also to the guide pins of the ball neck. tion of trailer hitches
R When transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks with The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-remov‐
additional support on the guide pins of the ball neck. able trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the
R Use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. lighting system is prohibited.
R Always observe the operating instructions of the bicycle rack.
# Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of
trailer hitches.

515

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Bicycle rack function

NOTES ON LOADING
The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head,
the greater the load on the trailer hitch.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible

R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible
across the vehicle's longitudinal axis

Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g.

Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin) baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the
bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of grav‐
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be ity of the bicycle rack.
transported.
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check
THE FOLLOWING BICYCLE RACK DESIGNS ARE POSSIBLE: them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.
R When mounted by being attached to ball head 1, the maximum load Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view
capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles. may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the
R When mounted on ball head 1 and guide pin 2, the maximum load trailer hitch will increase.
capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles.

The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack
and the bicycle rack load.

Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle
(/ page 336).

When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear Load distribution on the bicycle rack
axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
the tyre pressure table (/ page 769). 2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis.

516

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Bicycle rack function

Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

THE LOAD ON THE BICYCLE RACK (NO MORE THAN THREE BICYCLES)
Attached without additional guide pins

Total weight of bicycle rack Up to 75 kg

and load

Max. distance 1 420 mm

Max. distance 2 300 mm

THE LOAD ON THE BICYCLE RACK (NO MORE THAN FOUR BICYCLES)
Attached with additional guide pins

Total weight of bicycle rack Up to 100 kg

and load

Max. distance 1 420 mm

Max. distance 2 400 mm

When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg,
always use bicycle racks with additional support on both trailer hitch guide
pins.

517

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driving and parking Vehicle towing instructions

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for
flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems
may result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow
bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing
vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

R Permitted towing methods (/ page 752)

R Plug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods (/ page 753)
R Mercedes-AMG E Performance: permitted towing methods
(/ page 754)
R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
(/ page 75)

Back to Contents518

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display

Driver display
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Overview of status indicators on the driver

Notes on the driver display 520 542
display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Overview of status indicators on the driver

Driver display malfunction 521 544
display

Operating the driver display 522

Driver display menus 524

Head-up display 537

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

540
system

Function of the power meter 541

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Notes on the driver display

Notes on the driver display

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver display malfunctions R Various menus, such as Assistance and Navigation
if the driver display is inoperative or its functions are restricted, you will R Status indicators for the driving systems
not receive information about such issues as other function restrictions, R Display messages
speed, current drive range and the status of the electric parking brake. R Information regarding Consumption and Range
This will impair operating safety. R Power meter level and state of charge of the high-voltage battery

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic

ADDITIONAL INDICATORS FOR PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLES:
conditions and switch it off. Do not continue driving.
R õ Drive system is activated
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
° "Foot off the accelerator" (/ page 349)
# Have the vehicle transported rather than towed.

Some menu content and settings can be changed (/ page 525).

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immedi‐
ately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

THE DRIVER DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING BASIC INFORMATION:

R Indicator and warning lamps

R Speed and engine speed
R Transmission position
R Fuel level or state of charge

520

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display malfunction

Driver display malfunction

The driver display also does not work during an update.

& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver display malfunctions What to do in the event of a driver display malfunction
if the driver display is inoperative or its functions are restricted, you will If the driver display is inoperative or its functions are restricted, stop the
not receive information about such issues as other function restrictions, vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch it off.
speed, current drive range and the status of the electric parking brake. The following procedure is recommended in this eventuality:
This will impair operating safety. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic # While the vehicle is stationary, continue to hold the brake pedal down.
conditions and switch it off. Do not continue driving.
# Press the j button on the DIRECT SELECT lever.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Apply the parking brake.
# Have the vehicle transported rather than towed.
# Slowly release the brake pedal and make sure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away.
Identifying a driver display malfunction
# Press and hold the start/stop button (/ page 403) once for roughly
A DRIVER DISPLAY MALFUNCTION CAN BE IDENTIFIED BY CHARACTERIS‐ three seconds to switch off the drive system.
TICS SUCH AS THE FOLLOWING:
# Contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
R When the vehicle is switched on, the driver display continues to show
nothing but a black screen. # Have the vehicle transported rather than towed.
R The driver display restarts.
R The content freezes. % In addition, note the additional information about switching off
R The display stops showing data such as speed. Various indicator and the vehicle (/ page 403)and the notes on transporting the vehi‐
warning lamps are also displayed. cle (/ page 756).

521

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Operating the driver display

Operating the driver display

SCROLLING ON THE MENU BAR

& WARNING
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐

mits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying

attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ment with the vehicle stationary.
1 Back button
2 Main menu button
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently 3 Touch Control
driving when operating the driver display.

522

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Operating the driver display

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

1 Back button
2 Main menu button
3 Touch Control
The controls on the left of the steering wheel manage the content of the driver
display. Swipe with your finger on Touch Control 3 to navigate vertically
or horizontally through the content. Press the Touch Control to confirm your
selection.

% Use the tip of your thumb to operate Touch Control 3 in the

most effective way. Set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on
the central display (/ page 567).

# Briefly press the main menu button 2.

# Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.

# To confirm: press Touch Control 3.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

523

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

Driver display menus

Notes on menus on the driver display R Assistance

R Offroad (equipment-dependent)
R Service
& WARNING
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
equipment On some of the menus, you can choose between different display content in
the centre display area.
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. the menu-specific display content.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
mits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying

attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently
driving when operating the driver display.
THE FOLLOWING MENUS CAN BE CALLED UP VIA THE MENU BAR ON THE
DRIVER DISPLAY:

R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE

R Sport
R Classic
R Understated
R Navigation

524

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

Calling up and operating menus on the driver

display
CALLING UP A MENU VIA THE DRIVER DISPLAY MENU BAR

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

1 Back button
2 Main menu button
3 Touch Control
1 Back button # Press the main menu button 2 on the steering wheel.
2 Main menu button The menu bar will be shown in the lower area of the driver display.
3 Touch Control

Vehicles with combustion engines

525

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

% Pressing back button 1 on the standard display will open the

previous menu.

CALLING UP OR EXITING THE OPTIONS SUBMENU

Depending on the information in the centre display content, you can configure
various settings on the Options submenu.
Plug-in hybrid vehicles
# To call up the Options submenu and confirm a selection: press Touch
# Select a menu on the menu bar by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.
Control 3.
# To leave the Options submenu: press Touch Control 1.
# To confirm: press Touch Control 3. THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUB‐
BROWSING THROUGH DISPLAY CONTENT OR LISTS MENU, FOR EXAMPLE:
# Swipe horizontally or vertically on Touch Control 3.
R Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map set‐
tings
% On some menus, an index character at the right edge of the R Understated: selecting the colour selection
centre display indicates the current position of the information. R Classic: resetting the trip odometer
R Classic: resetting the trip computer From start
PRESETTING DISPLAYS R Classic: resetting the trip computer From reset
Custom-configured menu content can be set as the standard display.
R Classic: resetting the ECO display values
# Press and hold Touch Control 3 until the displayed bar is completely
filled.
The prompt Set direct entry? will appear.
Calling up the Classic or Understated menu
Driver display:
# Swipe to the left on Touch Control 3 and select Yes.
4 Classic
# To confirm: press Touch Control 3.
SELECTING CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT
# To show standard displays: press the back button 1 on the upper The Classic menu shows the driver display separated into speedometer and
level of a menu. rev counter. The area in between can be filled with various types of informa‐
tion.

526

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

Vehicles with combustion engines Plug-in hybrid

1 Speedometer 1 Speedometer
2 Rev counter 2 POWER display range
3 Transmission position 3 Rev counter and power meter level
4 Coolant temperature 4 Current state of charge of the high-voltage bat‐
Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and charge display tery
5 Outside temperature 5 Outside temperature
6 Centre display content (example: trip distance) 6 Display range of recuperated power
7 Time 7 Centre display content (example: trip distance)
8 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location 8 Time
9 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location

527

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

R ECO display
R Range
R Consumption
R ATTENTION ASSIST
R Audio
R Navigation

% If you select navigation for the centre display content, you will
see navigation instructions that vary depending on the driving
Mercedes-AMG vehicles situation.

1 Speedometer
2 Rev counter % If you have selected information for the centre display content
3 Gear display and switch to another menu, the selected information will be
4 Coolant temperature applied.
Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and charge display
5 Outside temperature
6 Centre display content (example: temperature)
7 Time
8 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator
# Open the Classic menu via the driver display menu bar.

# To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control and select the display content. Trip computer (example)
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS SHOWN IN THE CENTRE DISPLAY 1 Proportion of driving done in electric mode (distance travelled under elec‐
CONTENT: tric power per total distance travelled)

R Trip and total distance

R Trip computer From start and From reset
R Driving time and distance covered in electric mode

528

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

INFORMATION ABOUT RANGE

% To increase the distance covered in electric mode, charge the
R The actual range achieved may differ from the range displayed. Your high-voltage battery as frequently as possible at a suitable
previous driving style will be taken into account when the range is being charging facility.
calculated.
R Factors such as outside temperature or climate control settings have a CHANGING THE RADIO STATION OR TRACK ON THE STATION OR TRACK
direct influence on the achievable range. LIST
R While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional Radio stations or tracks are changed on the station or track list in the centre
information about the route ahead can be included in the range calcula‐ display content.
tion.
THE FOLLOWING WILL BE ADJUSTED IN THE MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:

INFORMATION ON ELECTRIC ENERGY CONSUMPTION R Configuring the station or track list

R Switching between media sources
R The From start and From reset consumption figures take into account
all active consumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's R Setting the frequency band
operational readiness õ.

INFORMATION ON THE PROPORTION OF DRIVING DONE IN ELECTRIC

MODE

R When the proportion of driving done in electric mode is determined,

only distances driven under the following conditions will be taken into
account:
- The combustion engine is switched off.
- The Electric or Hybrid drive program is active.
- The high-voltage battery is charged.

1 Track list in the centre display content (example)

Distances travelled under electric power in the Battery Hold drive program or
with a discharged high-voltage battery will not be taken into account in the # To change radio stations or tracks: swipe left or right on the Touch
proportion of driving done in electric mode. Control and select a radio station or track on the station or track list 1.

529

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

% The radio station or track displayed when the vehicle is restarted % Depending on the equipment, the selected colour setting will
depends on the user profile used for the previous trip. be adopted for the ambient lighting and the MBUX multimedia
system.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUB‐
MENU, FOR EXAMPLE:

R Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map set‐
Calling up the Service menu
tings Driver display:
R Resetting the trip odometer 4 Service
R Resetting the trip computer From start The current status of the vehicle is shown on the Service menu.
R Resetting the trip computer From reset
# Open the Service menu via the driver display menu bar.
R Resetting the ECO display values
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT IS AVAILABLE IN THE SERVICE MENU
CHANGING COLOUR SETTINGS ON THE UNDERSTATED MENU (EQUIPMENT-DEPENDENT):
# Call up the Understated menu via the driver display menu bar.
R Information about how many messages are in the message memory
R AdBlue: AdBlue® range and fill level
% If you select the Understated menu on the driver display, the con‐ R Tyre pressure:
tent in the MBUX multimedia system will also be made smaller. - Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (/ page 770)
# To call up the colour list: press the Touch Control. - Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 770)
The colour list on the Understated menu will be displayed. R ASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date (/ page 709)
R Engine oil level: checking the engine oil level (/ page 39)
# To select colour settings: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-
hand Touch Control and select the desired colour setting. R Coolant indicator
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles: temperature display (transmission oil, engine
# To exit the colour list: press the back button G. oil, coolant)
R Mercedes-AMG vehicles with plug-in hybrid: temperature display (trans‐
mission oil, engine oil, coolant, high-voltage battery and high-voltage
motor)

530

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU: In vehicles without the Driving Assistance Plus Package, your lane and the
vehicle in front will be displayed.
R Tyre pressure (/ page 770)
R Message memory (/ page 883) THE FOLLOWING STATUS DISPLAYS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE ASSISTANT
DISPLAY:

Calling up the Assistance menu R Y Green: pedestrian detection active

R Y Grey: pedestrian detection enabled, but no person detected
Driver display: R ¸ Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind
4 Assistance Spot Assist enabled and ready for operation
The Assistance menu displays different driver assistance systems and naviga‐ R ¸ Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind
tion instructions. Spot Assist enabled but not ready for operation

# Open the Assistance menu via the driver display menu bar.
THE CONTENT ON THE ASSISTANT DISPLAY WILL ADAPT TO THE FOLLOW‐
ING SITUATIONS:

R Number of lanes detected

R Change of direction, e.g. lane change
R Current road conditions
R Road users detected

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC indicator on the assistant display (exam‐

ple) % The assistant display will not show other detected obstacles with
IN VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PLUS PACKAGE, THE FOL‐ the exception of road users.
LOWING DISPLAYS MAY VARY DEPENDING ON THE DRIVING SITUATION:
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:
R The navigation instructions in the left-hand display section
R The traffic light view in the right-hand display section R Starting route guidance
R The display of the driver assistance systems R With active route guidance: end route guidance
R The level of detail on the assistant display R Call up previous destinations and favourites
R Start new route guidance to a recent destination

531

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

R Start new route guidance to a favourite (/ page 359). You can also activate or deactivate ESP® using
the steering wheel button or via the MBUX multimedia system
(/ page 423).
Calling up the Sport menu (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Driver display: Calling up the Sport menu (plug-in hybrid
4 Sport vehicles)
The Sport menu displays information about the engine data, the setup and the
Driver display:
temperature of the vehicle.
4 Sport
# Open the Sport menu via the driver display menu bar. The Sport menu provides additional information about the operating energy as
well as the recuperated power of the vehicle.

# Open the Sport menu via the driver display menu bar.

% When you call up the Sport menu on the menu bar of the driver's
display, the menu colour setting will automatically be applied to
the MBUX multimedia system.

1 Current torque
2 Temperature (transmission oil temperature, engine oil temperature, coolant
temperature)
3 Current power output
4 Setup (drive position, transmission position, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension
tuning, exhaust system, ESP®)
5 Engine speed

1 Display area for recuperated power (recuperation)

% Depending on the equipment, AMG-specific content regarding 2 Display area for output
temperature, setup and engine data will be displayed. You can 3 Additional display area for output
set the setup display content using the buttons on the multi‐
function steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system

532

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

Calling up the Supersport menu (Mercedes- # Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control to call up the Supersport
menu on the menu bar of the driver display.
AMG vehicles)
# To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch
Driver display: Control.
4 Supersport

SELECTING THE CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT % Displays 1 and 3 vary depending on the centre display con‐
tent.

% The displays for current torque 1 and current power 3 vary

depending on the display content in the centre display area.

THE CENTRE DISPLAY CONTENT SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

1 Current torque and recuperation display R Transmission position display

2 Centre display content (example: selected gear and electric drive support R Plug-in hybrid vehicles: temperature display (transmission oil, engine
display) oil, coolant, high-voltage battery and high-voltage motor)
3 Current power and recuperation display R Vehicles with combustion engines: temperature display (transmission
oil, engine oil, coolant)
R Vehicles with combustion engines: engine data
R Set-up (drive, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension and sound)
R G-force
R Trip and total distance
R Distance From start and From reset
R Consumption
1 Current torque
R Audio
2 Centre display content (example: gear display)
R Navigation
3 Current power output
# Press main menu button © on the steering wheel.

533

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, AMG-specific content

regarding temperature, set-up and engine data will be displayed.
You can configure the set-up display content either using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel or via the MBUX
multimedia system (/ page 359).

Track Pace menu (example)

Calling up the Track Pace menu (Mercedes- 1 G-meter
AMG vehicles) 2 Centre display content (example: gear display and electric drive support
display)
Driver display: 3 Telemetry (example: selected race track)
4 TRACK PACE # Press the © main menu button on the steering wheel.
The Track Pace function is intended only for closed race tracks. Do not use this
function on public roads. Adapt your driving style to your personal capabilities # Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control to select the TRACK PACE
and the environmental conditions. menu on the menu bar of the driver display.
THE DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE TRACK PACE MENU WILL ADAPT TO THE
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS WILL BE DISPLAYED ON THE TRACK PACE
SELECTED SETTINGS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:
MENU:
R Gear display
R G-meter
R Transmission position
R Race track selected
R Electric drive support display
R Braking and acceleration procedure
R Recuperated power display
R Gear currently selected
R G-meter
R Braking points
R Acceleration
R Quarter-miles
R Race track selected on the central display
R Current race
R Record route

534

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

R Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance: Charge 8 Lane not recommended (grey)

R Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance: Boost strategy (/ page 478) 9 Current lane

While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter shows the forces that are exerted % The level of detail in the navigation instructions in the left-hand
on the vehicle occupants both laterally and in the direction of travel. The display section may vary.
maximum values will be displayed in red in the coordinate system.
# To zoom in and out on the map directly: swipe upwards or downwards
Calling up the Navigation menu on the Touch Control.

Driver display: % If you do not enter anything in auto zoom, the system will reset
4 Navigation the scale of the map view already selected after a short time.
The Navigation menu shows the relevant map with navigation instructions. The map scale is set permanently in the MBUX multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 640).
# Open the Navigation menu via the driver display menu bar.
CHANGING THE SCALE OF THE SELECTED MAP VIEW THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:

R With active route guidance: end route guidance

R Select route guidance
R Map settings

% If the current route guidance is ended on the Navigation menu, it

will also be ended in the MBUX multimedia system.
1 Distance to the change of direction
2 Road to which the change of direction leads
On the Options submenu, you can use other functions in the Destinations and
3 Traffic incident indicator Map settings categories.
4 Currently selected route
5 Indicator showing vehicle's current position THE FUNCTIONS IN THE DESTINATIONS CATEGORY INCLUDE:
6 Change-of-direction symbol R Call up previous destinations and favourites
7 Recommended lane (white)

535

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Driver display menus

R Start new route guidance to a favourite

% In Favourites, the options Work and Home will be displayed even

if no address is stored.

THE FUNCTIONS IN THE MAP SETTINGS CATEGORY INCLUDE:

R Activate auto zoom

R Adjust the map view, satellite view and route overview

THE FOLLOWING MAP VIEWS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE NAVIGATION MENU:

R Entire route
R 2D direction of travel
R 2D north-up
R 3D map

536

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Head-up display

Head-up display

Function of the head-up display HEAD-UP DISPLAY CONTENT WITH NAVIGATION (9X3°)

The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision,
for example.

USE THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY MENU BAR TO SELECT DIFFERENT CON‐

TEXTS, E.G.:

R Minimal
R Sport 1 Navigation instructions
R Standard 2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event)
R Supersport 3 Active Steering Assist status
R TRACK PACE 4 Current speed
R RACE START 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control)
R Race 6 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)
R Settings When you receive a call, the head-up display and the driver display will show
R Activating/deactivating Head-up display the 6 Call waiting message.

The following image shows an example of the head-up display. You can choose % The call will also be shown on the central display.
what content is displayed (/ page 538).

SYSTEM LIMITS
VISIBILITY IS INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IN PARTIC‐
ULAR:

R Seat position

537

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Head-up display

R Image position setting SWITCHING BACK TO THE DRIVER DISPLAY

R Light conditions # Press the G or © button.
R Wet road surfaces SETTING THE POSITION AND BRIGHTNESS
R Objects on the display cover # Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control and select Settings on the
R Polarisation in sunglasses menu bar of the head-up display.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: # Press the Touch Control.
The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graph‐
ics on the head-up display as well as on the driver display.
Operating the head-up display
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the Touch
SELECTING DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY VIA THE MENU Control.
BAR OF THE DRIVER DISPLAY
# Press the main menu button © on the left. # To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the Touch Con‐
trol.
# To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved auto‐
Touch Control. matically.

# Press the G or a button to exit the settings.

Switching the head-up display on/off

Driver display:
4©
SWITCHING BETWEEN DISPLAY CONTENT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY SWITCHING ON
# Swipe to the left or right on the Touch Control. # Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.
A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up
display. # Press the Touch Control.
SWITCHING OFF
# To confirm: press the a button.
# Swipe upwards on the Touch Control.

538

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Head-up display

# Swipe on the Touch Control and select Head-up display.

# Press the Touch Control.

539

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

1 Electric drive support

2 Recuperation behaviour of the electric motor

% Due to various system limits, the values displayed may tempora‐

rily differ slightly from the actual value.

540

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Function of the power meter

Function of the power meter

R The area 4 – 5 shows the recuperation and charging behaviour using

the combustion engine.

% Due to various system limits, the displayed value 4 may tempo‐

rarily differ slightly from the actual value.

1 Beginning of the electrical drive support display range

2 End of the electrical drive support display range
3 Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery
4 Maximum recuperated energy
5 Start of the display range of recuperated energy

% The Electric drive program is not available if the state of charge

of the high-voltage battery falls below the minimum value of 25%
3. Electric mode is still possible when power output requests
are low or when at a standstill.

THE POWER METER HAS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

R In electric mode, the area 1 – 2 shows what percentage of the electri‐

cal drive is currently being used. The combustion engine is switched on
at 100%. In boost mode, the electrical power assistance of the drive is
displayed.

541

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG

vehicles)
The status indicators for the driving and driving safety systems are shown in
areas 1 and 6. % The number, position and presentation of the status indicators
on the driver display depend on which systems are activated or
deactivated.

DEPENDING ON THE EQUIPMENT, MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES HAVE THE

FOLLOWING STATUS INDICATORS:

Y Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only) (/ page 286)

Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 492)

È Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space (/ page 492)

é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 490)

Vehicles with combustion engines (example)
h Cruise control (/ page 428)

È Limiter (/ page 429)

ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 432)

Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 432)

æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 456)

Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 456)

Vehicle with plug-in hybrid (example)

542

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Overview of status indicators on the driver display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 442) Æ ESP® SPORT selected (/ page 420)

± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 446)

When ESP® SPORT is selected, the warning lamps å and Æ light up
A Active Lane Change Assist with automatic lane change continuously.
(/ page 446)
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 470) (/ page 456)

Z Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (/ page 468) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 461)
õ Plug‑in hybrid operation activated
Important information from other driving systems may briefly appear in front
° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 343, 349, 347) of the displayed traffic signs.
ò Sound generator inoperative (/ page 904)

è ECO start/stop function (/ page 340)

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 289)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 291)

¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 442).

p Engine temperature warning lamp

ä AMG RIDE CONTROL + .

ö AMG Real Performance Sound (/ page 350).

å ESP® OFF selected (/ page 420)

543

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Overview of status indicators on the driver display

Overview of status indicators on the driver display

The status indicators for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
display sections 1 to 4. (/ page 432)

æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 456)

Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (/ page 456)

Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 442)

± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 446)

A Active Lane Change Assist with automatic lane change

(/ page 446)

ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 470)

Y Pedestrian detection (on assistant display only) (/ page 286) Z Active Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (/ page 468)
Ç Active Parking Assist is available (/ page 492) Z Blind Spot Assist (on assistant display only) (/ page 468)
È Active Parking Assist has detected a parking space (/ page 492) õ Plug‑in hybrid operation activated
é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 490) ° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 343, 349, 347)
h Cruise control (/ page 428) ò Sound generator inoperative (/ page 904)
È Limiter (/ page 429) è ECO start/stop function (/ page 340)
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 432) ë HOLD function (/ page 425)

544

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Driver display Overview of status indicators on the driver display

_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 289)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 291)

ð Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)

¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 442)

Ò Slippery road surface warning

Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 456)

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs
(/ page 461)

Important information from other driving systems may briefly appear in front
of the displayed traffic signs.

Back to Contents545

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant

MBUX Voice Assistant

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Notes on operating safety 547

Operation 548

Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively 551

Essential voice commands 553

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Notes on operating safety

Notes on operating safety

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS

WHEN OPERATING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND ESPE‐
CIALLY YOUR VOICE ASSISTANT:

R Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
R If you use the Voice Assistant in an emergency your voice can change
and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
R Familiarise yourself with the Voice Assistant functions before starting the
journey.

% The Voice Assistant does not replace the Owner's Manual.

The answers from the Voice Assistant do not provide the com‐
plete scope of information contained in the Owner's Manual. The
Voice Assistant also does not give detailed warning or damage
information. You can get the full scope of information about the
function and safe operation of the systems and components in
the vehicle in the Owner's Manual.

547

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Operation

Operation

Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant For the dialogue with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete senten‐
ces of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: combined directly with a voice command, e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it
outside?
Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the
MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navigation or INTERRUPTING THE DIALOGUE
Telephone. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational about half a minute after # During the dialogue say Pause.
switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats (depending on the The dialogue is interrupted.
special equipment).
# Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.

Conducting a dialogue CHANGING DIALOGUE LEVEL

# During the dialogue, say Back.
Requirements: The MBUX Voice Assistant jumps back to the previous dialogue step.
R Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system NAVIGATING IN THE SELECTION LIST
(/ page 549). If a voice command does not achieve a clear result, a selection list is shown.
R For corrections during output, the Voice barge-in option must be activa‐ # Say the line number or the content to select an entry or to have further
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 549). details shown.

# Say Next page or Previous page to browse the selection list.

STARTING A DIALOGUE
# Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX Voice Assistant. CALLING UP HELP
# Current application: say Help.
or
You receive suggestions and information on operating the MBUX Voice
# Press the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Assistant .

A blue wave appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can
be started.

548

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Operation

Overview of the operable functions of the Setting functions of MBUX Voice Assistant
MBUX Voice Assistant using the multimedia system
YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOW‐ Multimedia system:
ING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Voice assistant
R Telephone SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION OF MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT ON OR OFF
R Text messages
R Navigation % For vehicles with driver camera or MBUX Interior Assistant, the
R Radio and media MBUX Voice Assistant can be switched on or off in the Intelligent
R Vehicle functions assistants menu.
R Online functions
# Select Hey Mercedes.
Full functionality of the Voice Assistant is only available for you with activation When the function is active, the Hey Mercedes voice command can acti‐
of online voice control (/ page 549). vate the dialogue.
SWITCHING DIRECT COMMANDS ON OR OFF
Select Z.
Information on the language setting
#

# Activate or deactivate the function.

You can change the language of the MBUX Voice Assistant via the system
language settings (/ page 589). If the set system language is not supported If the function is active, under certain conditions, some commands can
be used without Hey Mercedes, for example Navigate home.
by the MBUX Voice Assistant, English will be selected.
SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION FOR INDIVIDUAL SEATS ON OR OFF
# Select Z.

# Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

SWITCHING VOICE INTERRUPTION ON OR OFF
# Select Further settings.

549

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Operation

# Select Voice barge-in.

If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice
output of the system.
SWITCHING PROACTIVITY ON OR OFF
# Select Further settings.

# Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate your profile or Don't forget your
phone.
When the function is active, the MBUX Voice Assistant proactively pro‐
vides information in specific situations.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ONLINE VOICE CONTROL

% Online voice control is activated at the factory.

# Select Online recognition.

# Activate or deactivate the function.

If the function is switched on and a Mercedes-Benz user account is
linked to the vehicle, additional results are available through external
information, e.g. information on points of interest. By clicking the symbol
in the blue wave, more information about the online voice control can be
displayed.
ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING CONTACTS FOR ONLINE USE
# Select Contact upload for online recognition.
When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and
accurately using voice input.

550

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively

Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively

Notes on optimum use of the MBUX Voice You will need a Mercedes-Benz user account for this. If you do not yet
have a user account you must create one and connect it with your vehicle
Assistant (/ page 676).

R The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational half a minute after switching on Then call up your Mercedes-Benz user account. The Mercedes-Benz services
the vehicle and can be operated from all seats, depending on the equip‐ are displayed and can be activated (/ page 677).
ment installed. The system recognises from which seat the command
was spoken and performs actions according to the seat position. By clicking on the symbols displayed in the blue wave, further information on
R If a dialogue has been ended, the MBUX Voice Assistant continues to be the online status is displayed.
active, as long as the blue wave is shown in the multimedia system. You
WHEN ONLINE VOICE CONTROL IS ACTIVE, ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE
can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes.
AVAILABLE SUCH AS:
R If a dialogue has been ended, the MBUX Voice Assistant continues to
be active, as long as the blue wave is shown in the multimedia sys‐ R Weather
tem. You can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes R General knowledge
(/ page 549). R Public holidays and school holidays
R With the MBUX Voice Assistant, incoming calls can be accepted or rejec‐ R Smarthome
ted without the keyword Hey Mercedes.
R Messages
R Time, date and time zones
Information on the MBUX online voice assis‐ R Pocket and currency calculator
tant R Football results and fixture lists
R Share prices
The online voice control facilitates recognition and thanks to external informa‐ R Calendar
tion makes additional results available.
R ChitChat
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control R Horoscope
(/ page 549). R Geo Quiz

551

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively

% The availability of these functions is country and equipment-

dependent.

% Text content is taken from Wikipedia in accordance with the CC

BY-SA 3.0 licence.

552

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands

Essential voice commands

Notes on voice commands "HEY MERCEDES, ..."

R Drive me home.
It is not necessary to use exact voice commands to call up a specific function.
The MBUX Voice Assistant also understands you when you use your colloquial R Where is the nearest service station?
speech. Some examples are listed below. For some languages however these R Is there a service area along the route?
examples are only available to a limited extent. R Set Covent Garden as intermediate destination.

EXAMPLES OF VOICE COMMANDS: R Cancel the route guidance.

R Show my last destination.
R Navigation (/ page 553) R Search for a filling station near the Mercedes-Benz Museum in Stuttgart.
R Telephone (/ page 553) R Navigate me to Warsaw and avoid toll roads.
R Radio and TV (/ page 554) R How is the traffic on the way to work?
R Media player (/ page 554)
Vehicle functions (/ page 555)
R
Examples of telephone voice commands
R Online functions (/ page 555)
You can operate phones connected with the MBUX multimedia system using
the MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the
Examples of navigation voice commands possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you
say Help for phone.
You can operate the navigation system using the MBUX Voice Assistant. The
following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation com‐ "HEY MERCEDES, ..."
mands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation.
R Call Peter Miller on the mobile phone.
R Dial 0711 17 0.
% The MBUX Voice Assistant enables three-word addresses to
be used for navigation. Further information on three-word R Call my father.
addresses . R Write a text message to Jane Smith.

553

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands

R Search for the contact Peter Miller.

Examples of media voice commands
R Tell Peter Miller: "I'll be there five minutes later".
R Read me my new text messages. You can operate connected media sources and online music using the MBUX
Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible
R Show me the missed calls.
media voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help
R Switch to address book
for media or Help for player.

FOR AN INCOMING CALL: "HEY MERCEDES, ..."

R Reject call R Play Michael Jackson.

R Accept call R Play Michael Jackson on Spotify.
R Play "Yellow Submarine' by the Beatles.
R Next track.
Examples of radio and TV voice commands R Previous track.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can operate the radio and TV using R Repeat this track.
the MBUX Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the R Please skip five seconds.
possible radio or TV voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions R Please go back five seconds.
if you say Help for radio or Help for TV.
R Switch on random playback.
"HEY MERCEDES, ..." R Set the music volume to level six.
R Mute the music.
R Play the radio station Heart FM.
R Switch to USB.
R Next station.
R Previous station.
R Show me the list of radio stations Examples of message voice commands
R Save the station
Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the MBUX Voice Assis‐
R What am I listening to? tant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible message
voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for
messaging.

554

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands

"HEY MERCEDES, ..." R How warm is it outside?

R Write a text message to Jane Doe: When will the next meeting take place?
INFORMATION ABOUT THE VEHICLE CAN ALSO BE REQUESTED:
R Show me my new e-mails.
R Write an e-mail to Jane Doe. R Information about individual items of the vehicle equipment
R Read me my new text messages. - Hey Mercedes, which massage programmes do you have?
R Show all new text messages. - Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist?
R Write an e-mail to John Doe in English - Hey Mercedes, where is the warning triangle?
R Information about functioning of the systems and components installed
in the vehicle
Examples of vehicle voice commands - Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?
You can make settings or operate functions in your vehicle using the MBUX - Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?
Voice Assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible - Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX?
vehicle voice commands.
R Information about operating the systems and components integrated in
the vehicle
% If no seat is mentioned for commands, the action is carried out - Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my smartphone?
automatically for the seat from which the command was spoken - Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the main beam headlamps?
or for the function which is closest to that seat.
- Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionization function?

"HEY MERCEDES, ..."

R Switch the seat heating to level 2.

Examples of online functions
R Start the Refresh programme. Depending on the country, language and vehicle equipment, additional func‐
R Switch the massage function on. tions are available when online voice control is active. The system accesses
external information and can, for example, answer questions about general
R I would like to set the ambient light to blue
knowledge, provide information about weather or locations, perform calcula‐
R Switch on the reading lamp. tions, etc.
R Turn off the rear light.
"HEY MERCEDES, ..."
R Open all the windows.
R Switch the driver display to 3D. R Is the sun shining in Manchester?
R How fast can I drive here? R Is it raining at my destination?

555

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands

R What are the skiing conditions on the Zugspitze? R Next station

R What's the time in Sydney now? R Previous station
R In which country do you pay with dollars? R Next track
R How many Swiss franks make 25 euros? R Previous track
R How long now until the holidays? R Mute music
R What day is it tomorrow? R Music loud again
R What is 20 % of 29? R Music louder
R What does my horoscope say? R Music quieter
R What is the price of Mercedes-Benz Group shares? R Start dashcam recording
R Let's play Geo Quiz. R Stop dashcam recording
R I'm bored. R Show the map
R Who is the current prime minister? R 3D map
R What do you know about the Globe Theatre in London? R 2D map
R Who painted the picture "The Scream"? R Align map to north
R What's the status in the Premier League? R Align map in direction of travel
R Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am. R Enlarging the map
R Tell me a joke. R Zoom out map
R How many languages do you speak? R Show all routes
R What is your favourite animal? R Show traffic
R Are there any updates? R Navigate to work
R Navigate home

Direct command examples R Repeat driving instruction

R Cancel route guidance
With direct commands, some functions can be operated without first saying R Change language to English
the voice command Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the function must
be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 549).

R Next radio station

R Previous radio station

Back to Contents556

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system

MBUX multimedia system

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Overview and operation 558 Telephone 652

MBUX Interior Assistant 581 In-Car Apps 686

System settings 585 Online and Internet functions 688

AMG TRACK PACE 595 Media 693

Plug-in hybrid settings 601 Radio 699

Fit & Healthy 604 Sound 704

Navigation and traffic 609

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

Overview and operation

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system * NOTE

Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the cen‐
& WARNING tral display/front passenger display
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications The surface of the display is very dark.
equipment
If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface may heat up
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
considerably.
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # If the display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool down before touching it for a longer period of time.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
mits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying % THE FUNCTIONS OF YOUR MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM MAY
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ DIFFER AND DEPEND ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
ment with the vehicle stationary.
R Market
R National version
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving when operating the multimedia system. R Technical conditions

Functions, services and service aspects provided by Mercedes-

Benz and/or third-party providers may no longer be available
when the contractual period expires or due to technical condi‐
tions. There is therefore no entitlement to the continuous provi‐
sion of functions and services.
The described functions may be modified, optimised and adap‐
ted after the time of going to press.

558

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

MERCEDES-BENZ THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO a Switches the sound on or off

INTRODUCE CHANGES IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS: ø Adjusts the volume
R Features
R Services % Various MBUX multimedia system apps offer the option of linking
R Service aspects with a QR code. Scan this QR code with your mobile phone
before starting the journey.

For these reasons, descriptions and depictions relating to the

MBUX multimedia system may, in some cases, differ for your % Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice dialogue.
vehicle. Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey
Mercedes" (/ page 548). You can start a voice navigation, for
example.

% If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, vehi‐

cle and infotainment functions can be used contact-free. The
interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or
head movements.
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
• Operating Touch Control (/ page 567) Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you.
2 Central display with touch functionality for the driver These can be called up via the home screen.
• Overview of the zero layer (/ page 561) In the zero layer, entertainment sources as well as telephone, active applica‐
• Calling up and operating the zero layer (/ page 563) tions and suggestions are directly available to you. You can conveniently call
• Home screen overview (/ page 564) up and add your telephone favourites using the ß button on the steering
• Operating the touchscreen (/ page 568) wheel.
• Setting haptic operation for the touchscreen
Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select func‐
3 Control panel for: tions more quickly.
ú Fingerprint sensor
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switching the cen‐ If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, phone numbers
tral display on or off dialled during operation, active massage programmes or vehicle functions are
suggested to you, for example. Suggestions are displayed on the zero layer

559

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

based on context and your user behaviour. The configuration of the sugges‐ THE ZERO LAYER PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING MODULES AND APPLICA‐
tions is completed in the system settings. Furthermore, the multimedia system TIONS:
learns routines. Routines are actions that run automatically under certain con‐
ditions. You can compile your user profile from various vehicle settings and R Navigation module
settings of the multimedia system. Some functions and services are protected In the expanded view you can, for example, have the route overview
by a PIN. If you teach in biometric procedures, you can identify yourself with displayed, switch on the display of traffic information and make settings
these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN. for the View (map), Messages & tones and the Route.
R Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone
The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an availa‐
ble software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are
actions. The call is made via the Control Centre. always displayed.
A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION the phone to be displayed.
This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. R Active applications
More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop. The lower display area shows an active massage programme, for exam‐
ple.
R Suggestions
Zero layer Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context
and your user behaviour. Here are a few examples:
FUNCTION OF THE ZERO LAYER
- Latest calls
- Active relaxation programmes
% Your software can be upgraded to a more current version at a
- Vehicle functions
later date.
- Online voice applications
- Personalised routines
The zero layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia
system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use. The learning function of the system recognises your typical operat‐
When you select © on the central display, the digital map with the applica‐ ing sequences and offers to perform these automatically for you as
tions appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a a routine.
classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You
can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic menu. Modules and applications are first shown in a reduced view. By tapping on
them, you can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view).
The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again.

560

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions Press briefly: shows all applications (/ page 563)
are available. Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu (/ page 564)
The learning function can be switched on and off for the options A Route monitor
(/ page 590). e.g. route list, lane recommendations, 3D image of the upcoming driving
manoeuvre
OVERVIEW OF THE ZERO LAYER
The zero layer shows the digital map and the user-specific applications.
DIGITAL MAP AND USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS (EXAMPLE)
THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS ARE DISPLAYED IN THE
LOWER DISPLAY AREA:

R Suggestions
Requirement: suggestions are activated (/ page 590).
R Active applications
e.g. a massage programme
e.g. Active Parking Assist
R Telephone 7
R Entertainment sources 8
R Online voice applications
1 Navigation module (reduced view)
2 Enters a destination (/ page 45) The lower display area can be hidden and shown (/ page 563).
Searches for parking
3 Calls up the Control Centre (pull the bar down) INFORMATION ABOUT ENTERTAINMENT SOURCES
4 Status line You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expan‐
ded view) (/ page 563).
5 Calls up user profile settings
6 Content sharing menu (if available) EXAMPLES:
7 Telephone
R Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next track, set a station
Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multi‐
media system. R Select tracks from the current playlist or stations from the station list
8 Entertainment sources (media, radio) R Select a media source
9 © The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

561

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

INFORMATION ABOUT THE TELEPHONE For example, the multimedia system suggests a programme at a certain
To use the functions, the mobile phones must be connected to the MBUX time.
multimedia system. R Opening the boot lid
Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & messages option is activated in the Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with boot lid convenience closing.
suggestions. R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme
R Making heating settings
EXAMPLES:
R Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R Answer a call and call a missed call R Selecting previous destinations and destinations from favourites
The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phones connected to the
SUGGESTIONS FOR ONLINE VOICE APPLICATIONS
MBUX multimedia system.
Requirement: the Online voice services option is activated in the suggestions.
R Display contacts and call list and call a contact
R Use voice functions The suggested voice applications are made available online and are based on
R Suggest contacts your previous voice inputs.
The contacts are suggested for the mobile phones connected to the EXAMPLES:
MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for the mobile
phones that are linked to another user profile. R What will the weather be like tomorrow?
R Write messages to contacts (suggestion) R Play the messages.
R Connect a device via the device manager (suggestion) R Start geoquiz.
R Open the garage door.
INFORMATION ABOUT ACTIVE APPLICATIONS
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: SUGGESTIONS FOR ACTIVATING RECOGNISED ROUTINES
Requirement: the Learning & suggestions option is activated in the suggestions.
R Operating a massage programme
R Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme Routines are actions that run automatically under certain conditions. An exam‐
ple of a routine: whenever you drive to work in the morning (condition), the
SUGGESTIONS FOR COMFORT AND VEHICLE FUNCTIONS AS WELL AS MBUX multimedia system should set a certain massage programme (action).
NAVIGATION Routines can also perform different actions.
Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Navigation options are activated in the
suggestions.

R Operating a massage programme

562

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

CALLING UP AND OPERATING THE ZERO LAYER # To show: pull the bar above © upwards.
CALLING UP THE ZERO LAYER or
When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero layer is displayed with the
digital map. Navigation is active. # Select ©.
# From another application: press the © button on the right side of
or
the steering wheel.
# Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.
or
NAVIGATION MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW)
# Tap on ©.
OPERATING APPLICATIONS IN THE REDUCED VIEW (EXAMPLES)
# Media: to play the previous or next track, tap û or ü.

# To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on the contact.

After the connection has been established, the call functions are availa‐
ble.

# To end a call: tap on the contact again.

# To reply to a message: tap on a message and dictate the message via

the MBUX Voice Assistant.
Example: route guidance is active
# To start a massage programme: tap on the application and start the
1 Traffic incident on the route
massage programme.
Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time
# To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one 2 Destination
of the previous destinations. 3 Searches for a filling station
# To select a destination from the favourites: tap on the application and 4 Switches traffic information display on or off
select the destination. # Tap on the navigation module (/ page 561).
HIDING AND SHOWING THE DISPLAY AREA WITH APPLICATIONS
# Select Route in the lower menu bar.
# To hide: pull the applications down.

563

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

OPERATING A MENU IN THE LOWER DISPLAY AREA (EXAMPLE: ACTIVE # To hide applications: briefly press © again.
MASSAGE PROGRAMME)
SWITCHING BETWEEN THE ZERO LAYER AND HOME SCREEN WITH CLAS‐
SIC MENU
# Press and hold on ©.
The home screen with classic menu is shown.

# To return to the zero layer: press and hold on ©.

1 Selects a massage programme

Home screen overview
2 Starts/stops a programme for the driver
3 Starts/stops a programme for the front passenger
4 Sets the massage intensity for the driver's or front passenger seat
# Tap on the application.
The expanded view of the application is displayed.

# To close the menu: select G.

1 Status line
OPENING AND CLOSING THE CONTEXT MENU FOR A SUGGESTION
2 Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
# Press and hold on a suggestion.
3 Displays in the status line
The context menu opens and shows the No longer suggest option, for 4 Calls up user profile settings and switches user
example.
5 Calls up applications
# To close: swipe downwards. 6 Quick-access to application
REMOVING A SUGGESTION FROM THE DISPLAY AREA 7 Global menu
# Swipe the suggestion upwards. G Calls up previous menu
© Press and hold: switches between home screen and zero layer
SHOWING ALL APPLICATIONS
û Previous track or previous radio station
# Briefly press ©.
ü Next track or next radio station
Available applications are displayed.

564

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

R You select predefined routines (templates).

% During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global
menu 7.
If the learning function Learning & suggestions is switched on and enough data
is available, the system suggests a routine on the zero layer. You can activate
Alternatively, to switch between the home screen and the zero layer, press and or reject these. In the future, when the conditions for the routine are met, you
hold the © button on the right-hand side of the steering wheel. will receive a notification with a timer. After confirmation or expiry of the timer,
the actions of the routine are executed. If you tap É in the notification,
When bar 2 is pulled down, the Control Centre appears.
the routine is cancelled. No actions are performed. However, the routine is still
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE CALLED UP IN THE CONTROL CENTRE: activated. If the conditions for the routine are met again, you will receive a
notification again.
R Notifications Centre
You can create your own routines or select predefined routines via the Rou-
R Quick vehicle access
tines app.

CONDITIONS FOR ROUTINES ARE, FOR EXAMPLE:

Personalised routines
R When should a routine start?
OVERVIEW OF PERSONALISED ROUTINES
- Weekdays at 8 a.m.
The MBUX multimedia system supports you with daily routine tasks and can
run them automatically. The system's learning function recognises your typical R Where should a routine start?
operating sequences and suggests them as a routine in recurring situations. - Start at home, start at work, tunnel passage
R At what temperature should a routine start?
When the system recognises a routine, it is proposed to you on the zero layer
for activation. - From 0 °C
R At which event should a routine start?
Routines are actions that run automatically under certain conditions. An exam‐ - Incoming or outgoing call
ple of a routine: whenever you drive to work in the morning (condition), the
- Strong sunlight
MBUX multimedia system should set a certain massage programme (action).
Routines can also perform different actions.
YOU CAN SELECT THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS, FOR EXAMPLE, FROM CATE‐
ROUTINES ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU VIA THREE OPTIONS: GORIES:
R The MBUX multimedia system learns and suggests routines. R Comfort
R You create your own routines. - Selecting a massage programme

565

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

- Setting the seat heating # To reject routine this time: tap É.

- Selecting an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme If the conditions for the routine are met, the routine will be offered again
R Climate control in the future.
- Setting temperature (front, rear) CREATING YOUR OWN ROUTINES
- Activating or deactivating the AC function Multimedia system:
- Adjusting the air vents 4 © 5 Routines 5 Create routines
R Entertainment and navigation CONFIGURING CONDITIONS
- Selecting a radio station # Select W.
- Selecting a media source
# Select the condition, e.g. Weekdays.
- Switching off navigation announcements
# Select further conditions if required.
ACTIVATING AND STARTING SUGGESTED ROUTINES
CONFIGURING ACTIONS
ACTIVATING ROUTINES
When a new routine is detected, it is suggested for automation on the zero
# Select W.
layer. # Select the category, e.g. Comfort.
# Select Yes. # Select the action, e.g. Classic Massage.
In the future, when the conditions for the routine are met, a notification
will be displayed to prepare you to execute the routine. # If required, select further actions also from other categories.

or # Select Next.

# To reject the routine this time: select Decide later. # Select a symbol and enter a name, e.g. My first routine.
You can find the routine in the Routines app and can activate or delete it # Select Add routine.
there at any time.
The routine appears in the overview. When the conditions for the routine
STARTING A ROUTINE are met, a notification is displayed. The routine can be started.
A notification is displayed with a timer. When the timer has expired, the
routine starts automatically.
% You can edit a created routine at any time.
# To start the routine immediately: tap the notification text.

566

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

SELECTING PREDEFINED ROUTINES 8 To switch off the sound: press

Multimedia system: 7 ß Calls up telephone favourites
4 © 5 Routines 5 Templates 8 £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
# Activate the desired routine.
When the conditions for the routine are met, a notification is displayed. % To operate Touch Control 2 in the most effective way, use the
The routine can be started. tip of your thumb if possible.

% Templates can be edited like your own routines. You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of
Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, e.g.:

To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press

Touch Control
#

on Touch Control 2.
OPERATING TOUCH CONTROL (MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM) # To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

SETTING THE SENSITIVITY FOR TOUCH CONTROL
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
5 Touch Control sensitivity
# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
1 © Shows zero layer/home screen
SETTING ACOUSTIC OPERATIONAL FEEDBACK FOR ALL CONTROL ELE‐
2 Touch Control MENTS
=9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) Multimedia system:
a Press (confirm) 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Control elements
3 G Returns to the previous display 5 Acoustic feedback
4 6 Makes or accepts a call The function is supported by the selection in a list.
5 ~ Rejects or ends a call
6 To increase volume: swipe upwards
To reduce volume: swipe down

567

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

# Set Off, Unleaded or Loud. TOUCHING, HOLDING AND MOVING

If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when selecting # To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any
control elements or when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end direction.
of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.
# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the
finger to the left or right.
Touchscreen TOUCHING AND HOLDING
# To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold
OPERATING THE TOUCHSCREEN
until a message is shown.
TAPPING
# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
# To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen
and hold until the Options menu appears.
# To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.

# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers. Overview of the fingerprint sensor
# To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.
SINGLE-FINGER SWIPE
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

TWO-FINGER SWIPE
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two

fingers together or apart.

# To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers. Fingerprint sensor 1 allows you to conveniently access protected MBUX
THREE-FINGER SWIPE multimedia system functions and services. Compared to protection provided
# To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an applica‐ by the Mercedes me PIN, the entry of a four-digit number is not required to
tion. activate services and functions with personal content.

The fingerprint sensor must be set up before use (/ page 571).

568

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

If equipped with a front passenger display, one fingerprint can be scanned in

for the driver's seat and one for the front passenger seat. These fingerprints
User profiles
are then assigned to the respective seat. They can be used for authentication NOTES ON USER PROFILES
or to activate your own user profile on the assigned display.

& WARNING
% The fingerprint sensor stores only a data model and no image of Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat
the fingerprint. The data model is only processed in the vehicle after calling up a driver profile
and is not transmitted from the vehicle. Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat
to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occu‐
pants could be injured in the process.

# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being

adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body
parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the

adjustment process by:

# a) Tapping the warning message on the central display.

or

# b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat

adjustment switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped.

The electrically adjustable driver's seat is equipped with an automatic revers‐

ing function.

If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the
driver's profile.

569

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

OVERVIEW OF USER PROFILES User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by
different levels of security (/ page 571).
REQUIREMENTS FOR USE
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the
R You have a Mercedes me PIN. vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are used.
R You have agreed to the terms of use.
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. % The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated
from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels
cannot be turned off.
% If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile
has been selected, the data described in the following section
will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard % WHEN A USER PROFILE IS ACTIVATED, THE FOLLOWING
settings can be changed by all vehicle users. PERSONALISED COMFORT SYSTEMS, FOR EXAMPLE, CAN BE
ADJUSTED OR THEIR SETTINGS LOADED:
User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a
R Seat
person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other
users. R Ambient light
R Outside mirrors
% Some settings apply to the entire vehicle and are displayed in
R Roller blinds
all user profiles, e.g. ambient lighting and the current navigation R Air conditioning settings
settings. These are assigned to the driver's profile, but can also R Head-up display
be changed by the other vehicle occupants in their user profile.

If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat
You can individualise a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant position will not be adjusted.
or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me
PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes
USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT
me Portal.
DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT YOU CAN, AS A USER, SAVE
THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:
% If the user profile is downloaded while travelling, user profiles
are not set up using the set-up assistant. R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings
R Climate control

570

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

R Ambient light If more than one user profile is available, you will be directed to the user
R Radio (including station list) selection.
R Suggestions When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically
after user selection.

This function is an on-demand feature (/ page 109): if the vehicle key is

linked to the user profile, the user profile is pre-activated when unlocking % When the user has been added, they can be selected
the vehicle or approaching a vehicle with KEYLESS-GO. Light, mirror and seat (/ page 574).
adjustments are made during this process. To use a user profile or an applica‐
tion, the vehicle key also serves as a sensor input for authorisation. SELECTING USER OPTIONS
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Requirements:

ADDING A USER R A user is selected.

Requirements:
Multimedia system:
R The vehicle is stationary.
4 © 5 f 5 Settings

PROTECTING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS

Multimedia system:
If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user
4 © 5 f 5 Select user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, bio‐
# Select f Add user. metric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must
A QR code is loaded. be taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available
sensors into account.
# Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code
scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS ARE PRO‐
on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile TECTED, FOR EXAMPLE:
device.
R User selection and user profile settings
# Follow the steps in the Mercedes me App. R Biometric sensors
The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This The teaching-in of biometric sensors
automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. For teaching in and editing biometric recognition see the following sec‐
If only your user profile is available, it will be loaded automatically. tion.
R Suggestions

571

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

The data and determination of the most probable navigation destina‐

tions, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages. % Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific
basis.
R ENERGIZING COACH
The recorded health data and its evaluation.
R In-Car Calendar % Please note that authentication is necessary for several functions
The calendar. such as In-Car Calendar and cannot therefore be completely
R Parking service switched off.
The payment transactions.
R Mercedes me Store SETTING UP AND EDITING BIOMETRIC RECOGNITION
The purchase of services. The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recogni‐
tion has been set up, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authenti‐
R System activations of paid vehicle functions
cation on the multimedia system.

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES YOU WILL BE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICA‐

# Select Protect content.
TION OR RE-AUTHENTICATION USING A SENSOR OR THE MERCEDES ME # Select Fingerprint recognition.
PIN:

R When selecting a protected user profile % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.
R When calling up a function requiring special protection
R If biometric sensors provide insufficient or contradictory information SETTING UP FINGERPRINT RECOGNITION
R If the multimedia system no longer trusts a sensor # Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under
R If the seat belt buckle and the door are opened at the same seat and a the touchscreen (/ page 568).
function requiring special protection is called up
# Follow the system's instructions.
# Select Protect content. The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a mes‐
sage appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and
# Switch Access protection on or off. protected applications with your fingerprint.
DELETING BIOMETRIC DATA
% When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be # Tap on E behind Fingerprint recognition.
viewed from any seat and changes can be made.
# Select Yes.

572

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

CALLING UP THE SET-UP ASSISTANT # Select Change user name.

# Select Profile.
or
# Select Set-up assistant.
# Select Profile picture.
# Follow the directions from the set-up assistant. # Enter the user name or select a user image.
TEACHING IN THE KEY FOR PROFILE SELECTION # Select Finished.
# Select Protect content.

# Select Key recognition. % You can store your photo in the Mercedes me user account using
the app or in the portal. The photo will then be shown in the
# Have the key ready and follow the set-up assistant's prompts. vehicle. In the vehicle itself, you can select other sample images
The user profile is linked to the selected key. instead of the photo.
IF YOU OPEN THE VEHICLE WITH THE KEY, THE LIGHT, MIRROR AND SEAT
SETTINGS FOR YOUR USER PROFILE ARE PRE-ACTIVATED: DELETING A USER PROFILE
# Select Profile.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: on approach
R Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when unlocking the doors # Select Remove.

# Select Remove user profile.

The key you are currently using for unlocking is used.

The personalised settings of your user profile are loaded. % Your Mercedes me user account and your personal data will
remain within the Mercedes me ecosystem.
% The seat moves to the corresponding position before the driver's
door is opened (/ page 246). RESETTING THE USER PROFILE TO FACTORY SETTINGS
# Select Profile.

% The key is only stored for the driver and for one user profile. # Select Reset.

# Select Yes.
CHANGING A USER NAME OR PROFILE PHOTO
# Select Profile.

573

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

SYNCHRONISING USER PROFILES

% You are only resetting the user profile to the factory settings;
none of the other system settings in the vehicle are changed. Requirements:

R You have a Mercedes me user account.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: R The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account.

SELECTING A USER
R A user is selected.
Multimedia system:
4© 5f Multimedia system:
4 © 5 f 5 Settings 5 Profile synchronisation
% When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the # Activate Synchronise automatically.
steering wheel can be set. When the vehicle is switched on or off, the data stored in the vehicle
YOU CAN CANCEL THE SETTING PROCESS WITH THE FOL‐ is automatically synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts. This
LOWING ACTIONS: synchronisation is done for all user profiles and is not profile-specific.

R Press Tap here to cancel. message on the central display. or

R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.
# Select Synchronise now.
After selecting this option, the data stored in the vehicle is synchronised
# Select Select user. with the Mercedes me user accounts.
# Select a user.
% Not all user profile functions are available during synchronisa‐
# When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a tion.
taught-in biometric characteristic.
The user profile is loaded and activated.
% IF THE PERSONALISATION SERVICE IN THE VEHICLE IS
% If you select Continue without selecting user, no specific settings DEACTIVATED, ONLY THE FOLLOWING USER PROFILE MAS‐
for the user profile are loaded. TER DATA IS SYNCHRONISED:

R Profile name
R Profile image

574

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

R Mercedes me PIN The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are
at the top.

Notifications Centre
OVERVIEW OF THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE
THE FOLLOWING COMMUNICATIONS ARE COLLECTED IN THE NOTIFICA‐
TIONS CENTRE:

R Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from the multi‐

media system.
R Communications which are received through the use of services.

THE FOLLOWING NOTIFICATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE FOR YOU: Example of a message
1 Calls up the Notifications Centre
R Navigable destinations and routes
2 Symbol for a pinned notification
R Messages (text messages)
3 Time message received
R Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from the In-Car Calendar
4 Calls up the settings
This function is not available in all countries.
5 Notification
R System information, e.g. Important software update available. Confirm to
6 Description of the notification and the issuing service
start the update.
7 Symbol for notifications
R Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be sub‐
8 Date of the notification received
scribed to or emergency reports (e.g. tornado)
Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions are availa‐
ble. If available these are shown as symbols.
The Notifications Centre is in the Control Centre.
EXAMPLES OF ACTIONS INCLUDE:
Depending on the style set, newly received notifications are shown using a
coloured dot. R Reading aloud
Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. If you take no R Placing a call
action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre. R Replying

575

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

R Calling up a web page R Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre.
R Navigation
# Up to two actions available: select the action.
Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, # More than two actions available: select q.
it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly upon receipt of the
notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time. # Select the action.
You can pin a notification so that this is not deleted automatically after a The notification is still available.
certain time. The notification is then denoted by symbol 2. # Close the actions with r.
CALLING UP NOTIFICATIONS EDITING NOTIFICATIONS
OPENING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE # Call up the Notifications Centre (/ page 576).
# In the zero layer pull down bar 3 in the centre of the status line CONFIGURING SETTINGS
(/ page 561). # Select Z Settings .
or # Select the service.
# In the home screen pull down bar 4 in the centre of the status line # Switch the options on or off.
(/ page 564). THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE
The Control Centre opens. SERVICE:
# Select 3 in the Control Center.
R Allow notifications
SELECTING A NOTIFICATION
R Display in notification centre
# If several messages are available swipe up or down.
R Show notifications
# Select an action. R Switching Acoustic signals on or off
CLOSING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE R External access
# Select G. The option allows an external service access to specific data, e.g.
the current vehicle position. The detailed, approved information is
SELECTING ACTIONS FOR A NOTIFICATION
shown with Õ.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

R Select the action directly after a notification is received and shown.

576

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

If Allow notifications is switched off, the options cannot be selected with

the exception of External access.
PINNING A NOTIFICATION
# Drag a notification to the right on the touchscreen.
A pin appears.

# Tap on the pin.

The notification is marked with a pin.
DELETING NOTIFICATIONS
# Drag a notification to the left on the touchscreen.
On the central display control panel
or
# To switch off: press button 1.
# Select E. The current audio source is muted.
# Select Yes.
The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the central display.
All messages are deleted.
If you are listening to a radio station, for example, and switch off the
sound then all media sources will be muted.
Switching the sound for the MBUX multimedia Traffic and navigation announcements can still be heard in this case. The
MBUX Voice Assistant and telephony are also not affected.
system on or off SWITCHING ON
# Press button 1 again.

or

# Set the volume.

or

On the steering wheel # The media source changes.

577

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

Setting the volume of the MBUX multimedia USING THE CONTROL, THE VOLUME IS ADJUSTED FOR THE FOLLOWING
GROUPS:
system
R Entertainment
SETTING WITH THE BUTTON R Ringtone
R Calls, for example phone calls
R Voice output, for example MBUX Voice Assistant
R Navigation announcements

% If you set the volume of the voice output to "0", for example,
a minimum volume is automatically set when the MBUX Voice
On the steering wheel Assistant is next called up. The entertainment volume is auto‐
matically adjusted after the multimedia system is restarted.

SETTING IN THE MENU

# Press and hold the © button on the right of the steering wheel.

or

# Press and hold © on the touchscreen.

The home screen appears.
# Select Settings.

# Select System.
On the central display control panel
# Select Audio.
# Press ± or q 1.
# Select a volume setting.
or

# Swipe across button 1.

The volume of the current audio source in the foreground is set.

578

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

# Briefly press on a character.

% The volume can be set for all groups except the entertainment
The character is entered in input line 1.
volume.
# Resume character input.
# Set the volume.
THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN THE ASSISTANCE % The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the
MENU: language set and the character level.

R Switching the navigation announcements on or off during a phone call.

ENTERING ALTERNATIVE CHARACTERS
R Reducing the entertainment volume while a navigation announcement is
being issued. # Press and hold on a character.

# Select the character.

Entering characters ENDING CHARACTER INPUT
# Tap on 7 and hide the keyboard.
USING THE CHARACTER INPUT FUNCTION
You can enter characters using Touch Control or the touchscreen. Character SETTING THE KEYBOARD FOR CHARACTER ENTRY
input can be started with a control element and resumed with another. Requirements:
# When the keypad is shown, enter the characters by swiping and pressing R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.
on the Touch Control or by tapping on the touchscreen.

Examples for character entry include the entry of a navigation destination or a Multimedia system:
message. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Keyboard
ENTERING CHARACTERS ON THE TOUCHSCREEN SETTING THE KEYBOARD LANGUAGE
Requirements: # Select Keyboard languages.

R An online connection is required for some functions. # Select one or more keyboard languages.
DELETING THE USER DICTIONARY
# Example: call up the navigation and enter a destination address The user dictionary learns from your inputs and offers suggestions during
(/ page 45). character input. You can reset the user dictionary.

579

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

# Select Reset my dictionary.

# Select Yes.

580

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system MBUX Interior Assistant

MBUX Interior Assistant

Notes on lasers and laser classification Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
The MBUX Interior Assistant detects the front vehicle occupants via 3D laser
& WARNING cameras in the overhead control panel. The Assistant interprets natural hand,
Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation head and body movements contextually or upon explicit request from the
This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is driver or front passenger. The Assistant can thus automatically trigger vehicle
opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina. interior functions and assist appropriately to the situation.

# Do not open the housing. The Assistant recognises driver and front passenger interactions.

# Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a THE APPLICATIONS ARE AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDI‐
qualified specialist workshop. TIONS:

R The MBUX Interior Assistant is activated (/ page 584).

This device is a class 1 laser product in accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014 R The MBUX multimedia system is activated.
and DIN EN 60825-1:2014.

% The camera records image data for the applications, for example
body, head and hand detection.
The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No
image data is saved in the process. The data is processed in the
vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.
When you start the vehicle, the MBUX Interior Assistant is activa‐
ted automatically. You can switch the Interior Assistant on or off
Cameras 1 are located in the overhead control panel.
(/ page 584).

581

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system MBUX Interior Assistant

THE ASSISTANT SUPPORTS VEHICLE AND INFOTAINMENT FUNCTIONS AT THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOW‐
THREE INTERACTION LEVELS: ING SITUATIONS:

R INTELLIGENT R The camera in the overhead control panel may heat up due to operating
The Assistant recognises vehicle occupants and objects automatically conditions. As a result the camera may switch off temporarily, partic‐
and activates functions. ularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside tempera‐
tures.
R REACTIVE
Do not touch or cover the camera. Wait until the camera has cooled
The Assistant recognises the natural body language of a vehicle occu‐
down and is available again.
pant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation.
The Interior assistant unavailable. Notification to follow. message appears.
R CONTACTLESS
You receive a message when the camera is available again.
The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand move‐
ment. R The camera is covered, dirty, misted up or scratched.
Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera
cover.
THE ASSISTANT OFFERS FUNCTIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING:
The Currently unavailable, see Owner's Manual. message appears.
R SAFETY Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth.
The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint sys‐ Do not use microfibre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.
tems. R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing being worn (gloves, hat, scarf,
R COMFORT colour of clothing) or objects carried on a person, for example a watch
The Assistant enhances comfort by automating functions inside the vehi‐ with a large display, can affect the camera view. Or the detection range
cle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle. of the camera is restricted.
R INFOTAINMENT No message appears.
The Assistant facilitates operation of the Infotainment functions. Keep the camera's field of vision clear.
Objects in the detection range of the camera can restrict the camera
SYSTEM LIMITS, DISPLAY MESSAGES AND NOTES FOR RECTIFICATION view. Please make sure that no objects hang on the inside rearview
mirror, for example.
% System limits that only apply to one application are described in R The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty.
the corresponding section. The Interior assistant is unavailable. Please contact a Mercedes-Benz work-
shop. message appears.
The fault messages are shown on the central display. Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

582

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system MBUX Interior Assistant

THE THREE TYPES OF INTERACTION:

Type of interaction Description and example of application

INTELLIGENT The Assistant detects the presence of vehicle occupants and objects.
Depending on the situation, functions are carried out automatically.
Example of application: prompt about fastening the child seat (safety)

REACTIVE The natural body language of a vehicle occupant, e.g. a hand or head movement, is recognised and triggers a function implicitly.
Example of application: switching the search light on or off (comfort)

CONTACTLESS The vehicle occupant triggers a function by actively demanding this with a hand movement.

Note on securing the child seat with the belt Switching the reading light on or off (COM‐
(SAFETY/intelligent) FORT/contactless)
The MBUX Interior Assistant detects child restraint systems on the front Requirements:
passenger seat. If a child restraint system is not fastened, e.g. a rearward-
facing child seat, a message appears on the central display. R The driver's and front passenger's hand movement takes place under the
inside rearview mirror.
The function assists you in making sure that a child restraint system is secured
with the seat belt on the front passenger seat.
A brief movement of the hand up and down, switches the reading light on or
off.
% For further information on securing a child restraint system with
the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 177).

% The MBUX Interior Assistant cannot check whether the child is

correctly restrained in the child restraint system.

Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger

583

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system MBUX Interior Assistant

# Move your hand up and down under the inside rearview mirror.
Automatic preselection of the outside mirrors
The reading light is switched on or off.
(COMFORT/reactive)
% Further information on switching the reading lamps on and off Until now, to set the outside mirrors the desired mirror had to be selected
(/ page 294). using a preselection button in the driver's door.

With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automati‐
cally by the natural movement of your head to the left or right. When the hand
Switching the search light on or off (COM‐ touches the button for adjusting the outside mirror, the LED under the button
FORT/reactive) of the preselected mirror side lights up.

Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror.
REQUIREMENTS:

R The function is available in the vehicle when it is dark. % Preselection of the outside mirrors using buttons is still pos‐
R The front passenger seat is not occupied or a child is sitting in a child sible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors
restraint system. (/ page 299).
R The hand movement is made by the driver in the interaction area above
the front passenger seat.
% This function is not supported if the MBUX Interior Assistant is
not available.
The function enhances the comfort in the vehicle interior.

Stretching out a hand over the front passenger seat switches a search light on
automatically for the driver when it is dark. Pulling the hand back switches the
search light off again.
Selecting settings for the MBUX Interior
Assistant
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Intelligent assistants

SWITCHING THE MBUX INTERIOR ASSISTANT ON OR OFF

# Activate D or deactivate E the Assistant.
If the Assistant is activated, full functionality is used.
Interaction area for activation of the search light

584

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

System settings

Display # Select a country and, if required, a time zone.

The time zone set is displayed after Time zone.
CONFIGURING DISPLAY SETTINGS
Multimedia system: or
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display
# Select the Automatic time zone entry from the country list.
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS The time zone will be set automatically according to the vehicle location.
# Select Display brightness.

# Vehicles with a driver display and central display: adjust the display % The Automatic time zone option is available for vehicles with sat‐
brightness of the driver display or central display. ellite reception.

SWITCHING THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY ON/OFF

# Switch the head-up display on D or off E. SETTING THE TIME AND DATE FORMAT
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date 5 Set format
Time and date # Select a time and date format.

SETTING THE TIME ZONE SETTING THE TIME AND DATE MANUALLY
Multimedia system: Requirements:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date
R The vehicle does not have satellite reception.
# Select Time zone.
The list of countries is displayed.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date
% If there are several time zones available in a country, these will
be shown after the country is selected. SETTING THE TIME
# Select Set time.

585

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

# Set a time. R At least one digital Mercedes-Benz service is activated for the vehicle,
which customers and/or third parties can use to display the vehicle
# Press OK to confirm. position via the respective user accesses.
SETTING THE DATE
# Select Set date. With this setting, you decide whether the vehicle position will be transmitted
in order to show it to users who have access to the digital Mercedes-Benz
# Select a date. services for this vehicle.
# Press OK to confirm.
% The function is country-dependent. For more information, con‐
sult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
% On vehicles with satellite reception, the time and date settings
are determined automatically based on the vehicle location and
cannot be set manually. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection
ADJUSTING THE TIME # Activate or deactivate the Transmit veh. position function.
# Select Adjust time.
% Alternatively, you can also switch the function on or off in the
# Set a value.
status line via Ô.
# Press OK to confirm.

% The function is only available in vehicles with satellite reception. Setting permissions
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 Permissions
Vehicle position
In the Permissions menu, you can set access authorisations for various data
SWITCHING TRANSMISSION OF THE VEHICLE POSITION ON OR OFF points (such as a microphone, camera) used in an application. You can change
permissions that have already been granted here. You can set permissions
Requirements:
either for individual data points or for certain applications or websites.
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me ID. # Select Requests or Apps/websites.

# Make the required settings for the permissions.

586

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

Bluetooth® Wi-Fi
INFORMATION ABOUT BLUETOOTH® WI-FI CONNECTION OVERVIEW
Bluetooth® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transfer up You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the Internet or to external network
to approximately 10 m. devices.

YOU CAN USE BLUETOOTH® TO CONNECT YOUR MOBILE PHONE TO THE % The availability of the function is dependent on the country.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AND USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAM‐
PLE:
WITH REGARD TO THE WI-FI CONNECTION, YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN:
R Hands-free system with access to the following options:
- Contacts (/ page 658) R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot (/ page 588)

- Call lists (/ page 660) The multimedia system in the vehicle serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for
mobile communication devices such as a smartphone or tablet PC.
- Text messages (/ page 661)
R Internet connection (/ page 688)
R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)
(/ page 690)
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the
Inc. vehicle's multimedia system.

SWITCHING WI-FI ON OR OFF

% Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not available in all coun‐
Multimedia system:
tries.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
# Select Wi-Fi.
ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BLUETOOTH®
Multimedia system: The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with
# Switch Bluetooth on or off. external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices.

When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connec‐

tion.

587

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

% Availability of the function is dependent on the respective coun‐ % Some functions may first need to be activated on the device
try. being connected. More detailed information can be found in the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AS A WI-FI HOTSPOT
Requirements: % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not
available in all countries.
R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of con‐
nection described.
The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. Multimedia system:
The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
device to be connected. The type of connection must be selected on the # Select MBUX hotspot.
multimedia system and on the device to be connected.
# Select one of the following connection options.
CONNECTING USING A QR CODE
% The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being
device is used for the data connection. connected.
Data volume for the vehicle: depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment, you can obtain an Entertainment Package via the Mercedes Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner
me Store. In order to use the data package included, you must (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
conclude your own contract with a mobile phone network pro‐
vider via the Mercedes me App. This can be terminated at any # Scan the QR code shown.
time and incurs no costs. Without this contract it is not possible The WLAN connection is established.
to use the services included in the previously acquired Entertain‐
CONNECTING USING A SECURITY KEY
ment Package. The availability of this option is dependent on the
country.
# Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is dis‐
If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, played with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone # Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the
network provider for a fee. The availability of this option is
device to be connected.
dependent on the country.
# Confirm the entry.

588

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

GENERATING A NEW SECURITY KEY

Setting the distance unit
# Select the Generate new security key option in the MBUX hotspot menu.
Multimedia system:
# Confirm the prompt with Yes.
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Displays and appearance
A new security key is generated.

A connection will be established with the newly created security key. % This function is not available in all countries.

% When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi con‐ # Select a unit for the distance.
nections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are
re-established, enter the new security key. # Activate Additional speedometer for an additional display in the driver
display.

System language Activating/deactivating system PIN protection

NOTES ON THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE Multimedia system:
This function allows you to determine the language for the menus and naviga‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 PIN protection
tion announcements. The selected language affects the characters available
for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a SETTING THE SYSTEM PIN
language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. # Select Set PIN.

SETTING THE LANGUAGE # Enter a four-digit system PIN.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language
# Enter the four-digit system PIN again.
If both system PINs match, then the system PIN protection is active.
SETTING THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE
A list of the available system languages is shown. CHANGING THE SYSTEM PIN
# Select Change settings.
# Select a language.
The system language is switched to the selected language.
# Enter the current system PIN.

# Select Change PIN.

# Set a new system PIN.

589

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

SWITCHING SYSTEM PIN PROTECTION FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES ON OR Entertainment

OFF Suggestions are offered for the currently played media source. Sugges‐
# Select Protect software updates. tions are also made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify, TuneIn Radio
and streaming services, and for categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood.
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Climate control
The suggestions for quick temperature adjustment in the vehicle are
Configuring suggestions displayed.
Vehicle
Multimedia system: In-Car Calendar
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Suggestions
The suggestions for the calendar are displayed in the zero layer.
# Activate or deactivate Learning & suggestions. Online voice services
If the user profile is active and the function is switched on, personalised The suggestions are made available online based on your voice input
suggestions can be derived for activated applications. and are offered on the zero layer.
# Select Z.
% The suggestions offered depend on the equipment.
# Switch the options on or off individually.
If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, per‐
sonalised suggestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to
you. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone num‐ Deleting collected suggestions
bers dialled as well as suggestions based on your music preferences.
Multimedia system:
Navigation
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Suggestions
When Allow destination suggestions is switched on, the vehicle makes
# Select Î.
suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations.
If Commuter route is switched on, the navigation automatically detects # Select Yes.
that the vehicle is on a commuter route. The suggestions are reset.
Calls & messages
Suggestions are offered for numbers dialled and messages sent.
Comfort
The vehicle makes suggestions based on the use of your comfort func‐
tions, e.g. which massage programme should be started when.

590

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

Software update R Software updates without Mercedes me user account: the Allow software
updates option is activated in the Software update menu.
INFORMATION ON SOFTWARE UPDATES R For software updates via the communication module: an Internet con‐
Software updates keep your vehicle and the related systems up-to-date and nection exists via the communication module (/ page 689).
prevent security flaws. R For software updates via WLAN: a connection to an external WLAN
hotspot exists (/ page 690).
Software updates are available for vehicle components such as control units,
convenience systems, locking and safety systems, driver assistance systems,
suspension and drive systems as well as for the MBUX multimedia system.
Software updates are available via the communication module or a Wi-Fi % Depending on the software update, this is started via the z
connection to an external hotspot. communication module, ö Wi-Fi or 4 external storage
medium.
The navigation maps are also updated via updates from external storage media
(e.g. USB flash drive).

Install available software updates regularly. Otherwise the security of your % Online software updates cannot be performed via external WLAN
MBUX multimedia system and individual vehicle components cannot be hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP.
ensured.

% If the WLAN hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once

% Software updates can be protected with a system PIN. Further
the connection is successfully established the browser will open
information about the system PIN (/ page 589).
in order to start the update. To start the download follow the
instructions in the browser.
Further information about software updates can be found at https://
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com.
Multimedia system:
CARRYING OUT SOFTWARE UPDATES 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Software update 5 Z
Requirements STARTING A MAP UPDATE FROM AN EXTERNAL STORAGE MEDIUM
# Connect the storage medium with the vehicle via a media interface.
FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE AND WI-
FI: A message about an available map update appears on the central dis‐
play.
R Your vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account (/ page 676).
# Select the message.

591

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

# Select Start. There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is
The map update is started. safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is
locked.
STARTING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE
If the Automatic online update option is active, available software updates are INSTALLING SOFTWARE UPDATES
downloaded and installed automatically. Activate the option in order to always Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As
keep your vehicle up-to-date and avoid security flaws. soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears in the
central display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system.
# Select Automatic online update.
The software update is downloaded and installed automatically. Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be
completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the
vehicle switched off. If this is necessary, a message appears on the central
If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates display after the vehicle is switched off.
once. The updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time.
# Follow the instructions on the central display.
# Select an update from the list of available updates.

# Start the update. For some software updates, you can set a time for installation. The installation
The software update is downloaded and installed automatically. is carried out automatically at the scheduled time. You do not need to be in
the vehicle during installation. Note that the planned installation is cancelled
STARTING A SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA WI-FI as soon as the vehicle door is opened.
Some software updates require an additional connection to a WLAN hotspot.
The connection to an external hotspot can be established when the software If an installation is available where you can set the time, a message appears
update is started. on the central display after the vehicle is switched off.
# Select an update from the list of available updates. # Follow the instructions on the central display.
# Start the update. The vehicle cannot be used while these software updates are being installed.
Make sure that no persons or animals are in the path of your vehicle. Events
# Establish the connection to a WLAN hotspot. stored in the vehicle's control units can be overwritten.
The update is downloaded and installed automatically.
AVAILABILITY OF THE DRIVER AND CENTRAL DISPLAY
For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last instal‐ During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehi‐
lation step is reached, a message appears on the central display after the cle, driver display and central display. You may receive the following display
vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central messages when an installation is running:
display to complete the installation.

592

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐

tion)

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions
While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the revers‐
ing camera, are not available.
% The display message does not appear every time a software
update is installed. # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system
automatically attempts to restore the previous version.
Requirements:
If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown R The vehicle is switched on.
above appears every time the vehicle is started.
R Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary.
FAILURE OF THE DRIVER DISPLAY:
If the driver display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognise Multimedia system:
limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display,
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset
for example. This may impair the operating safety of the vehicle. Park the
vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop WHEN RESETTING THE SYSTEM, PERSONAL DATA AND SETTINGS ARE
(/ page 911). DELETED, FOR EXAMPLE:

Further information about software updates can be found at https:// R Connected devices
me.secure.mercedes-benz.com R Individual user profiles
R Biometric data
FAILURE OF THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:
If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown
continuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, PARKTRONIC
or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a % The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver
specialist workshop as soon as possible. assistance systems is deleted.

593

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system System settings

# Select Reset.
A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.

# Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia
system is restarted after the system reset.

Due to data protection and the function of individual driving and driving safety
systems, it is necessary to carry out a complete system reset before selling
or transferring the vehicle to third parties or after using a rental vehicle. Make
sure that all relevant data is deleted after the system reset.

594

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

AMG TRACK PACE

Function of AMG TRACK PACE # At the desired starting point, select Ì Start recording.
The track recording starts at this point.

% This function is a Digital Extra (/ page 109).

During track recording, sectors can be set to subdivide the track.

With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be # Select ö Set sector.
analysed and optimised. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hock‐
enheimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored # To finish track recording, select É Stop recording or cross the starting
for every track. These can be analysed and compared to other lap times to line again.
achieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking
# Confirm the prompt with Yes.
procedures can be measured and stored.
# Select the weather.
Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-off routes outside the public
traffic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and envi‐
ronmental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your
vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application. % The temperature is determined automatically.

Enter a name.
Setting Track Race
#

# Press a to confirm.
Multimedia system:
The track is saved under the name you entered.
4 TRACK PACE 5 Track Race
SEARCHING BY TRACK NAME
RECORDING A NEW TRACK # Select ª Search .
# Select Ü New track .
# Enter the track name.
Tracks with the searched name are displayed.

595

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

MEASURING THE TIME ON THE SAVED TRACK R Lap overview

# ß Select All tracks.
# Select ï Start timing .
# Select the desired track.
# Select à.
# Select u.
# Drag the desired display from the grid to the left or right edge of the
# If you are already at the starting line, select Start timing.
central display.
or The displays are shown during Track Race.

# Select Navigate to to be navigated to the starting line. Selecting ¨ on the active display deactivates it.
Timekeeping begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed.
DISPLAYING THE ANALYSIS
# ß Select All tracks.
% Selecting ¨ enables you to switch to the AR view of the
An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
track. Selecting ò also allows you to switch to the telemetrics
display. # Select a track.

# Select a session.
# To end the timekeeping, select ð End timekeeping.
THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE DISPLAYED:
# Confirm the prompt with OK.
R lap and sector times
# Select the weather. R average and maximum permissible speed
R driver
# Select Yes to save the times recorded for this track.
R Vehicle
FADING IN DISPLAYS DURING TRACK RACE
R Date
THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS CAN BE SUPERIMPOSED:
R Weather
R Tyre temperature
# Select Add recording to use another session for comparison.
R Miniature map # Select % in order to return to the overview.
R Sector overview
R Engine data
# Select Diagram.

R G-force display

596

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

# Set the desired parameters. EXPORTING TRACKS (USB)

The analysis is displayed. # Select ß Tracks .
An overview of all saved tracks appears.

# Select the desired track.

# Select options u of the desired track.

# Select Export track to….

The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected
to the vehicle.
1 Lap overview
2 Parameter overview EDITING TRACKS AND RECORDINGS
3 Editing parameters # Select ß Tracks .
4 Adding a new parameter
# Select the desired track.
5 Deleting parameters # Select options u of the desired track.

# Select Rename or Delete.

% THE FOLLOWING VALUES CAN BE SET FOR PARAMETERS,
FOR EXAMPLE: or
R Speed
# Select a track.
R longitudinal/lateral acceleration
R Steering angle # Highlight the desired recording.
R Engine speed # Select u options.
R engine oil/tyre temperature
# Select Exporting to… or Delete.
Based on the analysis, you can check and optimise driving characteristics for
any position on the track.

597

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

Setting Drag Race # Start off and begin the measurement.

Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the
Multimedia system: target distance or a maximum of one mile has been travelled.
4 TRACK PACE 5 Drag Race
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.
MEASURING ACCELERATION
MEASURING BRAKING
# Select Z Drag race options.
# Z Drag Race options
# Select Acceleration.
# Select Braking.
# Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
# Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been
reached. # Start off and begin the measurement.
# Set a target speed. # Brake to a stop.
Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been Measurement is incremental, in steps of 10 km/h to a stop. If the braking
reached. procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, measurement starts as
soon as 150 km/h has been reached.
# Start off and begin the measurement.
Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. STORING AND CALLING UP MEASURED VALUES
If measurement is completed or cancelled, a prompt appears asking whether
Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure. the measurement should be saved.

QUARTER MILE RACE # Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

# Select Z Drag race options. CALLING UP SAVED MEASUREMENTS
# Select Quarter-mile.
# ± Select History.

# Set a target distance.

# Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking.
# Select a measurement.
Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been
reached. The desired measurement is displayed in detail.

or

# Delete a measurement.

598

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

Calling up the telemetry display Multimedia system:

4 TRACK PACE 5 Z
Multimedia system:
CONNECTING A MOBILE DEVICE VIA THE TRACK PACE APP
4 TRACK PACE 5 Telemetry The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronise
The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a them with stored circuits.
diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected that are to be shown in the
display.
# Select TRACK PACE App.

FOR EXAMPLE: # Select Authorise new device.

R Engine speed # Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected.
R wheel angle # Select Continue and confirm the authorisation prompt.
R Speed A four-digit code is shown on the central display.
R Steering angle
# Enter the code on the smartphone.
# Set the desired parameters. The device is authorised.
DE-AUTHORISING THE MOBILE DEVICE
# Set the time. # Select TRACK PACE App.
The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the time set.
# Select a device.

Configuring AMG TRACK PACE # Confirm the prompt with Yes.

The device is de-authorised.
Requirements:
SETTING THE TRACK PACE READOUT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY AND
To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app: DRIVER DISPLAY
# Select IC and HUD contents.
R The TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile device.
R The mobile device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi # Activate or deactivate the desired contents.
(/ page 587). The content on the head-up display and driver display is adjusted.

599

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

SETTING THE DASHCAM

% Further information on the display of the head-up display If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE.
(/ page 537).
# Select Dashcam.

# Select Track Race or Drag Race and activate Activate recording.

% Further information on the driver display (/ page 520).
# You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under
SETTING ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK Video overlay contents.
# Select Acoustic feedback.
A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.

# Select a setting.
SHOWING STATISTICS
# Select TRACK PACE statistics.
Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.
THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE DISPLAYED:

R Driving time
R Distance driven
R Tracks recorded
R Track races recorded
R Laps recorded
R Drag races recorded
R Maximum speed
ACTIVATING THE AMBIENT LIGHTING
If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on
the delta time.

# Select Ambient light.

# Activate or deactivate the function.

600

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Plug-in hybrid settings

Plug-in hybrid settings

Configuring the charging settings ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING LOCATION-BASED CHARGING

# Select Charge at home or Charge at work.
Multimedia system:
# Activate or deactivate Select based on location.
4 © 5 Hybrid 5 Charging

SETTING THE CHARGING PROGRAM When the function is activated, the vehicle's current position is saved as one
of the selected options. When arriving at this address again, a brief prompt
# Select Home, Work or Standard.
appears as to whether the respective charging program should be selected.
OPENING THE SOCKET FLAP IN THE MMS
# Press Open socket flap to open the socket flap. ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING QUICK CHARGING (DC CHARGING)
# Activating or deactivating the Quick charge function.
# The charging process can be interrupted using Cancel charging. The
charging process is ended and the charging cable is unlocked. The Quick charge function increases the maximum possible charging power at
charging stations to up to 60 kW in order to charge the vehicle's high-voltage
battery faster. After the charging process is complete, the charging power
% Further notes on charging with alternating current: in the "Standard" charging programme is again limited to 20 kW in order to
(/ page 391). protect the high-voltage battery.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Quick charge function is not available for

% Further notes on charging with direct current: (/ page 397). Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME

UNLOCKING THE CHARGING CABLE (MODE 3 OR 4) The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control
When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maxi‐ and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the
mum state of charge is reached. time selected. The charging process is optimally timed for the next departure
time (up to 30% of the state of charge is charged immediately and may be
# Select Home or Work. followed by a charging break), when quick charging is deactivated. When quick
charging is activated, the charging process starts immediately, irrespective of
# Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
the next departure time.

601

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Plug-in hybrid settings

# Select Next departure time. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: you cannot set charging interruptions for Mercedes-
THE FOLLOWING CHARGING TIMES CAN BE SELECTED: AMG vehicles.

R individual charging times SETTING THE MAXIMUM STATE OF CHARGE

R a Week profile
# Select Maximum charge level.

SETTING AN INDIVIDUAL DEPARTURE TIME

# Set the desired percentage.
# Select Add new time and set the time. The high-voltage battery is charged up to the set percentage as a maxi‐
mum.
or

# Select ´ and adjust an existing departure time. % The percentage can be set in increments of 10 %.

SETTING REPEAT DAYS

# Select Add new time and set the time.
% As soon as the maximum state of charge is reached, a notifica‐
# Mark the relevant weekdays for which the departure time will apply and tion is shown on the central display that the charging process
confirm with a. is complete and the journey may be continued. The maximum
state of charge can be saved in the Home and Work charging
or programs. In the Standard charging programme, the setting is
automatically reset to a state of charge of 100 % after the vehicle
# Select ´ and edit existing repeat days. is switched on or off.
SETTING THE CHARGING INTERRUPTIONS (AC CHARGING)
Up to four interruptions in the charging process can be set during which the
vehicle is not charged, even if it is connected to a charging station. Overview of the energy flow display in the
# Select Charging interruptions. multimedia system
# Select Add new time and then set and save the times for the beginning The active components of the hybrid system are highlighted on the energy
and end of the interruption. flow display. The energy flow between the individual components is shown in
colour.
# Activate or deactivate the charging interruptions that have been set.
THE COMPONENTS DISPLAYED ARE:
Set charging interruptions can be edited with the ´ button or deleted with
the E button. R State of charge of the high-voltage battery

602

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Plug-in hybrid settings

R Combustion engine
R Energy flow
R High-voltage battery

THE ENERGY FLOW WILL BE SHOWN IN DIFFERENT COLOURS DEPENDING

ON THE OPERATING STATUS:

R White: constant energy flow

R Red: high energy flow (boost effect)
R Green: low-emission energy flow in the case of recuperation, electric
mode and charging the high-voltage battery

Calling up the energy flow display

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Info
# Select Energy flow.
The energy flow in the vehicle will be displayed.

Information on the status of the hybrid system and the current state of charge
of the high-voltage battery will be displayed in addition to the energy flow.

603

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy

Fit & Healthy

Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics In addition to the seat backrest and seat cushion, the lumbar region can be
activated for the function.
Requirements: # Activate or deactivate Including lumbar.

% These functions are available only for fully electric seats with a
memory function. ENERGIZING COMFORT
OVERVIEW OF ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMMES
Multimedia system: You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
# Select Seat kinetics. % Note that the available programmes and the associated functions
depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equip‐
ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back health by changing the seat posi‐
ment, fewer functions may be available.
tion during a journey. This involves repeatedly stressing and relieving the mus‐
cles and joints by means of minor movements of the cushion and backrest.
PROGRAMME OVERVIEW
STARTING SEAT KINETICS
# Select ; for the desired seat. R Refresh: Can have a refreshing effect with short, cool puffs of air. The
seat is ventilated, the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and
The programme will run for the set duration.
the programme is completed with appropriate sound. In addition, the
CONFIGURING SEAT KINETICS vibration massage in the cushions can loosen your muscles.
# Select Z for the desired seat. R Warmth: Can increase the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. Seat,
surface and steering wheel heater provide soothing warmth. The pro‐
# Select Backrest, Backrest & seat surface or Seat surface. gramme is completed with unobtrusive sound and warm colours.
# Select the desired duration for the selected seat. R Vitality: Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driving
situations. The activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants is carried
out with invigorating sound, activating light and a vitalising massage.
Vehicles with multicontour seats:

604

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy

R Joy: Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as STARTING THE ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMME
mental regeneration. This results from the activation of a massage pro‐
gramme, friendly sound and illumination with suitable colours. WARNING
&
R Well-being: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. This is achieved through Increased risk of accidents when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT
a relaxing massage programme, friendly light and calming sound. programmes Tips and Training
R Forest glade: Can have a calming and soothing effect on the vehicle occu‐ The Tips and Training ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes can distract
pants thanks to the acoustics of the forest. The ambience is supported you when driving.
by a suitable animation, colours and sound.
R Sea sounds: Can help calm the vehicle occupants. The acoustics of wave
# Only carry out exercises if the traffic situation permits.
sounds and seagulls in combination with other vehicle functions create a # When listening to the tips, make sure you are aware of the
relaxing seashore atmosphere. traffic around you at all times.
R Summer rain: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. The relaxing effect
of a rain shower can be experienced via acoustics and other vehicle
functions inside the vehicle.
& WARNING
R Power Nap: The programme consists of three phases.
Risk of entrapment when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro‐
- Falling asleep phase: here relaxing music is played. gramme Power Nap
- Sleeping phase: the active functions are deactivated or restricted With the Power Nap ENERGIZING COMFORT programme the following
as much as possible.
systems are moved automatically if required:
- Waking phase: here slightly stimulating music is played. Addition‐
ally, functions such as seat ventilation and a massage programme R Seats
are activated. R Side windows
R Golfing Focus: Contains spoken instructions to help you prepare for an R Sliding sunroof
upcoming golf game. R Roller sunblinds

Most programmes that have been started for one seat can also be transferred This can cause you or another vehicle occupant to be trapped.
simultaneously to another seat.
# Make sure that there is sufficient space behind the front seats.

# Make sure that no body parts are in the areas of movement.

605

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy

Requirements: STARTING A POWER NAP

# Select Power Nap.
R The vehicle is switched on.
# Select ; for the desired seat in order to start Power Nap.
FOR THE START OF POWER NAP:
WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STATIONARY, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS ARE CAR‐
R Only the power supply is on. RIED OUT WHEN POWER NAP IS STARTED:
R The doors are closed.
R The roller sunblinds are extended.
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
R The doors are locked.
R The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient for the use of
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
the auxiliary climate control.
R The seats are moved into the fully reclined position.
R The parking brake is applied.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Comfort 5 ENERGIZING COMFORT
# Select É to stop the programme.
STARTING AND STOPPING A PROGRAMME
# Select a programme.
ENERGIZING apps
# Select ; for the desired seat in order to start the programme.
FUNCTIONS OF THE ENERGIZING APP
# Select É to stop the programme.
FUNCTION OF THE ENERGIZING COACH
REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF THE ENERGIZING COACH
% If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no
longer met, a corresponding message appears. The active pro‐ R The ENERGIZING COACH service is activated in the Mercedes-Benz Portal
gramme is cancelled. or the Mercedes-Benz App.
R The Mercedes-Benz ENERGIZING app is installed on the mobile phone to
use the service.
% Further information on occupant safety in connection with the
anti-travel sickness programme (/ page 134)
With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the driving and driver situation.
Depending on the situation, it offers recommendations for the start of an
appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.

606

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy

THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMMES COULD BE SUGGESTED: REQUIREMENT FOR THE INTEGRATION OF THE SLEEP DATA:

R Vitality R The Garmin fitness tracker is synchronised with the Garmin account
As an activating programme in monotonous driving situations or for long before the beginning of the journey.
journey times, for example
Information on the Vitality programme; see (/ page 604).
% If ATTENTION ASSIST determines an excessive lack of attention,
R Joy
ENERGIZING COACH makes no further suggestions. Further infor‐
As a balancing programme in demanding driving situations mation about ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 427).
Information on the Joy programme; see (/ page 604).
R Refresh CALLING UP THE ENERGIZING COACH DISPLAY
As a refreshing programme when temperatures rise
Requirements:
Information on the Refresh programme; see (/ page 604).
R Warmth R The fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.
As a warming programme when temperatures drop R Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account
in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app.
Information on the Warmth programme; see (/ page 604).
R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 654).
R You are logged in with your Mercedes me profile both in the vehicle and
By connecting a Garmin fitness tracker, for example the Garmin vívoactive®
in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app.
3, additional information can be entered into the evaluation for the recommen‐
dation of an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. The additional information
includes the stress level, that is calculated by the fitness tracker. The stress Multimedia system:
level is based primarily on the pulse rate. 4 © 5 Apps 5 ENERGIZING COACH

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INTEGRATION OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CALLING UP THE ENERGIZING COACH
VIA A GARMIN FITNESS TRACKER: # Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of your pulse for the last
30 minutes driving time are shown.
R Your fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account.
A corresponding fault message is shown if there is no mobile phone
R Your Garmin account is linked to your Mercedes-Benz user account.
connected or no pulse can be sent to the system for an extended period.

If you wear your Garmin fitness tracker at night also, the sleep data is included
in the evaluation of the ENERGIZING COACH.

607

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy

% Only pulse values in the range of 30 ‑ 140 (possibly 150) bpm are
shown on the central display. The pulse values have no medical
validity but are only informative in nature and are therefore also
not required to be accurate.

CONNECTING A NEW DEVICE

# Select Z.

# Select Device selection.

A list of connected mobile devices will be shown.

# Select the desired device from the list.

608

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Navigation and traffic

Switching navigation on R Select Previous dest..

R Search for Filling stations.
Multimedia system: R Search for Parking spaces.
4© R Select Other routes.
# Alternatively, press the © button on the steering wheel on the right R Enter a destination with ª.
(/ page 567).
R Make settings for View, Messages & tones and Route with Z.
The zero layer with the digital map is displayed.

Navigation overview
Calling up the navigation module in the
expanded view DIGITAL MAP

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation

% Navigation means: tap on navigation module 1 on the zero layer

(/ page 609).

The navigation module is called up in the expanded view and shows the route 1 Navigation module (reduced view)
overview with additional functions. Route guidance active:
The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the
# Select one of the functions (/ page 621). zoomed-out view, e.g. the arrival time at the destination or a traffic delay
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE, FOR EXAMPLE: £ Ends the current route guidance
Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route
R Switch the traffic information display on or off.
(/ page 621)

609

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

2 Enters a destination Destination entry

3 Searches for a parking space
4 Sets map orientation Ä and map type NOTES ON DESTINATION ENTRY
5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
6 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and & WARNING
suggestions Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication
7 Navigation window shows the next driving manoeuvre in the reduced view equipment while the vehicle is in motion
when route guidance is active or an enlarged view with a detailed display If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle
of the upcoming driving manoeuvre when approaching a driving manoeu‐ when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
vre, e.g. a map section, 3D images or lane recommendations could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
When route guidance is active, tapping on the navigation window opens
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
the route monitor, which shows information for the entire route, e.g.
mits.
upcoming driving manoeuvres, destinations, motorway exits or rest areas
with points of interest # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
. Switches off navigation announcements attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
Ì Switches on navigation announcements ment with the vehicle stationary.
PRESSING 4 SEVERAL TIMES CHANGES THE MAP ORIENTATION IN THIS
ORDER: When operating the MBUX multimedia system, observe the legal regulations of
the country in which you are currently located.
R 2D and to the north
R 2D and in the direction of travel ENTERING A POI OR ADDRESS
R 3D and in the direction of travel Requirements:
R Map with complete route
R For the online search:
- There is an Internet connection.
% If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of - Mercedes me connect is available.
travel and 2D north orientation. - You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: accepted the terms of use.
- Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

610

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

- The service is available and has been activated. A Switches to digits and special characters
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
# Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order.
% If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using
the data of the digital map. The search results are displayed in a list.

Multimedia system:
% Online search results for POIs may contain additional informa‐
4© 5ª tion, for example opening times and ratings. The information is
provided by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all countries.

THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN 1:

R Town, street, house number or street, town

R Postcode
R POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants
R Town, POI name
R Contact name
R Junctions in the following entry format: "road A" and "road B"
Example: entering a POI or address
R Geo-coordinates (/ page 614)
1 Input line with current entry
2 Search result
3 Selects destination search, displays further destination searches with dou‐
# Hide the keyboard with a.
ble arrow # Select the destination in the list.
4 Deletes an entry
The following menu shows the selected destination with the address
5 Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search information and a corresponding map section.
6 Deletes the last character entered
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
7 Hides the keypad
8 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 548)
9 Sets the written language

611

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SELECTING A DESTINATION SUGGESTION

% You can save a destination as a favourite (/ page 632).
Requirements:

R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 590). SELECTING A POI
R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show Requirements:
destination suggestions.
R For use of personal POIs: a USB device is connected with the multime‐
dia system.
Multimedia system:
R Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx) have been saved in
4© 5ª
the PersonalPOI folder on the USB device.
# Select Suggestions and accept a destination suggestion.

or Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
# Select a destination suggestion directly on the Zero Layer (/ page 560). # Select POIs.
The route is calculated in the following menu.
# Select one of the displayed quick-access categories, e.g.
j.
% If Suggestions has been selected, a menu is available via Ä.
The menu offers settings for the suggestions and memory func‐ # Select the POI.
tions.
The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

or
% Managing destination suggestions (/ page 632).
# Select All categories or Personal POIs (see requirements).

SELECTING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS # Select the category.

Multimedia system:
4© 5ª # Select the POI.
The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
# Select Previous destinations.

# Select a destination.
The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

612

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SETTING A SEARCH FILTER AFTER SELECTING A POI CATEGORY # Use G to change back.
THE PRESET SEARCH POSITION DEPENDS ON THE STATUS OF THE ROUTE The new categories are shown after the destination entry is called up the
GUIDANCE: next time.

R If route guidance is not active, In the vicinity is searched.

% If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category
R If route guidance is active, Along the route is searched.
to be replaced.

# When the search results are displayed, select Filter.

CHANGING THE ORDER OF QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES
# Select the search position, e.g. In the vicinity. # In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access.

# If a route with intermediate destinations already exists and Near destina- # Tap on the arrows next to the selected category.
tion has been selected in the search filters, the destination is selected The arrows for the other categories are greyed out.
for the search.
# Drag the category up or down.
or
# Select ø.
# Select the desired travelling time to the point of interest. DELETING QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES
# Select Search results. # Select ß for the chosen category.
CONFIGURING CATEGORIES FOR QUICK ACCESS
THE CATEGORIES ARE DISPLAYED:
# Select Delete.

R As symbols after calling up the destination entry via ª

# Select ø.

R As a list after calling up All categories CHANGING CATEGORIES FOR PERSONAL POIS
# Select Personal POIs.
# In the POI menu, select All categories. # Press on a category as long as is necessary until a menu appears.
# Select f or ß for a category. # Select Change name and enter a name.
Tapping on f adds the category.
# Select Change icon and select a symbol.
Tapping on ß removes the category.
# Select Delete and confirm the prompt with Yes.

613

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SELECTING A CONTACT FOR DESTINATION ENTRY SELECTING A DESTINATION ON THE MAP

Multimedia system:
Requirements:
4©
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 654). # If necessary, move the map (/ page 638).
R The contacts from the mobile phone have been downloaded .
R The contact has a navigable address.
# Press and hold on the map.
R The address data can be located on the digital map. Available destinations are displayed.

or
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
# Briefly press on a POI symbol.
The POI is selected. If there are several POIs at this map position, a list
# Enter a contact in the entry line.
appears.
# Select the address. # Select the destination in the Selected objects list.
The following menu allows you to calculate the route. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.
SELECTING A DESTINATION FROM FAVOURITES
% Alternatively, after calling up the destination entry, you can enter Requirements:
the name of a contact in the search field.
R Destinations are saved as favourites.
ENTERING GEO-COORDINATES Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite
Multimedia system: (/ page 632).
4© 5ª
# Enter the geo-coordinates as latitude and longitude. Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
EXAMPLES OF INPUT FORMATS: # Select Favourites.
R 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes and seconds) # Select a favourite.
R 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees) The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

# Confirm the entry.

The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

614

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE ALREADY SET Multimedia system:
# Select Home or Work. 4© 5ª
The route is calculated in the following menu. The vehicle can receive destinations from services or apps. You will be
ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE NOT YET SET informed when a destination is received.
# Select Home or Work. # Select Received destinations.
The prompt No "Home" address available. Set address now? appears, for
example.
# Select a destination.
The route is calculated in the following menu.
# Select Yes.

# Search for or select the address. % You can save a received destination in the favourites
(/ page 632).
# Select Save.
DELETING FAVOURITES DELETING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS
# Select Ä for a favourite. # Select Ä for a destination.
# Select Delete.
# Select Delete or Delete all.
or
The destination or all destinations are deleted.
# Select Delete all.

# Confirm the prompt.

Route
When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for CALCULATING A ROUTE
example.
Requirements:
SELECTING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS
R To call up a website address:
Requirements:
- An active Internet connection is indicated in the status line on the
R There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations. central display with the Q symbol.
R A destination has been sent to the vehicle. - The www button is available.
- A website address is available for the destination selected.

615

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

CALLING UP THE DETAILED DISPLAY WITH DESTINATION ADDRESS

% This function is not available in all countries. # Pull the bar above the ¥ Let's go! symbol upwards.
Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content,
for example ratings and weather information, is shown.
% Using the web browser requires additional data volume
(/ page 689). # To share a destination: select Ç Share.
This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.

# To save a destination as a favourite: select ß Favourite and then an

option.

# To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select

www.

# To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.

Example: detailed display
SEARCHING FOR POIS IN THE VICINITY OF THE DESTINATION SHOWN
1 Calls up alternative routes # Select In the vicinity.
2 Adds the chosen destination to the existing destinations as the next inter‐ # Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal
mediate destination and recalculates the route
POI (/ page 612).
3 Calculates a new route to the chosen destination
4 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination ADDING AN INTERMEDIATE DESTINATION TO THE EXISTING ROUTE OR
STARTING A NEW ROUTE GUIDANCE
5 Detailed display with destination address, online content # Select ¦ Add.
After selection of 2 or 3, the route is recalculated. The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destina‐
tion. Route guidance begins.
# Select one of the options.
CALLING UP ALTERNATIVE ROUTES # There are already four intermediate destinations: confirm the prompt
with Yes and select an intermediate destinations in the route overview
# Select Routes.
(/ page 621), that should be overwritten with the new intermediate
# Select an alternative route. destination.
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE or
# Select ¥ Let's go!.

616

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Select Í Replace. Multimedia system:

The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route 4 © 5 Navigation
guidance begins.
PAYING FOR CHARGING ON A ROUTE WITH MERCEDES-BENZ CHARGE % OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
(PLUG-IN HYBRID)
R Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery
Requirements:
(/ page 381).
R The Mercedes-Benz Charge service is available and booked in the R Before selection of a charging station: the data for the
Mercedes-Benz Portal. charging stations is based on the online content available
R The Digital Extras "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of from the respective third-party provider.
charging stations" and "Mercedes-Benz Charge" are activated. R Observe the local information and conditions.
R To select a charging station: the Schedule charging stops option is
switched on in the multimedia system.
R For authentication at the charging station: after activation in the % With the Plug & Charge charging function from Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Portal, you have concluded a charging contract with your Charge, you can charge the vehicle at public Plug & Charge-
payment details with the respective contractual partners. compatible charging stations. The charging process starts imme‐
diately when the charging cable is plugged into the charging
R For authentication via app: the Mercedes-Benz App is installed on the
station. No further authentication is required. Communication
external device, e.g. tablet or smartphone.
between the vehicle and the charging station takes place directly
R For charging stations without remote access, you have purchased an via the charging cable.
RFID card for the contracting partner. This charging function is not available in all countries.

# To select a charging station: tap on a symbol on the map for a charging

% This function is not available in all countries.
station or on a group of symbols for several charging stations.

# If a group of symbols is selected, select the charging station from the

list.

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED (IF AVAILABLE):

R Name of the charging station operator

R Address of the charging station

617

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

R Plug with availability and information about charging power

% Remote access is not available for some charging stations. In
R Opening times
this case use your RFID card to activate the charging process (if
R Name of the charging station available).
R Travel time and distance of the charging station from the vehicle
R Authentication method # If required, enter the PIN for personalisation.
R Contact information of the charging station operator
R General costs and charging costs
# Confirm the action.
R Estimated charging costs and your available energy volumes, if available # If required, select the connector ID from the list shown.
R Display of available reviews and the ability to review with up to five stars The selected charging cable connector is unlocked.
R Availability prognosis
# Start the charging process.
R Information on green charging
The start of the charging process is shown.
Mercedes-Benz provides high-quality certificates of origin to ensure that
an equivalent amount of electricity from renewable sources is fed into # Select the Stop charging process display button in the app.
the grid for charging processes carried out via Mercedes me Charge.
The charging process is ended.
Payment is processed automatically.
# Calculate the route (/ page 615).
IF DATA FOR THIRD-PARTY PROVIDERS IS AVAILABLE, YOU WILL
RECEIVE THIS INFORMATION:

% If the function is available, the start/stop of the charging process R Overview of the charging process
can be selected. R Estimated cost

# To access a charging station remotely (start/stop): select a charging % There may be differences between the costs listed and the costs
station in the map menu of the app or the MBUX multimedia system. billed.
# Display the details using the widget (programme symbol).
SWITCHING LOW EMISSION ZONES FOR THE ROUTE ON OR OFF
# Select Start charging process.
Requirements:
The charging process starts. In addition, the payment agreement saved
with the third-party provider is authorised. R Mercedes-Benz Connect is available.

618

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

R You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is con‐ SELECTING A ROUTE TYPE
nected with the account. Multimedia system:
R The Digital Extra "Traffic restrictions" is available and activated in the 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route
Mercedes me Portal. The Digital Extra is free of charge after registration
USING TRAILER MODE AND ONLINE ROUTES
for the term offered.
The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time.

Multimedia system: Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 View available, you can select online routes.

# Activate Traffic restrictions.

% Trailer mode and online routes are not available in all countries
The low emission zones along the route are shown on the digital map
and for all vehicles.
and in the route overview.
Before you enter a low emission zone, you will be shown a notification in
the central display.
# Select Trailer mode.
A prompt is shown in the multimedia system.
OVERVIEW OF THE RANGE DISPLAY SERVICE (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
REQUIREMENTS: # Confirm the prompt.
The arrival time at the destination takes into account a reduced driving
R The Digital Extra "Range Display" is available (for a fee) and activated in
speed with trailer.
the Mercedes me Portal.
R The Range option is switched on (/ page 644). # To use online routes: switch on the option.
TAKING TRAFFIC INFORMATION FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT
The fuel range (purple) and the electric range (white) are shown on the map as # Select one of the options.
a closed line around the current vehicle position.
EXPLANATION OF THE OPTIONS:
IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THERE IS NO DISPLAY ON THE MAP: R Automatic
R The overall range is very large. Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account
R If the fuel level is less than 10 %. (/ page 632).
R If the electric range of the vehicle is less than 6 km. If a new route with a shorter journey time is determined based on traffic
reports, the current route is shown in blue and the new route in grey on
the map. You can accept the new route by tapping on the grey line or
keep the current route.

619

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries. If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll roads into account.
R Off
or
No traffic reports are taken into account for the route.
# Select an option for Payment by cash or card or Electronic billing.
CALCULATING ALTERNATIVE ROUTES
Multimedia system: Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the selected method of payment.
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 View Use: the route takes into account roads that require a toll corresponding
with the payment type selected.
# Activate Overview of route after start.
Alternative routes are calculated for every route. AVOIDING OR USING ROADS REQUIRING A SPECIAL TOLL STICKER
A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period.
SELECTING ROUTE OPTIONS
Multimedia system: # Select Avoid vignette roads r.
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route # Activate or deactivate Avoid all.

AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE SECTIONS, E.G. MOTORWAYS OR FERRIES or

# Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
# Switch individual countries on or off in the list.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids motorways, for example.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids roads requiring a special
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes motorways into consider‐
toll sticker in the selected countries.
ation, for example.
Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes into account roads in the
selected country which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette).
% The selected route options cannot always be taken into account.
Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though
the Avoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A message then appears % These route options are not available in every country.
and you will hear a corresponding message.
AVOIDING OR USING AREAS WITH LOW EMISSION ZONES
AVOIDING OR USING TOLL ROADS
The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll). % The function is available when there is an active internet connec‐
tion.
# Select Toll roads r.
# Activate or deactivate Avoid all.
If the option is activated, the route avoids toll roads.

620

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Activate or deactivate Area with low emission zones. # Activate Announce street names.
Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids all low emission zones The name of the street into which the vehicle should turn is announced.
restricted for the vehicle. These are displayed in red on the map.
Use: the option is deactivated. The restricted low emission zones for the % This option is not available in all countries and languages.
vehicle are passed through on the route. A warning is displayed before
you drive into a low emission zone.
SWITCHING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF
AVOIDING AREAS
# Activate or deactivate Announce traffic warnings.
# Select Avoid areas r (/ page 640).
If available, traffic warnings are announced, e.g. before the end of traffic
SELECTING NOTIFICATIONS FOR THE ROUTE jams that pose a risk.
Requirements: AUDIBLE INDICATION WHEN APPROACHING A PERSONAL POI
# Select Personal POIs.
R For an audible indication when approaching a personal POI: the USB
device contains personal POIs. # Activate a category.
R The USB device is connected with the multimedia system. When approaching a personal POI in the selected category an audible
R The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated. indication will be issued.
DISPLAYING A ROUTE OVERVIEW
Multimedia system:
Requirements:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Messages & tones
R A destination is entered.
SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF
# Activate Reduced messages.
If a driving instruction is available for a simple change in direction, you
hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right in 200 m". The number of
driving instructions along the route is minimised.

# Activate Detailed messages.

If a driving instruction is available and there is a complex driving situa‐
tion, you hear supplementary information, e.g. "In 200 m turn right and
continue to follow the major road". Additional driving instructions are
issued for the route, for example on turning major roads.

621

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Multimedia system:
% THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR ROUTE
4 © 5 Navigation
PLANNING IN THE ROUTE OVERVIEW:

R Changing the order of the destinations (/ page 622).

R Deleting a destination.
R Substituting an intermediate destination along the route.

PLANNING ROUTES
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª
# Enter the intermediate destination (/ page 45).
After entering the destination and new calculation of the route, the map
Example: route guidance is active is shown again. The route contains a new intermediate destination.
1 Traffic incident on the route
Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time % If there are already four intermediate destinations, delete an
2 Destination intermediate destination (/ page 622).
3 Searches for a filling station
4 Switches traffic information display on or off EDITING A ROUTE WITH INTERMEDIATE DESTINATIONS
When route guidance is active, the destination and entered intermediate desti‐ Requirements:
nations are shown.
R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been
Depending on the route, traffic situation and available data, further informa‐ entered.
tion can be displayed.

The route can include up to four intermediate destinations. Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Navigation
# If route guidance is not active, select Previous destinations, for example.
CHANGES THE ORDER OF THE DESTINATIONS
# Select the destination and calculate the route . # In the route overview, press and hold on a destination.

622

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Move the destination with = or Ì. . Switches off navigation announcements

Ì Switches on navigation announcements
# Tap on Finished ø.
Including the following route sections on the route to the destination
The editing mode is ended.
2 Current vehicle position
DELETING A DESTINATION
The route sections are displayed in the navigation window. The route list is
# In the route overview tap on £ for a destination. updated during the journey.
SUBSTITUTING AN INTERMEDIATE DESTINATION ALONG THE ROUTE
If an intermediate destination is entered and there are already four intermedi‐ % Motorway information shows the available service facilities. After
ate destinations, you will be asked to substitute one intermediate destination. selecting symbols, e.g. for car parks, service areas or motorway
A prompt appears. exits, the POI is adopted as an intermediate destination or desti‐
# Select Yes. nation.

# In the route overview, tap on £ for the intermediate destination to be # Swipe up or down.
substituted.
The new intermediate destination is added to the route. # Select a route section.
The map section is displayed.
DISPLAYING THE ROUTE LIST
Multimedia system: SELECTING AN ALTERNATIVE ROUTE
4© Requirements:
# Tap on the navigation window 7 (/ page 609).
R A route has already been created.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Other routes
The original route is shown in the navigation window and is highlighted on the
map.

Alternative routes are shown on the map together with the difference in travel‐
ling time.
Example: route list
1 Upcoming manoeuvre with turning arrow, distance to manoeuvre, street
number, street name

623

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

ACTIVATING A COMMUTER ROUTE

% A faster route may be shown as an alternative route that is
considerably longer. Requirements:

R You have created a profile (/ page 571).

THE FOLLOWING ROUTE INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR EXAMPLE: R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 590).
R driving time R The Commuter route option is switched on .
R Time of arrival R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show
destination suggestions.
R Distance to the destination
R Routes have been learned for these destination suggestions.
R Avoid options based on the set route options
R Route guidance is active.
R Driving time saved or lost compared with the original route

# When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in % This commuter route is not available in all countries.
the navigation window by swiping to the right or left.
CHANGING ROUTE TYPE Multimedia system:
# Select Filter. 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route
# Switching the route type on or off. # Activate Commuter route.
AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE OPTIONS The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a
commuter route.
# Select Filter.
For the daily commuter route, traffic incidents on the route are also
# Switch the route options on or off (/ page 620). reported when driving without active route guidance.
# To select commuter route: select Start.
# Confirm the settings with Finished.

# To start route guidance to the alternative route: select Start.

% A commuter route is suggested even with delays on the route.
# To select an alternative route on the map: touch any point on the
alternative route. # To delete a commuter route: select ¨.
The alternative route is highlighted.

624

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

ADJUSTING THE ROUTE ON THE MAP # Activate or deactivate Automatic filling station search.
Requirements: If Automatic filling station search is switched on, a notification appears in
which the search for filling stations is started.
R A route has already been created.
STARTING AN AUTOMATIC FILLING STATION SEARCH
Requirements:
You can change the course of the original route on the map. A new intermedi‐
ate destination is set in the process. R The automatic filling station search is activated (/ page 625).

% If the maximum number of intermediate destinations is reached, DRIVING SITUATION

the function is not supported. Press the OK button to confirm the The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level.
message.
The following notification is shown on the central display: Fuel reserve Tap
here to search for filling stations.
# Press lightly on the route with one finger and hold it in place.
A symbol appears. The route can be changed. # Confirm the notification.
The automatic filling station search begins. The available filling stations
# Drag and hold the route with your finger to a desired map position.
along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are
The new route is displayed. The route is recalculated. displayed.
When the route is calculated, the journey time and distance are com‐
pared with the original route. # Select a filling station.
When the finger is pulled away from the display, the intermediate desti‐ # Calculate the route with the filling station as an ¦ intermediate desti‐
nation is shown on the map.
nation or as a ¥ destination (/ page 615).
# Accept the route with Confirm or reject it with Cancel and return to the # If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the
original route.
prompt.
SWITCHING THE AUTOMATIC FILLING STATION SEARCH ON OR OFF The selected filling station is entered in the route overview at position 1.
Multimedia system: Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
STARTING THE AUTOMATIC SERVICE STATION SEARCH
# Select Other functions.
Requirements:

R ATTENTION ASSIST is activated (/ page 428).

625

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

R You are driving on a motorway. Multimedia system:

R There are service stations along the route section ahead. 4© 5ª
# Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is
DRIVING SITUATION displayed.
The following notification is shown on the central display ATTENTION ASSIST
# Select Stored routes.
Tap here to search for rest areas..
STARTING A SAVED ROUTE
# Confirm the notification. # Select a route.
The service station search starts. The available service stations along the
route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed. # Select Start: route guidance at start or Start: current location.
Route guidance begins.
# Select a service station.
RENAMING A ROUTE
# Calculate the route with the service station as an ¦ intermediate # Press on a route until a menu is shown.
destination or as a ¥ destination (/ page 615).
# Select Rename.
# If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the
prompt. # Enter the name.
The selected service station is entered in the route overview at position
# Select OK.
1. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.
RECORDING AND STORING A ROUTE
STARTING AND EDITING A STORED ROUTE
Requirements:
Requirements:
R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 696).
R A USB device with stored routes is connected with the multimedia sys‐
tem (/ page 696). R The "Routes" folder has been created on the USB device.
R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format
(.gpx). Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
# Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is
displayed.

# Select Stored routes.

626

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

STARTING RECORDING instructions. Driving instructions are, for example navigation announcements,
# Select Start recording. changes in direction and lane recommendations.
A white rectangle is displayed. Changes in direction and lane recommendations are shown in the navigation
The route is stored on the USB device. window.
STOPPING RECORDING THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS AND FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN
# Press the white rectangle. THE NAVIGATION WINDOW, FOR EXAMPLE:
# Select End recording. R Route list
R Destination information

Route guidance R Traffic information, e.g. length of traffic jam, delays

R Motorway facilities
NOTES ON ROUTE GUIDANCE R Car park search
R Emergency corridors
& WARNING
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication
equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated
route, a new route is calculated automatically.
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This If, for example, the route is diverted or the direction of a one-way road has
could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. been reversed, driving instructions may deviate from the actual traffic situa‐
tion.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
mits. Alternatives may be offered during route guidance, e.g. before passing a
motorway exit road. The additional driving time for the journey along the
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
motorway exit is shown.
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ment with the vehicle stationary. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations
during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic conditions.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are The route can differ from the ideal route, for example in the event of road‐
currently driving when operating the multimedia system. works or incomplete digital map data.
Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving

627

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

NOTES ON SATELLITE RECEPTION

The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things
on reception of the satellite system used. In certain situations satellite recep‐
tion can be impaired, malfunction or even not be possible, e.g. in tunnels or in
multi-storey car parks.

CHANGING DIRECTION OVERVIEW

CHANGES OF DIRECTION ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction
R Detailed image of the junction 1 Manoeuvre point
The display appears when you drive into a junction. 2 Blue highlighted route (also on the map)
R 3D image 3 Current vehicle position
The display appears when driving on junction-free, multi-lane roads, for 4 Current distance to the change of direction
example at motorway exits and motorway interchanges. THERE ARE THREE PHASES WHEN CHANGING DIRECTION:

R Preparation phase
If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia
system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation
announcement is issued, e.g. "Prepare to turn right".
The navigation window shows: the direction information or the name of
the road which is to be turned into as well as the distance to the change
of direction.
Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direc‐ R Announcement phase
tion
The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction,
1 Name of the street to turn into
e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 300 m".
2 Blue highlighted route (also on the map)
When the Auto zoom map orientation is switched off (/ page 643), a
3 Current distance to the change of direction
detailed representation of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming
change in direction appears in the navigation window.
R Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the imminent change of direction, e.g.
by announcing "Now turn right".

628

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Example 3D image: when the distance to the driving manoeuvre 1 is In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direc‐
displayed with 0 m the driving manoeuvre is performed. tion and the one after that.
R Possible lane
In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direc‐
% Changes in direction are also displayed on the driver display and tion.
head-up display. R Non-recommended lane
In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction
LANE RECOMMENDATIONS OVERVIEW without changing lane.

During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also
shown.

% Lane recommendations are also displayed on the driver's display

and head-up display.

USING MOTORWAY INFORMATION

When driving on the motorway, upcoming motorway facilities and available
service facilities are shown in the route list. These include car parks, service
stations or motorway exits with service POIs, for example.
Example: lane recommendations
1 Non-recommended lane (grey arrow) The entries are sorted according to increasing distance from the current vehi‐
2 Possible lane (white arrow) cle position.
3 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue background) # Select an entry.
This display appears for multi-lane roads.
# If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the
If the digital map contains the relevant data, lane recommendations are dis‐ list.
played in the navigation window. The destination address and the map position are shown.
# Calculate the route (/ page 615).
EXPLANATION OF THE DISPLAYED LANES:
or
R Recommended lane

629

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Search for a POI in the vicinity. SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF DURING A
PHONE CALL
or # Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.

# Use other functions, e.g. store the destination address of the service or
facility.
DESTINATION REACHED
# Tap © on the central display.
Once the destination is reached, you will see the Í chequered flag. Route
# Select Settings.
guidance will now be complete. The navigation menu is shown. # Select System.
When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the inter‐ # Select Audio.
mediate destination flag with the number of your Î intermediate destina‐
tion. Route guidance is continued. # Select Voice output.

SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF # Activate or deactivate Driving recommendations during call.
SWITCHING OFF
# To leave the menu: select G.
# Press the Ì button on the steering wheel or on the MBUX multimedia
system during a navigation announcement (/ page 577). ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS
The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message Multimedia system:
appears. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio 5 Voice output
# Select Driving recommendation vol..
or
# Set the volume.
# In the route list for a driving manoeuvre select . (/ page 623).
The symbol changes to Ì.
# To leave the menu: select G.

SWITCHING ON ROUTE GUIDANCE IS ACTIVE

# In the navigation window, select Ì for an upcoming driving manoeu‐
# Set the volume during a navigation announcement on the steering
vre. wheel (/ page 567) or on the switch panel under the central display
(/ page 558).
The current navigation announcement is played.
The symbol changes to ..

630

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SWITCHING AUDIO FADEOUT ON OR OFF DURING NAVIGATION CANCELLING ROUTE GUIDANCE

ANNOUNCEMENTS
Requirements
# Press the © button on the steering wheel on the right.
R A route has already been created.
or
R Route guidance is active.
# Tap © on the central display.
# Select Settings. # Select Í in the navigation module (/ page 609).

# Select System. OVERVIEW OF OFF-ROAD STATUS DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE

Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data
# Select Audio. on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the
multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current
# Select Voice output. position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road.
# Activate or deactivate Audio fadeout during navigation announcements. You can see the Please follow the arrow display and hear the corresponding
navigation announcement. Route guidance may be restricted.
# To leave the menu: select G.
REPEATING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route
guidance continues as normal.
Requirements

R A route has already been created.

Destination
R Route guidance is active.
SAVING THE CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION
Multimedia system:
Multimedia system:
4©
4©
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position.
# In the navigation window, select . for an upcoming driving manoeu‐
vre. # Select Store position.
# Select Ì. # To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite .
The current navigation announcement is repeated.
# To save as "Home" address: select Home .

631

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# To save as "Work" address: select Work . Multimedia system:

MANAGING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS 4© 5ª
Multimedia system: # Press and hold on a destination suggestion.
4© 5ª A menu appears.
# Select Previous destinations. # To cancel a destination suggestion: select Do not suggest now or No
SAVING THE LAST DESTINATION AS A FAVOURITE longer suggest.
# Select Ä for the last destination.
# To save a destination suggestion: select Save as favourite, Home or
A menu appears.
Work.
# To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite .
% Delete a destination suggestion from the favourites
# To save as "Home" address: select Home .
(/ page 614).
# To save as "Work" address: select Work .
DELETING A PREVIOUS DESTINATION
# Select Ä for the last destination. Route guidance with current traffic reports
# Select Delete.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION OVERVIEW
or Current traffic reports are received with the Live Traffic Information subscrip‐
tion service.
# Select Delete all.
% Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries.
# Confirm the prompt.
EDITING DESTINATION SUGGESTIONS
The service must be registered in the Mercedes me user account
Requirements: (/ page 633). This ensures that the term is free of charge.

R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 590). The service updates the traffic situation via the Internet connection at short,
R For the display of destination suggestions: the multimedia system has regular intervals.
gathered sufficient data.
Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Mercedes-Benz AG.
The data is immediately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG and for‐
warded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traffic reports relevant to

632

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.
the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports.
# Create a Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes.me. A
% There may be differences between the traffic reports received valid email address is required for this.
and the actual road and traffic conditions.
# Register the vehicle using the vehicle identification number (VIN).

IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO TRANSMIT THE VEHICLE POSITION, YOU HAVE # Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS: A code is sent to the multimedia system.
R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me user account. # Enter the code into the multimedia system.
R You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# Accept the general and specific terms of use.

% Hazard warnings can be received using the Car-to-X service % Alternatively, you can have the connection completed at a
(/ page 635). Mercedes-Benz service centre.

SHOWING INFORMATION FROM THE SERVICE PROVIDER FOR LIVE TRAF‐ EXTENDING A LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION SUBSCRIPTION
FIC INFORMATION Requirements
Requirements:
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.

Multimedia system: # Call up the Mercedes me website.

4 © 5 Apps 5 Mercedes me 5 My services
# Call up the Mercedes me user account.
# Select Live Traffic Information.
REGISTERING LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION
# Switch to the Mercedes me Store via the user account linked to the
vehicle.
Requirements
# Select the Live Traffic Information service.
R You have a Mercedes me user account.

633

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Select the renewal period. - Slow-moving traffic (orange line)

- Heavy traffic (yellow line)
# Add the product to the shopping basket.
- Free-flowing traffic (green line)
# Accept the general and specific terms of use. R Display for traffic delays on the current route
Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.
period. Activation begins on the date of extension.
SHOWING TRAFFIC INCIDENTS ON THE ROUTE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP
Requirements:
Requirements:
R The Traffic incidents display is switched on (/ page 635).
R Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic are switched on (/ page 635).

Multimedia system:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation
4©
If there are traffic incidents on the route, these are shown on the map and in
# If necessary, move the map (/ page 638).
the route overview.
THE MAP SHOWS THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC INFORMATION DEPENDING
ON THE ACTIVATED SETTINGS: The display is along the entire route.

R Traffic incidents
% The display is for route lengths up to approx. 2000 km.
These are roadworks, road blocks and warning messages, for example.
When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be
shown in colour on the route. Off the route they are grey.
% With the MBUX Voice Assistant you can inform yourself about
- Warning messages d traffic incidents on your route. Ask, for example How is the traffic
Traffic safety information can be shown, e.g. if there are people on on my route? or How is the traffic at home?. A voice output is
the carriageway. issued.
If the vehicle approaches a danger area, for example the end of a
traffic jam in a dangerous position, the Ë symbol is shown on
the map. If Announce traffic warnings is switched on and a message
has been issued, an additional announcement is made.
R Traffic flow information:
- Traffic jam (red line)

634

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

If a traffic jam symbol is selected, the trend can be displayed as

decreasing or increasing.

# Several pieces of traffic flow information are available in the imme‐

diate vicinity on the map: tap on the upper line and select the traffic
flow information in the list.

# Several traffic incidents are on the map in the immediate vicinity:

tap on the top traffic incident symbol and select from the list of traffic
incidents.
SWITCHING THE TRAFFIC INFORMATION DISPLAY ON
Multimedia system:
Example: traffic incidents on the route
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
1 Total delay
# Select View.
2 Traffic incident symbol, e.g. Ò roadworks
3 Colour representation of traffic flow information, delay and length, road # Traffic .
name and/or road number
4 Switches traffic information display on or off # Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic.
Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and
warning messages, are shown on the route.
% If a message about forming an emergency corridor has been
issued, Emergency corridor is shown in the navigation window.
Car-to-X-Communication
# To see all of the traffic incidents on the route, swipe to the right or left in
the route overview. CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW
The route section is highlighted on the map. THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS APPLY FOR THE CAR-TO-X-COMMUNI‐
CATION SERVICE:
DISPLAYING DETAILED INFORMATION
# Tap on a traffic incident symbol or traffic flow information in the route R The vehicle is equipped with an MBUX multimedia system with naviga‐
overview (when route guidance is active) or on the map. tion function.
The detailed information is shown, for example the road section, the R There is a subscription for the Live Traffic Information service.
direction and the delay. R The Car-to-X-Communication service is activated in your Mercedes me
user account.

635

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DISPLAYING HAZARD WARNINGS

% Car-to-X communication is not available in all coun‐ Multimedia system:
tries.
4©
If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map.
The communication module automatically establishes an Internet connection The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.
once the vehicle is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will
be provided shortly thereafter. Depending on the mobile phone connection, # Set the option via Z (/ page 635).
provision takes place from within a second up to about a minute. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown.
BENEFITS OF CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION: If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a
hazard warning.
R Dangers are automatically detected by the vehicle or can be reported by THE FOLLOWING HAZARDS MAY BE SHOWN ON THE MAP:
the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-Communication
in the immediate vicinity. R Accidents and breakdowns
R If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's R Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
current position are received. R Hazards reported manually
This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic R Vehicle with active hazard warning light
conditions.
R Roadworks
R Additional hazards (if available)
The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehi‐
cle data to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudonymised
by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount
% If Announce traffic warnings is switched on (/ page 621), voice
of time has elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently.
output can indicate a danger area.

% Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseu‐

SENDING HAZARD WARNINGS
donymisation process. In this way, your identity is protected
against access by unauthorised third parties. REPORTING HAZARDS MANUALLY

% Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle.

636

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position.

The Position menu is shown.

# Select Report traffic incident.

The Thank you for supporting accident prevention! message appears.

Route guidance with augmented reality 1 House number

OVERVIEW OF ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY 2 Street name
3 Change of direction arrow

& WARNING Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations,
Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been
depiction or wrong interpretation of the display digitised.
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a
Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all countries.
guide for driving.
ACTIVATING ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.

# Avoid extended observation of the camera image. & WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi‐
tional information
During route guidance with augmented reality a camera image with the real
The additional information from the augmented reality display may be
traffic scene is shown on the central display before a turning manoeuvre. The
inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the
camera image includes additional information, for example arrows indicating a
actual driving situation.
change of direction.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carry‐
If the options are switched on and this additional information is available, road
ing out all driving manoeuvres.
names and house numbers are displayed (/ page 638).

637

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Multimedia system:
Map and compass
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
# Select View. SETTING THE MAP SCALE
Multimedia system:
# Select Augmented reality video. 4©
# Activate or deactivate Augmented reality video. ZOOMING IN
IF THE FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED, THE FOLLOWING ARE SHOWN
# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central
BEFORE A TURNING MANOEUVRE IN THE CENTRAL DISPLAY: display.

R The camera's video image or

The video image includes additional information. # Move two fingers apart on the central display.
R The ¨ switch
ZOOMING OUT
The video image can be shown or hidden. # Tap with two fingers on the central display.
# To show or hide the video image: tap on ¨. or
SHOWING PROPERTY INFORMATION FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUG‐
MENTED REALITY # Move two fingers together on the central display.

Requirements:
% You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale
R Augmented reality is activated (/ page 637). (/ page 589).

Multimedia system: MOVING THE MAP

4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z Multimedia system:
# Select View. 4©
# When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the
# Select Augmented reality video. central display.
# Activate Street names and House numbers. # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Centre .
During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional
information in the camera image.

638

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SWITCHING THE ROUTE OVERVIEW AFTER START ON OR OFF

Multimedia system: % If the conditions are fulfilled, the POI symbols are shown with
current online information (/ page 644).
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
# Select View.
SWITCHING DISPLAY OF CATEGORIES FOR QUICK-ACCESS ON OR OFF
# Activate D or deactivate E Overview of route after start. # Switch a category on or off in the menu.
If the option is enabled, the map shows the full route after route guid‐ SELECTING CATEGORIES
ance is started and, if available, all alternative routes. # In the menu, select Other categories r.
SELECTING POI SYMBOLS FOR THE MAP DISPLAY # Activate or deactivate Show all.
Multimedia system:
When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z shown on the map.
POIs include restaurants and hotels, for example. These are displayed as
symbols on the map. Not all POIs are available in all countries. or

Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for # Select r the categories.
example.
# Activate or deactivate the categories.
The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map.
% The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or
deactivated as a favourite. SELECTING PERSONAL POI CATEGORIES
# In the menu, select Personal POIs r.
# Select View. # Select r a category.
# Select POI symbols on map r. # Activate or deactivate Display on the map.
# Activate or deactivate Hide all points of interest. # To issue a signal when approaching: activate Visual warning and Acous-
When the option is switched on, all POIs are hidden on the map. The tic notification.
settings in the POI categories are kept.
RESETTING THE POI SYMBOL DISPLAY
When the option is switched off, the POIs are shown on the map accord‐ # In the menu, select Reset POIs.
ing to the settings in the POI categories.
The settings are reset to the standard settings.

639

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SELECTING THE DISPLAY OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE MAP

Multimedia system: % The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can
be used to update the map data (/ page 45).
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
# Select View.

# Select Show additional information. % YOU CAN OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT NEW VERSIONS OF
THE DIGITAL MAP VIA THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
# Switch the options on or off.
R Depending on the setting, as a message in the Mercedes
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:
inbox or as an e-mail
R Current street R At any Mercedes-Benz service centre
If the option is enabled, it will be displayed in the navigation window.
R Scale OVERVIEW OF AREA AVOIDANCE ON THE ROUTE
If the option is enabled, the map scale is permanently displayed on the You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid.
map.
AVOIDING A NEW AREA FOR THE ROUTE
The option also influences the display on the driver display. Multimedia system:
R Altitude 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
R Next junction # Select Avoid new area.
If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route
guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be displayed in STARTING USING THE MAP
the navigation window. # Select Using map.
A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoi‐
DISPLAYING THE MAP VERSION ded.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z # Move the map (/ page 638).
# Select View. # Set the map scale (/ page 638).
# Select Map data version. # Select a.
The detail information is displayed. The area is entered into the list.

640

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

STARTING USING DESTINATION SEARCH R There is no practical alternative route.

# Select Via address entry. DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED
Multimedia system:
# Enter the address (/ page 45).
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas
# Select the destination in the list. DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED
The map appears. The area is saved. # Select an area in the list.
CHANGING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED
Multimedia system:
# Select Delete.
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid areas # Confirm the prompt with Yes.
# Select an area in the list. DELETING ALL AREAS TO BE AVOIDED
# Select Edit. # If at least two areas to be avoided are set, select Delete all.

# To move an area on the map: swipe in any direction on the central # Confirm the prompt with Yes.
display. MAP DATA UPDATE OVERVIEW
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE AREA As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have
# Move two fingers apart or together on the central display. a negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation
experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-
# Select a. Benz.
The area is entered into the list.
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP
TAKING THE AREA FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT DATA:
# Select the area in the list.
R Online map update
# Activate Avoid area. R Updates from the Mercedes me Portal
If route guidance is active, a new route is calculated. R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route Additional costs can be incurred in this process.
guidance.
ONLINE MAP UPDATE
THE ROUTE CAN INCLUDE AN AREA THAT IS TO BE AVOIDED IN THE
FOLLOWING CASES: REQUIREMENTS:

R The destination is located in an area that is to be avoided. R Mercedes me connect is available.

641

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

R You have a Mercedes me user account. For map data purchased as data media, the enclosed activation code must be
R The Online Map Update service is available for your region. entered after starting the installation.
R The service has been activated.
% The activation code is only ever valid for one vehicle.

% The Online Map Update service is only available in certain coun‐ IN THE EVENT OF THE FOLLOWING PROBLEMS, PLEASE CONTACT A
tries. MERCEDES-BENZ SERVICE CENTRE:

R The multimedia system does not accept the activation code.

Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update.
R You have lost the activation code.
The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the
European, North American, Korean and Japanese regions in which the vehicle DISPLAYING THE COMPASS
is located or is moved. Multimedia system:
4©
The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position until
is switched on.
the Position menu is shown.
UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL
The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with
# Select Compass.
your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/ THE COMPASS DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

Follow the menu path My Mercedes me account > Dashboard > Manage vehicle > R The current direction of travel with bearing (360° format) and com‐
Manage services > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a pass direction
storage medium. R Longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and sec‐
onds
After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your
R Number of satellites from which a signal can be received
vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the
map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has The information is not available in every country.
been restarted, the updated map data is used.

OVERVIEW OF MAP DATA

If map data is reinstalled in a vehicle, no activation code needs to be entered.

642

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DISPLAYING QIBLA DISPLAYING THE SATELLITE MAP

Multimedia system:
Requirements:
4©
# When the map is shown, tap on the ¥ current vehicle position until
R There is an Internet connection.
the Position menu is shown. R Mercedes me connect is available.
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
# Select Alerts.
R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted
The arrow on the compass shows the direction to Mecca in relation to the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
the current direction of travel.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
The number of satellites received is shown. R Satellite maps are available.

% This function is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
SETTING THE MAP SCALE AUTOMATICALLY # Select View.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z # Activate or deactivate Satellite map.
# Select View. WHEN SATELLITE MAP IS SELECTED, THEY ARE DISPLAYED AT THE
FOLLOWING MAP SCALES:
# Activate D Auto zoom.
When the option is switched on, the map scale is set automatically R On-board maps
depending on your driving speed and the type of road. The satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km.
R Online maps
% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually. The satellite maps are displayed in high-resolution map scales
After a few seconds, this is automatically reset. from 10 m.
When the option is activated, no detailed display of the junction
or a 3D image is shown in the navigation window during an When Satellite map is not selected, no satellite maps are displayed.
upcoming driving manoeuvre.

% The display of satellite maps is not available in all countries.

643

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DISPLAYING THE RANGE DISPLAYING ONLINE MAP CONTENTS

Requirements: Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection. R There is an Internet connection.

R Mercedes me connect is available. R Mercedes me connect is available.
R You have a Mercedes me user account. R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted R The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted
the Mercedes me connect terms of use. the Mercedes me connect terms of use.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
R The service is available and has been activated. R The service is available and has been activated.

Multimedia system: Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z 4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
# Select View. # Select View.

# Range . # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.

THE RANGE IS SHOWN ON THE MAP WITH THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS: Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g.
temperature or cloud cover.
R For petrol and diesel vehicles: green display
The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather
R For hybrid vehicles: symbols.
Total range: green display
Electrical range: blue display % The display of online map content is not available in all coun‐
tries.
When the lower reserve capacity is reached then the range display on the map
is switched off.

% The range display on the map is not available in all countries.

644

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Parking service Multimedia system:

4 © 5 Navigation 5 Z
NOTES ON THE PARKING SERVICE # Activate Parking.
The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are
* NOTE shown.
Vehicle damage due to failure to observe the maximum permissi‐
ble clearance height SELECTING PARKING OPTIONS

If the vehicle height exceeds the maximum permissible clearance

height, the roof and other vehicle parts may be damaged. * NOTE
Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and
# Please observe the indicated maximum clearance height. parking conditions
The data is based on the information provided by the respective service
# If the vehicle exceeds the permissible clearance height, do not
providers.
drive in.
Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information
# Take the modified vehicle height in the case of roof super‐
provided in relation to the car park or parking area.
structures or other carrier systems into account.
# Always observe the local information and conditions.

% This service is not available in all countries.

Requirements:

DISPLAYING PARKING OPTIONS ON THE MAP R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
Requirements:
R Parking is activated (/ page 645).
R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. Multimedia system:
4©
# Tap on j on the map.

or

# In the route overview, select j Parking spaces (/ page 621).

645

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and R Placing a call at the destination.
Multi-storey car parks. R Sharing the destination via the QR code.
The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings. R Calling up the web address.
# Select a parking option.
R Showing the destination on the map.

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED (IF AVAILABLE): PRIOR BOOKING OF A PARKING SPACE
Requirements:
R Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and
arrival time R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account.
R Information on the car park, e.g. R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.
- Opening times R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of park‐
- Parking charges ing in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective
- Current occupancy contract partner.
- Maximum parking time R Parking is activated (/ page 645).
- Maximum access height
The maximum access height shown by the parking service
does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir‐
% This option is not available in all countries.
cumstances.
R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, Multimedia system:
cards) 4©
R Details on parking tariffs # Select a parking option on the map.
R Number of available parking spaces
# If a parking space available to book has been selected, select Book
R Payment method (e.g. at parking meters)
parking space.
R Services/facilities at the parking option
R Telephone number # Select the desired booking period. Take note of the cancellation condi‐
tions.
# Calculate the route (/ page 615). If the parking space is available for the selected period, the price will be
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED (IF AVAILABLE): shown.

R Searching for POIs in the vicinity. # Press a to confirm.

R Saving the destination.

646

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# In the booking overview, confirm with Book. R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of park‐
ing in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective
# If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN. contract partner.
The parking space will be booked in the background. R Parking is activated (/ page 645).
A booking confirmation including a car park ticket will be sent to your
registered e-mail address.
MAKING USE OF OR CANCELLING THE BOOKING % This option is not available in all countries.
# Start the Mercedes me App on your smartphone.
Multimedia system:
# Open Menu.
4©
# Select My transactions. # Select a parking option on the map.
# Select Parking transactions. # If a car park that can be paid for has been selected, scroll down in the
parking details.
# Select the desired booking.
# To make use of the booking: select Show car park ticket. # Select Payment.
Once the vehicle has reached a parking position with payment function
or
and the vehicle is switched off, a message appears. Using this message
you can pay from the vehicle and start the payment process.
# To cancel the booking: select Cancel booking.
STARTING A PAYMENT PROCEDURE
% If possible, a parking space booking can be cancelled up to the
# Acknowledge the message.
stated time. If a booking cannot be cancelled, this will already be # Please note the maximum parking period displayed and any existing
shown to you during the booking procedure.
additional limitations. If required, a message will inform you about the
necessity of displaying information confirming the online payment for
PAYING PARKING CHARGES the parking space.
Requirements: # Select Start the payment process.
R Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account. # If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN.
R The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services.

647

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# Press a to confirm.
Dashcam
The successful start of your parking transaction is shown.
NOTES ON THE DASHCAM
# Complete the booking with OK.

# To cancel a parking transaction: after receiving the confirmation * NOTE

request, select Cancel. Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations
and data protection provisions
Minimum charges may be incurred.
You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam func‐
ENDING A PARKING TRANSACTION tions.
# Stop the active transaction using the Mercedes me app.
You receive a summary of the procedure and the costs. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam
can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated.
If an uncompleted parking transaction is detected for your vehicle as
you continue your journey, a message will appear asking whether you This function is not permitted in all countries.
would like to end it.
# Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal
# Acknowledge the message. regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in
When the parking transaction is stopped successfully, another message the respective country of use.
appears with the details about your completed parking.
# Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection
requirements.

% OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE OPERA‐

TION:

R Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.

R Use USB-IF certified USB storage devices.
USB-IF is a non-profit corporation and stands for USB
Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification,
USB-IF certifies, for example, USB versions, corresponding
cables and plugs as well as energy supply processes via the
USB interface.

648

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

R USB storage devices may be damaged if often or perma‐ Multimedia system:

nently overwritten at high speed. Mercedes-Benz recom‐ 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
mends a high-quality external SSD drive.
# Select the USB symbol.
The abbreviation SSD stands for Solid State Drive.
# Select the USB device.

% The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is % When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video
limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 files are not always displayed in the recording list.
formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one
example. partition.
When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you
receive a notification.
STARTING OR STOPPING A LOOP RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM
Requirements:
% THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE GAL‐
LERY APP: R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the
multimedia system (/ page 696).
R Switching write protection on or off R The vehicle is switched on.
R Deleting video files
Multimedia system:
Additional information about the Gallery app (/ page 678). 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
# If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select
SELECTING A USB DEVICE FOR A VIDEO RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM a USB device (/ page 649).
Requirements: If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when
recording starts.
R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system
(/ page 696). # To select recording mode: select Loop recording.
Loop recording continuously records short video files. When the memory
is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, the oldest video
file is written over.

649

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

# To start: select Start recording. Multimedia system:

The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select
message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. a USB device (/ page 649).
# To end: select End recording. If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when
recording starts.

% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are # To select recording mode: select Individual recording.
shown in the video image. Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.
inaccuracies.
# To start: select Start recording.
A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage
medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.
# To end: select End recording.
R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 651).
R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam
% In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are
recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically
shown in the video image.
after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater
displayed.
inaccuracies.
STARTING OR STOPPING INDIVIDUAL RECORDINGS WITH THE DASHCAM
Requirements: A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the R Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes
multimedia system (/ page 696). recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped
R The vehicle is switched on. imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video file.
R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

650

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 651).

R If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam
recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically
after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is
displayed.

CONFIGURING DASHCAM SETTINGS

Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 696).

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam
# Select Z.
RECEIVING NOTIFICATIONS AFTER PASSING A BORDER CROSSING
# Activate National border alert .
A message is shown if video is being recorded and the vehicle passes a
border.

% This function is not available in all countries.

STARTING AUTOMATIC VIDEO RECORDING

# Select Automatic loop recording.

# Activate Automatic loop recording.

When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically.

% This function is not available in all countries.

651

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Telephone

Telephony & WARNING

NOTES ON TELEPHONY Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion

WARNING Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situa‐
&
Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication tion. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
equipment while the vehicle is in motion # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle the vehicle is stationary.
when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices
only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger com‐
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ partment.
mits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ currently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communi‐
ment with the vehicle stationary. cation equipment in the vehicle.

652

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they may slide
or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders,
open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles will not always be
able to retain all objects that they contain in the event of an accident.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a

sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects such that they cannot be thrown around

in such situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. mobile phone
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
mobile phone (when several mobile phones are connected)
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. 4 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5 Options
6 Messages
OBSERVE THE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON STOWING MOBILE COM‐
MUNICATIONS DEVICES CORRECTLY: 7 Calls up devices
8 Numerical pad
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 251) 9 Starts contact search
Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or
at the https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com.

653

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

BLUETOOTH® PROFILE OVERVIEW R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the
second SIM card at the same time
Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone Function

PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Contacts are automatically displayed in the
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech qual‐
multimedia system
ity. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone
MAP (Message Access Profile) Message functions can be used network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® .

HFP (Hands Free Profile) Wireless telephony is available Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

OVERVIEW OF MOBILE PHONE USAGE CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE

DEPENDING ON THE EQUIPMENT, UP TO FOUR MOBILE PHONES CAN BE Requirements:
CONNECTED AT ONCE:
R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's
R A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® operating instructions).
(/ page 654).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 587).
R Additional mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via
Bluetooth® (/ page 655).
Multimedia system:
- You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with all
mobile phones. 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices

SEARCHING FOR A MOBILE PHONE

# Select Connect new device.
% Irrespective of this, Bluetooth®
audio functionality can by used
AUTHORISING A MOBILE PHONE
with any mobile phone (/ page 696).
# Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
INFORMATION ON TELEPHONY
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO THE CALL BEING DISCON‐ # If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.
NECTED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION:

R There is insufficient network coverage in the area % When you connect an iPhone®, a query appears on the smart‐
phone asking whether messages should be shown on the central
R You move from one transmission/reception station to another and no
display. If the request is confirmed, all incoming messages on the
communication channels are free
smartphone are shown as a pop-up on the central display.
R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available

654

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Further settings can be made in the Notification Centre Multimedia system:

(/ page 576). 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
# Select Connect new device.

% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia # Select the mobile phone.
system.
SWITCHING BETWEEN MOBILE PHONES
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone
% Up to four of the mobile phones activated in the driver's user
profile are automatically reconnected. The connected mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs.

# Select the tab with the desired mobile phone.

Selecting the tab of a specific mobile phone displays the associated
% A mobile phone can be used by the driver and front passenger as
telephone contents.
a Bluetooth® audio device (/ page 696).
Selecting the other tab switches the view to the other telephone.
The submenus in the Phone menu (e.g. contacts, call lists, messages)
% For older mobile phone models, enter a 1 to 16-digit number relate to the currently selected mobile phone with the exception of the
code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for telephone settings. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for
authorisation. both mobile phones.
CHANGING THE FUNCTION OF A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices 5 Devices
CONNECTING AN ADDITIONAL MOBILE PHONE
ACTIVATING A FUNCTION
Requirements: # Select the grey symbol for the required function in the line of a mobile
phone.
R At least one mobile phone is already connected to the multimedia sys‐
tem via Bluetooth®. The corresponding function is activated.
DEACTIVATING A FUNCTION
# One function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a
mobile phone.
The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system.

655

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

# Several functions are active: de-select an active function in the line of

one of the mobile phones. % If a mobile phone is connected via Smartphone Integration, the
voice recognition of this mobile phone is always started or stop‐
The corresponding function is deactivated.
ped.
DELETING A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
NOTE ABOUT CONTACT SUGGESTIONS
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
The multimedia system can show contact suggestions based on frequently
# Select Devices. used contacts, outgoing calls and text messages. For this, the Allow contact
suggestions option must be switched on (/ page 590).
# Select Ä in the line of the mobile phone.
When you open the call list or the message menu, contacts which you can
# Select Delete device. call or write to will be suggested to you. Suggestions will be shown in the
The mobile phone is deleted from the system. Suggestionstab.
STARTING OR STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION
Requirements % The multimedia system does not use the content of messages for
suggestions.
R At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system
(/ page 654).
SELECTING OPTIONS FOR CONTACT SUGGESTIONS
R The tab with the mobile phone for which voice recognition should be
started is selected (/ page 655). Requirements:

R The Allow contact suggestions option is switched on (/ page 590).

STARTING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show
# Press and hold the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel for contact suggestions.
more than one second.
Voice recognition is started for the currently selected mobile phone. Multimedia system:
STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION 4 © 5 Phone
# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. # Select Call list or Contacts.

# Select Suggestions.

656

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

# Select Ä in the line of the suggested contact. R m Micro. off

THE FOLLOWING OPTION IS AVAILABLE FOR SELECTION: R _ Keypad (show to send DTMF tones)
R Á Add call
R Do not suggest now
R Hands-free
Transfer the call, e.g. to Front, Rear or All seats.
Calls R Private mode
TELEPHONE OPERATION Transfer the call to the telephone or headphones, for example.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone # Select a function.
MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING NUMBERS
# Select _. % Observe that the functions and symbols can vary depending on
the vehicle equipment.
# Enter a number.

# Select R. CONDUCTING CALLS WITH SEVERAL PARTICIPANTS

The call is made. Requirements:
ACCEPTING A CALL R There is an active call (/ page 657).
# Select R Accept . R Another call is being made.
REJECTING A CALL
# Select k Reject . SWITCHING BETWEEN CALLS
ANSWERING A CALL WITH A MESSAGE # Select the contact.
# Select s Message. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

ENDING A CALL ACTIVATING A CALL ON HOLD

# Select k. # Select the contact of the call on hold.

ACTIVATING FUNCTIONS DURING A CALL CONDUCTING A CONFERENCE CALL

# Select  Conference.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DURING A CALL:
R k End call The new participant is included in the conference call.

657

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

ENDING AN ACTIVE CALL or

# Select k End call.
# Select k Reject.

% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as

the active call is ended. % The function and the behaviour depend on your mobile phone
network provider as well as on the mobile phone (see the manu‐
facturer's operating instructions).
ACCEPTING OR REJECTING A WAITING CALL
Requirements:

R There is an active call (/ page 657). Contacts

INFORMATION ABOUT THE CONTACTS MENU
If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. a
mobile phone or data storage medium.
Depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network provider you will
hear a call waiting signal. DEPENDING ON THE DATA SOURCE, IT IS POSSIBLE TO SAVE/LOAD THE
FOLLOWING NUMBER OF CONTACTS:
If several mobile phones are connected, you will hear an acoustic signal when
the call goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone. R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries
R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone: 5,000 entries per mobile phone
# Select R Accept.
The incoming call is active.
FROM THE CONTACTS MENU, YOU CAN PERFORM THE FOLLOWING
If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the
ACTIONS:
previous call will be put on hold.
If several mobile phones are connected and during a call you accept a R Make a call, for example call a contact (/ page 659)
call with the other mobile phone then the existing call is ended. R Navigation (/ page 614)
or R Compose messages (/ page 661)
R Additional options (/ page 659)
# Select Message.
The incoming call is not accepted.
Mobile phone contacts are automatically displayed when a mobile phone is
You answer with a message. connected to the multimedia system (/ page 654).

658

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

DOWNLOADING MOBILE PHONE FAVOURITE CONTACTS SAVING A MOBILE PHONE CONTACT

If the mobile phone supports the function, the favourites of the mobile phone Multimedia system:
are automatically loaded and appear in the overview of the phone menu. 4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts

CALLING UP CONTACTS # Select r in the line of the mobile phone contact.

Multimedia system:
# Select Ä.
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS CAN BE USED TO SEARCH FOR CONTACTS: # Select Save.

R Searching by initials # Select Yes.

R Searching by name The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the MBUX
R Searching by phone number symbol.
CALLING A CONTACT
Multimedia system:
# Enter characters into the search field.
4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
# Select the contact. # Select ª Search contacts.
A CONTACT CAN CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING DETAILS:
# Enter characters into the search field.
R Phone numbers
R Navigation addresses # Select the contact.
R Internet address # Select the telephone number.
R Email addresses The number is dialled.
R Relationship (if set)
SELECTING FURTHER OPTIONS IN THE CONTACTS MENU
MANAGING THE FORMAT OF A CONTACT'S NAME Multimedia system:
Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 Contacts
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z # Select r in the line of the contact.
# Select Contacts. # Select Ä.
# Select Name format. # Select an option.
# Select an option.

659

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

DELETING CONTACTS
Call list
Requirements:
OVERVIEW OF THE CALL LIST
R The contacts are saved in the vehicle. Depending on whether your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PBAP pro‐
R To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the file or not, the form and function of the call list differs as follows.
vehicle.
IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone R The call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia
system.
DELETING ALL CONTACTS
R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the con‐
# Select Z. nection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
# Select Contacts.
IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS NOT SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS
# Select Delete all MBUX contacts. ARE AS FOLLOWS:
# Select an option. R The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as
DELETING A CONTACT calls are made in the vehicle.
# Select Contacts. R The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone.

# Select r in the line of the contact. MAKING A CALL FROM THE CALL LIST
Multimedia system:
# Select Ä. 4 © 5 Phone
# Select Delete contact. # Select ª Call list.

# Select Yes. # Select an entry.

The call is made.

660

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

SELECTING ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE CALL LIST You can obtain further information about settings and supported functions of
Multimedia system: Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at:
4 © 5 Phone https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/.
# Select ª Call list. Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the
multimedia system to activate the messaging functionality (see manufacturer's
# For contacts that are in the address book: select options.
operating instructions).
The contact details are called up.
SETTING MESSAGE DISPLAYS
# For contacts where only one number is shown (not in the address book): Multimedia system:
select l.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 Z 5 Devices
DELETING THE CALL LIST # Select Message display.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 Z 5 Devices # Select On or Off.
# Select Delete call list. READING MESSAGES
Multimedia system:
# Select Yes.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <device name> 5 ç

USING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION

% This function is only available if your mobile does not support
A message list is shown.
the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.
# To read aloud, select the ¬ symbol at a conversation.
The message is read aloud.
Text messages CREATING AND SENDING A NEW MESSAGE

OVERVIEW OF MESSAGE FUNCTIONS Requirements

In the message menu you can receive text messages and Apple iMessages and
R There is an Internet connection.
create and send them with the help of the MBUX Voice Assistant.

If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® MAP profile, the mes‐ Multimedia system:
sage function can be used on the multimedia system. 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
# Using the MBUX voice assistant, speak the voice command Send a mes-
sage to, and name the desired contact (/ page 548).

661

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

DICTATING TEXT # Select r next to a contact.

# Say the message. The messaging history with this contact is shown.
You are guided by the voice dialogue.
# Select Ä.
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE IN THE MESSAGING HISTORY
Multimedia system: # Select Call.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <device name> 5 ç USING TELEPHONE NUMBERS, URLS OR EMAIL ADDRESSES FROM A TEXT
A message list is shown. MESSAGE
Requirements
# Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is shown. You will be guided R An Internet connection is available to call up a URL.
through the steps with the help of a voice dialogue.

# Select p. Multimedia system:

The dictation function is started. 4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
A message list is shown.
# Say the message.
After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text. # Select r next to a contact.
The messaging history with this contact is shown.
# Select Send or speak in the dialogue.
# Select a telephone number or a URL in the message.
FORWARDING MESSAGES
Multimedia system: If a URL is selected the web browser opens.
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç IF A TELEPHONE NUMBER IS SELECTED THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS
ARE AVAILABLE:
A message list is shown.
R Call
# Speak the voice command Forward message.
R New message
You are guided by the voice dialogue.
CALLING A MESSAGE SENDER # Select an option.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 <device name> 5 ç
A message list is shown.

662

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

DELETING A MESSAGE CALLING UP IN-CAR CALENDAR

Multimedia system:
Requirements:
4 © 5 Phone 5 <Device name> 5 ç
A message list is shown.
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
R The In-Car Calendar service is activated in your Mercedes me user
# Select a contact. account.
R You have a user account with an online service, for example Office 365.
# Press and hold on a message.
This allows appointments to be synchronised and made available.
# To delete the message: select Delete.
Multimedia system:
In-Car Calendar 4ÿ
# Select Apps.
IN-CAR CALENDAR FUNCTIONS # Select In-Car Calendar.
Using In-Car Calendar, you can connect your online services to the multimedia
system. Individual functions from In-Car Calendar can be called up.
LINKING A USER ACCOUNT
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU: # Select the desired online service.
R Calendar # Scan the QR code.
Showing appointments and triggering actions, e.g. reading aloud, placing
a call, navigating # Follow the instructions on the device.
SELECTING CALENDAR FUNCTIONS IN IN-CAR CALENDAR
Multimedia system:
% Notifications or reminders from In-Car Calendar, such as
4ÿ
appointments are shown in the zero layer (/ page 560).
# Select Apps.

# Select In-Car Calendar.

% Please note that certain functions are only available when the
vehicle is stationary. # Select Apps.
# Select an appointment.

663

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

Apple CarPlay®
R . Read aloud
OVERVIEW OF APPLE CARPLAY®
R R Call
R Z Navigate
& WARNING
R E Delete Risk of distraction from information systems and communications
equipment
# Select a function. If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
% Functions are available if corresponding appointment informa‐
tion is saved. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
EXAMPLES OF THIS ARE: mits.

R If a telephone number has been saved for the appoint‐ # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
ment, Call is available. attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
R If a navigable address has been saved in the Online ment with the vehicle stationary.
Account for the appointment, Navigate is available.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving when operating the multimedia system.
iPhone® functions can be used via the multimedia system using Apple Car‐
Play®. They are operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or Siri® voice
control. You can activate voice control by pressing and holding the £ but‐
ton on the multifunction steering wheel.

% By briefly pressing the £ button on the multifunction steering

wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using
the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 548).

Only one iPhone® at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay® with the
multimedia system.

664

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

As access to the iPhone® is restricted by MBUX when a CarPlay® session is # Connect the iPhone® to a USB port on the multimedia system using a
active, not all MBUX functions (e.g. dialling from the address book) can be fully suitable cable (/ page 696).
provided for the connected device. In this case use Apple CarPlay®. When the iPhone® is connected for the first time, a message about data
protection regulations appears.
The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay® is only available with an Internet
connection. # Select Accept & start if the application should be started.

The availability of Apple CarPlay® may vary according to the country. or

The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and # Open the device manager (/ page 655).
content connected to it. # Start Apple CarPlay® using the relevant symbol next to the device name.
Apple CarPlay® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: % If applicable, a message about data protection regulations
appears.
INFORMATION ON APPLE CARPLAY®
The Apple CarPlay® symbol in the status line changes from the multimedia
system to the last display within Apple CarPlay®.
# If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®.
EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®
If route guidance is already active on the multimedia system, it is ended when
# Select ©.
route guidance is started on the mobile phone.
or
CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (CABLE)
Requirements # Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).

R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions). % If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before
disconnecting, the application starts in the background when
reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the Apple
% For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the CarPlay® symbol in the status line.
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the parking brake applied.

665

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

CONNECTING AN IPHONE® USING APPLE CARPLAY® (WIRELESS)

% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®,
Requirements: you can connect another iPhone® via Bluetooth® to use Apple
R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see CarPlay® via the device manager.
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®
instructions). # Select ©.
R The device is "visible" for other devices.
or

# Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system).

% For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the parking brake applied. % If Apple CarPlay® was not displayed in the foreground before
disconnecting, the application starts in the background when
reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay® using the Apple
Multimedia system:
CarPlay® symbol in the status line.
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 654).
CALLING UP APPLE CARPLAY® SOUND SETTINGS
Multimedia system:
# When the iPhone® is connected with the multimedia system for the first
time, the use of Apple CarPlay® must be confirmed on the iPhone®. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio
A message appears on the multimedia system about the data protection # Select the sound settings.
regulations. ENDING APPLE CARPLAY®
# Select OK, start Apple CarPlay if the application should be started.
# Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager (telephone,
media) that is next to the device name of the iPhone®.

% It is possible at any time to switch between a connection via

% Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager in the
Bluetooth® or Apple CarPlay® (wireless) in the device list.
telephone or media applications if Apple CarPlay® should be
restarted.

666

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Android Auto The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet
connection.
ANDROID AUTO OVERVIEW
The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to
the country.
& WARNING
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and
equipment content connected to it.
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. INFORMATION ON ANDROID AUTO
The Android Auto symbol in the status line changes from the multimedia
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐
system to the last display within Android Auto.
mits.
If route guidance is already active on the multimedia system, it is ended when
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying
route guidance is started on the mobile phone.
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐
ment with the vehicle stationary. CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRED)
Requirements
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are
R The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0.
currently driving when operating the multimedia system.
Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android R The current version of the Android Auto app is installed on the mobile
operating system on the multimedia system. They are operated using the phone.
touchscreen, Touch Control or voice control. You can activate the voice control R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be
system by pressing and holding the £ button on the multifunction steering connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (/ page 654).
wheel. If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use
of the mobile phone with Android Auto.
% By briefly pressing the £ button on the multifunction steering
wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using
the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 548). % For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary with the parking brake.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Android Auto with the
multimedia system.

667

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

# Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on the multimedia system using R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 587).
a suitable cable (/ page 696).
When the smartphone is connected for the first time, a message about
data protection regulations appears. % For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the
multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
# Select Accept & start if the application should be started. tionary with the parking brake.
or

# Open the device manager (/ page 655). % The Android Auto function (wireless) is not available in all coun‐
# Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol next to the device name. tries.

EXITING ANDROID AUTO

# Select ©. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
or
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 654).
# Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system). A message appears on the multimedia system about the data protection
regulations.
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐ Depending on the end device, it may take several seconds until the
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐ message about data protection regulations appears.
nected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto # Select Accept & start.
symbol in the status line.

% It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Blue‐

CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRELESS)
tooth® or Android Auto (wireless) in the device list.
Requirements

R The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see
% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth®,
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
you can connect additional mobile phones via Bluetooth® to use
R The device supports the Android Auto function (wireless).
Android Auto via the device manager.
R Bluetooth® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
R The device is "visible" for other devices.

668

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

EXITING ANDROID AUTO

# Select ©.
Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto
and Apple CarPlay®
or
OVERVIEW OF TRANSFERRED VEHICLE DATA
# Press the © button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system). When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the
mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone
services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.
% If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before dis‐
connecting, the application starts in the background when recon‐ THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM INFORMATION IS TRANSMITTED:
nected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto
symbol in the status line. R Software release of the multimedia system
R System ID (anonymised)
CALLING UP THE ANDROID AUTO SOUND SETTINGS
Multimedia system: The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio vehicle and the mobile phone.
# Select the sound settings.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle
ENDING ANDROID AUTO identifier is randomly generated.
# Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager (telephone,
media) that is next to the device name of the mobile phone. This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is
deleted when the multimedia system is reset (/ page 593).

% Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager if Android THE FOLLOWING DRIVING STATUS DATA IS TRANSMITTED:
Auto should be restarted.
R Transmission position engaged
R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
R Day/night mode of the driver display
R Drive type
R Vehicle temperature

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to corre‐
spond to the driving situation.

669

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

THE FOLLOWING POSITION DATA IS TRANSMITTED:

R Coordinates
R Speed
R Compass direction
R Acceleration direction
R Height

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the naviga‐
tion (e.g. for continuity in a tunnel).
1 me button for a Mercedes-Benz Connect call
Mercedes-Benz Connect calls 2 SOS button cover
3 SOS button (emergency call system)
MAKING A CALL VIA THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL
Making a Mercedes-Benz Connect call

% Mercedes-Benz Connect calls are not possible in every country. # Press me button 1.
Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL
available in your country. # To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it briefly.

# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second.

If a Mercedes-Benz Connect call is active, an emergency call can still be

triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

INFORMATION ABOUT THE MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT CALL USING THE

ME BUTTON
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me
button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 670).

670

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

USING THE VOICE DIALOGUE SYSTEM YOU ACCESS THE DESIRED Multimedia system:
SERVICE: 4 © 5 Phone 5 ©
R Accident and Breakdown Management # Call Mercedes me connect.
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehi‐ R After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehi‐
cle cle data. The data transfer is shown in the display.

# Select a service via the voice dialogue system.

YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING TOPICS: You will be put in touch with a contact person at the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre.
R Activation of Digital Extras
THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE:
R Operating the vehicle
R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre R Accident and Breakdown Management
R Further products from Mercedes-Benz R Workshop service
R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehi‐
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer cle
Centre (/ page 673).

CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE USING THE MULTIME‐ % The availability of the individual selection options is country-
DIA SYSTEM dependent.
Requirements:
CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE AFTER AUTOMATIC
R Access to a mobile phone network is available.
ACCIDENT/BREAKDOWN DETECTION
R Sufficient network coverage is provided by the mobile phone network
providers in the respective region. Requirements:
R For automatic transmission of vehicle data: the vehicle is switched on. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circum‐
stances.

Accident: no requirements.

Breakdown:

R The vehicle is stationary.

671

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

R The hazard warning lights are switched on. You may be charged for these services.

# Support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre at a later time:

Additional requirements may apply for collision detection with a parked vehi‐ select Call later.
cle (/ page 413).
The message will disappear and reappear at a later time.

% This function is not available in all countries.

Additional prompt when the "Guard 360" Digital Extra is active: If the
"Guard 360" Digital Extra is active, a message may appear in the multimedia
ACCIDENT/BREAKDOWN DETECTION PROCEDURE system when the vehicle is switched on after a collision is detected, indicating
the affected area and the severity of the impact.
R The vehicle has detected an accident/breakdown situation
(/ page 413). # Support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre directly after
R If an accident/breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety collision detection: select Call.
instructions in the multimedia system display. This may take a few sec‐ # No support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre required:
onds.
reject the prompt.
Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency
call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls ARRANGING A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA A MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT
(/ page 681). CALL
If you have activated the Digital Extra Maintenance Management, relevant
vehicle data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
# Exit the emergency guide display. Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the main‐
A prompt appears asking whether you would like to receive support from tenance of your vehicle.
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management
# Support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre directly after service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time
breakdown/accident detection: select Call. that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an
R The vehicle data is transferred automatically after your consent appointment.
or if the "Breakdown Management" Digital Extra is activated # To arrange a service appointment: select Call.
(/ page 675).
After your consent, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-
R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The infor‐
the Accident/Breakdown Assistance. mation is then sent to your desired service outlet.

672

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary con‐ THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS MUST BE FULFILLED FOR THE TRANS‐
sult about the details. FER OF THE DATA:

R The vehicle is switched on.

% If you select Call later after the service message appears, the
R The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone
message is hidden and reappears at a later time.
network provider.
R The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.
CONSENTING TO DATA TRANSFER FOR A MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT CALL
Requirements: MULTI-STAGE TRANSFER DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:
R There is an active Mercedes-Benz Connect call via the multimedia sys‐ R Reason for the initiation of the call
tem or the me button in the overhead control panel (/ page 670).
R The available mobile phone transmission technology
R Activated Digital Extras
% The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all coun‐
R The service selected in the voice control system
tries.

% A prompt for consent to data transmission is only made if the

If the Accident/Breakdown Management Digital Extras are not activated, a corresponding Digital Extra has not been activated.
prompt appears to confirm the data transfer.

# Select Yes.
% The scope of the transmitted data depends on the vehicle model
R The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically (/ page 673).
and its equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available
or at all times.

# Select No and confirm. DATA TRANSMISSION WHEN DIGITAL EXTRAS ARE NOT ACTIVATED
R Only call control data is transmitted (/ page 673). IF NO DIGITAL EXTRAS ARE ACTIVATED AND THE DATA PROTECTION
More information on Digital Extras: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com PROMPT HAS BEEN CONFIRMED, THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE TRANSMIT‐
TED:
DATA TRANSMITTED DURING A MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT CALL
If you initiate Mercedes-Benz Connect Call, data is transferred to enable targe‐ R Vehicle identification number
ted advice and an efficient service.
R Time of the call

673

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

R Reason for the initiation of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call
R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Rejection of the data protection prompt
R Country indicator of the vehicle R Country indicator of the vehicle
R Set language for the multimedia system R Set language for the multimedia system
R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehi‐ R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehi‐
cle cle

DATA TRANSMISSION WHEN DIGITAL EXTRAS ARE ACTIVATED

IF A CALL IS MADE FOR A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA THE SERVICE Only in the second step and only for the respective activated Digital Extras,
REMINDER, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS ALSO TRANSMITTED: further case-specific data is transmitted in order to enable an optimal service.
R Current mileage and maintenance data An overview of the data transferred is contained in the data protection infor‐
mation for the Digital Extras. You can find these in your Mercedes-Benz user
IF A CALL IS MADE AFTER AUTOMATIC ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN account.
DETECTION USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS
DATA PROCESSING
ALSO TRANSMITTED:
The data transmitted as part of the call will be deleted from the transmitting
R Current mileage and maintenance data systems once the call has been completed, provided they are not used for
other activated Digital Extras.
R Current vehicle location
The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz
IF THE ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT SELECTION HAS Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the
BEEN MADE VIA THE VOICE DIALOGUE SYSTEM AND NO DIGITAL EXTRA service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Take note
HAS BEEN ACTIVATED, BUT THE DATA PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN of the data protection information on the Mercedes-Benz website https://
CONFIRMED, THE FOLLOWING DATA CAN BE ADDITIONALLY REQUESTED www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the
FROM THE VEHICLE BY THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE: Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

R Current vehicle location

% The recorded message is not available in every country.

IF THE DATA PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN REJECTED, THE FOLLOW‐

ING DATA IS TRANSMITTED TO ENABLE TARGETED ADVICE AND AN EFFI‐
CIENT SERVICE:

R Time of the call

674

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Mercedes-Benz Connect Please note the terms of use and data protection information for Mercedes-
Benz Connect.. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.
INFORMATION ON MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT
ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT DIGITAL EXTRAS

% Mercedes-Benz Connect or individual Digital Extras are not avail‐

% The Accident and Breakdown Management Digital Extras are
able in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre
not available in every country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service
if these functions are available in your country.
centre to find out whether this function is available in your coun‐
try.
Mercedes-Benz Connect comprises a number of Digital Extras.

YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING DIGITAL EXTRAS VIA THE MULTIMEDIA THE ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT CAN INCLUDE THE FOL‐
SYSTEM AND THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL, FOR EXAMPLE: LOWING FUNCTIONS:

R Accident Recovery (me button or the situation-dependent display in the R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 80)
multimedia system) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call
R Breakdown Management (me button or the situation-dependent display centre forwards the call to Accident and Breakdown Management. For‐
in the multimedia system) warding the call is however not possible in all countries.
R Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing
SOS button) away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
You may be charged for these services.
The Accident and Breakdown Management Digital Extras and the Mercedes- R Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown
Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock. detection (/ page 671)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent
The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
control panel (/ page 670). and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia R Supplement to the Digital Extra Telediagnosis
system (/ page 671). With the Telediagnosis function, specific wear and failure reports are
recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly inter‐
Please note that Mercedes-Benz Connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In an preted and are available through the monitoring of components that are
emergency, use the emergency call system in the vehicle (/ page 80) or subject to diagnostics.
contact the standard national emergency numbers.

675

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may

be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz
MB Apps (Digital Extras)
Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system INFORMATION ON MB APPS/DIGITAL EXTRAS
only appears when the vehicle is stationary. With a Mercedes me ID user account you have access to Mercedes-Benz
services and offers.

% These Digital Extras are subject to technical restrictions such as Availability is dependent both on the country and equipment.
the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the abil‐
You can obtain further information at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or in the
ity of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In
Mercedes-Benz Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the
information to appear in the multimedia system. CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME ID USER ACCOUNT
Multimedia system:
Please note that Mercedes-Benz Connect Call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In 4 © 5 MB Apps 5 Mercedes me
emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency number first or
VEHICLE IS LINKED TO MERCEDES ME ID USER ACCOUNT AND MERCEDES
use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 679).
ME ID IS AVAILABLE
You can find more information on Digital Extras on the Mercedes-Benz Portal: # Select Mercedes me ID.
https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Information about the linked user account appears.

DATA TRANSMITTED WITH A MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT CALL VEHICLE IS NOT LINKED TO MERCEDES ME ID USER ACCOUNT
THE DATA TRANSFERRED DURING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CONNECT CALL
DEPENDS ON: % If you do not yet have a Mercedes me ID user account, you can
create a user account at: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
R The reason for initiation of the call or in the Mercedes-Benz App. A valid email address or phone
R The service that is selected in the voice control system number is required for this.
R The activated Digital Extras (/ page 673)
# Select ©.
Which data is transferred for the Digital Extras can be taken from the currently
valid terms of use and the data protection notices for Digital Extras. You can
# Select MB Apps.
find these in your Mercedes-Benz user account. # Select Mercedes me.

676

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

# Follow the instructions on the display to link the user account with the R A Mercedes me PIN has been set.
vehicle.
Multimedia system:
% If the Mercedes-Benz App is available on a mobile phone, the 4 © 5 MB Apps 5 Mercedes me
vehicle link can be made via the displayed QR code.
# Select Mercedes me ID.

CALLING UP DIGITAL EXTRAS # Select Delete vehicle connection.

Requirements:
% Only the user whose Mercedes me ID user account was first
R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me ID user account. linked to the vehicle can remove the link between all users and
the vehicle.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 MB Apps 5 Mercedes me SELECTING APPS
# Select My services. Requirements:
The Digital Extras for which you have a valid licence are displayed in
R Depending on the app, the general terms and conditions are confirmed.
alphabetical order.
ORDERING OR RENEWING DIGITAL EXTRAS
Use the Store to order or renew Digital Extras. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Apps
# Select ©. # Select an app.
# Select Store. THE FOLLOWING APPS ARE AVAILABLE, FOR EXAMPLE:

REMOVING THE LINK BETWEEN THE MERCEDES ME ID USER ACCOUNT R Weather

AND THE VEHICLE R Browser
Requirements: R Additional apps, which are purchased or installed subsequently

R The Mercedes me ID of the user account that was first linked to the
vehicle is logged in.
% You can also access both of the first two apps via the quick
R The user profile is synchronised (/ page 574).
access at Apps.

677

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

R Camera app
% The available features are country-dependent.
R Favourites
Licence fees may be applicable.
# Select a tab.
THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR APPS, FOR EXAMPLE: FILTERING DISPLAYS
R Search function
# Select Z.

R Filter function, for displaying search results at the current vehicle posi‐ # Select an option.
tion or at the destination
All files, all images or all video recordings are displayed.
R Display of detailed information
PLAYING BACK A VIDEO RECORDING
R Read-aloud function
# Select 6.
R Setting functions
Playback starts.
USING THE GALLERY APP
# To continue playback in full screen mode: tap on the display.
Requirements:
# To pause playback: select 8.
R For use of the share content function:
- The Mercedes me App is installed on the device, e.g. a mobile # To continue playback from the desired position: move the · posi‐
phone or a tablet. tion on the timeline by sliding it.
- For Internet connection, the multimedia system is used as a WLAN # To select the previous or next video recording: swipe to the right or
hotspot (/ page 588).
left.
SCROLLING AND ZOOMING IMAGES
Multimedia system: # To scroll: swipe on the image in one direction.
4 © 5 Apps
# Select Gallery.
# To zoom: tap twice in quick succession on an image.

IMAGES AND VIDEO RECORDINGS ARE DISPLAYED FROM THE FOL‐ # To select the previous or next image: swipe to the right or left.
LOWING SOURCES, FOR EXAMPLE:
ADDING OR REMOVING A FILE FROM THE FAVOURITES
R Dashcam video recordings # Press and hold on a file.
R Collision detection images
R Video recordings and images from other available sources

678

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

# Select Add to favourites/Remove from favourites. # Scan the QR code with the device.
A corresponding message appears. A numerical code is displayed on the MBUX multimedia system.
SWITCHING WRITE PROTECTION ON OR OFF # Enter the numerical code on the device.
The connection is established and the device is available in the vehicle.
% Active write protection is not supported by every app.
SHARING CONTENT WITH A CONNECTED DEVICE
# Select Ä.
# Press and hold on a file.
# Choose the content that you wish to share.
# Activate D or deactivate E Write protection.
The content is marked with a tick.
DELETING FILES
# Select ø.
# Select ´.
# Select the device to which the content is to be transferred.
# To delete a single file: tap on a file.
The transferred content is stored in the Mercedes me App, not in the
ø will appear.
memory of the device.
# To delete all files: tap on /.

# To delete: select E. Emergency call systems

A prompt appears. INFORMATION ON AVAILABLE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS
# Select Yes. TWO TYPES OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU IN
THE VEHICLE:

% A single file can be deleted even after a long press on the file. R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
CONNECTING THE DEVICE TO THE MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM TO USE
THE SHARE CONTENT FUNCTION The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is generally available for your vehi‐
# Select the share function in the Mercedes me App on the device. cle for 10 years ex works.
A QR code is displayed on the MBUX multimedia system.
The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries.
You can find out about the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/

679

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES FOR BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS: R The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.
R Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile
R The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both
phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage.
emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer"
section (/ page 682). For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone
network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.
R Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your
vehicle and are activated at the factory.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AND THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone R If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the system only logs in to
network. the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.
R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls
emergency call centre. directly to public coordination centres.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried
out automatically.

There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for
the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full function‐ carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the
ality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on local dealers.
circumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This
includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastruc‐ MERCEDES-BENZ RECOMMENDS THE ACTIVATION OF THE MERCEDES-
ture of the public reception centres in the respective countries. BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM FOR THE FOLLOWING REASONS:

R In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a

language you speak.
% Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-
Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant R Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of
to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appendix I). Other man‐ the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
ufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certi‐ R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in
fied according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the
emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data.

680

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can
quickly. be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is
R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transfer‐ switched on.
red to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer. R G: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.
In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there
is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the
public emergency call centre. % If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loud‐
R If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is not available, the 112 speakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are
emergency call is carried out automatically. faulty.
YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL
OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS SYSTEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency
call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and R A corresponding message appears on the driver and media
the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate display .
an accident site in places that are difficult to access. R The SOS button lights up red continuously.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically
(/ page 681) or manually (/ page 682). TRIGGERING AN AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY CALL

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make Requirements:
an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. R The vehicle is switched on.
INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE
MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS: AN EMERGENCY CALL IS TRIGGERED AUTOMATICALLY:
R SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt
system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete tensioners after an accident
failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be trans‐ R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency
mitted. Stop Assist
The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of
the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call centre.

681

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE: or

R A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre. # To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX voice
R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call assistant (/ page 553).
centre. THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:

R A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call
is finished. R If the traffic conditions and safety permit, remain in the vehicle until a
voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a correspond‐ R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is
ing message appears in the display. necessary to call rescue teams and the police to the accident site.
# Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call
number on your mobile phone. centre.
IF AN EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN INITIATED:
If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a correspond‐
R If the traffic conditions and safety permit, remain in the vehicle until a ing message appears in the display.
voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is # Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call
necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. number on your mobile phone.
R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER
immediately. For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emer‐
gency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
TRIGGERING A MANUAL EMERGENCY CALL gency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS
button at least one second long (/ page 670). Depending on the emergency call system (/ page 679) activated different
data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.

682

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

TRANSMITTED DATA ACCORDING TO ACTIVATED EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call

R Position data of the vehicle R Position data of the vehicle

R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)

R Direction of travel R Direction of travel

R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle identification number

R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)

R Number of people detected in the vehicle R Number of people detected in the vehicle

R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically

R Time of the accident R Time of the accident

R Language setting on the multimedia system

R Digital Extras available or not

This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre if necessary.

% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in % For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information,
the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emer‐
emergency call centre. gency call.

FOR ACCIDENT CLARIFICATION PURPOSES, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION OF THE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
CAN BE TAKEN UP TO AN HOUR AFTER THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emergency call system every time
INITIATED: the vehicle is switched on. During this time, the SOS button lights up red
continuously for five seconds. In the event of a system failure, you will be
R The current vehicle position can be determined. informed via a text message on the driver's display and the red SOS NOT
R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. READY indicator on the central display or media display.
R Emergency call data can be called up.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red
indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF,
this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.

683

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

INFORMATION ON DATA PROCESSING ted to first accept and subsequently process emergency calls to the standard
European emergency call number 112.
PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY
CALL SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS FOR DATA PROCESSING
All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS ARE DESIGNED SO THAT THE FOLLOW‐
corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the
ING REQUIREMENTS ARE FULFILLED:
protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data
(GDPR)". R The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the
system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for
rescue and recovery in the event of an accident. R Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continu‐
ous tracking in normal operation.
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency R The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continu‐
call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has the ously deleted.
right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz
R The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the sys‐
emergency call system.
tem's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current loca‐
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ tions required for the normal function of the system are available.
gency call system are the local dealers. R The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only
kept for as long as is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the
PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYS‐ emergency call, and under no circumstances for more than 13 hours
TEM (EU ECALL) after the time that an emergency call is initiated.
All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the RIGHTS OF PERSONS AFFECTED BY THE DATA PROCESSING
protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right
(GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or
interests of the affected person in accordance with article 6, paragraph1, letter barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does
d of the GDPR. not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring
carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party
The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operat‐ to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be
ing the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112. infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure.
DATA RECIPIENT The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the
The recipients of data that is processed by the 112 emergency call system (EU appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their
eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals. These are configured rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.
by the appropriate authorities of the respective country in which they are loca‐

684

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeauf‐

tragter für den Datenschutz, Mercedes-Benz Group AG, HPC E600, D-70546
Stuttgart, Germany

685

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system In-Car Apps

In-Car Apps

In-Car Apps overview Installing In-Car Apps via the In-Car

You can install additional apps via the In-Car Mercedes-Benz Store and use Mercedes-Benz Store
them in the vehicle. The available in-car apps come from various categories,
Requirements:
such as entertainment, news or games.
R You have a Mercedes me user account.
To install In-Car apps, you need a Mercedes me user account and the activa‐
ted Digital Extra In-Car App Pass. If you do not yet have a Mercedes me ID you R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.
have to create this and connect it with your vehicle. R You have agreed to the terms of use.
R The In-Car App Pass Digital Extra is activated in the vehicle.
If the Digital Extra In-Car App Pass is not activated in the vehicle, you can
order it in the Mercedes-Benz Store. As soon as you have ordered the relevant
package, the Digital Extra In-Car App Pass will be activated automatically. The Multimedia system:
In-Car App Pass gives you access to our app library and allows you to use 4ÿ
additional apps in the vehicle. # Select Store.
# Select Apps.
% It is only possible to install In-Car Apps with an Internet connec‐ The available apps are displayed.
tion.
# Select the desired app.

# Install the app.

% The availability of In-Car Apps is country-dependent.
The installed apps can be found on the home screen.

% The Emotional Modes app only functions when the vehicle is % It is only possible to install In-Car Apps with an Internet connec‐
parked. tion.

686

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system In-Car Apps

% The availability of In-Car Apps is country-dependent.

687

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions

Online and Internet functions

Internet connection & WARNING

INFORMATION ON CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion

WARNING Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situa‐
&
Risk of distraction from information systems and communications tion. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
equipment # As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when
If you operate information systems and communication devices integra‐ the vehicle is stationary.
ted in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic
situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices
only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger com‐
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation per‐ partment.
mits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are cur‐
attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equip‐ rently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
ment with the vehicle stationary. DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT AND AVAILABILITY IN THE
COUNTRY, YOU CAN ESTABLISH AN INTERNET CONNECTION IN THE FOL‐
LOWING WAYS:
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving when operating the multimedia system. R Vehicles with a communication module:
- Using the communication module including data roaming
(/ page 689)
- Using Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone
R Vehicles without a communication module:
- Using Bluetooth® with a data-enabled mobile phone

688

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions

- Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can obtain an Entertainment Pack‐
age via the Mercedes me Store. In order to use the data package included,
you must conclude your own contract with a mobile phone network provider
The Internet functions can only be used to a limited degree whilst driving.
via the Mercedes me App. This can be terminated at any time and incurs no
SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION USING THE COMMUNICATION costs. Without this contract it is not possible to use the services included in
MODULE the previously acquired Entertainment Package. The availability of this option
is dependent on the country.
Requirements:
Comfort Data Volume
R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication
module. If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can
R A Mercedes me user account is available. purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a
R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. fee. To do this, connect your smartphone to the MBUX hotspot and open the
browser to be redirected to the home page of the third-party provider. The
R The Entertainment Package is active.
availability of this option is dependent on the country.
R The Comfort Data Volume service is active.

% Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether it is

Multimedia system: possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth a mobile phone network provider.
5 Manage Internet access
# Select Search for Internet access in the Internet device manager.
% Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise the tethering func‐
# Select Data package. tion of a mobile phone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® to use a Wi-Fi
hotspot.
For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when pur‐
chasing the services.

Additional data volume is required to use some functions, e.g. web browser or % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP,
Wi-Fi hotspot. online software updates cannot be carried out via the external
Wi-Fi hotspot.
If the data volume limit is reached, the availability of Mercedes me connect
services is limited.

Entertainment Package

689

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions

SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WLAN

% If there is no internet connection in the vehicle or the Mercedes
me App is not installed, as an alternative, the QR code displayed Requirements:
when the animation is called up can be scanned to play anima‐ R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 587).
tions. The data tariff of the mobile communication device is used
for the data connection. R The Wi-Fi hotspot function is activated on the mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating
DISCONNECTING THE AUTOMATIC INTERNET CONNECTION VIA COMMU‐
instructions).
NICATION MODULE
Requirements:
Multimedia system:
R Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® tethering are available in the vehicle. 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
5 Manage Internet access
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth % This function is country-dependent.
5 Manage Internet access
# Select the Ä settings in the line of Data package. The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager

# To disconnect the automatic connection: select the Delete entry # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol.
option. The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager

# Select Search for access.

% The communication module is removed from the list of known
hotspots, but can be reconnected manually at any time # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol.
(/ page 689). It may take a few seconds until the device is found by the Wi-Fi search.

# Log in to the Wi-Fi network (/ page 587).

The Delete entry option permits the use of purchased data volume to be
limited. The system is prevented from automatically establishing a connection THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WI-FI IS RESTRICTED OR DOES NOT
to the communication module after this option has been activated. FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R The mobile phone is switched off.

R Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone.

690

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions

R The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multimedia system.

% If a new mobile phone is connected using Bluetooth®, this is also
R The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the mobile phone.
used for the telephone application.
R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone.

SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH® THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH® IS RESTRICTED OR DOES
Requirements: NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® profile PAN (Personal Area
R The mobile phone is switched off.
Network). R The mobile phone network coverage is insufficient.
R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® R Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone.
(/ page 654). R The Bluetooth® function on the multimedia system is switched off and
R Internet access via Bluetooth® is activated (see the manufacturer's oper‐ the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth®.
ating instructions). R The Bluetooth® function is switched off on the mobile phone and the
mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth®.
Multimedia system: R Neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simulta‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth neous use of a telephone and an Internet connection.
5 Manage Internet access R The mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Blue‐
tooth®.

% This function is country-dependent. CANCELLING INTERNET ACCESS PERMISSION FOR A MOBILE PHONE
Multimedia system:
The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth
5 Manage Internet access
# Select the mobile phone with the \ Bluetooth® symbol. # Select options Ä next to the name of the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager
# Select Delete configuration.
# Select Search for access.
In the list displayed, all mobile phones already known to the multimedia # Select Yes.
system are shown. New devices can be set up using the phone applica‐
tion.

# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth® (/ page 654).

691

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions

Connection status R For vehicles with a communication module, the connection data of non-
user paid services can be displayed via Mercedes me connect.
CONNECTION STATUS OVERVIEW
DEPENDING ON THE CONNECTION STATUS, THE FOLLOWING SYMBOLS
CAN APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IN THE STATUS LINE:

R ö: a Wi-Fi device is selected as Internet access.

R \: a Bluetooth® device is selected as Internet access.
R Mobile communications standard (e.g. 4G + double arrow symbol): the
communication module is selected as the hotspot.

DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS

Multimedia system:
4©
# Briefly press the status line.
The extended status line is displayed.

# Briefly press the Internet symbol in the symbol overview.

The current connection status is displayed.
NOTES ON DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS

R When connecting via Wi-Fi, the connection status and device name are
displayed.
R When connecting via a Bluetooth® device, the connection status, device
name, and network type are displayed.
R In the case of a connection via the communication module the following
status information can be shown:
- Type of network
- Status (online, offline, data volumes available or used, limited
service)

692

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Media

Media

Information about media mode R Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32‑bit
address space).
INFORMATION ABOUT SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA R Due to the large variety of available music and video files
regarding encoders, sampling frequency and data transfer
WARNING rates, playback cannot be guaranteed.
&
Risk of distraction when handling data storage media R Due to the wide range of USB mass storage devices availa‐
If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is ble on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all
diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose USB mass storage devices.
control of the vehicle. R Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported.
R Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital
# Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is sta‐ Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back.
tionary.
R MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP).
R Files with the corresponding format can be played back
SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA: from the USB mass storage device in Dolby Atmos.
Permissible file systems FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
INFORMATION ON COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AND TRADEMARKS
Permissible data storage USB mass storage device, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Blue‐
media
Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media
tooth® audio devices
you make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many
Supported audio formats MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC countries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the
copyright holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the
Supported video formats MPEG, AVI, MKV, MP4, M4V, WMV applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these.

% OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000

files.

693

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Media

For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence

from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together
are registered trademarks, and DTS TruVolume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.©.
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 2020-2022 Dolby Laboratories. All
Rights Reserved.

DTS® Connected Radio™

For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from
DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS Connected Radio, and the DTS logo are
registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and
other countries. © 2020 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Lyrics licensed and
provided by Lyric Find™. Content licensed and sourced from Radioplayer™.

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID

and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote,
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

This product incorporates Spotify software which is subject to 3rd party licen‐
ces found here: https://www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses

694

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Media

8 Selected device
9 Playlists and categories
A Media search
B Controls playback
C Timeline
When the control menu is called up on the zero layer, the following functions
TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European are available:
Union and other countries.
R Controlling media playback
R Selecting tracks from the current playlist
Overview of the media menu R Selecting a playback list
R Media search
R Selecting a media source
R Creating favourites
R Configuring settings

% Further information on:

R Overview of the zero layer (/ page 561).
R Operating the zero layer (/ page 563).

1 Active media source

2 Album cover
3 Track and artist
4 Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback
list
5 Settings
6 Options
7 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward

695

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Media

Connecting the data storage medium to the R The audio device is "visible" for other devices.

multimedia system Multimedia system:

CONNECTING A USB MASS STORAGE DEVICE 4 © 5 Media 5 Bluetooth

AUTHORISING A NEW BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE

* NOTE # Select Connect device.
Damage due to high temperatures
Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.
High temperatures can damage USB mass storage devices.
# Select an audio device.
# After use, remove USB mass storage devices from the vehicle.
Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and
on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio device.

# Select No, only music.

The Bluetooth® audio device is connected with the multimedia system.
CONNECTING A PREVIOUSLY AUTHORISED BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE
# Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list.
The connection is being established.

Starting media playback

# Connect the USB mass storage device with the USB port.
Requirements:
SEARCHING FOR AND AUTHORISING A BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE
Requirements: R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system.

R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio device.

Multimedia system:
R The audio device supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and 4 © 5 Media
AVRCP.
# Select a media source.

696

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Media

Controlling media playback Additional options for setting media playback

Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 4 © 5 Media
# To pause playback: select 8. CALLING UP ADDITIONAL OPTIONS
# To continue playback: select 6.
# Select Ä.
The additional options are shown.
# To repeat a track: select :.
# Select an option.
FOR THE REPEAT FUNCTION THERE ARE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS:

Select once: the active playlist is repeated.

Media search
R
R Select twice: the current track is repeated.
R Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated. NOTES ABOUT THE SEARCH FUNCTION IN CATEGORIES
Under 5 you can search through all available media files. There are several
# To play back tracks in random order: select 9. categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the con‐
nected device and data format.
# To rewind or fast-forward a track: tap on the desired point on the
timeline.
% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content
# To select the next track: select ü. has been read in and analysed.
Availability of the media search with Android devices may be
# To select the previous track: select û.
limited.
# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold û or ü.
STARTING A SEARCH IN CATEGORIES
# To show the current track list: select 5.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 5
# Select a category.

697

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Media

USING THE KEYWORD SEARCH

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media
You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.

# Select ª.
A keyboard for character entry appears.

# Enter the term searched for.

% The search begins with the first character entered. The more
characters entered the more concrete the search results become.

# Select the desired entry from the result list.

If a list with several tracks is selected, then this is opened in the search.
To playback all of the tracks in the list, select Ä and then Play now.

698

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Radio

Radio

Switching on the radio 5 Settings

6 Sound settings
Multimedia system: 7 Switches on traffic reports
4 © 5 Þ Radio With DAB equipment: switches on radio announcements
# Start the application on the multimedia system home screen. 8 Station list
The radio menu appears. You will hear the last station played on the last 9 Search
frequency band selected. A Previous or next station

Radio overview % The availability of the frequency bands is dependent on the

equipment.

When the control menu is called up on the zero layer, the following functions
are available:

R Selecting a radio station

R Setting radio stations from the station list
R Storing radio stations
R Frequency band
R Search function
R Creating favourites
1 Preview image R Configuring settings
2 Active frequency band
3 Channel name
4 Set frequency

699

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Radio

% FURTHER INFORMATION ON: Calling up the radio station list

R Overview of the zero layer (/ page 561). Multimedia system:
R Operating the zero layer (/ page 563). 4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select 4.
You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: The station list appears.

# Swipe the station list up or down.

Setting the frequency band # Select a station.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio Searching for radio stations using station
# Select a frequency band or a favourite. names or frequency entry
Multimedia system:
Selecting a radio station 4 © 5 Þ Radio
Multimedia system: # Select è.
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Enter a station name or frequency.
# Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station.
# Select a station.
% You can also set the previous/next radio station on the zero layer
using the control menu displayed (/ page 561).
Selecting a recommended radio station
Requirements

R The Allow music suggestions option is switched on (/ page 571).

R The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show
station suggestions.

700

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Radio

Multimedia system:
Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select è. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio
The recommended stations are shown.
The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an
# Select a suggested station. image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news
The selected station is played. or service information, for example.

Storing radio stations % The slide show is available for DAB+ channels that broadcast
additional information.
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio # Press the station picture on the central display.
# Select a radio station. The image is enlarged and, if available, displayed with the additional
information of the slideshow.
# Select f.

Switching a slideshow on or off (FM/DAB

Managing favourites radio mode)
Multimedia system:
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Favourites
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z
MOVING STATIONS # Switch DAB Slideshow or Expanded Radio Slideshow on D or off E.
# Press ·.
When both slideshows are switched on, the contents of both slideshows
The list of favourites appears. alternate.
# Press Ä to the far right of the station name.

# Select Move.

# Move the station to the new position.

701

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Radio

Activating/deactivating the frequency fix # Switch off Radio announcements.

No radio announcements are played.
function
Multimedia system:
Selecting radio announcements
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Active frequency band
# Activate or deactivate Frequency fix. Multimedia system:
If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the recep‐ 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Radio announcements
tion is poor.
% In terms of the radio announcements, depending on the station
you can choose between, e.g. Traffic information service (TA),
Activating/deactivating traffic announce‐ Travel and Warning.
ments
Multimedia system:
# Switch an announcement on O or off.
4 © 5 Þ Radio
# Select .. Setting the traffic information service volume
The traffic information is switched on or off. increase
Multimedia system:
Activating/deactivating radio announcements 4 © 5 Z 5 System 5 Audio
Multimedia system: # Select Navigation & traffic announcements.
4 © 5 Þ Radio # Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase.
# Switch on Radio announcements.
The selected radio announcements are played.
When Radio announcements are first switched on, Traffic information
Displaying radio text
service (TA), Travel and Warning are preset. Multimedia system:
or 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Active frequency band
# Activate or deactivate Radio text information.

702

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Radio

Showing or hiding lyrics

% The function is equipment-dependent.

Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Ä

SHOWING LYRICS
# Select Show lyrics.
The lyrics, album cover, title and artist of the song currently playing on
the radio are displayed.
Swipe up or down to go to the bottom or top section of the lyrics.
If no lyrics are available for the song currently playing on the radio,
Show lyrics is greyed out.
HIDING LYRICS
# Select the cross at the top of the lyrics display.

or

# Select G.
The radio menu appears.

703

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Sound

Sound

Sound settings # Switch on one level.

or
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOUND SYSTEM
The sound system is equipped with five speakers. It is available for all func‐ # Switch off loudness normalisation.
tions in the radio and media modes.
SETTING THE BALANCE AND FADER
Multimedia system:
% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Balance and Fader
Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.
ADJUSTING THE BALANCE
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU # In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the right and
Multimedia system: left speakers in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the right and left-hand speakers.
# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. ADJUSTING THE FADER
ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS # In the grid shown, move the volume distribution between the front and
Multimedia system: rear speakers in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the front and rear speakers.
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. SWITCHING THE GREETING TONE ON/OFF
Multimedia system:
SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Loudness normalisation SWITCHING ON THE GREETING TONE
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between If the Greeting tone is switched on and you enter the vehicle, the vehicle will
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this welcome you with a corresponding sound.
purpose. The currently set level is displayed. # Tap on E in order to switch on the Greeting tone.
Loudness normalisation can also be switched off.

704

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Sound

SWITCHING OFF THE GREETING TONE Loudness normalisation can also be switched off.
# Tap on D in order to switch off the Greeting tone. # Switch on one level.

or
Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
# Switch off loudness normalisation.
INFORMATION ABOUT THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
The Burmester® 3D-surround sound system is equipped with 15 loudspeakers. ADJUSTING THE BALANCE AND FADER IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SUR‐
It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. ROUND SOUND SYSTEM
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Balance and Fader
% The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path. ADJUSTING THE BALANCE
# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND vehicle in the grid shown.
SOUND SYSTEM The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right
Multimedia system: sides in the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z ADJUSTING THE FADER
# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. # Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle
in the grid shown.
ADJUSTING THE TREBLE, MID AND BASS SETTINGS ON THE BURMESTER®
3D-SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of
Multimedia system: the vehicle.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass.
% Setting 0 is recommended for high quality music and voice repro‐
duction.
SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE BURMESTER® 4D SUR‐
ROUND SOUND SYSTEM ON OR OFF
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser 5 Loudness normalisation
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this
purpose. The currently set level is displayed.

705

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Sound

SELECTING A SOUND PROFILE IN THE BURMESTER® 3D-SURROUND ADJUSTING THE SOUND FOCUS ON THE BURMESTER® 3D SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM SOUND SYSTEM
Multimedia system: Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound focus

SETTING AN EXISTING SOUND PROFILE # Select a seat or seat row for the sound focus.
# Select a sound profile. The sound focus is activated.

SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE or

# Select Personal sound profile and select Z . Select Reconfigure and
restart the set-up assistant. # Select the seat or seat row again.

SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE FOR THE FIRST TIME: The sound focus is deactivated.
# Select Personal sound profile.

# Open the set-up assistant with Start.

Advanced sound system
INFORMATION ABOUT THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
# Observe the messages on the display and select the preferred settings.
The Advanced Sound System is equipped with nine speakers. It is available for
The personal sound profile is created with the selected settings and can all functions in the radio and media modes.
be selected in the Sound profiles menu.
CHANGING INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS OF THE PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE % The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace
AT A LATER DATE: Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.
# Select Personal sound profile, then select Z and adjust the desired
settings.
CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
Multimedia system:
% The availability of a Personal sound profile is dependent on the 4 © 5 Media 5 Z
equipment.
The set-up assistant is available when the vehicle is stationary. ADJUSTING SOUND SETTINGS
# Select one of the functions shown.

706

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
MBUX multimedia system Sound

ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS IN THE ADVANCED ADJUSTING THE FADER
SOUND SYSTEM # Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle
Multimedia system: in the grid shown.
4 © 5 Media 5 Z The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of
# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. the vehicle.

SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYS‐

TEM ON OR OFF
Multimedia system:
Super Sport sound
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Equaliser 5 Loudness normalisation INFORMATION ON SUPER SPORT SOUND
The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between With the Super Sport Sound function, engine sounds can be experienced even
audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this more intensely inside your vehicle. To do this, your vehicle generates sporty
purpose. The currently set level is displayed. engine sounds to match the current driving situation and plays them through
the speakers of your sound system inside the vehicle.
Loudness normalisation can also be switched off.

# Switch on one level.

% The Super Sport Sound function is a Digital Extra (/ page 109).

or
CALLING UP SUPER SPORT SOUND
Multimedia system:
# Switch off loudness normalisation.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving 5 Super Sport sound
SETTING THE BALANCE/FADER IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM
Multimedia system: SWITCHING SUPER SPORT SOUND ON OR OFF
4 © 5 Media 5 Z 5 Balance and Fader
# Tap on E to switch on the Super Sport sound.

ADJUSTING THE BALANCE or

# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the
# Tap on D to switch off the Super Sport sound.
vehicle in the grid shown.
The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right
sides in the vehicle. % The availability of Super Sport sound is country-dependent.

Back to Contents707

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

ASSYST PLUS service interval display 709

Maintenance Management 711

Telediagnostics 712

Engine compartment 713

Cleaning and care 722

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval Displaying the service due date
display Driver display:
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display provides 4 Service
information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due The next service due date is displayed.
date.
# To exit the display: press the back button G on the steering wheel.
You can hide this service display using the back button G on the steering
wheel.
Information on regular maintenance work
DEPENDING ON HOW THE VEHICLE IS USED, THE ASSYST PLUS SERVICE
INTERVAL DISPLAY MAY SHORTEN THE SERVICE INTERVAL, E.G. IN THE
FOLLOWING CASES: * NOTE
Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
R Mainly short-distance driving
Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incom‐
R When the engine is often left idling for long periods pletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
R In the event of frequent cold start phases
# Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
R Vehicles with diesel particulate filters: in the event of frequently inter‐
rupted regeneration of the diesel particulate filter # Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

709

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle.
Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operat‐
ing conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility
of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often
than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.

EXAMPLES OF ARDUOUS OPERATING CONDITIONS:

R Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops

R Mainly short-distance driving
R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
R When the engine is often left idling for long periods
R Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation
mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter,
engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. Check the tyres
more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased stress. Further
information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date
only when the battery is connected.

# Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before
disconnecting the battery (/ page 709).

710

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Maintenance Management

Maintenance Management

Notes about Maintenance Management Data transferred when using Maintenance

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automat‐ Management
ically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.
When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to
The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and
entered on the Mercedes-Benz website at: https://www.mercedes.me. You will fault rectification.
then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your
Details on data transmission can be found in the data protection informa‐
vehicle.
tion for Mercedes-Benz connect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Account", "Data Protection & Legal Notice".
% The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the mainte‐
nance request to the service partner is subject to technical limi‐
% Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the
tations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be
multimedia system are not available in every country.
perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this
case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment
with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the
multimedia system.

% Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the

multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function
is available in your country.

711

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Telediagnostics

Telediagnostics

Notes about Telediagnosis ommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and
the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working
on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on
% This service is not available in all countries. the country, vehicle model and equipment.

The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if mal‐
functions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnosis service is Data transferred when using Telediagnosis
activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If
fault conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to
transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and
depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to fault rectification.
the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes-Benz website at:
https://www.mercedes.me. Details on data transmission can be found in the data protection informa‐
tion for Mercedes-Benz connect services. These can be found at: https://
For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may www.mercedes.me under "My Account", "Data Protection & Legal Notice".
appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the cus‐
% The scope of the transmitted data depends on the vehicle model
tomer centre for assistance.
and its equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available
at all times.
% The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system
depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and
requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider
has no influence.

% Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. There‐

fore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and rec‐

712

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Opening and closing the bonnet

OPERATION OF THE ACTIVE BONNET (PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION)
In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces & DANGER
the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
approximately 75 mm. the charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
After being triggered, the active bonnet remains in the raised position. Limited
tem is under high voltage.
visibility due to the raised bonnet cannot be ruled out.
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be
process.
limited.

Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored immediately in a

qualified specialist workshop. WARNING
&
If necessary, adjust your seat position and drive carefully to a qualified spe‐ Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
cialist workshop. If a safe continued journey is not possible, contact a quali‐ The bonnet may open and block your view.
fied specialist workshop.
# Never release the bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

713

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet Risk of injury due to moving parts
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of
movement. Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

# Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the # Switch off the vehicle.
bonnet's range of movement.
# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐
nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

& WARNING # Remove jewellery and watches.

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:
& WARNING
R You may come into contact with hot gases. Risk of injury from touching components under voltage
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate at high volt‐
fluids. age. You could receive an electric shock.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down. # Never touch ignition system or fuel injection system compo‐
nents when the vehicle is switched on.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
bonnet closed and call the fire service.
THE LIVE COMPONENTS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING, FOR EXAMPLE:

R Ignition coils
R Fuel injectors
R Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors

714

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

# To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.

& WARNING
Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
ment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component

parts described in the following.

& WARNING
Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet
is open # Push handle 2 of the bonnet catch upwards and lift the bonnet until it
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you opens automatically.
could be trapped by the wiper linkage.
CLOSING THE BONNET
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if
you need to open the bonnet. * NOTE
Damage to the bonnet due to manual closing
OPENING THE BONNET If the bonnet is closed manually, there is a risk of dents.

# Do not close the bonnet manually.

# Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm and then allow it to fall,

applying a little force as you let it go.

# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close
it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

715

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

Engine oil # Add 1 l of engine oil.

R Engine oil level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL USING THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY
level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max":
Requirements

R The engine has been warmed up. # Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a
R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. qualified specialist workshop.
R The engine is running at idle speed. R For engine oil level, switch on vehicle
R The bonnet is closed.
# Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal
driving style and even longer with an active driving style. R Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not
connected.
Driver display:
4 Service # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine oil level is shown.
R Engine oil level System currently inoperative
ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER'S
DISPLAY: # Close the bonnet.
R Engine oil level Measuring now…: the engine oil level cannot be deter‐ TOPPING UP ENGINE OIL
mined yet.

& DANGER
# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
the charging process
R Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level
During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the
tem is under high voltage.
engine oil level is correct.
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging
R Engine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the engine process.
oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min":

716

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ment
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR: e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

R You may come into contact with hot gases. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating parts described in the following.
fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

& WARNING
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
bonnet closed and call the fire service. If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine
compartment, it may ignite.

# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler open‐
& WARNING ing.
Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
# Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐

nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

717

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

* NOTE
Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or
additives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond
to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service inter‐
vals.

# Follow the instructions on the service interval display for

changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change
intervals.

# Do not use additives. # Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Top up the engine oil.

NOTE
# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
*
Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil # Check the oil level again (/ page 39).
Excess engine oil can damage the engine or catalytic converter.

# Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist work‐

shop.
Checking the coolant level

& DANGER
% Depending on driving style, the vehicle will consume up to Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may also be the charging process
higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐
drive at high engine speeds. tem is under high voltage.

# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging

process.

718

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of burns when opening the bonnet Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ment
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR: e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

R You may come into contact with hot gases. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating parts described in the following.
fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

& WARNING
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the Risk of scalding from hot coolant
bonnet closed and call the fire service. If you open the cap, you could scald yourself.

# Allow the engine to cool down before opening the cap.

& WARNING # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety
Risk of injury due to moving parts glasses.
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start # Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐

nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

719

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

# Park the vehicle on a level surface.

& WARNING
# Check the coolant temperature display on the driver's display. Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
The coolant temperature must be below 70°C. IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED
ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING
# Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release overpressure.
SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:
# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
R You may come into contact with hot gases.
THE COOLANT LEVEL IS CORRECT IN THE FOLLOWING CASES: R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating
fluids.
R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2.
# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 1.5 cm over the marker bar 2.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the
bonnet closed and call the fire service.
# If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-
Benz.

WARNING
Topping up the windscreen washer system &
Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start
& DANGER unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.
Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during
the charging process Observe the following if you must open the bonnet:

During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical sys‐ # Switch off the vehicle.
tem is under high voltage.
# Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving compo‐
# Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging nents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
process.
# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

720

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Engine compartment

# Open cap 1 by the tab.

& WARNING
Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart‐ # Top up the washer fluid.
ment
Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot,
e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
Keeping the air/water duct free
# Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits,
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component
e.g. ice, snow or leaves.
parts described in the following.

& WARNING
‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust
system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out

next to the filler opening.

721

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car * NOTE

wash Damage from automatic braking
IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHI‐
CLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:
& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing R Active Brake Assist
the vehicle
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
R HOLD function
# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while pay‐ R Active Parking Assist
ing attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has
been fully restored. To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during
towing or in the car wash.

* NOTE
Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is
suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

# Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the

underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular

the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

722

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH,

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND:
Car wash mode
In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
car wash. Car wash mode can be activated up to a speed of 20 km/h
R The HOLD function is switched off. (/ page 724).
R The 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS ACTIVATED, THE CAR WASH MODE ACTIVE MES‐
SAGE WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY. THE FOLLOWING ADJUST‐
R The outside mirrors are folded in.
MENTS WILL BE MADE:
R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
R The windscreen wiper switch is in position g. R The outside mirrors will be folded in.
R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐ R To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically,
wise the boot lid could open unintentionally. the rain sensor will be deactivated.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. R Air-recirculation mode will be activated.
R For car washes with conveyor systems: R The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed.
- Neutral i is engaged. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
- If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, R Active Brake Assist will be deactivated, if applicable.
make sure the key is located in the vehicle. Park position j will R Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be activated after
otherwise automatically be engaged. approximately eight seconds.
R Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control R Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be deactivated.
panel or deactivate the Sliding sunroof and roller sunblind option in the
settings for the MBUX interior assistant (/ page 584). If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a % behind
the respective setting.

% Removing the wax from the windscreen and the wiper blades Pressing Switch off will cancel car wash mode. Car wash mode will automati‐
after washing the vehicle will help avoid smearing and reduce cally be deactivated above a speed of 20 km/h.
wiper noise.
You can also switch off car wash mode via the MBUX multimedia system
(/ page 724).

723

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS WILL BE RESET WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS

DEACTIVATED: % For an overview of the settings made when you activate car wash
mode (/ page 40).
R The outside mirrors will be folded out.
R The rain sensor will be activated. DEACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE
R Air-recirculation mode will be deactivated. # Select Deactivate.
R The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed. The settings of car wash mode will be reset.
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected set‐
ting.
% Car wash mode will be automatically deactivated as soon as your
R Active Brake Assist will be activated, if applicable. speed exceeds 20 km/h.
R Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be deactivated at
speeds above 18 km/h.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be activated.
R
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
Activating/deactivating car wash mode & WARNING
Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-
Requirements:
spray nozzles
R The vehicle is stationary. The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.
R The vehicle is switched on.
Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.

Multimedia system: # Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray noz‐

4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Driving zles.

ACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE # Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.
# Select Car wash mode.

# Select Activate. TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN
USING A HIGH-PRESSURE CLEANER:
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by a % next to
R The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Other‐
the respective setting.
wise the boot lid could open unintentionally.

724

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

% Observe the notes on the care of car parts (/ page 727).
R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
R Vehicles with decorative films: Parts of your vehicle are covered with
a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the film-
covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork
Move the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner around while cleaning. The
water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
care
R Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manu‐ To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance
facturer's operating instructions. systems, please observe the following notes:
R Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive
PAINT
parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas
louvres.
afterwards.
R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
Washing the vehicle by hand R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth
soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

NOTE
R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
*
Engine damage due to water ingress R Tar stains: use tar remover.
# Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air R Wax: use silicone remover.
inlet grille below the bonnet. R Do not attach stickers, foil or similar materials. Only have foil attached to
the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Do not use acid solutions and
Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by
acidic cleaners.
hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays).
MATT FINISH
# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not use acidic cleaning agents. R Do not attach stickers, foils or similar materials. Only have foil attached
to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When
R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment.

725

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preserv‐ R To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorb‐
ers, e.g.wax. ent cloth after every car wash.

IN THE EVENT OF PAINTWORK DAMAGE: AVOIDING DAMAGE TO THE DECORATIVE FILM

R The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by:
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
- Sunlight
shop.
- Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)
R Make sure the radar sensors are working (/ page 416).
- Weather conditions
- Stone chippings and dirt
Notes on cleaning decorative foils - Chemical cleaning agents
- Oily products
Observe the "Notes on paintwork / matt finish paintwork care" (/ page 725).
They also apply to matt decorative films. R Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect
of shining the film-wrapped surface.
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage. R Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent
stains may occur.
CLEANING
R When cleaning with the high-pressure cleaner, maintain a distance of at Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused
least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a
of the high-pressure cleaner. qualified specialist workshop.
R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without addi‐
tives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes- You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manu‐
Benz). facturer.
R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between
R Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative
damage the decorative film irreparably. film has been removed.
R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint
cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified
R Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).
afterwards.
R Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards.

726

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

Information on window films To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the
following car parts:

WINDOWS
* NOTE
Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids
When window films have been retrofitted, fluids such as cleaning * NOTE
agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids
interior and cause damage to electronic components. When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning
agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle
# Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible. interior and cause damage to electronic components.
# Immediately absorb any excess fluids. # Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.

# Immediately absorb any excess fluids.

Notes on car parts cleaning and care

R Clean the windows on the inside and outside with a damp cloth and with
a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to
Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while clean the insides of windows.
the windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the
windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. % After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with
wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents rec‐
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle
ommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the applica‐
before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.
tion instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling
spots.

* NOTE
Damage due to use of acidic cleaning agents % Remove external misting or dirt on the windscreen in front of
# Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Otherwise, the surfaces the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving
could be damaged. safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 416).

727

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

WHEELS AND RIMS R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of
R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. 30 cm.
R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could
CAMERAS
damage wheel bolts and brake components.
R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 487).
R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a
R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lenses.
few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads
will warm up and dry out. R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

WIPER BLADES
R Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 37). % Remove external misting or dirt on the windscreen in front of
R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving
cloth. safety systems may be impaired or unavailable (/ page 416).

TRAILER HITCH
% Note that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's owner's
residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or manual.
clean them too often.
R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.
R Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. with a wire brush).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car
shampoo). R After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.
R Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic
lenses.
% Before using trailers with anti-swerve coupling, note the manu‐
VEHICLE SOCKET (HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY) facturer's owner's manual.
R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the vehicle socket.
R Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents (such as soap).

SENSORS
R Clean the sensors in the front and rear part of the vehicle with car
shampoo, plenty of water and a soft cloth (/ page 416).

728

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

Notes on care of the interior * NOTE

Property damage due to disinfectants
& WARNING The interior includes a number of sensitive surfaces such as displays,
Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ plastics and leather.
vent-based care products
Disinfectants can contain alcohol and other substances that penetrate
Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in
and damage surfaces. Technology behind buttons and displays can also
the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic
be damaged.
parts may break away.
# Do not use disinfectant on interior surfaces.
# Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents
to clean the cockpit.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and
care:
& WARNING SEAT BELTS
Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. R Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct
sunlight.
# Never bleach or dye seat belts.
DISPLAY
R Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display
care product (TFT-LCD).
R Do not use any other agents.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY
R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth.
R Do not use cleaning agents.

PLASTIC TRIM
R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth.

729

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Clean with a damp cloth and a 1% soap solution and then wipe with a
R Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. dry cloth.
R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
with the plastic trim. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
REAL WOOD AND TRIM ELEMENTS
R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
R Clean with a microfibre cloth.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface characteris‐
tics, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth
ROOF LINING
and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface charac‐
R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
teristics are particular to leather, and are not material defects.
CARPET Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process, which
R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes- changes the surface characteristics.
Benz.
GENUINE LEATHER SEAT COVERS
IMITATION LEATHER STEERING WHEEL
R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers
R Clean the entire steering wheel with a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap
with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean
solution. Do not spot clean.
the seat covers.
R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-
R Do not use a microfibre cloth. Benz aftercare.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for
Mercedes-Benz.
STEERING WHEEL MADE OF GENUINE LEATHER OR DINAMICA
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
NOTE R Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
*
Damage caused by wrong cleaners R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.
# Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover
or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes.
Otherwise you may damage the finish.

730

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

% Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface characteris‐

tics, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth
and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface charac‐
teristics are particular to leather, and are not material defects.
Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process, which
changes the surface characteristics.
Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress
on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material.
Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear
marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life
span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the
leather.

DINAMICA SEAT COVERS

R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to
clean.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.

IMITATION LEATHER SEAT COVERS

R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton
cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot
clean.
R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use a microfibre cloth.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

CLOTH SEAT COVERS

R Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfibre
cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot
clean.
R Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Back to Contents731

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Emergency 733

Flat tyre 736

Battery (vehicle) 744

Tow-starting or towing away 752

Electrical fuses 759

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Emergency

Emergency

Removing the safety vest % Remove the packaging film from a new safety vest before sliding
it into the safety vest stowage recess. Otherwise, it may slide out
unintentionally or the packaging may hinder its removal.
Observe the legal requirements for the individual countries.

1 Maximum number of washes

There is a safety vest stowage recess in the door stowage compartments of all
2 Maximum wash temperature
doors for storing the safety vests.
3 Do not bleach
# To remove: pull out the safety vest bag 1 using the loop 2. 4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
# Open the safety vest bag 1 and take out the safety vest.
6 Do not dry clean
# To replace: fold the safety vest, roll it up and insert it into the safety vest
bag 1. 7 Class 2 safety vest
# Slide the safety vest bag 1 along the underside of the armrest into the The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety
safety vest stowage recess. Ensure that the loop 2 remains hanging out vest is the correct size and is fully closed.
so that it is easy to grasp.
EXCHANGE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty.

733

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Emergency

R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded. SETTING UP THE WARNING TRIANGLE
R The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to # Fold the side reflectors upwards to form a triangle and attach using the
sunlight. upper snap fastener .

# Fold the legs down and out to the side.

DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

R Please contact your local waste disposal company. First-aid kit (soft sided) overview

Warning triangle
REMOVING THE WARNING TRIANGLE

The first-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the left or right side of the boot,
depending on the respective vehicle version.

# Push both sides of the warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the
arrow and open it.

# Remove the warning triangle 2.

The warning triangle is located in the boot lid.

734

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Emergency

Removing the fire extinguisher

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in
the driver's footwell
A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other
vehicle occupants.

# Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.

# Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

# Pull the tab 1 upwards.

# Fold the tab 1 down.

# Remove the fire extinguisher 2.

735

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

Flat tyre

Notes on flat tyres R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible
to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the
TIREFIT kit (/ page 738).
& WARNING R Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz connect: you can make a call for break‐
Risk of accident due to a flat tyre down assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a break‐
A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as steering down (/ page 670).
and braking. R All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 777).

tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics:

# Do not drive on with a flat tyre. % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries
(/ page 784).
# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare
wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.

Run-flat tyres:

# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended

tyres (run-flat tyres).

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILA‐

BLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:

R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the jour‐

ney for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on
MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (/ page 737).

736

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which
appears on the side wall of the tyre.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only
& WARNING
be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.
Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the IF A PRESSURE LOSS WARNING MESSAGE APPEARS IN THE DRIVER'S
vehicle. DISPLAY, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:
# Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the R Check the tyre for damage.
MOExtended tyres. R If driving on, observe the following notes.
# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as
driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, DRIVING DISTANCE POSSIBLE IN EMERGENCY MODE AFTER THE PRES‐
in particular, to a loaded vehicle. SURE LOSS WARNING:
# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode

Partially laden 80 km
R banging noise
R vehicle vibration Fully laden 30 km
R smoke which smells like rubber
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the
R continuous ESP® intervention
driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
R cracks in the tyre sidewalls
If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you
can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.
# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a
qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle
even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre
affected must not show any clearly visible damage.

737

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

TIREFIT kit storage location You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or elec‐
trical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor.
PLUG-IN HYBRID The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. In the event
of a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the TIREFIT kit

Requirements:

R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflation compressor are ready for use
The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the left-hand side of the boot when delivered. (/ page 74).
R TIREFIT sticker is displayed.
Not plug-in hybrid
R Gloves are at hand.

TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 74)

You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm,
particularly on the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside tem‐
peratures down to -20 °C.

The TIREFIT kit 1 is located on the left-hand side of the boot when delivered.

Depending on the vehicle version, the TIREFIT kit may be located in a different
position in the boot.

% DEPENDING ON THE RESPECTIVE POWER CATEGORY (LK),

THE TYRE INFLATION COMPRESSOR WEIGHS AS FOLLOWS:

R LK1 – 12 V/10 A, 120 W, 0.8 kg

R LK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.9 kg

738

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of accident when using tyre sealant Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow
the following cases: it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from
R there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage children.
previously mentioned)
R the wheel rims have been damaged Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:
R after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres # Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immedi‐
ately.
# Do not continue driving.
# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
clean water immediately.

# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your

mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre
sealant immediately.

# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immedi‐

ately.

* NOTE
Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten
minutes without interruption.

739

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

Observe the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation # Pull the plug 4 with cable and hose 5 out of the tyre inflation com‐
compressor. pressor housing.

Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced at a qualified specialist workshop every # Push the plug of the hose 5 into the flange 6 of the tyre sealant bottle
five years. 1 until the plug engages.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which have pierced the tyre. # Insert the tyre sealant bottle 1 with the head pointing downwards into
the recess 2 of the tyre inflation compressor.

# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the
driver's field of vision. # Remove the valve cap from the valve 7 on the faulty tyre.
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the # Screw the filling hose 8 onto the valve 7.
defective tyre.
# Insert the plug 4 into a 12‑V‑socket in your vehicle (/ page 273).

# Switch on the vehicle.

# Press the On/Off switch 3 on the tyre inflation compressor.

The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First,
tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to
approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!

740

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

# Allow the tyre inflation compressor to run for a maximum of ten minutes.
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa & WARNING
(2.0 bar/29 psi). Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being
attained
If tyre sealant leaks out, ensure that the affected area is cleaned as quickly as If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time,
possible. It is preferable to use clean water. the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in
this instance.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned at a dry cleaner's as
soon as possible with perchloroethylene. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.
IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI) # Do not continue driving.
HAS NOT BEEN ATTAINED:
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.
IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI)
HAS BEEN ATTAINED:
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

# Drive the vehicle forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately & WARNING
10 m. Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling charac‐
# Pump up the tyre again.
teristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

# Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has
been repaired using tyre sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed

with tyre sealant.

# Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster in
a location where it will be easily seen by the driver.

741

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

* NOTE & WARNING

Staining from leaking tyre sealant Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being
After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose. attained
If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly
# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that con‐ damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
tained the TIREFIT kit.
The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Do not continue driving.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants. Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with
the telephone number, e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. # Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). For
values, refer to the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap.
# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. # To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

# Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.

# Pull away immediately.

# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure
using the tyre inflation compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
# To reduce the tyre pressure: press the pressure release button 1 next
to the manometer 2.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the
valve of the sealed tyre.

742

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.

# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. Press the
locking tabs on the yellow cap together to release.
The filling hose remains on the tyre sealant bottle.

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre
sealant bottle and filling hose replaced.

743

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12‑V‑battery For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries
which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

ALL VEHICLES EXCEPT VEHICLES WITH A LITHIUM-ION BATTERY

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the
battery & WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge
short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. battery.

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up,
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehi‐ The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and
cle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions during starting assistance.

# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a

qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Do not drive on.

# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop.

R Further information on ABS (/ page 418)

R Further information on ESP® (/ page 420) (/ page 419)

744

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

Risk of explosion if the 12‑V‑battery is used improperly.

& WARNING
Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
Battery acid is caustic. tery. Avoid creating sparks.

# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular
# Do not lean over the battery. gloves, apron and face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid
splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor.
# Do not inhale battery gases.
Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the
# Keep children away from the battery. battery to support a person in any way.
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of Wear safety goggles.
clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
Keep children away.
ALL VEHICLES
Observe this Owner's Manual.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE
Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries IF YOU DO NOT INTEND TO USE THE VEHICLE OVER AN EXTENDED
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the PERIOD OF TIME, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
household rubbish. R If available: activate standby mode (/ page 415).
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible
R Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by
Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect
manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
the battery.
workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12‑V‑battery, contact a qualified specialist work‐

shop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batter‐
ies.

745

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 48 V battery + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries
& WARNING Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the
Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the household rubbish.
battery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a #
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible
short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING

SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: Only have work on the 48 V battery carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.
R when braking
R in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehi‐ Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batter‐
cle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions ies.

# In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is used improperly.
qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The surface of the 48 V battery may be hot.
# Do not drive on.
Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat‐
# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
specialist workshop.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular
R Further information on ABS (/ page 418) gloves, apron and face mask. Immediately rinse off splashes of elec‐
R Further information on ESP® (/ page 419) trolyte or acid with plenty of clean water. Consult a doctor.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the
battery to support a person in any way.

Do not perform any work on the battery. Always have any work on
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not

746

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

disconnect the battery yourself. Do not remove the battery yourself. Risk of explosion.
Do not attempt to open the battery.
Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the
Keep children away. battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Wear safety glasses. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular
Observe this Owner's Manual. gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor.

IF YOU DO NOT INTEND TO USE THE VEHICLE OVER AN EXTENDED Wear safety glasses.
PERIOD OF TIME, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:
Keep children away.
R If available: activate standby mode (/ page 415).
Observe this Owner's Manual.

Notes on the high-voltage battery

& DANGER
Notes on starting assistance and charging the
Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the 12 V battery
high-voltage battery
ALL VEHICLES
In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite.
Always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment for
# Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual charging the battery and jump starting.
odours, smoke or burn marks.

# Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at * NOTE
a sufficient distance. Damage to the battery due to overvoltage
When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging
# Call the fire service. voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

# Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of

Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery (/ page 381). 14.8 V.

747

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas Risk of explosion due to explosive mixture of gases
If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of An explosive mixture of gases can escape from the battery during
hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery. charging and starting assistance.

# Take care that the positive terminal of a connected battery # Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐
does not come into contact with vehicle parts. ded.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # Make sure there is adequate ventilation.

# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always # Do not stand over the battery.
observe the sequence of battery terminals described.

# During starting assistance, always take care to connect only

battery terminals of identical polarity. & WARNING
Risk of explosion from a frozen battery
# During starting assistance, observe the sequence described
A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or
for connecting and disconnecting the jump leads.
below freezing point.
# Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the
During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be
engine running.
released.

# Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing

starting assistance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low

temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this
case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a defrosted battery may be drastically shortened. The

starting behaviour may deteriorate, in particular at low temperatures.

It is recommended to have a defrosted battery checked at a qualified special‐

ist workshop.

748

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

PLUG-IN HYBRID ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN CHARGING THE BATTERY:
If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possi‐
ble to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes. R Only use chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Read the operating instructions for the charger, then charge the battery.
Starting assistance is not considered to be a normal operating status.

ALL VEHICLES ALSO NOTE THE FOLLOWING POINTS DURING STARTING ASSISTANCE:

R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or

* NOTE other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the
R The vehicles must not touch each other.
engine
R Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the
engine and exhaust system are cold.
catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.

Starting assistance and charging the 12‑V‑
#

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS DURING STARTING ASSISTANCE AND

battery
WHEN CHARGING THE BATTERY: PREPARING STARTING ASSISTANCE/CHARGING
R Only use undamaged jump leads/charging cables with a sufficient cross-
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle.
section and insulated terminal clamps. # Shift the transmission to position j.
R Uninsulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact
with other metal parts as long as the jump leads/charging cables are # Switch off the vehicle and all electrical consumers.
connected to the battery/the jump-start connection point.
# Open the bonnet.
R The jump leads/charging cables must not touch any parts which may
move when the engine is running.
R Make sure that neither you nor the battery are electrostatically charged.
R Keep away from fire and naked flames.
R Do not stand over the battery.

749

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

# Connect negative terminal on the second battery and the earth point 4
on your vehicle to the jump lead. Begin with the donor battery first.

# Start the engine of your own vehicle.

# Let the engines run for several minutes.

# Before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer in

Illustrations exemplary your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

# Open the cover 1 of the jump-starting connection

point. When the starting assistance process is complete:

# First, remove the jump lead from earth point 4 and negative pole of
the donor battery, then from positive clamp 3 and positive pole of the
donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle
first.

# After removing the jump lead, close cover 2 of positive clamp 3.

# Close the cover 1.

If your vehicle has been started with starting assistance, it may not be possi‐
ble to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Open the cover 2 of the positive clamp 3 on the jump-starting con‐
CHARGING
nection point.
# Connect the positive clamp 3 on the vehicle and the positive pole of
STARTING ASSISTANCE the charger with the charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp 3
# Connect positive clamp 3 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the on the vehicle first.
donor battery using the jump lead. Always begin with positive clamp 3
on your own vehicle first.
# Connect the negative terminal of the charger and the earth point 4 on
the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger.
# On the assisting vehicle leave the engine running at idling speed.
# Start the charging process.

750

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

When the charging process is complete: Fit any existing or supplied stop plugs.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.
# First remove the charging cable from the earth point 4 and negative
terminal of the charger, then from the positive clamp 3 and positive R Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.
pole of the charger. Begin each time with the contacts on the vehicle
first.

# After removing the charging cable, close cover 2 of positive clamp 3.

# Close the cover 1.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12V battery (/ page 744).

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the 12V battery replaced at a qualified

specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

IF YOU WANT TO REPLACE THE BATTERY YOURSELF, OBSERVE THE FOL‐

LOWING NOTES:

R Replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle
requirements.
The vehicle is equipped with a battery with AGM technology (Absorbent
Glass Mat) or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guar‐
anteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends only using batteries that have been tested
and approved for the vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
R Use the detachable parts such as vent hose, elbow fittings or terminal
covers from the battery to be replaced.
R Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening
on the side of the battery.

751

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Tow-starting or towing away

Permitted towing methods (not plug-in * NOTE

hybrid) Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

* NOTE
Damage from automatic braking VEHICLES WITH REAR-WHEEL DRIVE
THE VEHICLE WILL BRAKE AUTONOMOUSLY IN CERTAIN SITUA‐
Permitted towing methods
TIONS IF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE SWITCHED ON:
Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h
R Active Brake Assist
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Front axle raised No

R HOLD function Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a
R Active Parking Assist steering wheel lock

To avoid damage to the vehicle, switch these systems off e.g. before 4MATIC VEHICLES
towing it or in a car wash. Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a break‐
down, rather than towing it. Front axle raised No

Rear axle raised No

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow bar. Do not
use tow bar systems.
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

752

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Permitted towing methods (plug-in hybrid) Exception: if the vehicle is located in a danger zone, it can be recovered from
the danger zone despite the display message á Towing not permitted See
Owner's Manual or the display not working. It must not be towed further than
% The information below does not apply to Mercedes-AMG E Per‐ 50 m with both axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h must not be
formance vehicles. exceeded. Beyond these limits, only transporting is permitted.

VEHICLES WITH REAR-WHEEL DRIVE

* NOTE Permitted towing methods

Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only
# Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail forwards with the driver on board
to recognise potential dangers.
Front axle raised No

Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in case of a breakdown, position with a steering wheel lock
rather than towing it.
4MATIC VEHICLES
For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow bar. Do not
use tow bar systems. Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only

forwards with the driver on board
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly Front axle raised No
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Rear axle raised No

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ONLY TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE IS

PERMITTED:

R The driver display is not working.

R The driver display shows the message á Towing not permitted See
Owner's Manual.

753

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Permissible towing methods (Mercedes-AMG * NOTE

E Performance) Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over
long distances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high
* NOTE
speeds or over long distances.
Damage caused by towing
Towing can damage the hybrid drive system. # A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.

# Have the vehicle loaded and transported rather than towed. # A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the & WARNING

Risk of accident when towing a vehicle with too much weight
ground IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOWED IS HEAVIER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods. GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS
CAN ARISE:
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.
R The towing eye breaks off.
OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE BATTERY IS DISCHARGED: R The combination oscillates and can capsize.

R The vehicle cannot be started. # Before towing, check whether the vehicle to be towed exceeds
R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied. the permissible gross mass.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The transmission cannot be
shifted to position i or j. If a vehicle is to be towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the transmission can‐ # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found
not be shifted to position i or if the display does not show on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 856).
anything, transport the vehicle (/ page 756). A tow truck with # Fit the towing eye (/ page 757).
lifting equipment is required for vehicle transport.
# Fasten the towing device.

754

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

* NOTE & WARNING

Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar Risk of accidents due to restricted safety-related functions during
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. towing
SAFETY-RELEVANT FUNCTIONS ARE RESTRICTED OR NO LONGER
AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 198).
R The vehicle is switched off.
# Do not activate the HOLD function.
R The brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
# Deactivate tow-away protection R The power supply or the on-board electrical system is defective.
(/ page 220).

# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 456). If your vehicle is being towed, considerably more force may be required
for steering and braking.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the transmission to posi‐
In addition, important vehicle display messages cannot be seen if the
tion i.
driver display is faulty.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door # Use a tow bar.
or front passenger door; the transmission otherwise automatically shifts
to position j. # Before towing, ensure that the driver's display is operational
and the steering can move freely.
# Release the electric parking brake.

* NOTE
Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the
vehicles could be damaged.

# Pull away slowly and smoothly.

755

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Loading up the vehicle for transport 4MATIC VEHICLES/VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Plug-in hybrid: transportation of vehicles should only be carried out by pro‐

fessional towing companies.

# Observe the notes on towing (/ page 75).

# Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load up the
vehicle.
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same trans‐
port vehicle.
% You can also attach the towing device to the trailer hitch.

* NOTE
# Shift the automatic transmission to position i. Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehi‐
cle
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the
% The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the transport vehicle.
event of damage to the electrics. To shift to i, provide the
on-board electrical system with power (/ page 70).

Towing eye storage location

# Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter.
R Ensure that all wheels are on the transportation surface. PLUG-IN HYBRID
R Ensure that the vehicle is parallel to the direction of travel.

# Put the selector lever into position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Stop the vehicle and switch off the power supply.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

The towing eye 1 is located in a holder in the boot on the left.

756

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Not plug-in hybrid

# To push out the cover at the recess: depending on the respective

vehicle version, use a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver, to prise out the
The towing eye 1 is located under the boot floor in the loading sill. cover at the recess 2.

# Screw in the towing eye in a clockwise direction as far as it will go.

% Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is located in a

different position in the boot. Vehicles with trailer hitch: vehicles with trailer hitch do not feature a holding
fixture at the back for the towing eye. Affix the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

# After removing the towing eye, reattach the cover 1 in the bumper.
Fitting and removing the towing eye
* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle as a result of incorrect use of the towing
eye or trailer hitch
The vehicle could sustain damage if the towing eye or trailer hitch is
used to pull on the vehicle during recovery situations.

# The towing eye and trailer hitch should only be used to tow
the vehicle.

# Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to pull on the vehicle
during recovery situations.

# Press the cover 1 inwards at the marking and remove.

757

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Tow-starting the vehicle

VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
# Observe the following note on material damage:

* NOTE
Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-
starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-star‐

ted.

758

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses * NOTE

Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
& WARNING Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to
Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines malfunction.
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can
with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.
enter the fuse box.
This could result in a fire. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is
# Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses contain‐ positioned correctly on the fuse box.
ing the correct amperage.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause determined and rectified
at a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE
ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:
Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
systems or their functions being considerably restricted. R All electrical consumers are switched off.
# Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respec‐ R The vehicle is switched off.
tive specified fuse rating.
THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:
Replace blown fuses with equivalent fuses, identifiable by their colour and R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 760)
label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in
R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 761)
the fuse assignment diagram.
R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 761)
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the boot (/ page 762). R Fuse box in the boot (/ page 762)

759

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses

Opening and closing the fuse box in the # Turn both retaining clips 2 on cover 1 on the driver's side a quarter-
turn clockwise.
engine compartment
# Fold cover 1 upwards.
Requirements

R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 72).

OPENING

& WARNING
Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet
is open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you
could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if # Loosen screws 3 and remove fuse box lid 4 from the top.
you need to open the bonnet.
CLOSING
# Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid 4.
# Open the bonnet (/ page 713).

760

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cock‐

pit
Requirements:

R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 72).

# Insert lid 4 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.

# Fold down lid 4 of the fuse box and tighten screws 3.

The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover.

# To open: open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

# To close: reinsert cover 1.

Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at a Mercedes-

Benz Service Centre.
# Fold down cover 1.

# Turn both retaining clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn anti-clock‐ Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
wise. passenger footwell
# Close the bonnet. Requirements

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 72).

761

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses

# To open: fold out and remove cover 1.

# To close: reinsert cover 1.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot

Requirements

Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 72).

# To open: fold out and remove cover 1.

# To close: reinsert cover 1.

Back to Contents762

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres

Wheels and tyres

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐

764
acteristics

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and

765
tyres

Notes on snow chains 767

Tyre pressure 768

Wheel change 772

Emergency spare wheel 784

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics

when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are
damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics.

If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and
have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

764

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. There is a risk of
an accident.
# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any
damaged tyres immediately. On a wet road surface the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular
where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.

# Check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact
surface across the entire width of all tyres on a regular basis.

MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR

R Summer tyres: 3 mm
R M+S tyres: 4 mm

# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescri‐

bed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

# Replace the tyres immediately if the legally-prescribed limit for

the minimum tread depth is reached.

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT

LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A
LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 768).

765

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.

R Check the valve caps.
R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across
the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres
4 mm.

766

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Notes on snow chains

Notes on snow chains

R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.

& WARNING R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist
Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains when snow chains are fitted.
If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag
against the vehicle body or chassis components.
% You can permanently limit the speed for winter tyre mode
# Never fit snow chains to the front wheels.
(/ page 432).
# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

% You can deactivate ESP® to start off (/ page 423). This allows
the wheels to spin, achieving increased tractive power.
* NOTE
Damage to body or suspension parts caused by fitted snow chains
Fitting snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC models can damage
body or suspension parts.

# Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC models.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:

R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations.

You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains of the same
quality standard.
R Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.

767

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure

Notes on tyre pressure HIGH OR LOW TYRE PRESSURE CAN:

R Shorten the service life of the tyres.

& WARNING R Cause increased tyre damage.
Risk of an accident due to tyre pressure that is insufficient or too R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due
high to aquaplaning.
TYRES WITH A PRESSURE THAT IS INSUFFICIENT OR TOO HIGH
POSE THE FOLLOWING DANGERS IN PARTICULAR:
& WARNING
R The tyres can burst. Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering‑ and braking
may be greatly impaired. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures and check the tyre # Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
pressure of all tyres including the spare wheel:
# Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
R monthly
# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified
R when the load changes
specialist workshop.
R before embarking on a longer journey
R when the operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving
Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted
R when driving at over 250 km/h
tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler
flap (/ page 769).
# Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appear‐
ance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.

768

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure

ONLY CORRECT TYRE PRESSURES WHEN THE TYRES ARE COLD. CONDI‐ If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure
TIONS FOR COLD TYRES: information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condi‐
tion.
R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at
least three hours. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre
R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel con‐
sumption may then increase slightly.

The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table
increases, so too does the tyre pressure. for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual num‐
ber of seats may differ from this.
NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION
Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the
tyre pressure table for increased load. Tyre pressure monitoring system
FUNCTION OF THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
Tyre pressure table The system checks the tyre pressure and the temperature of the tyres fitted to
the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature are displayed on the driver display.

In the event of significant pressure loss or excessive temperature of the tyres,

you will be warned by display messages (/ page 953) or the warning light
h on the driver display (/ page 978).

The tyre pressure monitoring system serves solely as an aid. It is the driver's
responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
suitable for the operating situation.

In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update
the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can,
however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure
The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres monitoring system manually (/ page 770).
approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold
tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the
vehicle.

769

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure

SYSTEM LIMITS R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving: Current val‐
THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING ues are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values of
SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR: each tyre are displayed as soon as they are known to the system.
R Tyre pressure monitor active: The teach-in process of the system is not yet
R Incorrect reference values were taught in. complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.
R Sudden pressure loss caused, e.g. by a foreign object penetrating the
tyre.
# Compare the current tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure
R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source. for the current operating status (/ page 769). Additionally, observe the
CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSURE WITH THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR‐ notes on cold tyres (/ page 768).
ING SYSTEM
Requirements: % The values displayed on the driver display may deviate from
those of the tyre pressure gauge as they relate to sea level. At
R The vehicle is switched on. high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure
gauge are higher than those shown on the driver display.
Driver display:
4 © 5 Service RESTARTING THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
# Press a to confirm. Requirements:

ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEARS: R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective oper‐
ating condition on each of the four wheels (/ page 768).
R Current tyre pressure of each wheel:
RESTART THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM IN THE FOLLOWING
SITUATIONS:

R The tyre pressure has changed.

R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

770

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure

Driver display:
4 © 5 Service
# Show tyre pressure: press a.

# Show options: press a again.

# Select Tyre pressure and confirm with a.

The driver display shows the message Use current tyre pressures as new
reference values?.
# Select Yes and confirm the restart with a.
The driver display shows the message Tyre pressure monitor restarted.
Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp
goes out.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the
current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre
pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
If the tyre pressure values are not within the prescribed range, the
message Please correct tyre pressure appears.

771

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

Wheel change

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres & WARNING

Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing
& WARNING capacity or the permissible speed rating
Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre dam‐
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or age and could cause the tyres to explode.
components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be # Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your
damaged.
vehicle model.
# Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the # Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating
specifications of the original part.
required for your vehicle.
FOR WHEELS, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:

R Designation
R Type

FOR TYRES, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:

R Designation
R Manufacturer
R Type

772

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

* NOTE * NOTE
Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres
sizes Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded
been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. tyres.

THESE TYRES ARE SPECIFICALLY CONFIGURED FOR ACTIVE For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.
SAFETY SYSTEMS, E.G. ABS, ESP® AND 4MATIC, AND ARE MARKED
AS FOLLOWS:
# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their
previous usage.
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tyres with run-flat char‐
acteristics, only for certain wheels) NOTE
*
R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles

Otherwise certain properties, e.g. driving characteristics, noise emis‐ Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decrea‐
sions, consumption, etc., could be adversely affected. Furthermore, ses, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over
other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and obstacles increases.
axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre # Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
or the vehicle.
# Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps,
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and
manhole covers and potholes.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
# Avoid particularly high kerbs.

773

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or
* NOTE which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.
Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in
potholes BEFORE PURCHASING AND USING NON-APPROVED ACCESSORIES, VISIT
A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP AND ENQUIRE ABOUT:
Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres.
R Suitability
# Only park on level surfaces if possible.
R Legal provisions
# Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking. R Factory recommendations

* NOTE & WARNING

Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fit‐ Risk of accident with sport tyres
ting tools The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre com‐
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic pound means that the risk of skidding or aquaplaning on wet roads is
components in the wheel. increased.

Positioning tyre-fitting tools in the area of the valve may damage the In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature
electronic components. and tyre running temperature.

# Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
valve.
# Use i M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 7 °C.
# Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Only use tyres suitable for the intended use.

* NOTE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN SELECTING, FITTING AND REPLACING

Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures TYRES:
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with sum‐ R Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific
mer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre.
tyre type for your vehicle.
# At temperatures below 7 °C use i M+S tyres. R The use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation
can be advisable.

774

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist work‐
MOExtended tyres) and the same make. shop.
R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).
VEHICLES WITH AN AMG DRIVER'S PACKAGE
Only fit a different size of wheel in the event of a flat tyre, to enable you
to drive to a specialist workshop.
& WARNING
R Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the
Risk of accident caused by non-approved tyre types
tyres.
If you use tyre types that have not been adapted to changes made to
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalid‐
the factory speed limit, this can have the following consequences:
ate the vehicle's general operating permit.
R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels R The tyres are not suitable for high speeds and the corresponding
must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure moni‐ driving dynamics.
toring system. R The tyres wear unevenly and affect the roadworthiness of the
R At temperatures below 7 °C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked vehicle.
i M+S for all wheels. R ABS, ESP® and cruise control operation are restricted.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
This can jeopardise road safety.
R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread.
R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. # Only use tyre types that have been approved for the maximum
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be permissible speed set and the vehicle.
indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
R Drive the vehicle with new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris‐
tics: Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT
kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with
tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.

% You can permanently limit the speed for driving with winter tyres
(/ page 432).

775

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

Notes on changing wheels Notes on storing wheels

WHEN STORING WHEELS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:
& WARNING
Risk of injury through different wheel sizes R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving
characteristics. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be dam‐

aged. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
# Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and With the exception of some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equip‐
tyres have the same dimensions. ped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find
out which tyre-change tool kit is necessary and approved for a wheel change
on your vehicle.
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different
dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A
Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" WHEEL:
(/ page 772).
R Jack
THE WEAR PATTERNS ON THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS DIFFER: R Chock
R front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder R Wheel wrench
R rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre R Centring pin

Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly % The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the sticker affixed to the jack.
wheels every 5000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction The jack is maintenance-free. In the event of a malfunction,
of rotation is maintained for the wheels. please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag 1 in the boot.

776

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

% When stowing the tool bag, ensure that it is adequately secured. Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements:

R The vehicle is not on a slope.

R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
R The required tyre-change tool kit is available.

% If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit,

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS: consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable
tools.
R Jack
R Gloves # Apply the electric parking brake manually.
R Wheel wrench
R Centring pin # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead posi‐
tion.
R Folding chock
R Ratchet wrench for jack # Shift the transmission to position j.

# Switch off the vehicle.

Overview of the plug-in hybrid tyre-change
Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
tool kit
#

# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the
The tyre-change tool kit is located in the tool bag 1 in the boot floor. wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# Unload the vehicle.

777

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

Removing and fitting wheel trim/hub caps # Using wheel wrench 3, turn the hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove
it.
Requirements
Fitting:
R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 777).
# Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
PLASTIC HUB CAP
Removal: % Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm.
# Turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub
cap.
Raising the vehicle for a wheel change
Fitting:
Requirements:
# Make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap has been turned anti-
R There are no persons in the vehicle.
clockwise.
R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 777).
# Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub
cap is felt and heard to engage.
IMPORTANT NOTES ON USING THE JACK:
ALUMINIUM HUB CAP
R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved for Mercedes-
Benz to raise the vehicle.
R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short
time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under
the vehicle.
R The jack must be placed on a firm, level and non-slip surface. If neces‐
sary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
R The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support
Removal: point.
# Position socket 2 from the tyre-change tool kit on the hub cap 1.

# Position the wheel wrench 3 on the socket 2.

778

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

Position of the jack support points

& WARNING
Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point
of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

RULES OF CONDUCT WHEN THE VEHICLE IS RAISED:

# Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the
vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically
R Do not put your hands or feet under the vehicle. under the jacking point of the vehicle.
R Do not lie under the vehicle.
R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
R Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid. * NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to the jack
If the jack has not been positioned at the prescribed jack support
points, the vehicle may suffer damage.

# Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for
this purpose.

# Take the ratchet wrench out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on
the hexagon nut of the jack in such a way that the lettering "AUF" is
# Using the wheel spanner, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish
visible.
to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.

779

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

* NOTE
Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel
Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repo‐
sitioning the wheel.

# Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when remov‐

ing and repositioning.

* NOTE
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack support point 1. Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
# Turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from
the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 780).

Removing a wheel
Requirements:

R The vehicle is raised (/ page 778). # Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.

During wheel change, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this
could impair the level of comfort when braking. # Remove the wheel.

# Fit the new wheel (/ page 781).

780

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

Fitting a new wheel * NOTE

Requirements: Damage to the ceramic brake disc during wheel change
Vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal and repositioning
R The wheel to be changed is removed and the centring pin is screwed in of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and
(/ page 780). damage it.

# Take particular care.

& WARNING # Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring
Risk of accident from losing a wheel pin.
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose,
as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.

# Never oil or grease the threads. * NOTE

Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel
# In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repo‐
specialist workshop immediately.
sitioning the wheel.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads # Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when remov‐
replaced.
ing and repositioning.
# Do not continue driving.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on.
# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 772).

& WARNING
For tyres with a specified running direction, an arrow on the side wall of the Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
tyre indicates the correct running direction. Observe the direction of rotation
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised,
when assembling.
the jack could tip.
Note on AMG vehicles: # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on
the ground.

781

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

# Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Wheel change"

(/ page 772).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indica‐
ted until they are hand-tight.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indica‐
ted 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.

# Tighten the wheel bolts to the prescribed torque, evenly in a crosswise

pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5). Note the following tighten‐
ing torques for the wheel bolts.

# Unscrew and remove the centring pin.

# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is hand-

tight.

# Lower the vehicle and tighten wheel bolts with the prescribed tightening
torque. (/ page 782).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements: 1 Specified tightening torque: 150 Nm (long wheel bolt).
2 Specified tightening torque: 130 Nm (short wheel bolt).
R The new wheel has been fitted (/ page 781).

# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the lettering "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise.

782

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Wheel change

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not
tightened to the prescribed torque.

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a

qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque
checked immediately.

# Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if neces‐
sary.

% The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency

spare wheel:

# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pres‐
sure monitoring system (/ page 770).

783

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel FOLLOWING NOTES ON FITTING AN EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL:

R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted

is 80 km/h.
& WARNING
Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions R Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regard‐
or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency less of wear.
spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteris‐ R Use the included wheel bolts for the emergency spare wheel.
tics of the vehicle. R Specified tightening torque: 130 Nm.
To prevent hazardous situations: R Check the tyre pressure of the fitted emergency spare wheel and adjust
it as necessary.
# Drive carefully.

# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare % The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emer‐
wheel that differs in size.
gency spare wheel.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.

# Do not deactivate ESP®. % Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emer‐
gency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure monitoring system
# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency
size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pres‐
new wheel must have the correct dimensions. sure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system when the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare ALSO TAKE NOTE OF THE FOLLOWING TOPICS:
wheel bag in the boot.
R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 768)

784

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel

R Tyre pressure table (/ page 769)

R Notes on fitting tyres (/ page 772)
R Fitting an emergency spare wheel (/ page 777)

Inflating the emergency spare wheel

# Pull filler hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tyre inflation compressor
* NOTE housing.
Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long
# Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten
# Insert plug 7 of filler hose 1 in the socket on the tyre inflation com‐
minutes without interruption. pressor and then turn it until plug 7 engages.

# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emergency spare wheel.
Requirements:
# Screw union nut 2 of filler hose 1 onto the valve.
R The emergency spare wheel has been fitted correctly. (/ page 777)
# Make sure the on and off switch 4 of the tyre inflation compressor is
set to 0.
% Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker of # Insert the plug 3 into a socket in your vehicle.
the emergency spare wheel and on the tyre inflation compressor.
R Cigarette lighter socket
# Remove the sticker with the inscription 80 km/h from the tyre inflation R 12 V socket (/ page 273)
compressor and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver's field
of vision. R Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter in the Digital Owner's Manual
# Remove the tyre inflation compressor from the stowage space under the R Observe the notes on sockets (/ page 273).
boot floor. (/ page 74)
# Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply
(/ page 328).

785

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel

# Press on/off switch 4 on the tyre inflation compressor to I.

The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. The
tyre pressure is shown on manometer 5.

# Inflate the tyre to the specified tyre pressure.

% The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emer‐

gency spare wheel.

# When the specified tyre pressure has been reached, press on/off switch
4 on the tyre inflation compressor to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched off.

# Press the start/stop button to switch off the power sup‐

ply.

# If the tyre pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure
release valve button 6 until the correct tyre pressure has been reached.

# Unscrew union nut 2 of filler hose 1 from the valve.

# Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.

# Stow filler hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower section of the tyre inflation
compressor housing.

# Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the vehicle.

Back to Contents786

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data

Technical data
This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Notes on technical data 788

On-board electronics 789

Regulatory radio information 791

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine

856
number overview

Operating fluids 858

Vehicle data 871

Trailer hitch 877

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Notes on technical data

Notes on technical data

The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The

data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain
further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the
COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are sup‐
plied upon delivery of the vehicle.

788

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data On-board electronics

On-board electronics

Notes on tampering with the engine electron‐ & WARNING

ics Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromag‐
netic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in
* NOTE
the following situations, in particular:
Premature wear through improper maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. R The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection
aerial.
# Always have work on the engine electronics and related com‐
ponents carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified spe‐

cialist workshop.
Two-way radios # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect
NOTES ON FITTING TWO-WAY RADIOS them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

& WARNING
Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the elec‐
tromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the
vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic compo‐

nents carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

789

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data On-board electronics

If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply
* NOTE and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufac‐
Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with turer's supplements when fitting.
the instructions for installation and use
MOBILE PHONE TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installa‐
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not
tion and use of two-way radios are not observed.
exceed the values in the following table.
# Only use approved frequency bands.
FREQUENCY BAND AND MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION OUTPUT
# Observe the maximum permissible output power in these fre‐ Frequency band Maximum transmission output
quency bands.
2‑m‑ frequency band 50 W
# Only use approved aerial positions. 144 - 174 MHz

Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 10 W

380 - 460 MHz

Mobile phone 2W
2G

Mobile phone 0.5 W

3G/4G/5G

THE FOLLOWING CAN BE USED IN THE VEHICLE WITHOUT RESTRICTIONS:

R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW

R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 -410 MHz fre‐
quency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)
1 Rear roof area
R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fitting an aerial to the roof area
is not permitted.
THERE ARE NO RESTRICTIONS WHEN POSITIONING THE AERIAL ON THE
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installa‐ OUTSIDE OF THE VEHICLE FOR THE FOLLOWING FREQUENCY BANDS:
tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting
two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
R 2G/3G/4G/5G

790

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Regulatory radio information

Specific information on wireless applications

in accordance with 2014/53/EU
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-
Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications.

TYPE OF WIRELESS APPLICATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength

Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m

Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m

Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m

Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field strength level
decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz

Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m

Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitor‐ 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
ing

Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP

Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP

Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP

RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP

791

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength

Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 40 mW EIRP

Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak

24 GHz radar 24 GHz ISM band (24.15–24.25 GHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP

76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP

79 GHz radar 77–79 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP

Compensator ECE DE003 and ECE DE004 GSM (E-GSM 900) < +33 dBm
GSM (E-GSM 1800) < +30 dBm

UMTS (I, III, VIII) < +23 dBm

LTE (B1, B3, B7, B8, B20) < +23 dBm

HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz) < 20 dBm
Services) WLAN (5736-5833 MHz) < 14 dBm

GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +33 dBm (±2 dB)

GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1) < +30 dBm (±2 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2) < +27 dBm (±3 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2) < +26 dBm (± 3 dB/-4 dB)

UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)

LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)

GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only

RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4) < +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4) < +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)

UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)

792

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength

LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
3)

LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)

GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

OVERVIEW OF MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer Manufacturer information

ADC ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems

GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau,
Regulatory radio identifiers / specific notes Germany

Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229

The tables and sections contain the following regulatory radio information: Leonberg, Germany

R Manufacturer information Bury BURY SP. Z O.O., UL. WOJSKA POLSKIEGO 4,

39-300 Mielec, Poland
R Required regulatory radio identifiers, listed by country/region:
- Manufacturer's specifications Continental Antenna Continental Advanced Antenna GmbH, Römer‐
ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany
- Model designations
- Radio equipment approval numbers Continental Automotive Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstraße
12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany
R Specific information on wireless vehicle components
Continental Automotive Technologies Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH,
VDO-Straße 1, 64832 Babenhausen, Germany
Further information and updates are available at the following web address:
Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial
https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA

793

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Manufacturer information Manufacturer Manufacturer information

Harman Becker Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, Valeo Valeo Telematik und Akustik GmbH, Max-
Becker-Goehring-Straße 18, 76307 Karlsbad, Planck-Straße 28-32, 61381 Friedrichsdorf
Germany Germany

HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75, Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsvägen 22,
59552 Lippstadt, Germany 44737 Vårgårda, Sweden

Hirschmann Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH, Vitesco Vitesco Technologies GmbH, Siemensstrasse
Stuttgarter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlin‐ 12, 93055 Regensburg Germany
gen, Germany
WITTE-Velbert WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr.
Huf Baolong Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewer‐ 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany
bestraße 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany
ALGERIA
HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger
Straße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany

MARQUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604

Rietheim-Weilheim, Germany

Meta System Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimberti 5, 42124

Reggio Emilia, Italy

Molex Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH, Märkische Straße

72, 15806 Zossen, Germany

Molex Technologies Molex Technologies GmbH, Mizarstraße 3,

12529 Schönefeld, Germany

Panasonic Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH,

Robert-Bosch-Straße 27, 63225 Langen, Ger‐
many

Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park,

Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ire‐
land, United Kingdom

Sennheiser Sennheiser electronic GmbH & Co. KG, Am

Labor 1, 30900 Wedemark, Germany

794

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 3681/1-73.OA 1639/DT/DG/
sor) ARPT/15
Continental Antenna RKE223GNS (locking system) 71/H/ANF/2021
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) 652/1/DT/DG/ARPCE/2020
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 122/H/ANF/2021
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 56/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 136/H/ANF/2023
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 3994/1.69-DA/2098/DT/DG/
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 122/H/ANF/2021 ARPT/17
tem)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 123/H/ANF/2021 sor) ARPT/17

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 106/H/ANF/2020 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 32/H/ANF/2021
tem)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 107/H/ANF/2020

ARGENTINA
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 133/H/ANF/2022
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 198/H/ANF/2021
sor)

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 105/H/ANF/2022

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 188/H/ANF/2021

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) C-18005

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 189/H/ANF/2021

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) H-28818

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 190/H/ANF/2021

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) C-2377

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 195/H/ANF/2021

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) H-26206

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 193/H/ANF/2021

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) H-24637

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 194/H/ANF/2021

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) H-24376

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 186/H/ANF/2021

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) H-28998

795

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ H-17929 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) H-21034
tem)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) H-21035
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) H-23974
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) H-17598
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) C-29127
nologies MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) H-23101

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) C-29126 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) H-24933
nologies
MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system) H-29810
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head C-29128
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) H-17213

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUMPLUS LF2 C-29930

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) H-17212
nologies (head unit)

MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) H-30378

HELLA DM4 (locking system) H-17845

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) H-23166

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) H-15694

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) H-30159

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) H-15695

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-4788

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) H-28310
sor)

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ H-27592

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) H-23292
sor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) H-25586

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) H-28067

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) H-20495

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) H-15541

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ H-20959

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) H-11545
sor)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) H-17689

796

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation

number
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) H-30148
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ H-24664
tem) Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit)

AUSTRALIA Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head unit)

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) HUF HUF13145 (locking system)

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

797

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number

Manufacturer Model designation Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ URCA_TA/2017_119
tem)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UCRA_TA/2016_009
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ UCRA_TA/2020_032
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) fier)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) HELLA DM4 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_078

Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor) HELLA RS6 (locking system) URCA_TA_2023_174

BAHAMAS Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_053

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_052

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) URCA_TA/2022_043
number

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) URCA_TA_2022_057

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2014_082

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2023_211

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_167

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA/2017_094

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2017_184
sor)

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2017_157

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) URCA_TA_2017_042

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_195

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_128

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2022_077

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_129

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2020_068

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_021

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2023_028

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_141

798

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) URCA_TA_2020_141, Vitesco Technologies HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) URCA_TA_2023_247
URCA_TA_2022_228
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ URCA_TA_2020_056
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_031 tem)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_033 BELARUS

MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) URCA_TA_2024_025 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_250

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) URCA_TA/2023_245 Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2024_060 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_TA/2015_009 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
sor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2019_101
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2021_001
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2020_046
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ URCA_TA_2019_247
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (tyre pres‐ URCA_TA_2024_056

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
sure sensor)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_169

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_168

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2021_027

Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication module)

Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor) URCA_TA/2015_063

799

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Manufacturer Model designation

HELLA DM4 (locking system) Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) BOTSWANA

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2018/2026
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2022/7599
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2020/5186
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4674
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2017/3788
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2022/7110
MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) BOCRA/TA/2019/4387
MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ BOCRA/TA/2019/5050
fier)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5075

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2023/8144

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ BOCRA/TA/2019/4661

tem)

800

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

HELLA DM4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4662 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2021/6191

HELLA RS6 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2023/8610 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ BOCRA/TA/2020/5342
tem)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4724
BRAZIL
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4723
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2022/7099
These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) HUF13145 cause interference in properly approved systems.

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4664 REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4389

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4388 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4390
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 02217-14-06068
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5135
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) 06783-19-02496
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4758
Bury A167 820 19 03 /A247 820 84 20280-23-04457
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2020/5473 02 (mobile phone charger)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4359 Bury A247 820 86 02 (mobile 20288-23-04457
phone charger)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4360
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) 03691-15-05298
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4687
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 07359-21-12817
MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2023/8771
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 3691-15-5298
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 00325-20-02149
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4980

801

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 01334-23-02149 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 01392-11-02930

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 03189-17-02856 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 00616-17-02930
tem)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 06218-19-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 12520-23-06353
nologies MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 11149-20-02930

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 12525-23-06353 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 03149-19-02930
nologies
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 03756-15-02930
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 12522-23-06353
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 03757-15-02930

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUMPLUS LF2 17830-23-06353

Molex Technologies HUB-8 (mobile phone charger) 19286-23-12116
nologies (head unit)

Molex Technologies HUB-9d / HUB-9e (mobile 19287-23-12116

HELLA DM4 (locking system) 04689-17-05364
phone charger)

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 1855-12-5762

Vitesco Technologies HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) 18924-23-15869

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 1787-12-8058

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 03034-20-07018
tem)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 08539-19-03616
sor)
Further specific information
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) HUF13145
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 03627-15-06643
This system is not protected against harmful interference and must not cause
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 00053-13-06643 interference in properly approved systems.
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 01333-17-02930 This product is approved by ANATEL in accordance with the procedures set
out in Resolution 242/2000 and complies with the relevant technical require‐
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 01395-11-02930
ments. Further information can be found on the https://www.anatel.gov.br

802

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

This device operates in secondary mode, that is to say it has no protection

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and number
must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DTA-005043
This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Direc‐
tive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) DTA-023993
the applicable technical requirements.
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ DTA-017264
tem)
More information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br
HELLA DM4 (locking system) DTA-020187
BRUNEI DARUSSALAM
HELLA RS6 (locking system) AA-000081
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DTA-001661

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DTA-000794

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) DTA-018051

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DTA-004005 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-011045
sor)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) DTA-020359
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure DTA-003757
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DTA-004222 monitor control unit)

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DTA-011039 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) DTA-017926

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DTA-006601 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DTA-006138

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DTA-006678 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DTA-000615

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) DTA-018042 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DTA-019403

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DTA-006665 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DTA-000068

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ DTA-004998 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DTA-000066
fier)

803

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) LPD-38890 Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor DTA-003893
control unit)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DTA-003525
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor DRQ-D-
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DTA-005850 control unit) MAJU-02-2011-111083

MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system) DTA-032943 Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (locking DTA-031587

system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DTA-011312
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DTA-004000
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DTA-011313
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DTA-003999
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) DTA-031059
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DTA-010423
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DTA-032673
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DTA-006216
MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) DTA-029861
Vitesco Technologies HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) DTA-030296
MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) DTA-032674
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ DTA-005628
tem)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-005291
sor)
EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-003581
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DRQ-D-JATI-07-2000-109000

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DTA-025258

sor) Manufacturer Model designation

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-025258 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-025258 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor)

804

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Manufacturer Model designation

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system)

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)

HELLA DM4 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system)

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

805

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number

Manufacturer Model designation Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 7M-7E7-X25-DSR

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ BR3-1M-GE2-16A
tem)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 7M-7E7-X09-DSR
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) nologies

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 7M-7E7-X05-DSR
nologies
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 7M-7E7-X03-DSR
GHANA nologies unit)

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS HELLA DM4 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE2-157

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X45
number
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X47
NCA APPROVED
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 7E6-M1-X14-SRD
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-152
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) EX6-6M-GE2-16C
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) 7E6-M1-16C-SRD
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X49
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-152
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X50
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X51
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) 7E6-M1-X9B-SRD
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ZRO-M8-7E3-X53
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE-129
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-225
fier)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ZRO-1H-7E3-26E

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-277

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) SRO-1M-7E4-11B

806

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval INDONESIA

number
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C
ADC ARS3-A (radar sensor) 97128/SDPPI/2024
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) HS-7E7-262-DSR
7163

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) HS-7E7-XE5-DSR ADC ARS3-B (radar sensor) 97129/SDPPI/2024
7163
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (locking 7M-7E7-272-DSR
system)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) ZRO-1H-7E3-142 ADC ARS4-B (radar sensor) 97127/ SDPPI/ 2024
7163
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 7E5-7M-X72-RDR

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 68676/SDPPI/2020
Vitesco Technologies HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) 7M-7E7-134-DSR
7163
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ SRO-1M-7E4-X59
tem)

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 90362/SDPPI/2023

7163

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) 84770/SDPPI/2022

7163

ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) 89748/SDPPI/2023

7163

807

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 74264/SDPPI/2021 Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) 86858/SDPPI/2022
7163 84754

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 74267/SDPPI/2021 han spesifikasi yang dapat
7163 menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) 74265/SDPPI/2021

7163
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 76621/SDPPI/2021
7163

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 74266/SDPPI/2021

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
7163
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 67882/SDPPI/2020
7163

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ 86957/ SDPPI/ 2022

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ fier) 10325
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

808

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 87836/SDPPI/2023 Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) 66678/SDPPI/2020 7163
7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ han spesifikasi yang dapat
han spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik
menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Continental Automotive NTG7 MID 92192/SDPPI/2023 7163

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 88721/SDPPI/2023 (Headunit)
7163 Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Continental Automotive NTG7 HIGH 92190/SDPPI/2023 7163
(Headunit)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 69379/SDPPI/2020 Production: Hungary
tem) Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
7163 han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

809

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM 92188/SDPPI/2023 7163 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 88579/SDPPI/2023 7163
(Headunit) nologies

Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS 92195/SDPPI/2023 7163 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 88478/SDPPI/2023 7163
(Headunit) nologies unit)

Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 88477/SDPPI/2023 7163 Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID 64019/SDPPI/2019 7163
nologies (Headunit)
Production: Germany
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

810

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH 64018/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 MID 65544/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit) (Headunit)
Production: Germany
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID 63775/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH 70513/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit) (Headunit)
Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH 63774/SDPPI/2019 7163 Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM 65543/SDPPI/2020 7163
(Headunit) (Headunit)
Production: Hungary
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

811

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS 70512/SDPPI/2020 7163 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 71369 /SDPPI/2020
(Headunit) 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
menimbulkan gangguan fisik han spesifikasi yang dapat
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ menimbulkan gangguan fisik
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Harman Becker NTG7 RSU (control unit) 66387/SDPPI/2020 7163

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 72974 /SDPPI/2021
7163
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 69378/SDPPI/2020
7163
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 82675/SDPPI/2022
7163
Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 72438/SDPPI/2021
sor) 7163

812

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 78368/SDPPI/2021 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 67373/SDPPI/2020
7163 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 26742/SDPPI/2015 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 80676/SDPPI/2022
3533 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

HUF HUF13145 (NFC reader) 83988/SDPPI/2022 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 80621/SDPPI/2022
7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat Dilarang melakukan peruba‐
menimbulkan gangguan fisik han spesifikasi yang dapat
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ menimbulkan gangguan fisik
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 41121/SDPPI/2018

5125

813

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 67372/SDPPI/2020 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 75282/ SDPPI/ 2021
7163 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 64126/SDPPI/2019 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 75285/ SDPPI/ 2021
7163 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 90695/SDPPI/2023 7163 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 82980/SDPPI/2022
7163 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

814

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Molex WCH-302b (control unit) 71668/SDPPI/2020 7163 Panasonic DAIRSE (control unit) 63550/SDPPI/2019

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Dilarang melakukan peruba‐

han spesifikasi yang dapat han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Molex WCH-302d (control unit) 71220/SDPPI/2020 7163 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020
9338

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 75465/SDPPI/2021

han spesifikasi yang dapat sor) 7163
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 72765/SDPP/2021

7163
Molex WCH-302e (control unit) 71669/SDPPI/2020 7163

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 57058/SDPPI/2018

han spesifikasi yang dapat sor) 3612
menimbulkan gangguan fisik
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐ Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure 25626/SDPPI/2015
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya monitor control unit) 3612

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) 62396/SDPPI/2020

7163

815

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval ISRAEL

number
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
7163 number

Approval number of the Min‐

istry of Communications:
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) 74749/SDPPI/2021
7163 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 55-09697

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) 55-14225

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 66830/SDPPI/2020 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 55-07525
7163
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 55-08783

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 55-08334

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 78366/SDPPI/2021
7163 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 55-08333

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 55-08395

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 66792/SDPPI/2020 Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) 55-12854
7163
Bosch MBCI2LS3PR1 (head unit) 51-91228

Bosch MBCI2LS4PR1 (head unit) 51-91226

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 67233/SDPPI/2020
tem) 10325 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 55-13929

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ 51-97825

Dilarang melakukan peruba‐ fier)
han spesifikasi yang dapat
menimbulkan gangguan fisik Continental Automotive D-WMI2017B (control unit) 51-75654
dan/atau elektromagnetik ter‐
hadap lingkungan sekitarnya Continental Automotive D-WMI2017A (control unit) 51-75367

Continental Automotive D-WMI2016A (control unit) 55-08177

816

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) 55-08179 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 51-62759

Continental Automotive RKE213E1 55-13929 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 51-49357

(Antennenverstärker)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 55-12320
Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS 51-97825
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ 63-63571
(Antennenverstärker)
sor)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 51-87871

Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure 63-66757
(Schließsystem) monitor control unit)

Continental Automotive CMKG2 51-92059 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) 55-14153

(Schließsystem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 51-87872
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless 55-13749
(Schließsystem) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 55-13847

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 51-90718 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 55-12215
nologies
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 55-12214
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 51-90717
nologies MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 51-85192

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 51-90719 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 51-86840
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 55-14331
Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH-IL 51-89476
(Headunit) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 51-94449

Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUMPLUS-IL 51-89475 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 51-94450

(Headunit)
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) 56-03260

HELLA DM4 (locking system) 55-14271

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) 51-97974

HELLA RS6 (locking system) 51-98663

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) 51-78338

817

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation

number
Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-73152
sor) Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 51-77898 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ 51-64111 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 55-09441
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure 51-29611
monitor control unit)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor 55-06040

HUF HUF13145 (locking system)
control unit)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor 51-79817
control unit)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 55-08176
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 55-08301
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ 55-12216
tem) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) 56-01011 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

JAMAICA
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)

818

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation CANADA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) number

Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (locking system) Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) IC: 7812D-CMKG2

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) IC: NTG7QMIDLF2
nologies
JAPAN
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) IC: NTG7QHIGLF2
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS nologies

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head IC: NTG7QPREF2

nologies unit)

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2R
number

Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2L

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TMWK2211004648KR

Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IC:2099A-BTT100

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 003-230113
Transmitter)
nologies

Sennheiser M3IETW2 C (Charging Case) CAN ICS-3(B)/NMB-3(B)

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 003-230112
nologies unit)
Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) 28616-HFA30
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) 201-190814 (R)
KUWAIT
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) 201-190815 (L)
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio 020-180077
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
Transmitter)
number

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) 209-J00495

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) Ref. 5873

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Ref. 6716

Sennheiser M3IETW2 (Momentum True Ref. 4870

Wireless 2)

819

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number

Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Ref. 4871 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
Transmitter) number

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) Ref. 7272 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) HIDF15000153

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ CIDF15000578

MALAYSIA tem)
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) HIDF15000153

Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) RGEZ/12A/1019/S(19-4128)

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) RCCT/92G/0423/S(23-0350)
number nologies

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) HIDF15000153 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) CCT/91G/0323/S(23-1291)
nologies
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head RGQB/05A/0323/S(23-1293)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 nologies unit)

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 HELLA DM4 (locking system) RDDK/41A/0717/S(17-2269)

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 HELLA RS6 (locking system) CIDF15000578

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) RAUU/63A/0311/S(11-0432)

Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) RAUU/22C/0615/S(15-1864)

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) RGLN/30A/0522/S(22-2490) Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) HIDF15000153

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) HIDF15000153 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ HIDF15000153
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ HIDF16000136
fier) HUF HUF13145 (locking system) RFBY/09A/0422/S(22-1843)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) HIDF15000153 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) RAYN/25A/0715/S(15-2385)

820

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) RAAU/16B/1112/S(12-2053) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RBEF/09A/1017/S(17-3183)
sor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) HIDF15000153
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) RDDK/33A/0317/S(17-0669) control unit)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0263) Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
control unit)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0264)
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) RDDK/31A/0217/S(17-0405)
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) RDDK/25B/1019/S(19-0943)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) RGLO/02A/0720/S(20-2580)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) CIDF19000029
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ RDDK/43B/0420/S(20-1749)
tem)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) CIDF19000029

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) RGZK/03A/1223/S(23-5530)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) CIDF19000029

Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection) RAVG/18Q/0212/S(11-2068) MOROCCO

Meta System MUW II (interior protection) RAVG/17Q/0212/S(11-2067)

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ RCDD/03A/0615/S(19-2094) number
sor)
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) RBEF/28A/0419/S/(19-1542)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) RBEF/51A/0121/S/(20-5642)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) MR 00033936 ANRT
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) RBEF/09A/1017/S(17-3183) 2022-08-03

821

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26
monitor control unit)
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) MR 32395 ANRT 2022-03-24
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) MR 20575 ANRT 2019-07-29
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MR 5371 ANRT 2010
2019-12-05 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MR 9186 ANTR 2014-04-22 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MR 13900 ANTR 2017-05-04 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) MR00032137ANRT2022 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) MR 6698 ANTR 2021-11-04

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) MR 6699 ANTR 2021-11-04

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ MR 21174 ANTR 2019-10-14 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15
fier)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) MR 19199 ANTR 2019-03-25
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) MR 23805 ANRT 2020-04-22
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) MR 36542 ANRT 2023-02-01
MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system) MR 00001197 ANTR
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04 2024-03-25
tem)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21
HELLA DM4 (locking system) MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) MR 00041098 ANTR
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13 2023-12-25

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) MR 32214 ANTR 2022-03-08 MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) MR 00039580 ANTR
2023-08-08
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure moni‐ MR 14320 ANTR 2017-07-07
tor control unit) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12

822

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval MEXICO

number
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) MR 00000864 ANTR
2024-02-29

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure moni‐ MR 10216 ANRT 2015 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
tor control unit) number

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) MR 19241 ANRT 2019 ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-1191

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) MR00026829ANRT2020 ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) IFETEL: SYCOAR22-17289

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor MR 10927 ANRT 2015 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
control unit)
ADC ARS441DP10 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor MR 19527 ANRT 2019
control unit) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-0828

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-0922

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MR 16355 ANRT 2018-04-19 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0598
sor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) IFETEL: RLVKARK15-1741
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure MR 6706 ANRT 2011-11-17
monitor control unit) Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) IFETEL: RLVCORK19-2174

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MR 10436 ANRT 2015-05-25 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPCOCM19-2315

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) MR 20097 ANRT 2019-06-14 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) IFETEL: COCOCM22-31003

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) MR 20149 ANRT 2019-06-19 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-1827
tem)
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) MR 27966 ANRT 2021-03-29
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) IFETEL: MECOCM22-17609
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ MR 00000073 ANRT
sor) 2024-01-05 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 12200
nologies
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ MR 23310 ANRT 2020-03-10
tem) Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 11923
nologies

823

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head IFETEL: MEMENT23 - 12204 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEMS20-0957
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1042
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-0448
tem) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1043

HELLA DM4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-10 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPMA3319-0530

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9211-0472 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RCPSCAG15-0627
sor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9212-0608
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCAG19-0705
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHI9222-2674
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCBG21-0750
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806
sor) Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor IFETEL: RLVSCMF15-0959
control unit)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPHUHU22-2505
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor IFETEL: RLVSCMF19-0777
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHUHU15-1204 control unit)

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVHUHU12-1587 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCGG17-1665

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVKOKK15-0891 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04
sor)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEDC17-0348
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure IFETEL: RCPSCMR14-062
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446 monitor control unit)

MARQUARDT DC12K (interior protection) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446 Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435-A1

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS17-0222 Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS19-0449 Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IFETEL: RCPSEBT18-1407
Transmitter)

824

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ IFETEL: RCPWISD20-0943 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) A19000516
tem)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) A20000085
Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) IFETEL: ROVIHF24-02919
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) A19000374
MONGOLIA
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) A19000374
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) A24001205

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) A23001102

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) A19000401

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) A19000633 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ A20000067
tem)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) A23000900
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ A24001183
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ A18000328 sor)
tem)
Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) A23001126
HELLA DM4 (locking system) A18000329
NIGER
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) A22000649
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) A22000674
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) A19000400
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 029/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) A19000371
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ 083/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) A19000372 tem)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) A18000289 HELLA DM4 (locking system) 082/ARCEP/DG/19

825

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation

number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 097/ARCEP/DG/19
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 098/ARCEP/DG/19
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 053/ARCEP/DG/19
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 037/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 010/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 008/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 009/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 014/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) HOMO-0096/ARCEP/DG/2019
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 034/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 035/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 015/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) HOMO-0095/ARCEP/DG/2019
HUF HUF13145 (locking system)
NIGERIA
HUF HUF14632 (locking system)
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)

826

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation OMAN

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) number

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2016/14

D080134
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/14181/22
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
D172338
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7769/19
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) D172338

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7983/19

D172338
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/1049/09
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/1849/14
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/4353/17
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor control unit)
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/13339/22
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA/TA-R/2715/15
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) D090258

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TRA/TA-R/8337/19
fier) D172338
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/8642/19

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access)
D172338

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/15164/23

D100428

827

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TRA/TA-R/4158/17 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0228/11
tem) D080134 D080353

HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4548/17 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4136/17
D080134 D080134

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0210/11 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/7316/19
D080353 D172249

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0655/12 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/17887/24
D080353 D172338

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13300/22 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2848/15
D172338 D080353

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA/TA-R/4516/17 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2900/15
sor) D100428 D080353

Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TTRA/TA-R/7506/19 MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/17223/23
sensor) D080354

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13465/22 MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/16494/23
D172338
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2665/15

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/7051/19

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0920/12
D172249
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/3129/16
MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/17721/24
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA/TA-RD/4056/17 D172338
D100428
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TTRA R/2380/15
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0227/11 sor) D080134
D080353
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA R/7287/19
D172338

828

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/10694/20 Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ TRA/TA-R/17293/23
D172338 sor) D172338

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor TRA/TA-R/7464/19 Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) TRA/TA-R/17028/23
control unit) D090258 172338D

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor TRA/TA-R/7467/19 PAKISTAN

control unit) D090258
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/4686/17
D080134

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA/TA-R/5511/18 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
sor) number
D172249

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9014/2019

Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) TRA/TA-R/10988/21

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9389/2019

Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio TRA/TA-R/10976/21
Transmitter)
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.198/2020
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2706/15
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.243/2023
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7706/19
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TAC NO: 9.142/2016
D172338
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TAC NO: 9.100169/2019
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7707/19 fier)
D172338
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TAC NO:9.100175/2019
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/11335/21
D172338 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.153/2023

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TRA/TA-R/9150/20 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TAC NO: 9.213/2017
tem) tem)

Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) TAC NO: 9.9836/2019

829

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

HELLA DM4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.409/2017 MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.1175/2023

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.845/2013 MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.1168/2023

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.846/2013 MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.269/2024

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TAC NO. 9.412/2022 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.039/2016

HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO: 9.620/2017 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO:9.9167/2019
sor) sor)

HUF Baolong TSSSRG4G6B (tyre pressure TAC NO: 9.9345/2019 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.68/2021
monitor control unit)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.538/2017
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.598/2015
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TAC NO: 9.789/2018
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.790/2013 sor)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.118/2016 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9284/2019

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.131/2017 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.829/2013 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TAC NO: 9.830/2013 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.477/2021

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.133/2017 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TAC NO: 9.527/2020
tem)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.100171/2019
Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) TAC NO: 9.1058/2023
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TAC.NO: 9.322/2024

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.486/2015

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.497/2015

830

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

PARAGUAY Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐
number fier)
2019-12-I-0656
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
2019-05-I-0271
2020-02-I-0110
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)
2022-08-I-0513
2023-03-I-0153
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐
2019-11-I-0602 tem)
2017-05-I-0000136
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive D-WMI2016A
2019-11-I-0602
2019-03-I-0170
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive D-WMI2017A
2019-09-I-0508
2019-03-I-000171
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive D-WMI2017B
2017-06-I-0000162
2019-03-I-000172
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A
2019-05-I-000236
2019-11-I-0600
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
2022-05-I-0329
2022-06-I-0388 y 2017-08-
I-0000261
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

2021-02-I-00101 y 2016-02-
I-0000038

831

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

2016-5-I-000134 y 2011-06- 2021-05-I-0304; 2016-5-

I-0059 I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

2017-04-I-0000119 y 2021-05-I-0305; 2016-5-

2012-05-I-0096 I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

2022-03-I-0149 2017-04-I-0000101

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
sor)
2022-08-I-0528 2019-10-I-0581

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

2022-04-I-0235 2020-08-I-0604

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

2020-06-I-0284 y 2015-08- 2020-07-I-0390 y 2015-07-

I-0000226 I-0000200

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

2017-12-I-0000409 y 2020-07-I-0391 y 2015-07-

2012-10-I-0178 I-0000201

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)

2015-06-I-0000181 2024-03-I-0256

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)

2020-12-I-0898 y 2015-06- 2023-08-I-0590

I-0000181

832

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access)

2024-02-I-0190 y 2019-04- 2023-11-I-0808

I-000216
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ sor)
sor) 2024-01-I-0074
2015-04-I-0000150
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) tem)
2020-06-I-0326
2019-05-1-000261
Further specific information
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

2021-02-I-0063 Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) D-WMI2020A:

2020-02-1-0044 This vehicle is equipped with the following radio frequency component
approved by CONATEL – Paraguay: Wireless interface for mobile devices, Con‐
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐
sor) tinental brand, model D-WMI2020A, manufactured by Continental Automotive
2019-11-1-0632 GmbH.

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Radio equipment approval number: 2019-11-I-0600
2020-07-I-0510
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)
DAIRSE:
2019-07-I-0399
Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaraníes, Asun‐
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) ción, Paraguay, (595 21) 569 7000, [email protected]
2019-07-I-0398

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

2021-04-I-0188

833

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

PHILIPPINES
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1715393C
number sor)

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) ESD-1409466C HUF HUF13145 (locking system) ESD-RCE-2229722

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ESD-1920226C HUF HUF14632 (locking system) ESD-1511236C

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ESD-1920531C HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ESD-1206521C

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) ESD-1408917C LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ESD-1510698C

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ESD-1716172C MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ESD-1714489C

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) ESD-RCE-2229495 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ESD-1105216C

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ESD-1511856C MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ESD-1105215C

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ ESD-1921015C MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) ESD-1715652C
fier)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ESD-1919133C
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ESD-2021556C
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) ESD-2022426C
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) ESD-RCE-2332806
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ESD-1510644C
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ ESD-1714865C
tem) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ESD-1510645C

HELLA DM4 (locking system) ESD-1715539C MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) ESD-REC-2436842

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ESD-1105246C MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) ESD-REC-2436843

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ESD-1206044C MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ESD-1919198C

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) ESD-RCE-2229632 MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) ESD-REC-2436916

834

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1715393C HELLA DM4 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/4
sor)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/12
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-1919585C
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/11
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-RCE-2124846
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/12/18
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-1715977C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/48
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ ESD-1817081C
sor) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/16

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) ESD-1510921C MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/17

Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) ESD-RCE-2335375 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/18

Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ ESD-RCE-2436285 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/9/30
sor)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/123
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ ESD-2022599C
tem)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/20

ZAMBIA MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/21

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/6

MARQUARDT MU1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/124

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2024/1/08
number sor)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/11

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/3

tem)

835

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

SENEGAL SERBIA
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) И011 20

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) И038 22

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) И011 19
number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) И011 19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) 072504/AG/ER
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) И011 19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) 072486/AG/ER
nologies Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) И011 17

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) 072487/AG/ER Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) И005 17
nologies
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) И005 21
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 072488/AG/ER
nologies unit) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ И005 22
fier)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUMPLUS LF2 072689/AG/ER
nologies (head unit) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) И005 20

MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) 072784/AG/ER Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) И005 23

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) 072676/AG/ER Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ И005 20
tem)
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ 072776/AG/ER
sor) Continental Automotive NTG7 MID И005 23

Continental Automotive NTG7 HIGH И005 23

Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM И005 23

836

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS И005 23 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) И011 17

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) И005 23 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) И005 19
nologies
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) И005 24
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) И005 23
nologies MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) И005 21

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head И005 23 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) И005 21
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) И005 24
HELLA DM4 (locking system) И005 20
MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) И005 23
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) И005 18
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) И005 22
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) И005 18
MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) И005 24
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) И005 22
Meta System MUW II (interior protection) И011 19
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 20
sor)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 15
sor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) И005 22
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) И005 15
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) И005 21
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) И005 20
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) И005 21
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) И005 17
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) И005 18
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ И005 18
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) И005 20 sor)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) И005 20 Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure И011 11
monitor control unit)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) И005 20

837

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DA103365
number
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DA103365
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (radar sen‐ И011 18
sor)
Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) N3827-22

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) И005 24

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DA105282

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) И011 19

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ DA107248
fier)
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) И011 19
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DA103365
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) И038 21
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) DB106440
Vitesco HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) И011
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ DA105282
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ И005 20 tem)
tem)
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) DB107091
SINGAPORE
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) DA103365
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) DA105282
number nologies

Complies with IMDA Stand‐ Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) DA105282
ards nologies

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) DA103365 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head DA105282
nologies unit)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) DA103365
Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication DB107091
module)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DA103365

HELLA DM4 (locking system) DA103365

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DA103365
N3308-22
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DA103365
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DA103365

838

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DA103365 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DB107091

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) DA105282 Meta System ITS/TPS (interior protection) DA103365

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) N2197-22 Meta System MUW II (interior protection) DA103365

HUF Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ DA30668 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA103787
sor) sor)

HUF Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure DA28467 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA107968
sensor)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA103365
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DA105282
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) DA105282
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DA103365
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ DA105282
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) DA103365 sor)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DA103787 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DA103365

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DA103365 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DA103365

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DA103365 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DA103365

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) DA103787 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DA103365

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DA103787 Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) N4949-23

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DB107091 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ DA107248
tem)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DA103365

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DA103365

MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) DA103787

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) DA103787

839

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

SOUTH AFRICA
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) TA-2023/0111
number nologies

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA-2014/1637 Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head TA-2023/0090
nologies unit)
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) TA-2022/1837
Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ TA-2015/1386
tem)
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA-2019/1595

HELLA DM4 (locking system) TA-2017/2518

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA-2019/1200

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TA-2011/374

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) TA-2014/212

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TA-2013/1262

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TA-2017/2013

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TA-2022/0162

Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TA-2009/464

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2017/1393

Bosch F5CP12 (radar sensor) TA-2022/0153
sor)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TA-2015/1438

Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TA-2019/1440
sensor)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) TA-2020/043
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TA-2022/0375
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TA-2019/5405
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TA-2015/1077
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TA-2022/3611_CMKG2
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TA-2012/1543
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TA-2016/3500
tem)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TA-2015/595

Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) TA-2021/3460

Meta System ITS Master (interior protec‐ TA-2011/1636
tion)
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) TA-2023/0091
nologies
Meta System ITS Sensor (interior protec‐ TA-2011/1227
tion)

840

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Meta System MUW II (interior protection) TA-2019/261 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2017/3884

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TA-2017/312 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2017/2933
sor)
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TA-2011/370
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure TA-2011/1370
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TA-2012/1542 monitor control unit)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TA-2016/3314 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA-2015/2087

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TA-2019/843 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA-2019/1380

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TA-2020/5765 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA-2019/1382

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TA-2015/179 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA-2021/0150

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TA-2015/180 Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) TA-2023/2469

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) TA-2023/1835 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TA-2020/055
tem)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TA-2018/3985
SOUTH KOREA
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TA-2015/072
sor) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2019-133

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TA-2020/7731 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor TA-2019/273
control unit) Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) R-C-Ca3-RKE223E1

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor TA-2019-273 Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) R-R-TeH-CMKG2
control unit)

841

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

THAILAND
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q LF2 (head unit) R-R-TeH- NTG7QLF2
nologies Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head 130111-23-0132
nologies unit)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ R-CRM-HHFTSSRE4A
sor)
TOGO
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6 (tyre pressure R-REM-HHFTSSSG4G6
monitor control unit) REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MSIP-CRM-HHF-HUF-14632
number

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor MSIP-REM-SRD-MFR

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) No. 024/19
control unit)

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ No. 040/19

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor KCC R-R-SRD-MFR3A
tem)
control unit)

HELLA DM4 (locking system) No. 039/19

Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure KCC-REM-SRD-MRXMC34MA4
monitor control unit)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) No. 089/19
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG5SP4
sor) Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) No. 088/19

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) R-C-SRD-AG3PF4 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) No. 041/19

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) R-C-SRD-BG3FP4 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) No. 060/19

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MSIP-CRM-SRD-GG4T MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) No. 055/19

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ R-CRM-SRD-DG6W2D4 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) No. 057/19
sor)
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) No. 056/19
Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) R-R-vT2-HFA30
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) No. 008/19

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) No. 101/19

842

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) No. 021/19 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) No. 022/19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head UA.TR.052
nologies unit)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) No. 016/20

HELLA DM4 (locking system) UA.TR.109

UKRAINE
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) UKR.355-7/20
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) UKR.355-8/20

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ UA 1.001.018568-19-TE

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval sor)
number
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure UA 1.001.019289-19-TE
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) UA RF: 1CONT0004 monitor control unit)

ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) UA RF: 1CONT0013 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) UKR.355-113/19

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UKR.355-123/19 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) UKR.355-113/19

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ UA.R.TR.052.682-19 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) UA1.001.018653-19-TE
fier)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 1O094.006682-19
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) UA1.001.021175-20-TE
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.307-19
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) UA.032.CT.0105-23
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.308-19
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ RTS.UKR.355-34/18
tem) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.309-19

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) UA.TR.052 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) UA1.001.019129-19-TE
nologies
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.528-19
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) UA.TR.052
nologies
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 632.16-CET

843

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

UZBEKISTAN
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) UA1.001.019233-19-TE Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) UA1.001.019234-19-TE Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) UA.TR.001.0355.30.01316-23 Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) UA.TR.001.0355.30.01276-23 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) UA1.001.018888-19-TE Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA.TR. 032 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
sor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA-TR-001
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA-TR-109
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) UA.TR. 028
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ UA.TR. 028
sor)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ UA.R.TR.052.120-20

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)
tem)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

844

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
Manufacturer Model designation number

MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system) ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA RTTE: Er558296/17,
DA40068/15
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER77062/19,
DA40068/15
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER74533/19,
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DA36758/14

MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system)

Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) Bosch NRCS2P (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER88778/20,

DA36758/14
Valeo ARTEMIS-SUB-01 (locking system)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA ER64693/18,
DA65993/17
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ TRA ER76442/19,
fier) DA65993/17

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA ER77964/20,

DA0018994/09

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) TRA ER17713/23,

DA36975/14

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ TRA ER56005/17,

tem) DA44932/15

845

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system) TRA ER11321/22, Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER57806/17,
DA36975/14 sor) DA36976/14

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) TDRA ER17731/23, Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure TRA ER7307/19,
nologies DA76163/18 monitor control unit) DA0086237/12

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22,

DA36976/14
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) TDRA ER17730/23,
nologies DA76163/18

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA ER63716/18,

DA36976/14
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head TDRA ER17732/23,
nologies unit) DA76163/18 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA ER55496/17,
DA36976/14

HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22 DA36976/14

Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys‐ TRA ER41849/15,
tem) DA35176/14

Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication TRA ER03601/21, LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA ER62622/18,
module) DA0028019/10 DA0105247/13

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA ER53465/17,

DA0018994/09
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA ER56616/17,
DA44932/15
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA ER0067828/11,
DA0018994/09
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA ER52213/17,
DA35219/14
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA ER0067829/11,
DA0018994/09
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA ER42011/15,
DA35219/14
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA ER52668/17,
DA0018994/09
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA ER10723/22,
DA35219/14
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TRA ER71616/19,
DA0018994/09

846

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA ER80720/20, Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure TRA ER37066/15,
DA0018994/09 monitor control unit) DA0047074/10

MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system) TRA ER29729/24, Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) ER78231/20
DA0018994/09
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio ER64728/18
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA ER64145/18, Transmitter)
DA0018994/09
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER96352/21;
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA ER64146/18, 0020858/10
DA0018994/09

MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system) TRA ER26811/23,

DA0018994/09 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72324/19;
0020858/10
MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) TRA ER25917/23,
DA0018994/09

MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system) TRA ER29344/24, Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72323/19;
DA0018994/09 0020858/10

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) TRA ER25917/23,

DA0018994/09
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER95775/21;
0020858/10
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER37156/15,
sor) DA0047074/10

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER70533/19,

Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) TRA ER25428/23
DA0047074/10

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ TRA ER79695/20,

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER96175/21,
tem) DA0018994/09
DA0047074/10

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER57985/17,

DA0047074/10

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ TRA ER960528/18,

sor) DA0047074/10

847

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

UNITED KINGDOM
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
MARQUARDT MK3 (locking system)
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system)
Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)
Continental Automotive UWBTRX1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit)
MARQUARDT MS7 (locking system)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit)
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)
Continental Automotive Technologies NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head unit)
MARQUARDT MUB1 (locking system)
HUF HUF13145 (locking system)
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking system)
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

848

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

number
Manufacturer Model designation
Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q HIGH LF2 (head unit) FCC ID: NTG7QHIGLF2
Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) nologies

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q PREMIUM LF2 (head FCC ID: NTG7QPRELF2
nologies unit)
Further specific information
HUF HUF13145 (locking system) FCC ID: YGOHUF13145
Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2R
D-WMI2016A, D-WMI2017A, D-WMI2017B:
Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2L
Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 10 cm
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio FCC ID: DMOBTT100
between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device Transmitter)
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter. Visteo HFA30 (Handsfree-Access) FCC ID: 2A6TC-HFA30

D-WMI2020A: WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ FCC ID: DMOBTT100

tem)

Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 0 cm

between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device Information on installation clearances
must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or Charging unit for the wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):
transmitter.
The charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) complies
UNITED STATES with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi‐
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum
distance of 0 cm (in contact) between the source of radiation and your body.
This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number same time as another transmitter or antenna.

Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) FCC ID: KR5CMKG2 Rear Seat Entertainment System:

Continental Automotive Tech‐ NTG7Q MID LF2 (head unit) FCC ID: NTG7QMIDLF2 USA: "This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada
nologies
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two

849

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

conditions: (1) This device must not cause any harmful interference, and (2) Canada only: This equipment should be installed and operated with a mini‐
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that mum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body.
may cause undesired operation.
BT Audio Transmitter (BTT100):
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits estab‐
lished for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and
This device must be installed and used at a distance of at least 6 cm from the operated with a minimum distance of 9 cm between the radiation source and
body." your body.

Canada: "This device complies with ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS stand‐ This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the
ard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device same time as another antenna or transmitter.
must not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the Infotainment system head unit (NTG7Q):
device.
For USA only: This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure
This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits established for limits established for an uncontrolled environment, the FCC guidelines for RF
an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated exposure and RSS standard 102 of the ISED guidelines for RF exposure. This
with a minimum distance of 5 cm between the radiation source and your equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm
body." between the radiation source and your body.

Radar sensors: For Canada only: This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation expo‐
sure limits established for an uncontrolled environment, the FCC guidelines for
ARS4-C (ADC), ARS4-B (ADC), ARS4-A (ADC), FR5CPCCF (Bosch), MRR1REAR RF exposure and RSS standard 102 of the ISED guidelines for RF exposure.
(Bosch), MRREVO14F (Bosch), LRR3 (Bosch), 77V12BSM (Veoneer), 77V12CRN This equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
(Veoneer), MMRV1 (Veoneer) 20 cm between the radiation source and your body.

USA only: Information on exposure to high-frequency radiation:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits established for
an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated
with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your
body.

This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the
same time as another antenna or transmitter.

850

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

VIETNAM
REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Continental Automotive CMKG2 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
number pany Limited
C0104060423AF04A3
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) SUNTECH VN
C00082015 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys‐ Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
tem) pany Limited
ADC ARS6-A (radar sensor) SUNTECH VN B0748240419AF04A2
C00082015
HELLA DM4 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
pany Limited
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) SUNTECH VN
CO204030321AF04A3
C00082015

HELLA RS6 (locking system) SUNTECH VN

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) SUNTECH VN
C00082015
C00082015

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) SUNTECH VN
pany Limited
C00082015
B0424070422AF04A3

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) SUNTECH VN

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen‐ C0112200717AF04A2
C00082015 sor)

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Suntech Vietnam Technology HUF HUF13145 (tyre pressure sen‐ C1071050922AF04A3
Company Limited sor)
C0274151118AF04A2
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology pany Limited
fier) Company Limited C0313140421AF0403
B1522011121AF04A3
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Company Limited
Company Limited C0208030321AF04A3
C0001070120AF04A2

851

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number number

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Company Limited
C0076210121AF04A3 C0131030221AF04A3

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited sor) Company Limited
C0077210121AF04A3 C0002050119AF042A

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Company Limited
C0075210121AF04A3 C0120220519AF04A2

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited Company Limited
C0913110821AF04A3 C0170191017AF04A2

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen‐ Suntech Vietnam Technology
Company Limited sor) Company Limited
C0141140520AF04A2 C0078070518AF04A2

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
Company Limited pany Limited
C0049150121AF04A3
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology pany Limited
Company Limited
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐
C0050150121AF04A3
pany Limited

MARQUARDT MU3 (locking system) CÔNG TY TNHH MERCEDES-

BENZ
Mercedes-Benz Vietnam
Company Limited
C0547201223AF04A3

852

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en
Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
number

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

pany Limited

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys‐ Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com‐

tem) pany Limited
A0847130820AF04A3

Information about the specific absorption

rate (SAR)
INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE
The values have been determined and tested in accordance with the
Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline regarding the indication of the specific absorp‐
tion rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.

INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value

ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 compensators < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg

DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg

D-WMI2020A 0.018 W/kg 4 W/kg

HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg

RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg

NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg

853

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value

NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg

NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg

NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg

Gen20x.i2 LS3+ 2.2 W/kg 4 W/kg

Gen20x.i2 LS4+ 2.5 W/kg 4 W/kg

SM-T230NZ tablet PC 0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg

Radio data transmission telephone system 0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg

Importer information for regulatory radio PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL”

components Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2

FOR MOLDOVA ONLY: 01004 Kyiv

Importer
Ukraine
S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova
FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:
mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2 Importer

FOR TURKEY ONLY: Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited

Importer
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.Ş. Genel Merkez
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1
England
34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul
Importer of Mercedes-Benz vans
FOR UKRAINE ONLY:
Mercedes-Benz Vans UK Limited
Importer

854

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Regulatory radio information

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts

Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics

Delaware Drive, Tongwell

Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

England

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

855

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE 3 Manufacturing date

4 Vehicle model
5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)

1 Vehicle manufacturer
2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
3 VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Permissible gross mass (kg)
5 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combination (kg) (only for certain coun‐
tries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
1 Vehicle manufacturer 8 Paint code
2 Place of manufacture

856

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

ENGINE NUMBER
% The data in the illustration is shown as an example. The engine number is stamped into the crankcase. Further information can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
VIN BELOW THE RIGHT FRONT SEAT

1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)

2 Floor covering
VIN AT THE LOWER EDGE OF THE WINDSCREEN

1 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in
some countries.

857

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids R DeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas aftertreatment
R lubricants
R coolant
& WARNING
R brake fluid
Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids
R windscreen washer fluid
Operating fluids can be toxic.
R climate control system refrigerant
# When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe
the imprints on the respective original containers.
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage to the vehicle caused
# Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container. by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
# Always keep children away from operating fluids.
The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the
following labels on the container:

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)

Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
operating fluids
Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to FURTHER INFORMATION ON APPROVED OPERATING FLUIDS:
the environment.
R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids in accordance
# Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible with the details on the label
manner.
- at https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
R at a qualified specialist workshop
OPERATING FLUIDS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

R fuels

858

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

& WARNING & WARNING

Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are highly flammable. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoi‐ # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes
ded. or clothing.

# Before and during refuelling, switch off the vehicle and, if # Do not inhale fuel vapour.
fitted, the stationary heater.
# Keep children away from fuel.

# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the follow‐
ing:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse

them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do

not induce vomiting.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact

with fuel.

FLEXIBLE-FUEL VEHICLES CAN BE REFUELLED WITH THE FOLLOWING

FUEL TYPES:

R unleaded premium-grade gasoline

R E85 fuel

859

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

R a mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded premium-grade gasoline

* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
system, the engine and the emission control system.
Depending on the respective country of use, the fuels you can use in your
vehicle may differ from the information in the Owner's Manual. The fuels that
# Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine
have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the information label on fuel.
the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Spark ignition engine fuel can contain up to 25% ethanol by volume.

Fuel # See the information label in fuel filler flap for compatible fuels.

INFORMATION ON FUEL QUALITY FOR VEHICLES WITH PETROL ENGINES

Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858). Further information about compatible fuels can be obtained at a quali‐
fied specialist workshop.

Throughout Europe you can also find the compatibility labels on the
fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.

NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:

R Diesel
R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
R Petrol with metallic additives

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch on the vehicle.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

860

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

The following compatibility marks for fuel may apply to your vehicle:
* NOTE
Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Refuel only with unleaded, sulphur-free spark-ignition engine

fuel.

Compatibility marks for fuel: Spark ignition engine fuel can contain up to 25% ethanol by volume.
1 For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by volume
# See the information label in fuel filler flap for compatible fuels.
2 For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by vol‐
ume
2 For petrol with a maximum of 25% ethanol by vol‐ Further information about compatible fuels can be obtained at a quali‐
ume fied specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleas‐ Throughout Europe you can also find the compatibility labels on the
ant odours. fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle.
The recommended octane number can be found on the information label on NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:
the fuel filler flap (/ page 29).
R Diesel
If the recommended fuel is not available, you may also temporarily use regular
R Regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON.
R Petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. R Petrol with metallic additives

Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified
specialist workshop. # Do not switch on the vehicle.

INFORMATION ON FUEL QUALITY FOR MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).

861

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

The following compatibility marks for fuel may apply to your vehicle: INFORMATION ON ADDITIVES IN PETROL (VEHICLES WITH PETROL
ENGINE)
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).

* NOTE
Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions
occurring.
1 For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by volume # Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz
2 For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by vol‐ to the fuel.
ume
3 For petrol with a maximum of 25% ethanol by vol‐
ume Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, it may produce unpleas‐ In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Depos‐
ant odours. its could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in con‐
sultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service
The recommended octane number can be found on the information label on
centre), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-
the fuel filler flap (/ page 29).
Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.
For maximum engine output: refuel only with super unleaded petrol with an
NOTES ON FUEL QUALITY FOR VEHICLES WITH DIESEL ENGINES
octane number of at least 98 RON. Alternatively, you can also refuel using
premium-grade unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 95 RON. GENERAL NOTES
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).
In exceptional cases, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also
use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON. This
may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption.

Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.

Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified

specialist workshop.

862

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

& WARNING * NOTE

Risk of fire from fuel mixture Damage caused by the wrong fuel
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel
lower than that of pure diesel fuel. system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines. Vehicles with diesel particulate filters:

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. # Refuel using only sulphur-free diesel fuel.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only
low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less than
50 ppm.

Vehicles without diesel particulate filters:

# Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sulphur content of less

than 500 ppm.

NEVER REFUEL WITH ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUELS:

R Petrol
R Marine diesel
R Heating oil
R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil
R Paraffin or kerosene

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch on the vehicle.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

863

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

ACCORDING TO EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 16942, YOU CAN FIND THE

* NOTE COMPATIBILITY MARKS AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:
Shorter maintenance intervals due to fuel with increased bio-con‐
tents R On the vehicle, on the information label on the fuel filler flap
(/ page 29)
When fuels with increased bio-contents are used, fuel residues with
increased separation volume may occur. If fuels with increased bio-con‐ R On the fuel dispensers or pump nozzles suitable for your vehicle
tents (compatibility marks B10 and B20) are used on an ongoing basis, throughout Europe
this may lead to shorter maintenance intervals for the fuel filter.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified
If the vehicle is not used for an extended period of time (several specialist workshop.
weeks):
TANK CONTENT AND FUEL RESERVE
# Refuel the vehicle beforehand with diesel fuel with bio-con‐ The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary depending on the vehicle equip‐
tents < 10% to avoid possible deposits of bio-contents in the ment.
fuel tank.
Not for plug-in hybrid:

TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY

The following compatibility marks for fuel may apply to your vehicle:
Model

All models 66.0 litres

FUEL TANK RESERVE

Model

All models 7.0 litres

1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty acid methyl ester by volume Plug-in hybrid:
(bio-diesel)
2 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty acid methyl ester by volume TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
(bio-diesel) Model
3 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 20% fatty acid methyl ester by volume
(bio-diesel) All models 50.0 litres

4 For paraffinic diesel fuel

864

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

FUEL TANK RESERVE (PLUG-IN HYBRID) AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of
diesel engines.
Model

All models 7.0 litres It may be improper or punishable in some countries to operate a vehicle that
uses no AdBlue® or one that does not comply with the specifications of this
TANK CONTENT AND FUEL RESERVE (MERCEDES-AMG VEHICLES) Owner's Manual.
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment.
* NOTE
TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue® or the use of additive-
enhanced AdBlue®
Saloon and Estate
The function of the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment can be impaired by
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 50.0 litres or 66.0 litres the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.

FUEL TANK RESERVE # Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO 22241.
Saloon and Estate # Do not dilute AdBlue® with water.
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 7.0 litres
# Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
TOTAL FUEL TANK CAPACITY (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)
Saloon and Estate
* NOTE
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 60.0 litres
Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue®
FUEL TANK RESERVE (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE) CONSEQUENCES OF IMPURITIES IN ADBLUE®:
Saloon and Estate R increased emission values
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 10.0 litres R damage to the catalytic converter
R NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunctions

AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only) Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.

#

NOTES ON ADBLUE®
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).

865

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

AdBlue® residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfa‐ The information supplied in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve quantity
ces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as at the first warning on the driver display and the minimum top-up quantity
soon as possible. when the AdBlue® tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values.

When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may
escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the Engine oil
AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
NOTES ON ENGINE OIL
ADBLUE® FILLING QUANTITY AND CONSUMPTION Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).
TOTAL CAPACITY OF ADBLUE® TANK
Model Total capacity

All models 23.0 litres

ADBLUE® CONSUMPTION
The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consump‐
tion. Like fuel consumption, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent upon
your driving style and the operating conditions. For this reason, your vehicle's
* NOTE
actual consumption figures in day-to-day operating conditions may differ from
Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or
the average consumption figures calculated. The frequency at which you will
additives
have to top up with AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply checked at
a qualified specialist workshop before making journeys outside Europe. Before
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which
a longer stay outside Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop. meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service
intervals.
ADBLUE® FILL LEVEL AND RANGE
You can have the AdBlue® range and level shown on the driver display.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve
longer change intervals than prescribed.

% The AdBlue® range shown is highly dependent upon driving style # Do not use additives.
and operating conditions. The actual range may therefore differ
# Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals.
from the range currently shown on the driver display.

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist

workshop.

866

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (PLUG-IN HYBRID WITH A PETROL ENGINE)

ENGINE OIL QUALITY AND FILLING QUANTITY Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

Not for plug-in hybrid: All models 229.51, 229.52*

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (PETROL ENGINES)

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (PLUG-IN HYBRID WITH A DIESEL ENGINE)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
All models 229.71, 229.72*
All models 229.52*

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (DIESEL ENGINES)

* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscos‐
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE
viscosity classes).
All models 229.52, 229.61, 229.71, 229.72*
Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: use only engine oils of viscosity class
* Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscos‐ SAE 0W‑40.
ity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE
viscosity classes).
% If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may
Vehicles with petrol engines: use only engine oils of viscosity class add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.
SAE 0W‑20. Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: ACEA C5
Plug-in hybrid with diesel engine: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
229.51 or ACEA C5
% If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may
Observe any possible restrictions of the SAE viscosity classes.
add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.
Vehicles with petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or ACEA C5 Not for plug-in hybrid:
Vehicles with diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
229.51 or ACEA C5 ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY
Observe any possible restrictions of the SAE viscosity classes. Model Quantity

All models 6.0 litres

Plug-in hybrid:
Plug-in hybrid:

867

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY (PLUG-IN HYBRID) ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY
Model Quantity Saloon and Estate Quantity

C 300 de with EQ hybrid technology 6.0 litres Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 6.0 litres
C 300 de 4MATIC with EQ hybrid technology
ENGINE OIL FILLING QUANTITY (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)
All other models 5.3 litres
Saloon and Estate Quantity
The specified filling quantity refers to an oil change with the oil filter.
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 6.0 litres

ENGINE OIL QUALITY AND FILLING QUANTITY (MERCEDES-AMG VEHI‐

The specified filling quantity refers to an oil change with the oil filter.
CLES)
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION
Saloon and Estate MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Notes on brake fluid
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 229.71 Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)

& WARNING
Saloon and Estate MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake
system
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 229.71
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers
Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour
class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied
classes). hard.

Use only engine oils of viscosity class SAE 0W‑20. This impairs the braking effect.

# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

% If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may
top up with a maximum of 1.0 l of engine oil with MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or ACEA C5 once only. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe
or MB-Approval 331.0.

868

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

Coolant * NOTE
NOTES ON COOLANT Overheating at high outside temperatures
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858). If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently
protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside tempera‐
tures.
& WARNING
Risk of fire‑ and injury from antifreeze # Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz.
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
compartment, it may ignite.
for Operating Fluids 320.1.
# Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the anti‐
freeze.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler open‐
PROPORTION OF ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATE IN THE COOLING SYSTEM:
ing.
R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C)
# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before
starting the vehicle. R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

* NOTE
Damage caused by incorrect coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 858).
# Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required
antifreeze protection. & WARNING
INFORMATION ON COOLANT IS AVAILABLE AT THE FOLLOWING ‑ Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate
LOCATIONS: Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1
system.
- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com
R At a qualified specialist workshop # Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out
next to the filler opening.

869

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Operating fluids

* NOTE
Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen
washer fluid
Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of
the exterior lighting.

# Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for
use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

* NOTE
Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind‐
screen washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be
triggered erroneously.

RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:

R above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit

R below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze con‐
tainer.

Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.

870

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle data

Vehicle data

Vehicle dimensions VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

All models Vehicle dimensions
THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING
FACTORS: Vehicle length 4751 mm

R Tyres Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2033 mm

R Load Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1820 mm

R Condition of the suspension
Vehicle height 1442 mm
R Special equipment
Wheelbase 2865 mm
Not for plug-in hybrid:

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
All models Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING
Vehicle length 4751 mm
FACTORS:
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2033 mm
R Tyres
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1820 mm R Load
Vehicle height 1438 mm R Condition of the suspension
R Special equipment
Wheelbase 2865 mm

Plug-in hybrid:

871

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle data

HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEADROOM (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORM‐

ANCE)
Estate 1 Height when open 2 Headroom

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Per‐ 1952 mm 1829 mm

formance (Estate)

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)

Estate model only
Saloon and Estate Vehicle dimensions
1 Height when open
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance
2 Headroom
Vehicle length 4842 mm
HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEADROOM
Estate 1 Height when open 2 Headroom Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2033 mm

Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors 1900 mm

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 1944 mm 1821 mm

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS VEHICLE HEIGHT (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)

Model Vehicle height
Saloon and Estate Vehicle dimensions
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance (Saloon) 1458 mm

Vehicle length 4791 mm Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance (Estate) 1474 mm

Vehicle width including outside mirrors 2033 mm

WHEELBASE (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)
Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors 1824 mm
Model Vehicle height

Wheelbase 2865 mm
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance (Saloon) 2865 mm or
2875 mm
VEHICLE HEIGHT
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance (Estate) 2875 mm
Model Vehicle height

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC (Saloon) 1450 mm

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC (Estate) 1466 mm

872

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle data

Weights and loads ROOF LOAD

Saloon and Estate Maximum roof load
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE
DATA: Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 100 kg

R Items of special equipment increase the kerb weight and reduce the ROOF LOAD (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)
payload.
Saloon and Estate Maximum roof load
R Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identifi‐
cation plate. Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 100 kg

Not for plug-in hybrid:

ROOF LOAD Maximum design speeds

Model Maximum roof load Not for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:

All models 100 kg The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It
depends on the operating conditions, the special equipment and the size of
Plug-in hybrid: the tyres.
ROOF LOAD (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.
Model Maximum roof load
MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED
All models 100 kg
Model

All models

Weights and loads (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE Maximum design speeds (Mercedes-AMG
DATA:
vehicles)
R Items of special equipment increase the kerb weight and reduce the
payload. Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
R You will find vehicle-specific weight information on the vehicle identifi‐ The following values only apply to vehicles with the AMG Driver's Package.
cation plate (/ page 856).

873

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle data

The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It
depends on the operating conditions, the special equipment and the size of
the tyres.

Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.

MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED

Saloon and Estate
1 Supply type: AC
All models Standard: EN 62196-2
Design: type 2
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid) Voltage range: 480 V RMS
2 Supply type: DC
NOTES ON THE ENERGY SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BAT‐
Standard: EN 62196-3
TERY
In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle labels are loca‐ Style: FF
ted on the vehicle in the following places: Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
R On the inside of the socket flap 3 Supply type: DC
R on the charging cable connector Standard: EN 62196-3
Style: FF
In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.
You can find information on the range in all-electric mode on the driver display
For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the (/ page 402).
"Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 381).
Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.

874

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle data

ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (C 350 E WITH EQ HYBRID All other models
TECHNOLOGY)
Charging time – mode 2 Approx. 3 h
C 350 e with EQ hybrid technology
with 3.7 kW charging power

Type Lithium-ion
Charging time – mode 2 Approx. 13 h

Usable energy content with 1.8 kW charging power

Range in all-electric mode Charging times – modes 2 and 3 apply to AC charging from 0 % to 100 % of the
usable energy content. Charging time – mode 4 applies to DC charging from
Charging time – Mode 4 Approx. 20 min
10 % to 80 % of the usable energy content.
with maximum 55 kW charging power
The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the
Charging time – Mode 3 Approx. 2 h
battery, the ambient temperature and the charging power of the battery. The
with 11 kW charging power
charging power, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current and the
Charging time – mode 2 Approx. 13 h type of power supply.
with 1.8 kW charging power
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information
ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (ALL OTHER MODELS) label on the inside of the socket flap(/ page 381).

All other models

Type Lithium-ion
High-voltage battery (Mercedes-AMG E PER‐
Usable energy content
FORMANCE)
NOTES ON THE ENERGY SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BAT‐
Range in all-electric mode
TERY
Charging time – Mode 4 Approx. 20 min In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle labels are loca‐
with maximum 55 kW charging power ted on the vehicle in the following places:

Charging time – Mode 3 Approx. 2 h R On the inside of the socket flap

with 11 kW charging power R on the charging cable connector

875

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Vehicle data

In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy Saloon and Estate
supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance
charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier.
Range in all-electric mode
For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the
"Charging the high-voltage battery" section (/ page 381). Charging time – mode 2 Approx. 2 h 45 min
with 1.8 kW charging power

– Mode 2 charging time applies to AC charging from 25 % to 100 % of the

usable energy content.

The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the
battery, the ambient temperature and the charging power of the battery. The
charging power, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current and the
type of power supply.
1 Supply type: AC
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information
Standard: EN 62196-2
label in the socket flap.
Design: type 2
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
You can find information on the range in all-electric mode on the driver display
(/ page 402).

Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.

ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES

Saloon and Estate
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance

Type Lithium-ion

Usable energy content

876

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Trailer hitch

Trailer hitch

General notes on the trailer coupling

Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the
vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing
capacity is specified in your vehicle documents.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Attachment points (not plug-in hybrid)

Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch

Attachment points (plug-in hybrid)

1 Attachment points The overhang dimension and attachment points are valid for a trailer hitch
2 Overhang dimension installed at the factory.
3 Rear axle centre line
Not for plug-in hybrid:

OVERHANG DIMENSION, LENGTH

Model 2 Overhang dimension

All models 1203 mm

877

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Trailer hitch

Plug-in hybrid: TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

OVERHANG DIMENSION, LENGTH (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Model

Model 2 Overhang dimension C 350 e with EQ hybrid technology

All models 1203 mm All other models 1800 kg

TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Trailer load Model

C 350 e with EQ hybrid technology

% The tongue weight is not included in the trailer load.
All other models 750 kg
The values for the trailer load, braked apply with a minimum
start-off gradeability of 12 %.

Not for plug-in hybrid:

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED % The tongue weight is not included in the trailer load.
Model The values for the trailer load, braked apply with a minimum
start-off gradeability of 12 %.
All models 1800 kg

TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED

Model Saloon and Estate

All models 750 kg Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 1800 kg

Plug-in hybrid: TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED

Saloon and Estate
Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 750 kg

878

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Trailer hitch

TRAILER LOAD, BRAKED (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE) Not for plug-in hybrid:

Saloon and Estate TONGUE WEIGHT
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 1800 kg Model Maximum tongue weight

TRAILER LOAD, UNBRAKED (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE) All models 75 kg

Saloon and Estate LOAD CAPACITY

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 750 kg All models Maximum load capacity

When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg

head
Maximum tongue weight‑ and load capacity
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 100 kg
head and additionally to the guide pin

* NOTE
Damage caused by the trailer coming loose Plug-in hybrid:

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.
# The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg. TONGUE WEIGHT (PLUG-IN HYBRID)
# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maxi‐ Model Maximum tongue weight
mum permissible tongue weight.
C 350 e with EQ hybrid technology

All other models 75 kg

* NOTE LOAD CAPACITY (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose
All models Maximum load capacity
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the
maximal load capacity should be observed. When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg
head
# Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 100 kg
head and additionally to the guide pin

Observe the additional notes on load capacity (/ page 515).

879

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Trailer hitch

Maximum tongue‑ weight and load capacity LOAD CAPACITY (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)

(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Saloon and Estate

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance
Maximum load capacity

When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg

% OBSERVE THE INFORMATION:
head

R On the maximum tongue weight and load capacity When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 100 kg
(/ page 879). head and additionally to the guide pin

R On the maximum load capacity in the vehicle's Own‐

er's Manual (in "Function of the bicycle rack" section)
(/ page 515). Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)
Not for plug-in hybrid:
TONGUE WEIGHT
Saloon and Estate Maximum tongue weight
TRAILER OPERATION AXLE LOAD
Model Axle load
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC 75 kg
C 180 1335 kg
LOAD CAPACITY
C 200 d 1375 kg
Saloon and Estate Maximum load capacity
C 220 d 4MATIC
Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC
C 220 d 1385 kg
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 75 kg
head
C 300 d 1390 kg
C 300 d 4MATIC
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball 100 kg
head and additionally to the guide pin
C 300 4MATIC 1355 kg

TONGUE WEIGHT (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE) All other models 1345 kg

Saloon and Estate Maximum tongue weight
Plug-in hybrid:
Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance 75 kg
Missing values were not available by the editorial deadline.

880

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Technical data Trailer hitch

TRAILER OPERATION AXLE LOAD (PLUG-IN HYBRID)

Model Axle load

C 350 e with EQ hybrid technology

All other models 1655 kg

Permissible axle load, rear axle (Mercedes-

AMG vehicles)
TRAILER OPERATION AXLE LOAD
Model Axle load

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC (Saloon) 1310 kg

Mercedes-AMG C 43 4MATIC (Estate) 1365 kg

AXLE LOAD IN TRAILER OPERATION (MERCEDES-AMG E PERFORMANCE)

Model Axle load

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance (Saloon) 1570 kg

Mercedes-AMG C 63 S E Performance (Estate) 1600 kg

Back to Contents881

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go.
You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Display messages 883

Warning and indicator lamps 961

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages

Introduction High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver display will show
these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message
INFORMATION ABOUT DISPLAY MESSAGES has been rectified.
Display messages appear on the driver display.
CALLING UP SAVED DISPLAY MESSAGES
Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual Driver display:
and may differ from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display 4 Service
shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages will be The Message memory message appears on the driver display.
accompanied by a warning tone.
# Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards
Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional on the left-hand Touch Control.
notes in the Owner's Manual.
# To exit the display: press the G back button.
FOR SOME DISPLAY MESSAGES, SYMBOLS WILL ALSO BE SHOWN:

R Õ Further information
R ¨ Hide display message

You can select the respective symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand
Touch Control. Press Õ to display further information on the central display.
Press ¨ to hide the display message.

You can hide display messages to be acknowledged by pressing the back

button G or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will
then be stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.

883

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Restraint system malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

884

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Front left malfunction Consult workshop
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

885

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Front right malfunction Consult workshop
& WARNING
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

886

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Second row of seats, left Malfunction
& WARNING
Consult workshop
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

887

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Second row of seats, centre Malfunction
& WARNING
Consult workshop
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

888

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Second row of seats, right Malfunction
& WARNING
Consult workshop
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

889

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Left window airbag malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.

# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

6
Right window airbag malfunction Consult
& WARNING
workshop
Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.

# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front passenger airbag disabled See Own- * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to
er's Manual the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

890

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.

# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.

# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 138).

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front passenger airbag enabled See Own- * THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WILL BE ENABLED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUA‐
er's Manual
TIONS:

R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat

R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

891

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.

# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 138).

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Occupant presence reminder inoperative * The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

æ
* The occupant presence reminder suspects that there are persons or animals in the rear of the vehicle.

# Do not leave any persons or animals behind when leaving the vehicle.
Do not leave persons or animals in the
vehicle

892

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

®
* The key battery is discharged.

# Replace the battery (/ page 187).

Change key batteries

®
* The key is currently undetected.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

Key not detected (white display mes‐
# Try to start the vehicle.
sage)
# If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 330).

# Start the vehicle.

®
* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.

IF THE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:
Key not detected (red display message)
R You will no longer be able to start the vehicle.

R You will not be able to lock the vehicle centrally.

# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 330).

The key battery is at low capacity or is flat.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 184).

893

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 187).

®
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.

# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being taught in Please wait

Place the key in the marked space See * Key detection is malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual
# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 330).

Searching for key in stowage tray or * The key has not been detected.
Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging
bracket… See Owner's Manual # Place the key in the marked space (/ page 330).

If the key is still not detected:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The Digital Vehicle Key has not been detected.

# Place the Digital Vehicle Key in the marked space (/ page 330).

If the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

õ
* The key or the Digital Vehicle Key is currently undetected.

# Change the location of the key or the Digital Vehicle Key in the vehicle.
Key not detected
# Try to start the vehicle.

# If the key is still not detected, place the key in the marked space (/ page 330).

894

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected, place the Digital Vehicle Key in the marked space (/ page 330).

# Start the vehicle.

õ
* The key or the Digital Vehicle Key is no longer detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.

IF THE KEY OR THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:
Key not detected Place Digital Vehicle
Key in inductive charging bracket R You will no longer be able to start the vehicle.

R You will not be able to lock the vehicle centrally.

# Ensure that the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle.

If the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Place the key in the marked space (/ page 330).

# Place the Digital Vehicle Key in the marked space (/ page 330).

The key battery is at low capacity or is flat.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 184).

# Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 187).

The state of charge of the rechargeable battery of the end device with the Digital Vehicle Key is too low.

# Immediately charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key end device.

Otherwise, it may not be possible to restart the vehicle after it has been switched off.

If the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected:

895

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

í
* If the Digital Vehicle Key is not renewed, the vehicle cannot be unlocked/locked or started.

# The system will automatically renew the Digital Vehicle Key.

Replace key See Owner's Manual When renewal is complete, the message will disappear and the Digital Vehicle Key will be available again.

õ
* A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

Do not forget key

í
* The state of charge of the rechargeable battery of the end device with the Digital Vehicle Key is too low.

# Immediately charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key end device.
Digital Vehicle Key Charge device

õ
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new Digital Vehicle Key.

# Wait until processing is complete.

Key being taught in Please wait

í
* The vehicle cannot be unlocked/locked or started.

# Use the Digital Vehicle Key belonging to the vehicle.

Key does not belong to vehicle

®
* Have the key replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace key

896

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction See Owner's Manual * Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 72).

:
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Automatic driving lights inoperative

:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.

# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Switch on headlamps

:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.

# Turn the light switch to the à position.

Switch off lights

DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check low beam setting (left/right-side * The type of traffic has been selected manually.
traffic)
# Check the setting and change it manually if necessary (/ page 293).

Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) * The automatic headlamp conversion for left-hand/right-hand traffic has malfunctioned.
Manual adjustment only

897

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Change the headlamps over manually (/ page 293).

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Manual
The system limits have been reached (/ page 291).

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will
appear.

# Drive on.

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inopera- * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.
tive
# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, operate the high beam manually.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.

unavailable See Owner's Manual
The system limits have been reached (/ page 289).

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message will appear.

# Drive on

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

# Drive on

or

898

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, operate the high beam manually.

:
* The front left parking light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Front left parking lights

:
* The front right parking light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Front right parking lights

:
* The left low beam is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left low beam

:
* The right low beam is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right low beam

:
* The left cornering light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left cornering light

:
* The right cornering light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right cornering light

899

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The left tail light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left tail light

:
* The right tail light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right tail light

:
* The left high beam is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left main beam

:
* The right high beam is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right main beam

:
* The left daytime running lights are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left daytime running lights

:
* The right-hand daytime running lights are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right daytime running lights

:
* The front left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Front left turn signal

900

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The rear left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Rear left turn signal

:
* The front right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Front right turn signal

:
* The rear right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Rear right turn signal

:
* The turn signal lamp on the left mirror is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left mirror turn signal

:
* The turn signal lamp on the right mirror is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right mirror turn signal

:
* The left brake light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Left brake lamp

:
* The right brake light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Right brake lamp

901

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The third brake light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Third brake lamp

:
* The reversing light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Reversing light

:
* The rear fog light is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Rear fog light

:
* The number plate lamp is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Number plate lamp

:
* The left turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Trailer left turn signal

:
* The right turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Trailer right turn signal

:
* The brake light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Trailer brake lamp

902

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* A tail light on the trailer is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Trailer tail light

Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative indicator lamp in driver dis- * An indicator lamp on the driver's display is defective.
play. Consult workshop
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.

& # When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting
several minutes between each attempt.
inoperative See Owner's Man. (stationary
heater)
# If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.

& The stationary heater has switched itself off.

Currently unavailable Battery low
# Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.

* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.

& # Refuel the vehicle.

Currently unavailable Refuel

903

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched

& on.

# Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.
Currently unavailable High-voltage bat-
tery charging incomplete.

* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched

& on.

# Charge the high-voltage battery

Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage
battery (/ page 381).

* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched off.

& # Start the vehicle for ten seconds.

Pre-entry climate control via key available Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
again after starting vehicle

* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.

& # Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 381).

Pre-entry climate control via key currently When the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational
unavailable. High-voltage battery low again.

Drive system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

u
* The drive system is malfunctioning.

# Have the vehicle transported using only a transporter or trailer (/ page 753).
Towing not permitted See Owner's Man-
ual

904

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ò
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road
users.

# Drive with particular care.

Acoustic presence indicator inoperative

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.

è # Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

Charger cable connected

Not possible to unlock charging cable * The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehicle socket.
See Owner's Manual
# If the charging cable is under strain, relieve the strain on the charging cable connector by carefully pulling on the charging cable.

# Press the charging interruption button (/ page 394).

If the charging cable connector cannot be removed after that:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle not currently being charged * A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
Charging station fault
# Start the charging process at a different charging station.

or

# Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.

Charging fault Please change charging * A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
method See Owner's Manual
# Wait until the malfunction has passed.

or

# Start the charging process at a different charging station.

905

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

or

# Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.

AC charging inoperative Consult work- * The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.
shop
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DC charging inoperative Consult work- * The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.
shop
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Login failed Change authentication * Plug-and-Charge is not expected to be available at this charging sta‐
method or charging station tion.

# Use an alternative authentication method or payment method.

or

# Start the charging process at a different charging station.

Only electric drive available Power limited * The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched off. The output of your vehicle is limited because you are driving in electric mode.

# Refuel immediately.
Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a distance of 50 km.

If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

"Electric" drive program currently unavail- * The state of charge of the high-voltage battery or the environmental conditions are not sufficient for the Electric drive
able program.

# Drive on and observe the notes on plug-in hybrid operation (/ page 324).

or

906

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Charge the high-voltage battery

(/ page 381).

Reduced drive power See Owner's Manual * The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Preparing drive system… * The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.

* Plug-in hybrid: The high-voltage battery is overheated. There is a risk of fire.

Û # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out!
# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Outdoors if possible

% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.

# Do not continue driving.

# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.

* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound.

Û # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction

* The drive system is malfunctioning.

Û # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction Visit workshop

907

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* A function restriction has occurred in the drive system.

Û # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Have high-voltage system checked See
Owner's Manual

Consult workshop without changing the * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
transmission position
# If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.

# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Consult workshop without starting the * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
vehicle again
# Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

* A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.

Û Output and range will be severely restricted.

Drive power and range reduced See Own-
# Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
er's Manual

# After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.

If the display message appears again:

# Drive on carefully.

# Fully charge the high-voltage battery

(/ page 381).

If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

908

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual * It is not possible to start the vehicle.

A malfunction has occurred in the drive system.

# Switch the vehicle off and lock it.

# After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.

# If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive malfunction Achievable speed limi- * The drive system is malfunctioning.

ted Stop soon
The maximum vehicle speed is restricted. The drive system will shut off within a few kilometres.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.

# Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive malfunction Achievable speed * The drive system is malfunctioning.

severely limited See Owner's Manual
The maximum vehicle speed is restricted.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.

d # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction

* The drive system is malfunctioning.

d # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving.
Stop Switch off the vehicle
# Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

909

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures.

d Output will be severely restricted.

Performance severely limited
Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The display message will disappear.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

High-voltage battery malfunction. No * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.

start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop
(yellow display message) It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered.

It will still be possible to start the combustion engine.

# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.

High-voltage battery malfunction. No * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.

start in approx. XXX km Consult work-
shop(red display message) It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered.

It will still be possible to start the combustion engine.

# Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a qualified specialist work‐
shop.

High-voltage battery malfunction. Consult * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery.
workshop without starting the vehicle
again It will no longer be possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched off.

# Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank needs to be reduced before the fuel filler flap is opened. This pressure reduction can take up to

6 15 minutes.

Please wait Depressurising fuel tank

910

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel filler flap opens.

6
Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for refu-
elling

Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update.

The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.

& WARNING
Risk of accident if the driver's display fails
If the driver's display fails or malfunctions, you may not be aware of any functional limitations to safety-critical
systems. This may affect the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If the driver display fails, you may not recognise e.g. function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display. The operating safety of the
vehicle may be impaired (/ page 592).

# Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started.

# Switch the vehicle off and then back on

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.

911

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

# Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery
(/ page 70).
The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
* Mercedes-AMG vehicles with plug-in hybrid: the charging cable is inserted.

# Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.

* Mercedes-AMG vehicles with plug-in hybrid: the charging cable is not inserted.

# Switch off the vehicle for five to ten minutes.

# Switch on the vehicle.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown * You are about to leave the vehicle and the engine is running.
occurs when locked or automatically in
XX mins The vehicle will switch off automatically in 20 minutes.

# To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, acknowledge the message on the central display of the multimedia system.
* You are in the vehicle. Park position j is engaged and the engine is running.

After a certain holding time, this display message will appear on the driver display. The vehicle will then switch off automatically after a total of 20 minutes of
holding time.

# To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, acknowledge the message on the central display of the multimedia system.

Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
occurs when locked or automatically in
a few minutes # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and starting the
engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

¥ # Top up the washer fluid (/ page 36).

Top up washer fluid

912

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.

# Restart the vehicle.

If the display message still appears:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

Trailer coupling Check lock (white dis‐ & WARNING

play message) Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 54).

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.

913

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 54).

# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.

# If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 54).

# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ï
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

Trailer coupling Check lock(red display & WARNING

message) Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 54).

914

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.

# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 54).

# Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.

# If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 54).

# Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.

If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Head-up display currently unavailable See * THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Owner's Manual
R Malfunctions in the power supply

R Signal interference

# Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

915

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Head-up display Brightness currently * THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS REDUCED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:
reduced See Owner's Manual
R Dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision

R Faulty exterior brightness signals

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Clean the windscreen if necessary.

# Switch the vehicle off and then back on

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ù
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

Steering malfunction Stop immediately & WARNING

See Owner's Manual Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ù
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

Steering malfunction Increased physical

effort See Owner's Manual

916

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Ù
* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.

# Drive on carefully.
Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
workshop

Ù
* The rear-axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Rear axle steering currently malfunction-
ing
If the display message does not disappear:

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ù
* The rear-axle steering is malfunctioning.

The rear axle has no steering capability.

Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit work-
The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line.
shop

917

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Ù
* The rear-axle steering is malfunctioning.

The rear axle has no steering capability.

Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop
The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line.
immediately

& WARNING
Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Electronic rear axle differential lock inop- * The electronic locking differential has failed.
erative
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Electronic rear axle differential lock cur- * The electronic locking differential has overheated.
rently unavailable
# Let the electronic locking differential cool down by driving defensively.

Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's * The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
Manual
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ambient light warning support inoperative * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support.

918

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes.

# If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

* The bonnet is open.

M
& WARNING
Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.

# Never release the bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Close the bonnet.

* At least one door is open.

C # Close all doors.

* The boot lid is open.

919

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& DANGER
Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

# Close the boot lid.

Function blocked as centre backrest is * You cannot electrically unlock the left seat backrest.
folded down
# Fold the centre seat backrest back until it engages.

* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.

_ # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Rear left seat backrest not locked

* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.

_ # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.

Rear right seat backrest not locked

4matic currently unavailable * 4MATIC is currently unavailable.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4matic inoperative * 4MATIC is inoperative.

920

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/ * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3
times # Information about switching off the vehicle while it is being driven (/ page 329).

* The coolant level is too low.

+
Top up coolant See Owner’s Manual * NOTE
Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant (/ page 718).

# Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ÿ
* The coolant is too hot.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.
Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle

921

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPART‐
MENT, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

R You may come into contact with hot gases.

R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains
below 120 °C.

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.

! # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Clean the fuel filter

ý
* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace air filter

Reserve fuel * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel.

922

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only select P when vehicle is stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.

# Depress the brake pedal to stop.

# Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.

Apply brake to deselect P position * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position.
of P or N
# Depress the brake pedal.

# Start the vehicle.

# Change the transmission position.

Apply brake to engage D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h or k.

Apply brake to engage R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position k.

Apply parking brake to park Visit work- * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
shop
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle.

923

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
open Transmission not in P
The vehicle may roll away.

# Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.

Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
brake to park
# Park the vehicle safely.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.

Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running or the vehicle switched on.
manually No automatic switch to P

* NOTE
Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away
When the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is
deactivated.

The vehicle may roll away.

# Be ready to brake.

# Do not leave the vehicle unattended.

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.

# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

924

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N automatically activated Please engage * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.
transmission position again

% When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.

# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

To shift to N, hold selector lever longer in * Selector lever not held for long enough in position i.
position N
It will be possible to change from park position j to neutral i only if the selector lever is held in i for an extended period of time.

If the selector lever is not held for long enough, park position j will remain engaged.

# When changing from park position j to neutral i, hold the selector lever in position i for an extended period of time.

Reversing not poss. Consult workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Consult workshop without changing the * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
transmission position
# If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.

# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

925

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Drive malfunction Stop Restart vehicle * The transmission is malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Restart the vehicle.

If the display message still appears:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive malfunction Stop Consult workshop * The transmission is malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive overheated. Drive on with care * The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired.

# Drive at low engine speed.

# Avoid sporty driving.

# Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.

Auxiliary battery malfunction (white dis‐ * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
play message)
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Auxiliary battery malfunction (red display * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
message)
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

926

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Brakes
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

! To apply:
Parking brake See Owner's Manual
# Switch the vehicle off and then back on

# Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 412).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

# Switch the vehicle off and then back on

# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 412).

or

# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 411).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

# Switch the vehicle off and then back on

To apply:

927

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 412).

To release:

# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the state of charge is too low:

# Charge the 12 V battery (/ page 70).

To apply:

# Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:

# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake
manually (/ page 412).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

928

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The red ! indicator lamp is flashing.

! THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED WHILE YOU ARE DRIVING:

Release parking brake
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 411).

R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 413).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.

# Release the electric parking brake manually.

* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.

! You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.
Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release
# Switch on the vehicle.

* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.

J A horn may also sound at regular intervals.

Brake immediately
You cannot start the vehicle system.

# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.
You cannot start the vehicle system again.

* The brake force boosting function is impaired.

J The hill start assist may be impaired.

Malfunction See Owner's Manual

929

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be affected.

J
Malfunction Stop vehicle & WARNING
Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.

# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

J
Check brake fluid level

930

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check brake pads See Owner's Manual * The brakepads have reached the wear limit.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving and driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.

!÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See Owner's Man-
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
ual (ABS and ESP®)

931

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive
carefully.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

!÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
and ESP®)

932

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
currently unavailable See Owner's Man-
ual (ESP®)
& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive
carefully.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

933

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

* ESP® is malfunctioning.

÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP®)
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

T! Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

÷
inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD,
ABS and ESP®)

934

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.

ë # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 425).
Off

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 427).

# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!

h
* Cruise control cannot be activated because not all activation conditions are fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 430).

- - - km/h

Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

935

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Cruise control and Limiter inoperative * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.

If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 428).

* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

È
- - - km/h

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive mode (/ page 429).

È
passive

Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable * Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
# Drive on
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

Speed Limit Assist inoperative * Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.

936

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ð
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).

# Drive more slowly.

Maximum speed exceeded

Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
See Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.

Traffic Sign Assist inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

# Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations.

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ä
* DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

Malfunction Maximum speed 80 km/h
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ä
* AMG RIDE CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

Malfunction Maximum speed 80 km/h
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AMG Ride Control Function limited See * At least one of the main functions of AMG RIDE CONTROL is malfunctioning.
Owner's Manual
The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

937

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* NOTE
The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side
during cornering.
# Drive on carefully.

# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.

# Avoid sudden steering movements.

# Drive on carefully.

# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.

# Avoid sudden steering movements.

ä
* Plug-in hybrid: The rear axle level control is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.

Malfunction Maximum speed 80 km/h
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

RACE START not possible See Owner's * POSSIBLE CAUSES:

Manual
R The activation conditions have not been fulfilled (/ page 475).

RACE START cancelled * POSSIBLE CAUSES:

R you released the accelerator pedal during RACE START.

R you depressed the brake pedal during RACE START.

# You can try RACE START again at the next start.

938

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

DRIFT MODE currently unavailable See * POSSIBLE CAUSES:

Owner's Manual
R The activation conditions have not been fulfilled (/ page 477).

Driver assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Emergency stop initiated To cancel: oper- * No driver activity (e.g. steering or accelerating) was detected for an extended period. Active Emergency Stop Assist will initiate an emergency stop
ate steering wheel and a pedal (/ page 442).

# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

# Make a deliberate steering movement.

# Accelerate or brake.

Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 445).

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated because not all activation conditions are fulfilled.

# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 435).
- - - km/h

ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 432).

suspended

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically
(/ page 435).

Off

939

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Distance Assist currently unavaila- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
ble See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 432).

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on carefully.

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Active Distance Assist inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

# Drive on carefully.

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist available again * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.

# Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 435).

Active Brake Assist Functions currently * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY
limited See Owner's Manual
UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE:

R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

R Evasive Steering Assist

R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS

Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.

The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 451).

940

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.

# Drive on carefully.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Active Brake Assist Functions limited See * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY
Owner's Manual
UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE:

R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function

R Evasive Steering Assist

R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS

Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.

# Drive on carefully.

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Steering Assist currently unavaila- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
ble See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 442).

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on

# Check the tyre pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.

941

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 442).

You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.

# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Active Steering Assist currently unavaila- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
ble due to multiple emergency stops
# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Switch the vehicle off and then back on

Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 442).

# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Beginning emergency stop
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 445).

Active Emergency Stop Assist currently * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 445).

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
* Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.

942

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Switch the vehicle off and then back on.

Active Emergency Stop Assist will be available once more.

Active Emergency Stop Assist inoperative * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Change Assist currently * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 446).

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Active Lane Change Assist inoperative * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Automatic lane change currently unavaila- * The automatic lane change is temporarily unavailable.
ble. See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 446).

943

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Automatic lane change inoperative * The automatic lane change is malfunctioning.

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still availa‐
unavailable see Owner's Manual ble.

The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 432).

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on

Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.

See Owner's Manual
Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still availa‐
ble.

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist and exit warning cur- * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
rently unavailable See Owner's Manual

944

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The system limits have been reached (/ page 466).

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# Drive on

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Blind Spot Assist and exit warning inoper- * Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
ative
# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist unavailable when tow- * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
ing a trailer See Owner's Manual
# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Blind Spot Assist and exit warning * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual
The system limits have been reached (/ page 466).

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# Drive on

or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Active Blind Spot Assist and exit warning * Active Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.
inoperative
# Drive on

945

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when * When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual
# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Lane Keeping Assist currently * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
unavailable See Owner's Manual
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 470).

As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# Drive on

Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist functions * Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.
restricted See Owner's Manual
# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Lane Keeping Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 470).

# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Beginning emergency stop

946

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 445).

¸ü
* FRONT AND CORNER RADAR SENSORS (HEREAFTER "SENSORS") ARE MALFUNCTIONING. POSSIBLE CAUSES:

R The sensors are dirty

çÓ R
R
Heavy rain or snow

Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to
function normally.

# Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will
be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Clean all sensor covers from the outside (/ page 416).

# Restart the vehicle.

êü
* THE VIEW OF THE MULTIFUNCTION CAMERA IS RESTRICTED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:

R Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera

Ó¬ R
R
Heavy rain, snow or fog

Mist on the inside or outside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside or outside of the windscreen during cold times

çÔ of year in particular.

Camera view restricted See Owner's Man-

ual % This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

947

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to
function normally.

# Drive on carefully.

# To remove mist from the outside, wipe once (/ page 296).

# To remove the mist from the inside, press ¬ (/ page 311).

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will
be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear even after a driving time of about 15 minutes:

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 416).

# Restart the vehicle.

ü¸
* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.

# Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.

±
Restricted during trailer operation

PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Man- * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
ual
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
Owner's Manual
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Owner's * The PRE‑SAFE® PLUS system is malfunctioning.
Manual

948

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive on

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant * If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established, Parking Assist
unavailable at rear when towing a trailer PARKTRONIC will be not available at the rear when you are reversing. The rear manoeuvring assistant will also be unavailable in this situation.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
inoperative See Owner's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

or

949

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Limited availability of Active Parking * Active Parking Assist’s manoeuvring assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Assist manoeuvring assistant See Own-
er's Manual # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 727).

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.

G # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative

Battery
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

# # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

12 V on-board electrical system Visit
workshop

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

#
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

950

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* NOTE
Possible engine damage if you continue driving
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.

# #
#
Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
Drive for 30–60 mins.
Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V bat-
tery
or

# Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 70).

# Plug-in hybrid: Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 381).

* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.

# # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge
# Leave the vehicle running
the 12 V battery

# If the display message disappears: drive on.

# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

951

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

Û # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual
# Switch off the vehicle.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire.

Û # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Battery overheated Stop, everybody out!
# If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
Outdoors if possible

% Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.

# Do not continue driving.

# If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.

* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.

Û Comfort functions, such as the air-conditioning system, may be available only to a limited extent.
48 V battery See Owner's Manual
It is possible to drive on.

# If the display message remains active permanently, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was

Ý providing starting assistance.

The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Possible to start the vehicle again display message will be
Please wait 48 V battery charging
shown on the driver's display.

# Start the vehicle.

952

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.

If the Possible to start the vehicle again display message does not appear after a few minutes:

# Try to start the vehicle.

# If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Possible to start the vehicle again * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.

# Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tyre pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring
system is temporarily unavailable.

The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.

# Drive on

Tyre press. monitor inoperative * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

& WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.

Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

953

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
pressure sensors
# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

é
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.

# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheel sensor(s) missing

é
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.

The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.

Check tyre(s)

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 768) and the tyres.

954

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

é
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.

# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

Rectify tyre pressure
# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (/ page 770).

é
* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.

Warning tyre malfunction & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre
R The tyres can overheat and be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Do not drive with a flat tyre.

# Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi‐
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tyre.

# Observe the notes on flat tyres.

Notes on flat tyres (/ page 73).

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tyres.

é
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.

Tyre(s) overheated

955

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.

é
* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.

Reduce speed & WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.

Exhaust gas aftertreatment

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue® level has dropped to the reserve range.

Ø # Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 34).

Refill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual

956

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction after the remaining distance displayed has been driven.

Ø # Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 34).

Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual

* The low AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction from the speed displayed.

Ø After the remaining distance displayed has been driven, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.
Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max.
XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km # Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue®(/ page 34).

* The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.

Ø # Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue® displayed (/ page 34).

Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch vehicle on,
wait 60 sec. or engine start not poss # Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.

# Start the vehicle.

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.

¯ # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

¯ # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system malfunction Emergency
op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual

* Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.

¯ # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.:
max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km

957

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.

¯ # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue system fault Engine start not pos-
sible

* Plug-in hybrid:

Ø The low AdBlue® level will result in the internal-combustion engine being switched off after the displayed remaining distance has been driven.
Top up AdBlue In XXX km Electric only.
See Owner's Manual From this point on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage battery.

# Top up with AdBlue® immediately (/ page 34).

* Plug-in hybrid:

Ø The AdBlue® tank is empty. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage
battery.
Top up XX,X l AdBlue Only "Electric" avail-
able See Owner's Manual
# Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (/ page 34).

# Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.

# Start the vehicle.

* Plug-in hybrid:

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. The combustion engine will switch off after the remaining distance displayed.
AdBlue system fault In XXX km Electric
only. See Owner's Manual From this point on, the vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage
battery.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* Plug-in hybrid:

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. The vehicle can be driven only in all-electric mode, depending on the state of charge of the high-voltage
battery.
AdBlue system fault Only "Electric" drive
program available
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

958

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

5
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling * NOTE
Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 716).

Notes on engine oil (/ page 866).

* The engine oil level is too high.

5
Engine oil level Reduce oil level * NOTE
Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

* The engine oil level is too low.

5
Engine oil level Stop Switch off the vehicle * NOTE
Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

959

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 716).

# Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil (/ page 866).

* The oil pressure is too low.

5
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off the * NOTE
vehicle Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure
# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the vehicle.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.

5 # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine oil level cannot be measured

* Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine oil quality is no longer sufficient.

5 # Visit a qualified specialist workshop and have the oil changed.

Engine oil Quality loss Oil change required

960

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning and indicator lamps

Overview of indicator and warning lamps p Occupant presence reminder (yellow) (/ page 963)

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some DRIVE SYSTEM
indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is
non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if _ Reduced power (/ page 965)
they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.
Ú System error (/ page 965)
The indicator and warning lamps are located in the highlighted display sec‐
tions. # Electrical fault (/ page 965)

DRIVER DISPLAY
VEHICLE

ï Trailer hitch (/ page 966)

Ù Power steering (yellow) (/ page 966)

Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 966)

Ù Rear-axle steering (yellow)

INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS (/ page 966)
OCCUPANT SAFETY
ENGINE
6 Restraint system (/ page 963)
ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 967)
ü Seat belt (/ page 963)
; Engine diagnostics (/ page 967)
p Occupant presence reminder (white) (/ page 963)

961

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

p Vehicles with petrol engine: engine operating temperature Æ ESP® SPORT (/ page 972)
(/ page 967)
â DRIFT MODE (/ page 972)
p Engine operating temperature (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(/ page 967) Û ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 972)

% Vehicles with diesel engine: preglow ê Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 972)

# Electrical fault (/ page 967) ê Speed Limit Assist (/ page 972)

8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator (/ page 967) L Distance warning (/ page 972)

Ó Active Brake Assist (/ page 972)

BRAKES
ê Active Brake Assist (/ page 972)
! Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 970)
Æ Active Brake Assist (/ page 972)
! Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 970)
ä Rear-axle level control
J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 970) (/ page 972)
J Brakes (red) (/ page 970) ä AMG RIDE CONTROL (/ page 972)

DRIVING AND DRIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM

! ABS (/ page 972) H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 978)
÷ ESP® (/ page 972)
TYRE PRESSURE MONITOR
å ESP® OFF (/ page 972)
h Tyre pressure monitor (/ page 978)
å ESP® OFF (/ page 972)

¤ EXTERIOR LIGHTING
ESP® OFF (/ page 972)
T Side lights (/ page 282)

962

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

L Low beam (/ page 282)

K High beam (/ page 283)

#! Turn signal lights (/ page 283)

R Rear fog light (/ page 282)

SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY

É Drive Away Assist (/ page 497)

L Rear cross traffic warning (/ page 498)

º Close-range braking (/ page 499)

Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.

6 The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 136).

Restraint system warning lamp

& WARNING
Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Plug-in hybrid:

963

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& DANGER
Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.

You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

# Drive on carefully.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 136).

Seat belt warning lamp flashes
There are objects on the front passenger seat.

# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.

ü In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.

The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 136).

If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

964

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

p
* The white occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.
The occupant presence reminder is deactivated.

Occupant presence reminder warning

# Switch on the occupant presence reminder, see (/ page 182).
lamp (white)

p
* The yellow occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.
The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Occupant presence reminder warning
lamp (yellow)

Drive system
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

_
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Reduced-power warning lamp

* The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.

Ú There is a malfunction in the drive system.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

System error warning lamp

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.

# There is a fault with the electrics.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Electrical fault warning lamp

965

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ï
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.

Trailer hitch warning lamp

& WARNING
Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Ù
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)

Ù
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Power steering warning lamp (red)

966

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Ù
* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Rear axle steering warning lamp (yel‐
low)

Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÿ
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Coolant warning lamp (red) R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning

R The coolant level is too low

R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed

R The radiator fan is faulty

R The engine coolant pump is faulty

967

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.

& WARNING
Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED ENGINE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT,
THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

R You may come into contact with hot gases.

R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:

# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.

# Check the coolant level (/ page 718).

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains
below 120°C.

968

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÿ
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Coolant warning lamp (yellow) R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning

R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty

R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

; A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.

The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
Engine diagnostics warning lamp
# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.

# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.

If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.

* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.

# There is a fault in the electrics.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Electrical fault warning lamp

p
* The blue warning lamp for engine operating temperature will remain lit until the engine operating temperature has been reached.
The engine output and engine torque will remain reduced until then.

# Take this into consideration in your driving style.

Engine operating temperature warning
lamp

p
* Vehicles with a petrol engine: after a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on.
Engine output and engine torque are reduced.

# Take this into consideration in your driving style.

Engine operating temperature warning
lamp

969

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

8 The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel.
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.

! The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit up in the event of a malfunction.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
Electric parking brake indicator lamp
(red)

!
Electric parking brake indicator lamp
(yellow)

* The yellow brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

J WARNING
Brakes warning lamp (yellow) &
Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning.

970

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

# If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

J POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Brakes warning lamp (red) R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.

R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

& WARNING
Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.

# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

971

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake fluid.

Driving and driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

÷ One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 419).

ESP® warning lamp flashes One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 420).

# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

÷ ESP® is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
ESP® warning lamp lights up

# Note the messages on the driver display.

972

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

å ESP® is deactivated.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
ESP® OFF warning lamp

& WARNING
Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

# Drive on carefully.

# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

973

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 419).

* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the vehicle is running.

å¤ ESP® is deactivated.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

& WARNING
Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

# Drive on carefully.

# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 420).

* ESP® SPORT is activated while the vehicle is running.

åÆ When ESP® SPORT is activated, ESP® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.

& WARNING
Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly
When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

# Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.

974

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Observe the notes on activating ESP® SPORT(/ page 420).

Û
* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.
ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp

ê
* The Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp is lit.
Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp

ê
* The Speed Limit Assist warning lamp is lit.
Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Speed Limit Assist warning lamp

L
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.

If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Warning lamp for distance warning
# Be prepared to brake immediately.

# Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 451).

Ó
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Active Brake Assist warning lamp

ê
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.

This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp

975

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 451).

Æ
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
After you drive off, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process.

Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp
# Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 451).

â
* DRIFT MODE is activated while the engine is running.

DRIFT MODE warning lamp & WARNING

Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use DRIFT MODE, ESP® is not available.

There is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

# Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal roads.

# DRIFT MODE may only be activated and used on closed race circuits, not on public roads.

# Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

# Observe the notes on activating DRIFT MODE (/ page 476).

ä
* Plug-in hybrid: The yellow rear axle level control warning lamp is on.
There is a fault with the rear axle level control.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

ä
* The yellow AMG RIDE CONTROL warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the AMG RIDE CONTROL.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

976

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

! ABS is malfunctioning.

If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.

ABS warning lamp
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

& WARNING
There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

977

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

H
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

warning lamp

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

h The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

Tyre pressure monitoring system warn‐

ing lamp flashes & WARNING
There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.

Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

h The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

Tyre pressure monitoring system warn‐

ing lamp lights up

978

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING
Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure
R The tyres can burst.
R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

Back to Contents979

F206 0151 02
C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index

Index
Searching for something specific? Click on the relevant initial letter here and look it up.
Incidentally, you can also use your PDF reader's search function at any time.

0-9 981 G 1034 N 1056 U 1090

A 982 H 1036 O 1057 V 1092

B 992 I 1039 P 1059 W 1096

C 997 J 1042 Q 1064 Z 1101

D 1007 K 1043 R 1065

E 1025 L 1044 S 1072

F 1030 M 1048 T 1082

F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index 0-9

0-9
4MATIC 371

48 V on-board electrical system

Displays in the driver's display 540

Operating safety 110

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

A
A/C function Access data Exit warning 466

Activating/deactivating (operating
308 Setting (Bluetooth®) 691 Function 466
unit)

switching on/off (MBUX) 309 Accident prevention 497 Trailer operation 468

ABS 418 Accident, emergency call 80 Active bonnet 713

Activating/deactivating the acoustic

Acceleration 185 Active Brake Assist
locking verification signal

Kickdown 369 Active Blind Spot Assist Function 451

Optimised acceleration 335 Activating/deactivating 470 Setting 456

Accelerator pedal 349 Brake application 468

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Route-based speed adaptation 440 Function 470

Activate/deactivate variable limiter 435 Storing a speed 435 Setting the sensitivity 472

Activating/deactivating 435 Active Emergency Stop Assist 445 Trailer operation 470

Active Emergency Stop Assist 445 Active headlamps 285 Active light function 285

Active Lane Change Assist 446 Active Lane Change Assist Active Parking Assist

Active Speed Limit Assist 439 Activating/deactivating 450 Automatic braking function 497

Calling up a speed 435 Function 446 Cross traffic warning 498

Function 432 Active Lane Keeping Assist Drive Away Assist 497

Increases/decreases the speed 435 Activating/deactivating 472 Exiting a parking space 495

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Function 491 Active Emergency Stop Assist 445 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Manoeuvering brake function 499 Active Lane Change Assist 446 Switching on/off 292

Memory Parking Assist 500 Function 442 AdBlue®

Parking 492 Active Stop-and-Go Assist 442 Additives 865

Pausing 496 Adaptive brake lights 427 Capacity 866

Active Service System PLUS 709 Adaptive cruise control 440 Fill level 530

Active Speed Limit Assist 439 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Notes 377

Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating 290 Purity 865

Activating/deactivating 444 Range 530

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Adjusting bass, mid-range and treble

Topping up 34 Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass
settings

Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐

Additional door lock 195 Advanced sound system 707 705
tem

Adjusting mid-range, treble and bass

Additional mobile phone Adjusting the sound focus
settings

Burmester® 4D surround sound sys‐

Connecting 655 Advanced sound system 707 706
tem

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass

Additives Adjusting the balance/fader
settings

AdBlue® 34 Advanced sound system 707 Advanced sound system 707

Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐ Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐

Engine oil 866 705 705
tem tem

Fuel 862 Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble Advanced sound system

Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐

705 Adjusting the balance/fader 707
tem

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass

707 Ionisation 312 Air-conditioning menu
settings

Calling up the sound menu 706 Rear compartment climate control 311 Climate control 309

Information 706 Air distribution Air/water duct 721

Switching loudness normalisation

707 Overview 310 Airbag
on/off

After-sales service 709 Setting 304 Inflating 145

Air conditioning menu Air inlet 721 Overview 153

Air distribution 310 Air pressure 768 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 138

Calling up 308 Air vents Warning lamp 136

Front air conditioning 308 Setting 321

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Airflow AMG Real Performance Sound 350 AMG TRACK PACE

Setting 304 AMG RIDE CONTROL Boost strategy 478

Alarm system 219 Selecting the suspension setting 474 Configuring 599

All-wheel drive 371 Suspension 474 Drag Race 598

Alternative route 615 AMG steering wheel buttons Function 595

Ambient lighting 294 Setting 351 Telemetry display 599

AMG ceramic high-performance compo‐

340 AMG steering-wheel buttons Track Race 595
site brake system

AMG DYNAMIC SELECT Function 350 Android Auto

Setting drive programs 359 Connecting a mobile phone (wired) 667

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Connecting a mobile phone (wire‐

668 Anti-theft protection Overview 664
less)

Ending 669 Additional door lock 195 Sound settings 666

Information 667 Immobiliser 219 Transferred vehicle data 669

Anticipatory operating-mode strategy,

Sound settings 669 349 Apps, Mercedes me
Route-based

Transferred vehicle data 669 Apple CarPlay®, Smartphone Mercedes me calls 670

Android smartphone 667 Connecting an iPhone® (cable) 665 Mercedes-Benz Connect 675

Animals 146 Connecting an iPhone® (wireless) 666 Selecting (MBUX multimedia system) 677

Anti-lock braking system 418 Ending 666 Ashtray

Anti-theft alarm system 219 Notes 665 Using 271

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Assembly licence plate, front 114 Service requirements 709 ATTENTION ASSIST

Assistance system 417 Special service requirements 710 Function 427

Assistant display ATA Setting 428

Menu (driver display) 531 Deactivating the alarm 220 Attention assistant 427

ASSYST PLUS Function 219 Augmented reality

Battery disconnection periods 710 Interior protection 221 MBUX route guidance 637

Displaying the service due date 709 Interior protection function 221 Authorisations

Maintenance work 709 Tow-away protection 220 Setting 586

Service interval display 709 Tow-away protection function 220 Authorised workshop 120

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Automatic front passenger airbag shut‐

Automatic car wash 40 Automatic transmission
off

Information (child restraint system

Automatic car wash mode 724 161 DIRECT SELECT lever 361
on the front passenger seat)

Automatic climate control 309 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 138 Drive programs 353

Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Automatic lane change DYNAMIC SELECT button 353

Function 141 Active Lane Change Assist 446 Engages neutral 363

Automatic distance control 432 Automatic measures after an accident 144 Engaging drive position 366

Automatic driving lights 282 Automatic mirror folding function 302 Engaging reverse gear 362

Automatic emergency call 681 Automatic seat adjustment 237 Gear shift 361

Automatic engine start/stop 340 Kickdown 369

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index A

Trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG

Manual shifting 366 881
vehicles)

Oil temperature (driver's display) 532

Selecting park position 364

Steering wheel gearshift paddles 366

Transmission position display 361

Transmission positions 361

Autonomous braking 451

Axle load

Trailer operation 880

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index B

B
Bad weather light 286 Battery Starting assistance 70

Bag hook 262 Declaration of conformity 117 Battery (48 V)

Ball neck High-voltage battery 747 Notes 746

Battery (high-voltage on-board electri‐

Folding out/in 54 Battery (12 V battery) 874
cal system)

Trailer coupling 512 Charging 70 Battery (key) 187

BAS 419 Notes 744 Battery (starter battery)

Notes (starting assistance and charg‐

Basic information 133 747 Charging via Remote Online 332
ing)

Replacing 751 Battery operation 324

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index B

Belt Blind Spot Assist Switching on/off 587

Adjusting the height 136 Activating/deactivating 470 Bonnet

Fastening 136 Function 466 Active bonnet 713

Notes on wearing correctly 135 BlueTec Opening/closing 713

Boost pressure, current (driver's dis‐

Releasing 152 AdBlue® 377 532
play)

Bicycle rack Bluetooth® Boost strategy

activating/deactivating (steering
Load capacity 879 Connecting a mobile phone 654 478
wheel button)

Load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

880 Information 587 Function 478
cles)

Trailer operation 515 Setting up an Internet connection 691

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index B

Boot floor Brake Assist Brake pads 334

Opening 53 Active Brake Assist 451 Brakes

Boot lid Brake Assist System 419 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 418

Closing 201 Brake Assist System 419 Active Brake Assist 451

HANDS-FREE ACCESS 203 Brake disks 334 Adaptive brake lights 427

AMG ceramic high-performance

Limiter 205 Brake fluid 868 340
composite brake system

Opening 200 Brake force distribution 425 BAS (Brake Assist System) 419

Power closing function 201 Brake lamps Driving tips 336

Switching the separate locking fea‐ EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐

205 Adaptive brake lights 427 425
ture on/off tion)

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index B

Electric parking brake 410 Braking assistance Wheel change 777

Handbrake 410 Active Brake Assist 451 Burmester® 4D surround sound system

HOLD function 425 Brake Assist System 419 Adjusting the sound focus 706

Limited braking effect (salt-treated

336 Breakdown Automatic loudness normalisation 705
roads)

New/replaced brake pads/brake

334 Flat tyre 73 Burmester® 3D-surround sound system
discs

Parking brake 410 Overview of aids 97 Adjusting the balance/fader 705

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass

Post-collision brake 144 Tow-starting 758 705
settings

Recuperation 345 Towing methods 75 Calling up the sound menu 705

Running-in notes 334 Transporting the vehicle 756 Information 705

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index B

Selecting the sound profile 706

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

C
Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐
Call list 705 Making 657
tem

Deleting 661 Calls, Telephone operation Mercedes-Benz Connect 670

Making a call 660 Accepting 657 Telephone 657

Overview 660 Activating functions during a call 657 Via the overhead control panel 670

Selecting options 661 Calls with several participants 657 Camera

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer

671 Declining 657 360° camera 482
Centre

Activating using GPS (reversing cam‐

Calling up the sound menu Ending a call 657 486
era)

Advanced sound system 706 Incoming call during an existing call 658 Button 486

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Care 727 Car wash Care

Cleaning 727 Automatic car wash 40 Air/water duct 721

Function 482 Car wash mode 723 Automatic car wash 40

Information 416 High-pressure cleaner 724 Camera 727

Manage activation points 486 Washing by hand 725 Car parts 727

Opening the camera cover (reversing

487 Car-to-X-Communication Car wash mode 723
camera)

Reversing camera 479 Display on map 636 Decorative foil 726

Select view 486 Overview 635 Display 729

Car key 184 Sending hazard warnings 636 Exterior lighting 727

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Genuine wood/trim elements 729 Vehicle interior 729 Central locking system

Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

Head-up display 729 727 Button 196
battery

High-pressure cleaner 724 Washing by hand 725 Key 185

Paint 725 Wheels/rims 727 Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest)

Plastic trim 729 Care of the plastic trim 729 Inflating 145

Roof lining 729 Care of the roof lining 729 Information 153

Seat belt 729 Care of the steering wheel 729 Charge level display 402

Steering wheel 729 Caring for rims 727 Charge level/charge display 402

Trailer hitch 727 Central display 564

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Charging Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 390 Stowing the charging cable 383

12 V battery 70 Mains socket, mode 2 385 USB port 56

Maximum charging current (mains

At time of departure 601 389 Wallbox, mode 3 386
socket)

Notes on charging the high-voltage

Charge level display 402 381 Charging cable
battery

Charging cable control panel 389 Notes on the high-voltage battery 747 Control panel 389

Charging station, mode 3 386 Rapid charging station, mode 4 388 Stowing 383

Configuring weekly profile 601 Recuperation 345 Charging process

Ending the charging process (alter‐ Starting the charging process (alter‐
394 391 Paying 617
nating current, mode 2/3) nating current, mode 2/3)

Ending the charging process (direct Starting the charging process (direct
400 397 Charging settings 601
current, mode 4) current, mode 4)

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Seats suitable for belt-secured child

Checking the coolant level 718 Basic instructions 157 170
restraint systems

Brief overview of most important Seats suitable for i‑Size child

Checking tyre 155 170
points restraint systems

Seats suitable for ISOFIX child

pressure 770 Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size 174 169
restraint systems

Securing to the front passenger seat

Child safety lock Front passenger seat 161 177
with the seat belt

Notes on fastening seat belts (MBUX Securing to the rear seat with the
Rear door 178 583 177
Interior Assistant) seatbelt

Side window (rear) 180 Overview of warning stickers 160 Top Tether 176

Without automatic co-driver airbag

Child seat Rearward-facing 164 163
shutoff

Recommendations for child restraint

Adjusting the vehicle seat 173 165 Children
systems

Approval categories 164 Risks/dangers 158 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle 158

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Vehicle socket for the high-voltage

Basic instructions 157 Camera 727 727
battery

Chock 73 Car parts 727 Washing by hand 725

City lighting 286 Car wash mode 723 Cleaning carpet 729

Classic menu display content Decorative foil 726 Cleaning the seat cover 729

Selecting 526 Genuine wood/trim elements 729 Climate control, Air conditioning system

Clean varnish 725 High-pressure cleaner 724 Activating/deactivating 307

Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐

Cleaning Paint 725 307
ing unit)

Activating/deactivating the A/C func‐

Air/water duct 721 Sensors 727 308
tion (control panel)

Automatic car wash 40 Vehicle interior 729 Air conditioning menu 308

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Pre-entry climate control for depar‐

Air distribution 304 Demisting the windscreen 304 315
ture time

Pre-entry climate control when the

Air distribution settings 310 Demisting windows 311 314
vehicle is unlocked

Air vents (front) 321 Fine particle status display 308 Rear operating unit 305

Air vents (rear) 321 Fragrance system 312 Rear window heater 304

Resetting the climate control set‐

Airflow 304 Immediate pre-entry climate control 318 78
tings

Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐

Automatic control 309 313 Residual heat 312
grance system)

Automatically controlling (rear oper‐

309 Ionisation 312 Setting 308
ating unit)

Closing/opening the windows (air-

77 Notes 304 Stationary heater/ventilation 319
recirculation button)

Switching air-recirculation mode

Defrosting the windscreen 309 Operating unit 304 311
on/off

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Switching the A/C function on/off

309 Cockpit Comfort
(MBUX)

Synchronisation function 311 Dashboard 83 Information 26

Temperature 304 Coffee cup symbol 427 Communication module

Ventilation with convenience open‐ Disconnecting automatically from

209 Collision detection (parked vehicle) 690
ing the Internet

Climate control settings Information 413 Setting up an Internet connection 689

Resetting 78 Setting 414 Commuter route 615

Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER

141 Combination switch Compass 642
AIR BAG OFF

Components subject to radio regula‐

COC papers, Certificate of conformity 788 Lights 283
tions

Windscreen wipers 296 Declaration of conformity 115

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Connection status Note about suggestions 656 Convenience closing 209

Displaying 692 Options 659 Convenience feature

Closing/opening the windows (air-

Overview 692 Selecting options for suggestions 656 77
recirculation button)

Contacts, Address book, Phone book Storing 659 Convenience opening 209

Calling up 659 Content sharing Coolant

Deleting 660 Gallery app 678 Notes 869

Control element (MBUX multimedia sys‐

Information 658 Cooling 304
tem)

Making a call 659 Setting acoustic feedback 567 Copyright 131

Name format 659 Control elements: 108 Cornering light 285

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index C

Correct use 122 Setting a speed 430

Cover 212 Storing a speed 430

Cross traffic (warning) 498 Cup holder

Crosswind Assist 422 Rear 269

Cruise control

activating/deactivating 430

Calling up a speed 430

Function 428

Requirements: 430

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

D
Damage Starting/stopping loop recording 649 Online services 129

Limited protection 146 Data processing in the vehicle 127 Deactivating the alarm 220

Dashboard Data protection Dealership 120

Cockpit 83 Granting authorisations 586 Declaration of conformity

Dashcam Data protection rights 129 Battery 117

Components subject to radio regula‐

Configuring settings 651 Data storage 115
tions

Selecting a USB device 649 Data protection rights 129 Electromagnetic compatibility 115

Starting/stopping individual record‐

650 Electronic control units 127 TIREFIT kit 117
ings

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Decorative foil 726 Editing intermediate destinations 622 Selecting from favourites 614

Defrost function 309 Editing the previous destinations 632 Selecting from the map 614

DeNOx agent Saving as a favourite 632 Selecting previous destinations 612

AdBlue® 377 Destination entry Destination entry (multimedia system)

Deployed components Accepting a destination suggestion 612 Notes 610

Limited protection 146 Entering an intermediate destination 622 Selecting a POI 612

Deployment situations 145 Entering geo-coordinates 614 Detecting inattentiveness 427

Destination Selecting a contact 614 Diagnostics connection 118

Editing a suggestion 632 Selecting a received destination 615

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Diesel Bad weather light 286 Digital Vehicle Key

Notes 862 City lighting 286 Function 189

Digital Extras 109 Cornering light 285 managing 191

DIGITAL LIGHT Dynamic low beam 284 Problem 194

Activating/deactivating 288 Enhanced fog light function 286 remove 192

Active headlamps 285 Motorway mode 285 Setting up 189

Adaptive Highbeam Assist 289 Overview 284 Direct commands

Voice commands for MBUX voice

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 291 Topographical compensation 286 556
assistant

Assistance functions 286 Digital Owner's Manual 100

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

DIRECT SELECT lever Selecting park position 364 Notes 883

Automatic transmission 361 Display Display messages

Engages neutral 363 Care 729 ç - - - km/h 939

Engaging drive position 366 Display (driver's display) È - - - km/h 936

Engaging park position automatically 364 Overview of displays 542 h - - - km/h 935

# 12 V on-board electrical sys‐

Engaging reverse gear 362 Display (MBUX multimedia system) 950
tem Visit workshop

Û 48 V battery See Owner's Man‐

Function 361 Settings 585 952
ual

ò Acoustic presence indicator

Gearshift recommendation 368 Display message 905
inoperative

¯ AdBlue system fault Engine

Manual gearshifting 366 Calling up on driver display 883 958
start not possible

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

¯ AdBlue system fault In XXX km & Currently unavailable Battery

958 Ø Beginning emergency stop 942 903
Electric only. See Owner's Manual low

¯ AdBlue system fault Only & Currently unavailable Charge

958 J Brake immediately 929 904
"Electric" drive program available high-voltage battery

¯ AdBlue system fault See Own‐ ê Camera view restricted See & Currently unavailable High-
957 947 904
er's Manual Owner's Manual voltage battery charging incomplete.

¯ AdBlue system malfunction

Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not 957 ® Change key batteries 893 & Currently unavailable Refuel 903
poss. in XXX km

! currently unavailable See

¯ AdBlue system malfunction è Charger cable connected 905 931
Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP®)
Emergency op. in XXX km See Own‐ 957
er's Manual
÷ currently unavailable See
J Check brake fluid level 930 933
5 Add 1 litre engine oil when Owner's Manual (ESP®)
959
next refuelling
í Digital Vehicle Key Charge
é Check tyre(s) 954 896
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a device
935
break!

! Clean the fuel filter 922 õ Do not forget key 896

: Automatic driving lights inop‐
897
erative
ÿ Coolant Stop Switch off the æ Do not leave persons or ani‐
921 892
Û Battery overheated Stop, vehicle mals in the vehicle
907
everybody out! Outdoors if possible

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Û Drive power and range 6 Front right malfunction Con‐

908 886 ® Key being taught in Please wait 894
reduced See Owner's Manual sult workshop

5 Engine oil level cannot be

960 : Front right parking lights 899 õ Key being taught in Please wait 896
measured

5 Engine oil level Reduce oil

959 : Front right turn signal 901 í Key does not belong to vehicle 896
level

5 Engine oil level Stop Switch off 6 Fuel tank is depressurised ® Key not detected (red display
959 911 893
the vehicle Ready for refuelling message)

5 Engine oil pressure Stop Û Have high-voltage system ® Key not detected (white dis‐
960 908 893
Switch off the vehicle checked See Owner's Manual play message)

5 Engine oil Quality loss Oil ! inoperative See Owner's Man‐ õ Key not detected Place Digi‐
960 932 tal Vehicle Key in inductive charging 895
change required ual (ABS and ESP®)
bracket

6 Front left malfunction Consult T inoperative See Owner's Man‐

885 934
workshop ual (EBD, ABS and ESP®) õ Key not detected 894

÷ inoperative See Owner's Man‐

: Front left parking lights 899 934
ual (ESP®) : Left brake lamp 901

: Front left turn signal 900 G Inoperative 950

: Left cornering light 899

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

! Parking brake See Owner's

: Left daytime running lights 900 J Malfunction Stop vehicle 930 927
Manual

! Parking brake Switch on vehi‐

: Left low beam 899 Û Malfunction Visit workshop 907 929
cle to release

: Left main beam 900 d Malfunction 909 È passive 936

: Left mirror turn signal 901 Û Malfunction 907 d Performance severely limited 910

Ý Please wait 48 V battery

: Left tail light 900 ð Maximum speed exceeded 937 952
charging

6 Left window airbag malfunc‐ 6 Please wait Depressurising

890 : Number plate lamp 902 910
tion Consult workshop fuel tank

ä Malfunction Maximum speed & Pre-entry climate control via

937 Ø 942 key available again after starting 904
80 km/h
vehicle

: Malfunction See Owner's Man‐

897 ç Off 939 & Pre-entry climate control via
ual
key currently unavailable. High-volt‐ 904
age battery low
J Malfunction See Owner's Man‐
929 ë Off 935
ual Ù Rear axle steering currently
917
malfunctioning

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction Ø Refill AdBlue See Owner’s

918 956 : Right cornering light 899
Stop immediately Manual

Ù Rear axle steering Malfunction

917 ! Release parking brake 929 : Right daytime running lights 900
Visit workshop

: Rear fog light 902 ý Replace air filter 922 : Right low beam 899

_ Rear left seat backrest not í Replace key See Owner's Man‐
920 896 : Right main beam 900
locked ual

: Rear left turn signal 901 ® Replace key 896 : Right mirror turn signal 901

_ Rear right seat backrest not 6 Restraint system malfunction

920 884 : Right tail light 900
locked Consult workshop

ü Restricted during trailer opera‐ 6 Right window airbag malfunc‐

: Rear right turn signal 901 948 890
tion tion Consult workshop

6 Second row of seats, left Mal‐

é Rectify tyre pressure 955 : Reversing light 902 887
function Consult workshop

6 Second row of seats, right Mal‐

é Reduce speed 956 : Right brake lamp 901 889
function Consult workshop

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

# Start the vehicle to charge the Ø Top up XX,X l AdBlue Only

951 : Switch off lights 897 "Electric" available See Owner's 958
12 V battery
Manual

Ù Steering malfunction Drive

917 : Switch on headlamps 897 Ø Top up XX,X l AdBlue Switch
carefully Visit workshop
vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine 957
start not poss
Ù Steering malfunction ¸ temporarily unavailable Sen‐
Increased physical effort See Own‐ 916 947
sors dirty u Towing not permitted See
er's Manual 904
Owner's Manual

Ù Steering malfunction Stop : Third brake lamp 902

916
immediately See Owner's Manual : Trailer brake lamp 902

Ø Top up AdBlue Emergency op.

957
d Stop Switch off the vehicle 909 in XXX km See Owner's Manual ï Trailer coupling Check lock
913
(white display message)
Ø Top up AdBlue In XXX km Elec‐
# Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on 958
951 tric only. See Owner's Manual ï Trailer coupling Check lock
to charge the 12 V battery 914
(red display message)
Ø Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg.
# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐ op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in 957
950
ual XXX km : Trailer left turn signal 902

Û Stop vehicle See Owner's Man‐ + Top up coolant See Owner’s

952 921
ual Manual : Trailer right turn signal 902

ç suspended 939 ¥ Top up washer fluid 912

: Trailer tail light 903

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable Active Lane Change Assist currently
é Tyre(s) overheated 955 when towing a trailer See Owner's 946 943
unavailable See Owner's Manual
Manual

Active Lane Change Assist inopera‐

é Warning tyre malfunction 955 Active bonnet malfunction See Own‐ 943
918 tive
er's Manual

Active Lane Keeping Assist currently

é Wheel sensor(s) missing 954 Active Brake Assist Functions cur‐ 946
940 unavailable See Owner's Manual
rently limited See Owner's Manual

"Electric" drive program currently Active Lane Keeping Assist functions

906 Active Brake Assist Functions limited 946
unavailable 941 restricted See Owner's Manual
See Owner's Manual

Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera‐

4matic currently unavailable 920 Active Distance Assist available 946
940 tive
again

Active Parking Assist and

4matic inoperative 920 Active Distance Assist currently PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐ 949
940
unavailable See Owner's Manual er's Manual

AC charging inoperative Consult

906 Active Steering Assist currently
workshop Active Distance Assist inoperative 940 unavailable due to multiple emer‐ 942
gency stops
Active Blind Spot Assist and exit
warning currently unavailable See 945 Active Emergency Stop Assist cur‐
rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ 942 Active Steering Assist currently
Owner's Manual 941
ual unavailable See Owner's Manual

Active Blind Spot Assist and exit

945 Active Emergency Stop Assist inop‐
warning inoperative 943 Active Steering Assist inoperative 941
erative

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently Blind Spot Assist and exit warning
944 Apply brake to deselect P position 923 945
unavailable see Owner's Manual inoperative

Active Stop-and-Go Assist inopera‐ Blind Spot Assist unavailable when

944 Apply brake to engage D or R 923 945
tive See Owner's Manual towing a trailer See Owner's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently Cannot start vehicle See Owner's

898 Apply brake to engage R 923 909
unavailable See Owner's Manual Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera‐ Apply parking brake to park Visit Charging fault Please change charg‐
898 923 905
tive workshop ing method See Owner's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur‐ Automatic lane change currently Check brake pads See Owner's Man‐
rently unavailable See Owner's Man‐ 898 943 931
unavailable. See Owner's Manual ual
ual

Check low beam setting (left/right-

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop‐ Automatic lane change inoperative 944 897
898 side traffic)
erative

Auxiliary battery malfunction (red Consult workshop without changing

Ambient light warning support inop‐ 926 908
918 display message) the transmission position
erative

Auxiliary battery malfunction (white Consult workshop without starting

AMG Ride Control Function limited 926 908
937 display message) the vehicle again
See Owner's Manual

Blind Spot Assist and exit warning Cruise control and Limiter inopera‐
Apply brake and start vehicle to shift currently unavailable See Owner's 944 936
923 tive
out of P or N Manual

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Head-up display currently unavaila‐

Cruise control inoperative 935 Drive overheated. Drive on with care 926 915
ble See Owner's Manual

Electronic rear axle differential lock

Cruise control off 936 918 Head-up display inoperative 915
currently unavailable

DC charging inoperative Consult Electronic rear axle differential lock High-voltage battery malfunction.
906 918 Consult workshop without starting 910
workshop inoperative
the vehicle again

Emergency stop initiated To cancel:

DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited 897 939 High-voltage battery malfunction. No
operate steering wheel and a pedal
start in approx. XXX km Consult 910
workshop (red display message)
DRIFT MODE currently unavailable Front passenger airbag disabled See
939 890
See Owner's Manual Owner's Manual High-voltage battery malfunction. No
start in approx. XXX km Consult 910
workshop (yellow display message)
Drive malfunction Achievable speed Front passenger airbag enabled See
909 891
limited Stop soon Owner's Manual
Inoperative indicator lamp in driver
903
display. Consult workshop
Drive malfunction Achievable speed Function blocked as centre backrest
909 920
severely limited See Owner's Manual is folded down
Limited availability of Active Park‐
ing Assist manoeuvring assistant See 950
Drive malfunction Stop Consult Hazard warning lamp system Mal‐ Owner's Manual
926 903
workshop function

Limiter inoperative 936

Drive malfunction Stop Restart vehi‐ Head-up display Brightness currently
926 916
cle reduced See Owner's Manual
Login failed Change authentication
906
method or charging station

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Low beam setting (left/right-side Reversing not poss. Consult work‐

897 Possible to start the vehicle again 953 925
traffic) Manual adjustment only shop

N automatically activated Please PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply
925 948 924
engage transmission position again See Owner's Manual parking brake to park

Not possible to unlock charging PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's
905 948 924
cable See Owner's Manual Manual door open Transmission not in P

Occupant presence reminder inoper‐ PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Risk of vehicle rolling away N activa‐
892 948 ted manually No automatic switch to 924
ative Owner's Manual
P

Only electric drive available Power

906 Preparing drive system… 907 Searching for key in stowage tray
limited
or Digital Vehicle Key in inductive
894
charging bracket… See Owner's Man‐
Only select P when vehicle is sta‐ ual
923 RACE START cancelled 938
tionary

Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h 936

PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring RACE START not possible See Own‐
assistant unavailable at rear when 949 938
er's Manual
towing a trailer
Speed Limit Assist currently unavail‐
936
Reduced drive power See Owner's able See Owner's Manual
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own‐ 907
949 Manual
er's Manual
Speed Limit Assist inoperative 936
Place the key in the marked space Reserve fuel 922
894
See Owner's Manual
To shift to N, hold selector lever lon‐
925
ger in position N

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

To switch off the vehicle, press the Vehicle not currently being charged
Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ 921 905 Emergency key 198
Charging station fault
onds or 3 times

Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila‐ Wiper Malfunction 913 Opening (from the inside) 195
937
ble See Owner's Manual

Displaying road names/house numbers 638 Unlocking (inside) 195

Traffic Sign Assist inoperative 937

Distance control 432 Door control panel

Transmission Malfunction Stop 925

Tyre press. monitor currently Distance warning 451 Seat operation 94

953
unavailable

DISTRONIC 432 Drag Race, Drag race 598

Tyre press. monitor inoperative 953

Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No Door DRIFT MODE

954
tyre pressure sensors

Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown Additional door lock 195 Activating 477
occurs when locked or automatically 912
in a few minutes
Child safety lock (rear door) 178 Activation conditions 477
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown
occurs when locked or automatically 912
in XX mins

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Deactivating 477 Selecting 356 Menus 524

Function 476 Driver display Navigation menu 535

Drinks holder 266 Identifying malfunctions 521 Notes 520

Drive Away Assist 497 Service due date 709 Operating 522

Drive position 366 Track Pace menu 534 Service menu 530

Drive program display 356 Driver's display, Instrument cluster Status displays 542

Drive programs 48 V on-board electrical system 540 Supersport menu 533

AMG DYNAMIC SELECT 359 Assistant display 531 Warning/indicator lamps 89

Function 353 Head-up display 537

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Driver's seat Driving safety system 466
Assist

Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 227 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 418 Cameras 416

Adjusting electrically 230 Active Brake Assist 451 Cruise control 428

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu‐

Easy entry and exit feature 245 Active Lane Change Assist 446 425
tion)

Manually adjusting 225 Active Lane Keeping Assist 470 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) 419

Seat heating 238 Active Steering Assist 442 Hill Start Assist 427

Driving abroad Adaptive brake lights 427 HOLD function 425

Light adjustment low beam 42 ATTENTION ASSIST 427 Overview 417

BAS (Brake Assist System) 419 Radar and ultrasonic sensors 416

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Light adjustment when driving

Speed Limit Assist 456 42 Dynamic handling control system 419
abroad

STEER CONTROL 425 Optimised acceleration 335 Dynamic low beam

Traffic Sign Assist 461 Rear axle steering 340 Activating/deactivating 288

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist 505 Recuperation 345 Overview 284

Your responsibility 416 Running-in notes 334 DYNAMIC SELECT

Calling up the fuel consumption indi‐

Driving system 417 Drowsiness detection 427 358
cator

Driving tips Duplicate key 188 Configuring drive program I 357

AMG ceramic high-performance

340 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Displaying engine data 358
composite brake system

General driving tips 336 Suspension 473 Displaying vehicle data 358

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index D

Drive program display 356

Drive programs 353

Function 353

Selecting the drive program 356

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index E

E
E-mails 554 Setting 246 ECO start/stop button

E10 860 EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution 425 Automatic engine start/stop 342

E25 860 ECO Assist ECO start/stop function

Easy entry feature 48 V on-board electrical system 343 Automatic engine start 340

Function 245 Activating/deactivating 349 Automatic engine stop 340

Conditions (automatic engine stop/

Setting 246 Plug-in hybrid 347 79
start)

Easy exit feature ECO display 343 Function 340

Function 245 Switching off/on 342

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index E

Electric drive 324 Electronic Stability Program 419 Warning triangle 734

Electric parking brake Electronics compartment Emergency braking

Applying automatically 410 Rear centre console 257 Active Brake Assist 451

Emergency braking 413 Emergency Brake Assist System 419

Manually applying/releasing 412 Emergency guide 80 Carrying out 413

Releasing automatically 411 Fire extinguisher 68 Electric parking brake/handbrake 410

Electrical fuses 72 First-aid kit (soft sided) 44 Emergency call

Electromagnetic compatibility Overview of aids 97 Automatic 681

Declaration of conformity 115 Safety vest 43 Manual 682

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index E

Emergency call system Emergency spare wheel Energy flow display

Digital Extras 80 Inflating 785 Function/notes 602

Emergency key Emergency stop assistant 445 Engine

Door 198 ENERGIZING Coach Emergency operation mode 330

Inserting/removing 186 Calling up 607 Engine number 856

Emergency operation mode Function 606 Starting assistance 747

Start the vehicle 330 ENERGIZING COMFORT switching off (start/stop button) 403

Emergency shutoff (high-voltage on-

326 Overview of programmes 604 Tow-starting 758
board electrical system)

Starting the programme 605

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index E

Checking the oil level using the

Engine data 39 Engine operating temperature
driver display

Displaying 358 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 867 Warning lamp 334

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
DYNAMIC SELECT 358 868 Engine output 334
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Engine electronics 789 Quality 867 Engine output, current (driver's display) 532

Engine number 856 Quality (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 868 Engine sound 350

Engine oil, Oil Temperature (driver's display) 532 Engine start

Additives 866 Topping up 716 Emergency operation mode 330

Capacity 867 Engine oil temperature (driver's display) 532 Engine starting

Capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 868 Remote Online 333

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index E

Start/stop button 329 ESP® Exit warning

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Engine torque 334 Activating/deactivating 423 466
Assist

Entering characters Adjusting (steering-wheel button) 423 Exiting a parking space

Deleting the user dictionary 579 Crosswind Assist 422 Active Parking Assist 491

Function/notes 579 ESP® SPORT 420 Drive Away Assist 497

Setting the keyboard language 579 Function 419 PARKTRONIC 487

using the touchscreen 579 Trailer stabilisation 423 Exterior lighting

Environmentally friendly driving 103 EU type approval number 856 Care 727

Exhaust gas aftertreatment, diesel Light adjustment when driving

ESC, Electronic Stability Control 419 865 42
engine abroad

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index F

F
Factory settings Fill level Fire extinguisher 68

MBUX reset function 593 AdBlue® 530 First aid

Fault message Filling station search First-aid kit (soft sided) 44

Driver's display 883 Starting automatic search 625 Fitting

Switching the automatic search

Favourites 625 Snow chains 60
on/off

Adding a destination 614 Fine particle status display 308 Tyres/wheels 781

Home address 614 Fingerprint sensor Fitting accessories

Work address 614 MBUX multimedia system 568 Limited protection 146

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index F

Fitting the licence plate (front) 114 Floor mats 278 Free software 131

Flacon 313 Fog light (extended range) 286 Frequencies

Flat towing Foil covering Mobile phone 790

Pulling/towing 518 On camera/sensors 416 Two-way radio 790

Flat tyre Radar and ultrasonic sensors 416 Front airbag

MOExtended 737 Fragrance system Inflating 145

Notes 73 Inserting/removing the flacon 313 Front headlamps 282

TIREFIT kit 738 Perfume vial 313 Front passenger airbag

Wheel change 777 Setting 312 Disabling/enabling 140

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index F

Front passenger airbag shutoff Fuel Petrol quality 860

Information (child restraint system

161 Additives 862 Refilling 29
on the front passenger seat)

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in

Front passenger display 377 Reserve 864
hybrid with petrol engine)

Overview 558 Diesel 862 Sulphur content 860

Visual shield function 558 Diesel quality 862 Tank content 864

Tank content (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Front passenger seat E10 860 865
cles)

Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 227 E25 860 Fuel consumption indicator 358

Fuel reserve (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

Adjusting electrically 230 865 Fuel reserve 864
cles)

Manually adjusting 225 Petrol 860 Function in the event of an accident 145

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index F

Function seat 94

Fuses

Boot 762

Cockpit 761

Engine compartment 760

Front passenger footwell 761

Fuse assignment diagram 72

Notes 72

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index G

G
G-meter, Accelerometer 532 Garage door openers General driving tips 336

Gallery app Programming buttons 405 Genuine parts 106

Content sharing 678 Synchronising the rolling code 406 Glide mode 369

Operating 678 Gearshift Glove compartment

Garage door opener DIRECT SELECT lever 361 Locking/unlocking 57

Clearing the memory 409 Manual 366 Grab handles 224

Open/close gate 409 Gearshift paddles Greeting tone

Problem 407 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 366 Switching the greeting tone on/off 704

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index G

Gross mass 856

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index H

H
Handbrake 410 Hazard warnings Head-up display

Handling characteristics Car-to-X-Communication 636 Care 729

Unusual 764 Head restraint Function 537

HANDS-FREE ACCESS 203 Adjusting (rear) 235 Memory function 249

Hands-free system 652 Adjusting manually (front, 2-way) 233 Operating 538

Haptic accelerator pedal, Pressure point 349 adjusting manually (front, 4-way) 233 Switching on/off 538

Hazard warning lights 68 Removing/fitting (rear) 235 Headlamp flashing 283

Headlamp range control 286

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index H

Headlamps 282 Help call Charging station, mode 3 386

Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐

Heating 80 Configuring weekly profile 601
tem

Activating/deactivating 307 High beam 283 Connection types 874

Ending the charging process (alter‐

Centre console 305 High-pressure cleaner 724 394
nating current, mode 2/3)

Ending the charging process (direct

Climate control 304 High-voltage battery 400
current, mode 4)

Rear window 304 Charge level display 402 Energy flow display 603

Seat 238 Charging at time of departure 601 General notes on charging 381

Stationary heater 65 Charging cable control panel 389 Mains socket, mode 2 385

Maximum charging current (mains

Steering wheel 243 Charging duration 874 389
socket)

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index H

Notes 747 Wallbox, mode 3 386 Home screen

Range 874 High-voltage on-board electrical system Central display 564

Rapid charging station, mode 4 388 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 390

Recuperation 345 Manual switch-off 326

Starting the charging process (alter‐

391 Operating safety 110
nating current, mode 2/3)

Starting the charging process (direct

397 Hill Start Assist 427
current, mode 4)

Stowing the charging cable 383 HOLD function

Type 874 Function 425

Voltage types 874 Switching on/off 426

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index I

I
i-Size child restraint system Implied warranty 125 Selecting functions (calendar entry) 663

Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occu‐

Fitting 174 Importer information
pants

Suitable seats 170 Regulatory radio information 854 Limited protection 146

Identification plate In-Car App Pass 686 Increase in traffic information volume

Engine 856 In-Car Apps Setting 702

Vehicle 856 Installing 686 Indicator lamps/warning lamps

Immediate pre-entry climate control 318 In-Car Calendar PASSENGER AIR BAG 138

Immobiliser 219 Calling up 27

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index I

Indicator/warning lamps Switch-off delay time 295 Internet connection

Cancelling permission (mobile

Overview 961 Interior protection 221 691
phone)

Disconnecting automatically (com‐

Individual drive program Intermediate destination 690
munication module)

Configuring 357 Editing 622 Displaying the connection status 692

Starting an automatic filling station

Inside rearview mirror 300 625 Information 688
search

Starting the automatic service sta‐

Interior lighting 625 Overview of connection status 692
tion search

Ambient lighting 294 Internet Restrictions 688

MBUX reading light 583 Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot 588 Setting access data (Bluetooth®) 691

Setting 294 Smartphone integration 27 Setting up (communication module) 689

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index I

Setting up (Wi-Fi) 690

Setup (Bluetooth®) 691

Ionisation 312

iPhone®

Smartphone integration 664

ISOFIX child restraint system

Fitting 174

Suitable seats 169

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index J

J
Jack

Storage location 73

Jump-start connection 70

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index K

K
Key Problem 188 Kickdown 369

acoustic locking verification signal 185 Replacement key 188 Knee airbag 153

Battery 187 Unlocking setting 185

Deactivating a function 79 KEYLESS-GO

Emergency key 186 Deactivating 79

Energy consumption 79 Locking/unlocking the vehicle 196

Function 184 Problem 197

Key ring attachment 186 Unlocking setting 185

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index L

L
Lane Change Assist 446 Language Light adjustment

Lane Keeping Assist 470 Notes 589 Driving abroad 42

Lane navigation Setting 589 Light switch 282

Overview 609 Last destinations Lighting

Lane recognition Selecting 612 Dynamic low beam 284

Active Lane Change Assist 446 Level regulation Interior lighting 294

Active Lane Keeping Assist 470 Suspension 473 Lights

Activating/deactivating dynamic low

288
beam

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index L

Active headlamps 285 Cornering light 285 Motorway mode 285

Adaptive brake lights 427 DIGITAL LIGHT 284 Reading lamp 294

Adaptive Highbeam Assist 289 Dynamic low beam 284 Rear fog light 283

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 291 Fog light (extended range) 286 Responsibility for lighting systems 281

Assistance functions 286 Hazard warning lights 68 Setting low beam 293

Automatic driving lights 282 High beam 283 Switch-off delay time 293

Bad weather light 286 Interior lighting 294 Topographical compensation 286

Light adjustment when driving

City lighting 286 42 Turn signal light 283
abroad

Combination switch 283 Locator lighting 293

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index L

Limiter Setting a speed 430 Load capacity

Activating/deactivating 430 Storing a speed 430 Bicycle rack 879

Buttons 430 Live Traffic Information Loading

Calling up a speed 430 Displaying the traffic map 634 Bag hook 262

Function 429 Displaying traffic incidents 634 Notes 251

Passive mode 429 Extending a subscription 633 Roof luggage rack 48

Information from the service pro‐

Permanent setting 432 633 Stowage space under the boot floor 53
vider

Requirements: 430 Registering on Mercedes me 633 Tie-down eyes 56

Selecting 430 Loading guidelines 251

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index L

Loads 251 NFC function 193 Low emission zone

Locator lighting 293 Loud sound Avoiding/exiting 618

Drive program change (plug-in

Locking/unlocking PRE-SAFE® Sound 142 618
hybrid)

Additional door lock 195 Low beam lubricants 858

Automatic locking (MMS) 198 Activating/deactivating 282 Luggage 251

Doors (from the inside) 195 Left-hand/right-hand traffic 293 Luggage rack 251

Light adjustment when driving

Emergency key 198 42 Lumbar support 232
abroad

KEYLESS-GO 196 Setting 293

Mercedes-Benz Connect 195

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

M
Maintaining safe distance Malfunction Manoeuvring assistant

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 435 Driver display 521 Cross traffic warning 498

Maintenance 709 Restraint system 136 Drive Away Assist 497

Maintenance Management Manoeuvering brake function 499 Manoeuvering brake function 499

Notes 711 Manoeuvring Manual gearshifting

Transferred data 711 Drive Away Assist 497 Activating/deactivating 368

Maintenance work, Information on regu‐

709 Manoeuvering brake function 499 Map, Traffic map
lar performance

Avoiding an area 640

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Avoiding an area (overview) 640 Displaying the traffic map 634 Updating 45

Changing an area 641 Displaying weather information 644 Map functions 638

Deleting an area 641 Map data 642 Massage programmes 237

Displaying online map contents 644 Moving 638 Maximum full-stop braking 419

Maximum permissible gross vehicle

Displaying Qibla 643 Route overview after start 639 856
mass

Displaying the compass 642 Selecting additional information 640 Maximum speeds 873

Displaying the map version 640 Selecting POI symbols 639 MB Apps

Displaying the range 644 Setting the map scale 638 Calling up a user account 676

Displaying the satellite map 643 Setting the map scale automatically 643 Calling up Digital Extras 677

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Unlinking the user account 677 Search light 584 Display settings 585

MBUX Selecting settings 584 Drive programs 357

Dashcam 648 MBUX multimedia system ENERGIZING seat kinetics 604

MBUX Interior Assistant Activating and starting routines 566 Factory setting 593

Lasers and laser classification 581 Adjusting the volume 578 Fingerprint sensor 568

Notes on securing the child seat with

583 Air conditioning menu 308 Home screen 564
the belt

Overview 581 Authorisations 586 Language settings 548

Preselection outside mirrors 584 Calling up the zero layer 563 MB Apps 28

Reading light 583 Creating routines 566 MBUX Interior Assistant 581

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT

Memory Park Assist 504 605 Function 548
programme

Operating the zero layer 563 Steering wheel heater/seat heating 243 Language setting 549

Overview 558 Switching the sound on/off 577 Media voice commands 554

Personalised routines 565 Touchscreen 568 Online voice commands 555

Selecting routines 567 Zero layer 560 Online voice control 551

Set collision detection 414 MBUX reading light 583 Operable functions 549

Set keyboard 579 MBUX search light 584 Operating safety 547

Setting route-based speed adapta‐

441 MBUX Voice Assistant Setting 549
tion

Standby mode function 415 E-mails 554 Speech quality 551

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Voice commands 553 Controlling media playback 697 Surprise mix 697

Voice prompting 548 Copyright and trademarks 693 Using the keyword search 698

Information about the search func‐

Mecca 643 697 Medical aids 124
tion in categories

Media Overview of the media menu 695 Memory function

General information 26 Playing back similar music tracks 697 Head-up display 249

Media mode Removing a favourite song 697 Outside mirrors 249

Adding a favourite song 697 Starting a search in categories 697 Seat 249

Connecting Bluetooth® audio equip‐

696 Starting media playback 696 Steering wheel 249
ment

Connecting USB mass storage devi‐ Supported formats and data storage
696 693
ces media

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Menus (driver's display), Steering-wheel

Memory Parking Assist Mercedes me calls
buttons

Exiting a parking space 503 Assistant display 531 Information 670

Function 500 Navigation 535 Mercedes-Benz app

Parking 502 Notes 524 Activating Digital Extras 109

Recording 501 Operating 525 Mercedes-Benz Charge, Paying

Setting 504 Service 530 Charging stations display 617

Menus (driver display) Sport 532 Mercedes-Benz Connect

Track Pace 534 Supersport 533 Accident/breakdown management 675

Mercedes me and Apps 676 Information 675

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system,

Transferred data 676 Mercedes-Benz service centre 120
Call for help

Mercedes-Benz Connect calls Automatic emergency call 681 Message memory 883

Arranging a service appointment 672 Availability 679 Messages, Short messages

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐

tomer Centre after automatic acci‐ 671 Data processing 684 Calling a message sender 662
dent/breakdown detection

Data transfer 682 Deleting 663

Calls via the overhead control panel 670

Manual emergency call 682 Dictating 661

Consenting to transfer of data 673

Overview 80 Forwarding 662

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre 671

Self-diagnosis 683 MBUX voice commands 554

Transferred data 673

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 106 Overview 661

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index M

Read-aloud function 661 Outside mirrors 299 Wireless charging (front) 275

Reading 661 Rear-view mirror 300 Model type 856

Replying 662 Mobile phone, Mobile phone holder Modification

Cancelling permission for Internet

Sending 661 691 Limited protection 146
connection

Setting the displayed text messages 661 Frequencies 790 MOExtended tyres, Run-flat tyres 737

Using a phone number or URL 662 Holder (rear armrest) 269 Motorway mode 285

Mirror heater 314 Maximum transmission output 790

Mirrors Smartphone integration 27

Mirror folding function 302 Telephone 27

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index N

N
Navigation Navigation announcements Notifications Centre

Activating 609 Activating/deactivating 630 Calling up a notification 576

Destination entry 45 Adjusting the volume 630 Editing a notification 576

Displaying/hiding the menu 609 Repeating 631 Message types 575

MBUX voice commands 553 Switching audio fadeout on/off 630 Overview 575

Menu (driver display) 535 Near-Field Communication (NFC) Selecting actions 576

Unlocking/locking the vehicle (Digital

Overview 609 193
Vehicle Key)

Updating the map data 45 Neutral 363

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index O

O
Objects in the vehicle interior Child seat 157 On-board electronics

Information on the child restraint

Limited protection 146 140 Engine electronics 789
system

Information on the correct seat posi‐

Occupant presence reminder 134 Two-way radios 789
tion

Activating/deactivating 182 Occupant presence reminder 182 Online services 129

Function 182 Pets in the vehicle 146 Open Source Software 131

Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® 142 Open/close garage door 409

Airbag 153 On-board diagnostics interface 118 Open/close gate 409

Basic information 133

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index O

Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot

Opening the boot lid using your foot Notes 858 466
Assist

HANDS-FREE ACCESS 203 Petrol 860 Folding in/out 299

Operating fluids Windscreen washer fluid 61 Memory function 249

AdBlue® 865 Operating safety Parking position 301

Additives 862 48 V on-board electrical system 110 Preselection MBUX 584

High-voltage on-board electrical sys‐

Brake fluid 868 110 Setting 299
tem

Coolant 869 Outside mirrors Warning lamp 466

Diesel 862 Automatic anti-dazzle mode 300 Overhead control panel 92

Engine oil 866 Automatic mirror folding function 302

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index P

P
Paint code 856 Parking Assist Parking assistance systems

Park position Active Parking Assist 491 Active Parking Assist 491

DIRECT SELECT lever 361 Memory Parking Assist 500 Drive Away Assist 497

Parking PARKTRONIC 487 Manoeuvering brake function 499

Active Parking Assist 491 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Memory Parking Assist 500

PARKTRONIC 487 Activating/deactivating 490 PARKTRONIC 487

Prior booking 646 Adjusting warning tones 490 Parking brake 410

Function 487

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index P

Parking charges Parking service Parking up 414

Displaying a parking option on the

Paying 647 645 PARKTRONIC 487
map

Parking lights 282 Paying parking charges 647 PASSENGER AIR BAG

Status display, front passenger air‐

Parking option Prior booking of a parking space 646 138
bag

Displaying on the map 645 Selecting parking options 645 Pedestrian protection 713

Parking position Parking space Period out of use

Activating/deactivating standby
Outside mirrors 301 Finding 645 415
mode

Storing the front-passenger outside

78 Parking support Permissible axle load 856
mirror using the memory button

Storing the position of the passenger

301 Activating/deactivating 500
outside mirror using reverse gear

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index P

Function of the recuperative brake

Permitted towing methods Photos 345
system

Overview 752 Gallery app 678 Functions of the energy flow display 602

Personalised routines PIN protection Haptic accelerator pedal 349

Activating and starting 566 System PIN protection 589 Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 390

Manually disconnecting the high-

Creating 566 Plug-in hybrid operation 326
voltage on-board electrical system

Maximum charging current (mains

Overview 565 Charging cable control panel 389 389
socket)

Charging the high-voltage battery at Notes on charging (charging station,

Selecting 567 388 386
a rapid charging station (mode 4) mode 3)

Ending the charging process (alter‐ Notes on charging (mains socket,

Petrol 860 394 385
nating current, mode 2/3) mode 2)

Ending the charging process (direct

Pets in the vehicle 146 400 Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3) 386
current, mode 4)

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index P

Notes on plug-in hybrid operation 324 POI symbols Switching on (start/stop button) 328

Operating safety 110 Selecting 639 Pre-entry climate control

Route-based operating-mode strat‐ activating/deactivating for departure

349 Post-collision brake 144 317
egy time

Sets recuperation 345 Power closing function At departure time 316

Starting the charging process (alter‐

391 Boot lid 201 At time of departure 315
nating current, mode 2/3)

Starting the charging process (direct

397 Power meter, Output immediate 318
current, mode 4)

Stowing the charging cable 383 Function/note 541 When the vehicle is unlocked 315

POI Power supply When vehicle is unlocked 314

Selecting 612 Start/stop button 328 Pre-heating 314

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index P

PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protec‐

Reversing measures 143 Protection of the environment
tion

Preventative occupant protection sys‐

Function 142 142 Driving style 103
tem

PRE-SAFE® Sound 142 Program 353 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 105

Reversing measures 143 Protection Pulling away

PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Limited 146 Drive Away Assist 497

Function 143 Protection against collision Hill Start Assist 427

Inflating 145 Drive Away Assist 497 Optimised acceleration 335

PRE-SAFE® PLUS Manoeuvering brake function 499

Function 143

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index Q

Q
Qibla 643

QR code rescue card 70

Qualified specialist workshop 120

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

R
RACE START Radio Entering a frequency directly 46

Activating 475 Activating 699 Frequency fix 702

Activation conditions 475 Activating/deactivating radio text 702 Managing favourites 701

Information 475 Calling up a slide show 701 MBUX voice commands 554

Racetrack mode Calling up the station list 700 Menu 25

AMG ceramic high-performance

340 Deleting stations 701 Moving stations 701
composite brake system

AMG steering-wheel buttons 350 Displaying radio text 702 Overview 699

Radar and ultrasonic sensors 416 Editing station presets 701 Searching for a channel 46

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

Setting a channel 700 Radio (audio system) Wireless applications 791

Switching traffic announcements

Setting station tracking 702 78 Rain closing function
on/off

Setting the frequency band 700 Radio announcements Side windows 208

Setting the traffic information

702 Activating or deactivating 702 Sliding sunroof 214
service volume increase

Showing/hiding lyrics 703 Selecting 702 Rain sensor

Station suggestion 700 Radio regulations Side windows 208

Storing radio stations 701 Importer information 854 Sliding sunroof 214

Switching a slide show off/on 701 Regulatory radio identification 793 Windscreen wipers 296

Specific absorption rate 853

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

Range Rear door (child safety lock) Rear-view mirror

AdBlue® 530 Securing 178 Automatic anti-dazzle mode 300

REACH regulation 123 Rear fog lamp 283 Rearward-facing child seat

Reading lamp Rear fog light 283 Information 164

Interior lighting 294 Rear seat belt Recuperation

Rear axle level control 473 Status display 137 Function 345

Rear axle steering 340 Rear window Setting 345

Rear compartment climate control 311 Roller sunblind 217 Recycling 105

Rear window heater 304

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

Reducing agent Remote Online Resetting

AdBlue® 34 Charging the starter battery 332 MBUX reset function 593

Refuelling Cooling/heating the vehicle interior 332 Residual heat 312

Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in

377 Starting the vehicle 333 Responsibility
hybrid with petrol engine)

Fuel 29 Replacement key 188 Driving safety systems 416

Refuelling the vehicle 29 Reserve Restraint system

Topping up AdBlue® 34 Fuel 864 Basic information 133

Registration 121 Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 865 Basic instructions for children 157

Deployment situations 145

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

Functionality 136 Reverse gear Roll away protection 425

Information on function 145 DIRECT SELECT lever 361 Roller sunblind

Information on the correct seat posi‐

134 Reversing camera Rear window 217
tion

Limited protection 146 360° Camera 479 Side windows 217

Malfunction 136 Activate via GPS 486 Sliding sunroof 212

Protection 134 Function 479 Roof load 873

Self-test 136 Manage activation points 486 Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 873

Warning lamp 136 Opening the camera cover 487 Roof luggage rack

Rocking free 366 Loading 48

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

Securing 48 Editing a stored route 626 Selecting options 620

Route Low emission zone 618 Starting a saved route 626

Starting the automatic service sta‐

Adjusting on the map 625 Navigation 609 625
tion search

Switching the automatic filling sta‐

Alternative route 615 Planning 622 625
tion search on/off

Calculating 615 Range Display service 619 Route guidance

Calculating alternative routes 620 Recording 626 Cancelling 631

Commuter route 615 Saving a recorded route 626 Changing direction 628

Displaying destination information 621 Selecting a type 619 Destination reached 630

Displaying the route list 623 Selecting notifications 621 Lane recommendations 629

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index R

Motorway information 629 Route-based operating-mode strategy

Notes 627 Function 349

Off-road 631 Route-based speed adaptation

Route guidance with augmented reality Function 440

Activating 637 Setting 441

Activating/deactivating the traffic

466 Run-flat characteristics 737
light view

Displaying road names/house num‐

638 Running-in notes 334
bers

Overview 637

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

S
Safety system 417 Automatic adjustment 237 Lumbar support 232

Safety vest 43 Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest) 153 Manually adjusting 225

Satellite map 643 Configuring settings 236 Massage programmes 237

Saving a destination suggestion as a

632 Correct driver's seat position 223 Memory function 249
favourite

Resetting settings (massage pro‐

Searching for a channel 46 ENERGIZING seat kinetics 604 238
gramme)

Seat, Front seat, Through-loading feature Folding back the backrest (rear) 52 Settings 94

Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 227 Folding the backrest forwards (rear) 50 Side airbag 153

Adjusting electrically 230 Locking the backrest (rear) 261 Workout programmes 237

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Seat belt Warning lamp 137 Seat kinetics

Activating/deactivating seat belt

144 Seat belt adjustment Setting 604
adjustment

Adjusting the height 136 Activating/deactivating 144 Seat ventilation

Automatic tightening 144 Function 144 Activating/deactivating 239

Care 729 Seat belt tensioners Selecting a gear 366

Selecting a sound characteristic (steer‐

Fastening 136 Inflating 145 350
ing-wheel button)

Notes on wearing correctly 135 Seat belt warning 137 Selecting the sound profile

Burmester® 3D-surround sound sys‐

Rear seat belt status display 137 Seat heating 706
tem

Releasing 152 Activating/deactivating 238 Selector lever 361

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Self-test Service due date 709 Shifting

Automatic front passenger airbag

138 Service interval display 709 Automatic transmission 366
shutoff

Restraint system 136 Service station search Gearshift recommendation 368

Sensors Starting automatic search 625 Manual 366

Cleaning 727 Setting the date format 585 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 366

Information 416 Setting the distance unit 589 Shortening the braking distance

Service Settings Brake Assist System 419

Menu (driver's display) 530 Information 28 Shunting assistant 505

Service centre 120 Shunting support 498

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Side airbag 153 Side windows Close with key 209

Side window Automatic function 208 Opening with the key 209

Close with key 209 Child safety lock (rear) 180 Opening/closing 212

Convenience closing 209 Problem 210 Problem 215

Convenience opening 209 Rain closing function 208 Rain closing function 214

Opening with the key 209 Roller sunblind 217 Smartphone integration

Opening/closing 207 Skid chains 60 Apple CarPlay®/Android Auto 27

Window films 727 Sliding sunroof, Panorama sliding sunroof Snow chains 60

Automatic functions 214

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Socket Sound settings Speed

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass

12 V 273 704 Limit, Limiter 429
settings

Trailer operation 512 Automatic loudness normalisation 704 Save, cruise control 435

Socket flap 381 Calling up the sound menu 704 Save, DISTRONIC 435

SOS button 670 Setting the balance and fader 704 Save, Limiter 435

Sound Spare parts 106 Speed adjustment, route-based 440

AMG Real Performance Sound 350 Spare wheel 784 Speed control

PRE-SAFE® Sound 142 Specialist workshop 120 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 432

Wheels/tyres 764 Specific absorption rate (SAR) 853 Cruise control 428

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Limiter 429 Hill Start Assist 427 Starting assistance 70

Speed limit Optimised acceleration 335 Starting the engine

Winter tyres 60 Start/stop button Remote Online 333

Speed Limit Assist Parking the vehicle 403 Start/stop button 329

Setting 459 Starting the vehicle 329 Starting-off aid

Switching on the power supply /

System limits 456 328 Drive Away Assist 497
vehicle

Standing lights 282 Start/stop function 340 Hill Start Assist 427

Start-off assist Starter battery Optimised acceleration 335

Drive Away Assist 497 Charging via Remote Online 332

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Station Station list Stationary heater/ventilation

Deleting 701 Calling up 700 Activating/deactivating 65

Entering a frequency directly 46 Station presets Operating 320

Frequency fix 702 Editing 701 Status display

Managing favourites 701 Station suggestion Front passenger airbag 138

Moving 701 Radio 700 Rear seat belt 137

Setting 700 Station tracking Steer Assist

Storing 701 Setting 702 Active Steering Assist 442

STEER CONTROL 425

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

STEER CONTROL 425 Steering wheel adjustment 242 Stowage space

Steering Steering wheel gearshift paddles 366 Rear centre console 257

Rear axle steering 340 Steering wheel heater Stowage space under the boot floor 53

Steering wheel Decoupling from the seat heating 243 Stowage spaces

Adjusting electrically 242 Stop/start Armrest (front) 56

Driver's airbag 153 ECO start/stop function 342 Centre console (front) 56

Manually adjusting 241 Stopping Door 56

Memory function 249 Parking the vehicle 403 Glove compartment 56

Steering wheel heater 243 Stowage areas 56

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Switching loudness normalisation

Suggestions DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL 473
on/off

Configuring 590 Level regulation 473 Advanced sound system 707

Burmester® 4D surround sound sys‐

Deleting 590 Selecting the suspension setting 474 705
tem

Sulphur content 860 SVHC System PIN protection

Supersport menu display content Substances of very high concern 123 Activating/deactivating 589

Selecting 533 Switch-off delay time System settings

Activating/deactivating system PIN

Suspension Exterior 293 589
protection

Air suspension 473 Interior 295 MBUX reset function 593

AMG RIDE CONTROL 474 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 311 Setting the distance unit 589

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index S

Setting the time zone 585

Setting the time/date format 585

Transmission of the vehicle position 586

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

T
Overhang dimension of the trailer
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 105 Technical data 877
hitch

Tank content Axle load (trailer operation) 880 Radio frequencies 790

Axle load (trailer operation),

AdBlue® 866 881 Radio regulations 793
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Fuel 864 Fastening points of the trailer hitch 877 Roof load 873

Fuel (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 865 High-voltage battery 874 Specific absorption rate (SAR) 853

Reserve 864 Information 788 Tongue weight 879

Reserve (fuel), (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐ Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

865 Maximum speeds 873 880
cles) cles)

Mounting dimensions of a trailer

Tank filler cap / flap 29 877 Towing capacity 878
hitch

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 878 Calls with several participants 657 Notes 652

Vehicle dimensions 871 Changing a function 655 Secure Simple Pairing 654

Telediagnosis Connecting a mobile phone 654 Smartphone integration 27

Diagnostic data 712 Deleting a mobile phone 656 Switching between mobile phones 655

Telediagnostics Emergency call 80 Telephone menu overview 653

Transferred data 712 Incoming call during an existing call 658 Telephone operation 657

Telemetry display 599 Information 24 Voice recognition 656

Wirelessly charging a(mobile phone,

Telephone, Smartphone MBUX voice commands 553 275
front)

Activating functions during a call 657 Mobile phone usage 654

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

Television, Digital TV Tie-down eyes 56 Tone settings

MBUX voice commands 554 Time Information 704

Temperature Manual time setting 585 Tongue weight 879

Setting 304 Setting the time zone 585 Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 880

Text messages 554 Setting the time/date format 585 Top Tether 176

Topographical compensation, Predictive

THERMATIC TIREFIT kit, Tyre inflation compressor 286
headlamp range control

Air conditioning control panel 304 Declaration of conformity 117 Torque (driver's display) 532

THERMOTRONIC Storage location 74 Touch Control

Air conditioning control panel 304 Driver's display 522

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

MBUX 567 Towing Track Pace

Setting the sensitivity 567 Pulling/towing 518 Menu (driver display) 534

Touch-sensitive controls 108 Towing methods 752 Track Race 595

Touchscreen Towing eye Traffic announcements (audio system)

Entering characters 579 Storage location 756 Switching on/off 78

Tow bar system Towing methods Traffic information

Towing away 518 Both axles on the ground 75 Car-to-X-Communication 635

Tow-away protection 220 Overview 752 Displaying the traffic map 634

Tow-starting 758 Displaying traffic incidents 634

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

Extending a Live Traffic Information

633 Traffic restrictions Trailer hitch
subscription

Information on Live Traffic Informa‐

633 Activating/deactivating 618 Axle load 880
tion

Overview 632 Service 618 Axle load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 881

Registering Live Traffic Information 633 Traffic Sign Assist Bicycle rack 515

Traffic Jam Assistant 442 Function 461 Care 727

Traffic light view Setting 465 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 512

Activating/deactivating 466 Trailer coupling 54 Fastening points 877

Information 465 Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing 518 Folding the ball neck out/in 54

Traffic light warning/display 461 General notes 877

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

Mounting dimensions 877 Trailer Manoeuvering Assist Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 512

Overhang dimension 877 Function 505 Folding the ball neck out/in 54

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist, Manoeu‐

Socket 512 Making settings 514
vring assistant

Tongue weight 879 Operation 505 Notes 508

Tongue weight (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

880 Trailer operation Socket 512
cles)

Towing capacity 878 Active Blind Spot Assist 468 Trailer stabilisation 423

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 878 Active Lane Keeping Assist 470 Transferred vehicle data

Trailer Manoeuvering Assist 505 Axle load 880 Android Auto 669

Bicycle rack 515 Apple CarPlay® 669

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

Transmission position display 361 Two-way radios Tyre pressure monitoring system

Transmission positions Frequencies 790 Function 769

DIRECT SELECT lever 361 Installation 789 Restarting 770

Transporting Transmission output 790 Tyre pressure table 769

Vehicle 756 Type approval number EG 856 Tyre sealant 738

Turn signal indicator 283 Tyre pressure Tyre tread 42

Turn signal light 283 Notes 768 Tyre-change tool 73

TV TIREFIT kit 738 Tyre-change tool kit 73

MBUX voice commands 554 Tyre pressure table 769

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index T

Tyres Removing 780

Breakdown 73 Removing/fitting hub cap 778

Checking 42 Replacing 772

Checking temperature 770 Selection 772

Fitting 781 Snow chains 60

Interchanging 776 Storing 776

MOExtended 737 TIREFIT kit 738

Noise 764 Tyre pressure table 769

Notes on fitting 772 Unusual handling characteristics 764

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index U

U
Unfastening 152 Information 591 User profiles, Personalisation

Units of measurement Performing 591 Adding a user 571

Setting 589 USB port Notes 569

Unlocking setting 185 Rear 273 Overview 570

Unlocking/locking the vehicle Stowage compartments (front) 56 Requirements for use 570

(NFC function) 193 USB port (multimedia system) Selecting a user 574

Updating software, System update,

Connecting mass storage devices 696 Selecting options 571
Update

Error message 592 Synchronising 574

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index U

User-specific content 570

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index V

V
Variable limiter 429 Diagnostics connection 118 Lock/unlock (emergency key) 198

Vehicle, Switching on the ignition Emergency key 198 Locking/unlocking (from inside) 196

48 V on-board electrical system 110 enabling, Remote Online 333 Lowering 782

Activating/deactivating standby High-voltage on-board electrical sys‐

415 110 Medical aids 124
mode tem

Additional door lock 195 Implied warranty 125 Parking up 414

Collision detection (information) 413 Information 27 QR code rescue card 70

Correct use 122 KEYLESS-GO 196 Raising 778

Data storage 127 lock automatically (MMS) 198 REACH regulation 123

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index V

Registration 121 switching off (start/stop button) 403 Vehicle data

Rocking free 366 Switching on (start/stop button) 328 Display, MBUX 358

Set collision detection 414 Towing 518 Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT 358

Standby mode function 415 Towing away 752 Maximum speeds 873

Starting (start/stop button) 329 Transporting 756 Roof load 873

starting, emergency operation mode 330 Ventilation / convenience opening 209 Roof load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 873

Voice commands for MBUX voice

Stopping 403 555 Transferring to Android Auto 669
assistant

SVHC/substances of very high con‐

123 Vehicle cameras 416 Transferring to Apple CarPlay® 669
cern

Switching off 403 Vehicle height 871

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index V

Vehicle height (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

871 Vehicle emergency start 758 Vehicle interior
cles)

Vehicle length 871 Vehicle identification number 856 Cooling/heating (Remote Online) 332

Vehicle length (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

871 Vehicle identification plate Vehicle key 184
cles)

Vehicle width 871 Axle load 856 Vehicle location

Vehicle width (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

871 EU type approval number 856 Switching transmission on/off 586
cle)

Wheelbase 871 Gross mass 856 Vehicle position

Wheelbase (Mercedes-AMG vehi‐

871 Model type 856 Storing 631
cles)

Vehicle dimensions 871 Paint code 856 Vehicle sensors 416

Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG

871 VIN 856
vehicles)

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index V

Vehicle socket Towing eye 756 Seat 856

Care 727 Ventilation 209 Vision

Indicator lamps 390 Vents Demisting windows 311

Vehicle start Air vents 321 Voice assistant

Emergency operation mode 330 Video recordings Voice prompting 548

Remote Online 333 Gallery app 678 Voice recognition 656

Start/stop button 329 VIN

Vehicle tool kit Engine compartment 856

TIREFIT kit 74 Identification plate 856

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index W

W
Warning system 219 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red) 967 å ESP® OFF warning lamp 973

Warning triangle 44 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow) 969 ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes 972

Warning/indicator lamp â DRIFT MODE warning lamp 976 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up 972

! Electric parking brake indicator 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp

! ABS warning lamp 977 970 970
lamp (red) lights up

Ó Active Brake Assist warning ! Electric parking brake indicator H Mercedes-Benz emergency call
975 970 978
lamp lamp (yellow) system warning lamp

Û ATTENTION ASSIST warning p Occupant presence reminder

975 # Electrical fault warning lamp 965 965
lamp warning lamp (white)

; Engine diagnostics warning p Occupant presence reminder

J Brakes warning lamp (red) 971 969 965
lamp warning lamp (yellow)

p Engine operating temperature Ù Power steering warning lamp

J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) 970 969 966
warning lamp (red)

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index W

Ù Power steering warning lamp ê Traffic Sign Assist warning

966 975 Washer fluid
(yellow) lamp

Ù Rear axle steering warning

967 ï Trailer hitch warning lamp 966 Topping up 36
lamp (yellow)

h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐

_ Reduced-power warning lamp 965 978 Windscreen washer fluid 61
tem warning lamp flashes

h Tyre pressure monitoring sys‐

6 Restraint system warning lamp 963 978 Washing by hand 725
tem warning lamp lights up

L Warning lamp for distance

ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes 964 975 Water tank 721
warning

ü Seat belt warning lamp lights

964 Warning/indicator lamps Wear
up

ê Speed Limit Assist warning

975 Overview 961 Limited protection 146
lamp

ä Suspension warning lamp (yel‐

976 PASSENGER AIR BAG 138 Weather information 644
low)

Ú System error warning lamp 965

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index W

Website Removing/fitting hub caps 778 MOExtended 737

Mercedes-Benz Connect 675 Wheel rotation 776 Noise 764

Weight information 856 Wheels Notes on fitting 772

Wheel change Breakdown 73 Removing 780

Fitting a new wheel 781 Care 727 Removing/fitting hub cap 778

Lowering the vehicle 782 Checking 42 Replacing 772

Preparation 777 Checking tyre temperature 770 Selection 772

Raising the vehicle 778 Fitting 781 Snow chains 60

Removing a wheel 780 Interchanging 776 Storing 776

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index W

TIREFIT kit 738 Window airbag 153 Removing mist 311

Tyre pressure 768 Windows Roller sunblind 217

Tyre pressure monitoring system 769 Care 727 Window films 727

Unusual handling characteristics 764 Convenience opening 209 Windscreen

Wi-Fi De-icing 309 De-icing 309

Activating/deactivating 587 Opening with the key 209 Demisting 304

Information on connection 587 Opening/closing 207 Windscreen washer fluid 61

Opening/closing (air recirculation

Setting up a hotspot 588 77 Windscreen washer system 36
button)

Setting up an Internet connection 690 Rear window 217

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index W

Windscreen wipers Wiper blades

Activating/deactivating 296 Care 727

Replacing the wiper blades 37 Replacing (windscreen) 37

Replacing the wiper blades (wind‐

37 Wipers 296
screen)

Winter operation Wireless applications 791

Snow chains 60 Wireless charging

Winter tyres Mobile phone (front) 275

Limiter 60 Workout programmes 237

Setting the permanent speed limit 60 Workshop 120

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
 C-Class Saloon - Owner's Manual
Index Z

Z
Zero layer

Function 560

Overview 561

0-9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z
F206 0151 02
Publication details
WEBSITE
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following
websites:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com

https://group.mercedes-benz.com

EDITORIAL TEAM
You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you
may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical
editorial team at the following address:

Mercedes‑Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546

Stuttgart, Germany
© Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written
permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG.

VEHICLE MANUFACTURER
Mercedes‑Benz AG

Mercedesstraße 120

70372 Stuttgart, Germany

F206 0151 02